Core Strategy Baseline Analysis Study - Bradford Metropolitan ...

Local Development Framework for Bradford
Evidence Base
Core Strategy DPD:
Base Analysis Report
Working Draft
October 2011

This page is intentionally left blank
1

Core Strategy: Baseline Analysis Report
Table of Contents
1.0 Introduction 07
1.1 Local Development Framework (LDF) for Bradford 08
1.2 Bradford District-setting the context 08
1.3 A Spatial Picture of the District 10
1.4 The Big Plan- our place 12
1.5 Scope and Purpose of the Baseline Analysis Report 15
1.6 Structure of the Report 17
2.0 Planning Policy Context 19
2.1 National Planning Policy Context 19
2.2 Regional Context 29
2.3 Sub-Regional Context 34
2.4 Local Planning Context 36
3.0 Regeneration Context 43
3.1 Bradford Vision – Local Strategic Partnership 43
3.2 The Big Plan – Sustainable Community Strategy 2008 – 201 44
3.3 Bradford City Centre Masterplan 45
3.4 The Neighbourhood Development Frameworks 47
3.5 Canal Road Masterplan 48
3.6 Manningham Masterplan 49
3.7 Airedale Corridor Masterplan 50
3.8 Leeds Bradford Corridor Study 51
3.9 Bradford Trident Masterplan 52
3.10 Bradford Learning Quarter Design and Delivery Framework 53
3.11 Neighbourhood Development Plan for South Bradford 54
3.12
Neighbourhood Development Plan for Holmewood, Tong and
Manningham
4.0 Socio-Economic Context 57
4.1 Demographic Characteristics 57
4.1.1 Population Structure
4.1.2 Population Trend
4.1.3 Ethnicity and Religion
4.1.4 International Migration
4.2 Deprivation Indices 62
4.3 Education and Skills 64
4.3.1 Qualifications
4.3.2 GCSE Attainment
4.3.3 Further and Higher Education
4.4 Economic Activity 67
4.4.1 Economic Trends
4.4.2 Location of Employment Activities
4.4.3 Bradford Employment Land Review and Forecast
4.4.4 Protecting Existing Employment Land and Buildings
4.4.5 Rural Diversification
55
2

4.5 Employment and Earnings 73
4.5.1 Economic Activity Rates
4.5.2 Employment Rates
4.5.3 Occupation Profile
4.5.4 Self-employment
4.5.5 Earnings and Income
4.5.6 Unemployment and Worklessness
4.6 Car Ownership and Commuting 84
4.6.1 Car Ownership Levels
4.6.2 Commuting to Works
4.7 Health 86
4.8 Crime 90
4.9 Road Casualties 94
4.10 Emergency Services-Capacity and Performances 95
4.11 Key Facts 101
5.0 Housing 104
5.1 National, Regional and Sub-regional Policies and Strategies 104
5.2 Housing Profile of the District 110
5.2.1 Current Housing Stock
5.2.2 Building Activity
5.2.3 Future Housing Stock
5.2.4 Property type
5.2.5 Tenure
5.2.6 Stock Condition
5.2.7 Vacancy
5.2.8 Overcrowding
5.3 Household Characteristics 119
5.3.1 Household Composition
5.3.2 Household Structure and Formation
5.3.3 Gypsies and Travellers
5.3.4 Household Formation Typology
5.3.5 Future Changes in Household Numbers
5.4 Housing Market 124
5.4.1 Bradford Housing Market Area
5.4.2 Housing Markets in Bradford
5.4.3 Property Values – Levels and Trends
5.4.4 Affordability
5.4.5 Housing Need
5.5 Latest Housing Data 132
5.6.1 Progress in Leeds City Region
5.6.2 Implications of the Recession on LCR Housing Delivery
5.6 Key Facts 135
6.0 Social and Community Facilities 139
6.1 Education 140
6.1.1 Schools in Bradford
6.1.2 School Performances
6.1.3 Other Achievements
6.1.4 Management of Schools
6.1.5 Building Schools for Future Programme
6.1.6 School Capacity
6.1.7 Further and Higher Education
3

6.2 Health 151
6.2.1 Primary Care
6.2.2 Secondary Care
6.2.3 Hospitals
6.2.4 Health Centres/GP Surgeries
6.3 Children’s Services 159
6.4 Neighbourhood Management and Community Strategy 164
6.5 Community Services 168
6.5.1 Markets and Shopping Facilities
6.5.2 Community Centres
6.5.3 Post Offices
6.5.4 Job Centre Plus
6.5.5 Local Benefit/Tax Offices
6.5.6 Cemeteries and Crematoria
6.5.7 Courts and Prison
6.5.8 Places of Worship
6.6 Emergency Services 180
6.6.1 Police
6.6.2 Fire Services
6.6.3 Ambulance
6.7 Social Services/Over50s Support 186
6.8 Gypsy and Travellers Facilities 188
6.9 Culture and Leisure 191
6.9.1 Museums/Galleries
6.9.2 Theatres/Concert Halls
6.9.3 Cinemas
6.9.4 Ten-Pin Bowling Alleys, Casino/Bingo Halls
6.9.5 Libraries
6.9.6 Children’s Play Areas
6.9.7 Sports Pitches and Courts
6.9.8 Sports Centre and Recreation Facilities
6.9.9 Festivals and Town Centre Programmes
6.9.10 Parks and Openspaces
6.10 Key Facts 218
7.0 Landscape Character and Historic Environment 220
7.1 General overview of Natural Landscape Elements 220
7.1.1 Landform
7.1.2 Geology
7.1.3 Soils and Agricultural Land Classification
7.1.4 Climate
7.1.5 Biodiversity
7.2 Landscape Types 228
7.3 Landscape Character Areas 233
7.4 Policy Context-Landscape 236
7.5 Built Heritage and Historic Environment 236
7.5.1 Policy Context- Historic environment
7.5.2 Listed Buildings
7.5.3 Conservation Areas
7.5.4 World Heritage Site
7.5.5 Parks and Gardens
7.5.6 Scheduled Ancient Monuments
7.5.7 Historical Battlefields
4

7.5.8 Heritage at Risk
7.5.9 Archaeology
7.6 Key Facts 247
8.0 Commercial Appraisal 249
8.1 Regional Context 249
8.2 Local Context 251
8.3 Office Market Profile 252
8.4 Industrial Market Profile 255
8.5 Retail Profile 259
8.6 Leisure and Tourism Market Profile 265
8.7 Visitor Economy Profile 271
8.8 Residential Market Profile 281
8.9 Key Facts 284
9.0 Transport and Accessibility 286
9.1 Policy Context 286
9.2 Travel and Transport in Bradford District 291
9.2.1 General Traffic Trend
9.2.2 Commuting Pattern
9.2.3 Car Ownership
9.2.4 Congestion
9.2.5 Environmental Issues
9.3 Accessibility and Connectivity 298
9.4 Public Transport 299
9.4.1 Train services
9.4.2 Bus and Coach services
9.4.3 Taxis
9.5 Air Travel 307
9.6 Cycling and Walking 309
9.7 Car Parking Provision 310
9.8 Road Injuries 313
9.9 Key Facts 313
10.0 Environment 316
10.1 Air Quality 316
10.2 River and Water Quality 321
10.3 Renewable Energy 322
10.4 Land Contamination 325
10.5 Hazardous Installations 325
10.6 Litter and Dereliction 327
10.7 Flood Risk 329
10.8 Biodiversity and Wildlife 333
10.8.1 Biodiversity Habitat Summery
10.8.2 Wildlife Species Summery
10.8.3 Biodiversity Assets
10.9 Agricultural Land 340
10.10 Climate Change and energy Efficiency 341
10.11 Key Facts 345
11.0 Minerals and Waste Management 360
11.1 Minerals 360
11.1.1 Aggregates
5

11.1.2 Sand and Gravel
11.1.3 Building, Roofing and Flag Stone
11.1.4 Coal and Fireclay
11.2 Current Minerals Supply Situation in Bradford 365
11.3 Waste Production in Bradford 366
11.4 Municipal Waste 368
11.5 Waste Collection, Treatment and Disposal Services 369
11.6 Waste Composition 370
11.7 Recycling and Composting 376
11.8 Future waste Position in Bradford to 2021 377
11.9 Key Facts 378
12.0 Sustainability 384
13.0 Conclusion 387
6

1.0 INTRODUCTION
It is important that the polices and proposals of the Core Strategy DPD are based on an upto-date,
robust and reliable evidence base to ensure a thorough understanding of the needs,
opportunities and any constraints of the area.
The Council has drawn on a range of information about the important aspects of the District
including housing, the local economy, environment, transportation and community facilities
including schools, shopping and sporting facilities to form the evidence base for the Core
Strategy. These pieces of work provide a picture of the District in terms of key issues and
also their spatial relevance. The Council is encouraging comments and reviews on all of its
evidence base technical studies and research papers. The full list of evidence base studies
and research which have informed the Core Strategy to date can be found in Bibliography
section of the Report. These are also made available on the Council’s website under
‘Evidence Base’. Some of the key pieces of Evidence are listed as follows:-
• The Big Plan Sustainable Community Strategy and Background Papers
• Bradford District Retail & Leisure Study
• Bradford District Employment Lands Review Assessment
• Bradford District Strategic Housing Market Assessment
• Bradford District Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment
• Bradford District Transport Study
• Bradford District Local Infrastructure Study
• Bradford District Strategic Flood Risk Assessment Level 1 and Level 2
• Bradford District Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study
• Bradford District Conservation Area Assessments (for 57 Conservation Areas)
• Bradford District Landscape Character Assessment
• Bradford District Biodiversity Action Plan
• Bradford District Tourism Strategy
In accordance with good practice advice by the Planning Advisory Service (PAS), including
the online Plan Making Manual, the Council considers the gathering of evidence as an
iterative process which must be continued throughout the plan preparation process. The
reason for this is because the evidence is key to other aspects of plan production including
Sustainability Appraisal, Infrastructure Planning and Delivery, Options Generation and
Community Engagement.
The Council has therefore published this ‘Draft Baseline Analysis Report’ which provides a
comprehensive analysis of the core baseline conditions and context of the district. The Draft
Baseline Analysis Report has been published as part of the Preferred Options consultation.
The report has been deliberately left in ‘Draft’ form and will be supplemented with additional
information during the course of the preparation of the Core Strategy DPD. As part of the
ongoing consultation process, the Draft Baseline Analysis Report has been made publicly
available for consultees for comment and review.
7

1.1 Local Development Framework (LDF) for Bradford
Development in the District is currently managed by the Replacement Unitary Development
Plan (RUDP), adopted in 2005. New planning legislation requires that local authorities
replace their current development plans with a new type of plan called a Local Development
Framework (LDF). The Local Development Scheme (LDS) provides a starting point for
the local community and the stakeholders to find out what planning policies and
proposals (Local Development Documents) the Council intends to produce as part of the
Local Development Framework.
The Local Development Framework will be a portfolio of documents which will replace the
Council’s current Replacement Unitary Development Plan. For further information on the
Local Development Framework, please see Bradford Councils Leaflet Number 1 ‘The Guide
to the Local Development Framework’.
The Core Strategy will set the long term spatial vision for the District and strategic policies
to deliver the vision. The Core Strategy Issues and Options Report was published for public
consultation in February 2007 with the Further Issues and Options Report published for
consultation in January 2008. For further information on the Core Strategy, please see
Bradford Councils Leaflet Number 2 ‘The Guide to The Core Strategy’
1.2 Bradford – setting the context
Bradford is a City in West Yorkshire, England. It lies amongst the Pennines, 8.6miles
(13.8km) west of Leeds city centre. Bradford is surrounded by several smaller settlements
which together form the City of Bradford Metropolitan District.
Bradford is the sixth largest city in the UK, by population size, and the fourth largest
Metropolitan District in England. Population projections for the District show annual growth in
the population of 4,000 per year to 2028 - making Bradford the fastest growing Metropolitan
District outside London. Bradford also has a relatively young population, in 2004, Bradford
had the lowest average age population of all major urban areas in the North of England at
34.8 years.
Bradford’s economic performance has been growing in terms of output (GVA) and number of
jobs, although the rate of improvement has not matched regional or national growth. Future
developments in the District including £2bn of construction work will boost economic
performance, and the District is currently predicted (Source: Experian Regional Econometric
Model) to have the fastest growing economy in the region over the next 10 years.
Bradford retains a significant manufacturing sector (the third largest in the UK) but recent job
losses in the face of global competition and economic slump have strengthened the need to
diversify the economic base in Bradford.
8

Fig 01: Bradford in Regional Context
Today's fastest growing employment sectors are the professional, commercial and service
industries - including tourism. Bradford's reputation as a base for high technology, scientific
and computer based industries is growing, building on long traditions of innovation, skills and
quality products.
Several major companies have head offices based in the District including Wm Morrison plc,
Otto UK (Freemans and Grattan), Hallmark Cards UK, Redcats UK (Empire Direct, La
Redcoute, Vertbaudet and Daxon) and three of the UK’s largest financial institutions -
Yorkshire Building Society, Bradford & Bingley Building Society and Provident Financial.
The University of Bradford has leading national research departments in management,
peace studies and archaeology, health and medical sectors and has strong links to industry
9

and the community. The University’s School of Management is ranked 8 th
in Europe. In 2006,
the University was ranked 2 nd in the UK for graduate employment.
Bradford has a strong cultural offer. Saltaire model village is one of only two World Heritage
Sites in Yorkshire and includes the world’s largest collection of works by the artist David
Hockney. Haworth and Bronte Country attracts visitors from all over the world while the
National Media Museum in the city centre is the most visited museum outside London.
Bradford District covers 143 square miles of which around 60% is classified as rural,
stretching over parts of the Airedale and Wharfedale Valleys and the Pennine Hills and
Moors. Despite the districts areas of open countryside, Bradford, along with Leeds, has the
highest population density of the West Yorkshire districts at 1290 people/km 2 .
Due to the heterogeneous nature of the geography and population of the district, many
challenges will be posed to both service providers and commissioners of services to ensure
that the needs of residents are both identified and met.
1.3 A Spatial Picture of the District
Bradford is a diverse District with sharp contrasts and challenges. This section sets out
under several themes the spatial picture of the District together with key facts as an
indication of where the District is at present.
Structure and Growth
Key facts
Area: 370 km 2
Total Population : 501,700 (ONS 2008 mid year estimate)
Population Growth (ONS 2006 based population projections):
2015 – 555,000 people
2020 – 589,000 people
2030 – 649,000 people
Age group (ONS 2008 based population projections):
Children (0-15): 22.5%
Working age (16-64M/59F) : 61.5%
Older people (65M/60F and over): 16%
Age and Gender (2001 Census):
Male 48.1%
10

Female 51.9%
26% up to age 18
15% aged 65 or over
Ethnic mix (2001 Census):
White 78.3%
Asian or Asian British 18.9%
Mixed 1.5%
Chinese or Other 1.0%
Black or Black British 0.9%
Bradford is a major metropolitan authority located within the West Yorkshire conurbation. It is
in a key location within the Leeds City Region and also has good links to the North West and
the Manchester City Region. The District covers an area of approximately 370 km 2 .
However, unlike many other metropolitan areas, it is not one of unrelieved development, but
a mixture of urban and country areas with distinctive and attractive landscapes. The
administrative boundaries and major settlements of the district are shown in the figure below.
Figure: Administrative boundaries and major settlements within West Yorkshire
Around one third of the District is built up and the population is approaching half a million
people. The main urban area of the District is comprised of the City of Bradford. Along the
Aire Valley (Airedale) to the north of Bradford City are Shipley and several freestanding
towns of Keighley, Bingley and Silsden and the smaller settlement of Steeton with Eastburn.
To the north of Airedale within Wharfedale are the freestanding town of Ilkley and the smaller
settlements of Menston, and Burley In Wharfedale, as well as the village of Addingham. The
11

ural areas include many villages including large ones such as Wilsden, and Oakworth as
well as smaller ones such as Harden, all of which have very limited remains of their original
agricultural or textile functions but predominantly now serve as commuter settlements of the
main employment centres in the District and beyond.
Local Character
Key facts
Built heritage:
1 World Heritage site (Saltaire)
202 Scheduled Ancient Monuments
1 Historic battlefield (Adwalton Moor)
56 Historic parks and gardens
59 Conservation areas
5800 Listed Buildings
The District has a long history with traces of stone age (Rombalds moor), Roman (Ilkley),
Saxon, medieval, Tudor, Georgian and Victorian (Saltaire) heritage. The District possesses a
rich architectural and archaeological heritage, which is highly valued. The District’s industrial
heritage of mills and associated commercial development from the late 18 th and 19 th
Centuries is particularly important and reflects the area’s dominance in the textile trade. This
contributes to the distinctiveness of the District and quality of place. It is also important to the
economy in terms of tourism in particularly in ‘Bronte’ country.
The District’s topography is equally rich and diverse, characterised by dramatic contrasts
from the fringes of the South Pennines in the west to the Wharfe Valley in the north. These
provide a high quality setting for the settlements in the District but also constrain their
development and growth.
The quality of the District’s built and natural heritage is also of major importance to the
economy in attracting and retaining high quality and high value investment.
The District comprises a series of escarpments of plateaux with elevations up to 455m O.D.,
and a general decrease in the height of plateau in the east. The escarpments are dissected
by the Rivers Aire and Wharfe and a number of smaller rivers, including Bradford Beck and
the River Worth. The valley sides are commonly very steep, in contrast to the flat nature of
the valley bottoms. The main urban areas and transport routes occur within the valley floor
of the District.
1.4 The Big Plan – our place
The district stretches from the outskirts of Leeds in the east, through Bradford city and
onwards through the towns of Shipley, Bingley, Keighley and Ilkley, and close to the
boundaries of the Yorkshire Dales National Park. This results in a diverse mix of
12

environments ranging from inner-city areas, through towns and villages and onto high
Pennine moorland.
We are proud of our built heritage, including the World Heritage site of Saltaire. The
redevelopment of Lister’s Mill has been a catalyst for ambitious regeneration in Manningham.
Four of the district’s parks have coveted green flag status, including the award-winning Lister
Park. Our desire to build on this heritage is reflected in the ambitious plans for ‘Park at the
Heart’ in the city centre, and in our regeneration master-plans.
The district’s range of landscapes is extraordinary - from wide valleys rising steeply through
craggy escarpments up to open moorland; and from vibrant urban centres through densely
populated residential areas, to idyllic rural villages, each with their own character.
Unlike many metropolitan districts, only about a third of our 370 square kilometres is built up.
Much of our moorland and woodland is relatively undisturbed, and provides important
conservation habitats, as well as drawing visitors who want to enjoy our countryside.
Farming is still part of our rural economy, but the average size of farmholdings is only 10-15
hectares, so much farming activity is marginal, often part-time and supported by other
income.
This means that while some of our villages have maintained their original agricultural
functions, such as Oxenhope and Stanbury, many are now largely commuter settlements for
the main employment centres in the district and beyond.
Our geography has also resulted in most of the industrial, economic and residential
development taking place along the valleys and floodplains formed by rivers such as the Aire
and Wharfe. 77% of our population live within the urban areas of Bradford, Keighley and
along the Aire valley.
These urban areas are both the district’s best attributes and biggest challenges. The city of
Bradford is rich in culture, architecture and attractions –including the National Media
Museum, the Alhambra Theatre and some of the best Asian cuisine in the UK. It is
recognised nationally as a significant cultural economy. But it is also the most densely
populated area of the district: in the inner city, the proportion of households living in terraced
houses is 59%, and there are some 3,000 back-to-back houses.
Sharp contrasts are also clear in neighbourhoods like Manningham. Magnificent buildings
and public spaces such as Cartwright Hall and Lister Park, and elegant crescents and
squares tell of Manningham’s affluent past as a textile centre. However, for many, a vibrant
community can be marred by crime, traffic and congestion, sub-standard housing, and ill
health.
13

Such contrasts are an expression of the fact that, of the 354 local authority areas in England,
the district ranks as the 32nd most deprived, according to the latest measures 1 .
Two-fifths of our population live in some of the most deprived neighbourhoods in the country.
And some of these neighbourhoods are adjacent to much more affluent areas.
Another stark contrast is in the more rural areas, where, unlike most of the district, we score
badly in terms of access to housing and services. People living in parts of Wharfedale, the
Worth Valley, Wyke and Tong face geographical and wider barriers to GP surgeries,
supermarkets, primary schools and post offices, as well as housing.
The map below illustrates the pattern of deprivation (2007) across the district. It clearly
shows that many of the urban areas on the edge of the city centre, which grew when our
manufacturing industries were flourishing, have suffered in the shift to the service and
knowledge based economy.
Figure: Bradford’s least and most deprived areas (LSOAs) 2007
The focus of economic activity now is the city of Bradford, and the well served corridor
centred on Keighley, Bingley and Shipley. The historic concentrations of employment along
Canal Road, Thornton Road and Bowling Back Lane have been joined by more recent
concentrations close to the M606 and M62 motorways.
We have good transport links with Leeds Bradford Airport, and three rail routes provide key
connections across the district, and to neighbouring Leeds, as well as providing a trans-
Pennine link to Manchester via Halifax. Good connections across all types of public transport
will be increasingly important. Trends show that the district is unlikely to create enough jobs
1 Office of National Statistics’ indices of multiple deprivation, 2007. These make an assessment across
income; employment; heath and disability; education; skills and training; access to housing and
services; environment and crime
14

on its own to meet the demands of a growing workforce. Links with neighbouring districts will
be increasingly important to connect people with training and employment. For some, the
urban centres of Leeds will provide these opportunities, but for many of our rural
communities, Craven is more important.
Population trends also mean that we need to be planning for new homes and housing
developments. The Local Development Framework (LDF) is a new system for making sure
our land, buildings, transport links and green spaces are planned to provide us with
maximum wellbeing and to meet people’s needs. The LDF will complement our priorities in
The Big Plan, so that the council takes account of all of the economic development,
transport, and housing activities that will shape our places across the district in the coming
years.
The LDF will help the Council work with its partners to plan for our growing population: to
plan for homes, jobs, healthcare, education, shops and recreation spaces. It will ensure that
planning and land-use strategies make the district a focus in West Yorkshire for sustainable
economic growth, with high quality employment and housing.
1.5 Scope and Purpose of the Baseline Analysis Report
This report sets out the baseline position for the Bradford District, including the key issues
and parameters which will inform the preparation of the Core Strategy and where appropriate
the other Development Plan Documents of the Local Development Framework (LDF).
Essentially this document comprises a concise and comprehensive analysis of a wide range
of topics relevant to the district’s social, economic and environmental characteristics. The
intention is that all policies and proposals in the Core Strategy be justified by the relevant
evidence, and so this report includes data which have highlighted the district’s current
position and conclusively identified the issues to be faced in the future.
In accordance with good practice advice by the Planning Advisory Service, including the
online Plan Making Manual, Bradford Council considers the gathering of evidence as an
iterative process which must be continued throughout the plan preparation process. The
reason for this is because the evidence base is key to other aspects of plan production
including, Sustainability Appraisal, Options Generation and Community Engagement. The
figure below explains the linkages between these different areas (Source PAS March 2008).
15

Fig 03: Relationship between different elements of plan production
This Baseline Analysis Report therefore has been deliberately left in ‘Draft’ and will be
supplemented with additional information during the course of the preparation of the Core
Strategy. As part of the ongoing consultation process it would be made publicly available for
statutory consultees and other consultees for comment and review.
The report is arranged by thematic topics (e.g. Housing, Biodiversity, Transport, etc) and
includes data showing performance at national, regional and local levels, illustrated through
tables, charts, maps and diagrams. A significant part of the information contained within the
report derives from the evidence which has informed District’s Sustainable Community
Strategy (SCS) document prepared by the Bradford Council. It contains information about
general socio-economic and sustainability topics, relevant targets, comparative analysis and
data sources.
Relevant information, specific to the District, has also been collated and analysed from a
variety of sources, including commissioned studies and surveys, District, Regional and
National data and monitoring reports.
In preparing this report, we have not sought to replicate all published and unpublished
documents and data, but to identify and describe key issues and findings that are raised. In
considering the overall ‘Evidence Base’ that informs the emerging CS reference should be
made to the individual documents, strategies and data sources that are identified in each
chapter.
This report will also focus on setting the current infrastructure context in the district, by
achieving a basic knowledge and understanding of the issues relating to the provision of
infrastructure. This will provide the foundation for the strategy, which will set out how the
Council and key partners intend to implement the LDF and deliver the associated
infrastructure requirements.
16

The Local Infrastructure Plan covers physical, social and green infrastructure in Bradford, in
order to ensure that it embraces all matters necessary for the achievement of LDF policies,
proposals and aspirations.
1.6 Structure of Report
This report seeks to consider key elements of the ‘Evidence Base’ in a clear and structured
manner, as follows:
• Planning Policy and Regeneration Context – the first two sections contain an
appraisal of the National, Regional, Sub-Regional and Local planning policies which
provide the context within which the CS will be set. The second part of the section
identifies and assesses a range of current and proposed regeneration initiatives
affecting the future development of the district.
• Socio-Economic Appraisal – An appraisal of the social and economic context of
Bradford district.
• Housing Assessment – An overview of existing housing tenure and types, summary
of the relevant housing policy documents, urban potential study, housing land
availability assessments and an overview of the housing market.
• Social and Community Facility Audit – An assessment of the key public, private and
community facilities that are currently provided in Bradford.
• Landscape Character & Historic Environment – An assessment of the landscape and
the physical form and structure of the district including an Urban Design analysis of
the cityscape and assessment of the historic buildings, streets and spaces.
• Commercial Appraisal – A sectoral overview of the development potential and an
assessment of the delivery issues that this raises.
• Transport and Accessibility– A review of the transportation infrastructure including
highways, parking, facilities for pedestrians and cyclists, public transport as well as
private vehicles.
• Environment– An assessment of the District’s environmental quality and extent of the
issues affecting the delivery of sustainable development.
• Minerals and Waste Management- a review of Bradford’s waste and minerals
situation ranging from current capacity and management issues to future requirement
and planning matters .
17

• Sustainability – An Outline of the key sustainability issues that need to be addressed
throughout the development of the CS.
Each section of this report summarises the key issues which are raised from the discussion
of individual topic areas and which will be tested and explored during the next stage of the
Core Strategy.
18

2.0 PLANNING POLICY CONTEXT
This section summarises the national, regional and local policies that are relevant to Bradford
district and those that should be considered during the development of the Core Strategy.
The key planning policy documents at the national, regional, sub regional and district and city
centre level are reviewed below. These comprise Planning Policy Guidance Notes and
Planning Policy Statements at the national level; Regional Spatial Strategy at regional level;
Leeds City Regional Development Programme at the sub regional level; and Replacement
Unitary Development and LDF documents at the district level. The key policy implications
arising from these documents for the future of Bradford district are considered below.
2.1 National Planning Policy Context
At the top of the planning policy hierarchy are Planning Policy Statements (PPS) which are
published by the Department of Communities and Local Government (DCLG). Planning
Policy Statements will eventually replace Planning Policy Guidance Notes (PPGs). Planning
Policy Statements/Guidance Notes present the government’s views on general issues
relating to planning policy and how Regional government and local planning authorities
should interpret this strategic policy at local level. PPGs and PPSs form material planning
considerations in the decision making process with respect to development plan making and
development management.
The Government’s overall aims for towns and cities are set out in the Urban White Paper and
the Sustainable Communities Plan. These aims are taken forward into the planning system
through a series of Planning Policy Statements and Guidance Notes.
The Urban White Paper and the Sustainable Communities Plan
The Urban White Paper – ‘Our Towns and Cities: The Future – Delivering an Urban
Renaissance’, was published in 2000. It sets out the Government’s vision for urban areas.
The Sustainable Communities Plan – ‘Sustainable Communities: Building for the Future’,
was published in 2003. It builds on the urban white paper and sets out the Government’s
long-term programme of action for urban areas.
In summary, the Government’s vision is for towns and cities to become attractive, successful
places with a good quality environment and a high quality of life. They will be the focus for
housing and economic growth, and new development will be sustainable.
To achieve this each town and city needs to develop a vision for its future and plan how to
achieve it.
19

The Planning Act 2008
The Planning Act 2008 was granted Royal Assent on 26 November 2008. The Act builds on
the proposals set out in the ‘Planning White Paper - Planning for a Sustainable Future’ and
introduces a new system for nationally significant infrastructure planning, alongside further
reforms to the town and country planning system and the introduction of a Community
Infrastructure Levy.
An Infrastructure Planning Commission (IPC) will be established under the Act as the new
authority granting development consent for nationally significant infrastructure projects. The
Act also provides for the Government to produce national policy statements (NPSs) to be
used as the policy framework for the Commission's decisions. It imposes a requirement on
project promoters to consult affected parties and local communities prior to submitting an
application, and sets out a new process for examining applications. The three departments
responsible for drafting the NPSs are: Department for Transport, Department for Energy and
Climate Change and Department for Environment, Food and Rural Affairs.
The Act also makes further reforms to the town and country planning system, including
improving the Local Development Plan system by removing some minor procedures; adding
a duty on councils to take action on climate change in their development plans; and to have
regard to the desirability of achieving good design; streamlining development control
procedures; making changes to the appeals process; and adding transitional powers allowing
regional assemblies to delegate some planning functions to regional planning bodies.
The Act also contains enabling powers to empower local councils to apply a Community
Infrastructure Levy (CIL) on new developments in their areas to support infrastructure
delivery. The CIL will establish a better way to increase investment in the vital infrastructure
that growing communities need. Draft regulations setting out the detail of the CIL regime will
be issued for public consultation in spring 2009. The regulations will not enter into force
before October 2009.
The Housing Green Paper
The Housing Green Paper Homes for the future: more affordable, more sustainable
published in July 2007 sets out proposals for more homes to meet growing demand, to make
housing more affordable, and to create places and homes that people want to live in. The
Green Paper includes proposals for further reforms to the planning system to aid the delivery
of this ambition, including local planning incentives and improving the regional planning
process.
Planning Policy Statements and Guidance Notes
National Planning Policy Guidance promotes high quality and sustainable development.
Sustainable communities require sufficient quality housing to meet the needs of the
community, a flourishing local economy supported by adequate infrastructure, a high quality
20

safe and healthy environment and the amenities and sense of space and place to support a
diverse and vibrant local community.
PPS1: Creating Sustainable Communities (31 st January 2005) sets out Government’s
commitment to the creation of sustainable communities and the delivery of sustainable
development which focuses on:
• The need for planning authorities to take an approach based on integrating the four
aims of sustainable development: economic development; social inclusion;
environmental protection and prudent use of resources;
• The need for positive planning to achieve sustainable development objectives and
proactive management of development;
• The need for plans to set clear visions for communities and to help to integrate the
wide range of activities relating to development and regeneration; and
• The need for the planning system to actively promote participation and involvement.
PPS1 states that planning should facilitate and promote sustainable patterns of development
by:
• Making suitable land available in line with objectives to improve the quality of life;
• Contributing to sustainable economic growth;
• Protecting and where possible enhancing the natural and historic environment and
existing successful communities;
• Ensuring high quality development through good design; and
• Ensuring that development supports existing communities and contributes to the
creation of safe, sustainable and liveable communities with good access to key
services.
PPS1 promotes development that builds socially inclusive communities and the need to
address accessibility to jobs, health, housing, education, shops, leisure and community
facilities.
Planning Policy Statement: Planning & Climate Change – Supplement to PPS1 (17 th
December 2007)
PPS on climate change supplements PPS1 by setting out how planning should contribute to
reducing emissions and stabilising climate change and take into account the unavoidable
consequences. It does not seek to assemble all national planning policy relevant or
applicable to climate change and should be read alongside the national PPS/G series.
Where there is any difference in emphasis on climate change between the policies in this
PPS and others in the national series this is intentional and the PPS on planning 7 climate
change takes precedence.
Tackling climate change is a key Government priority for the planning system. The ambition
and policies in this PPS should therefore be fully reflected by planning authorities in the
preparation of Local Development Documents. All planning authorities should apply the
following principles in making decisions about their spatial strategies:
21

• the proposed provision for new development, its spatial distribution, location and
design should be planned to limit carbon dioxide emissions;
• new development should be planned to make good use of opportunities for
decentralised and renewable or low carbon energy;
• new development should be planned to minimise future vulnerability in a changing
climate;
• climate change considerations should be integrated into all spatial planning concerns;
• mitigation and adaptation should not be considered independently of each other, and
• new development should be planned with both in mind; sustainability appraisal
(incorporating strategic environmental assessment) should be applied to shape
planning strategies and policies that support the Key Planning Objectives; and
• appropriate indicators should be selected for monitoring and reporting on in regional
planning bodies’ and planning authorities’ annual monitoring reports. Such monitoring
should be the basis on which regional planning bodies and planning authorities
periodically review and roll forward their planning strategies.
Paragraph 18 states that planning authorities should consider the opportunities for the Core
Strategy to add to the policies and proposals in the RSS, such as where local circumstances
would allow further progress to be made to achieving the Key Planning Objectives set out in
this PPS. In doing so, the core strategy should be informed by, and in turn inform, local
strategies on climate change including the sustainable community strategy
PPG2: Green Belts (24 th January 1995) outlines the history and extent of Green Belts and
explains their purposes. It describes how Green Belts are designated and their land
safeguarded. Green Belt land-use objectives are outlined and the presumption against
inappropriate development is set out.
Paragraph 1.4 states that the fundamental aim of Green Belt policy is to prevent urban
sprawl by keeping land permanently open; the most important attribute of Green Belts is their
openness. Green Belts can shape patterns of urban development at sub-regional and
regional scale, and help to ensure that development occurs in locations allocated in
development plans. They help to protect the countryside, be it in agricultural, forestry or other
use. They can assist in moving towards more sustainable patterns of urban development
PPS3: Housing (29 th November 2006) sets out the national planning policy framework for
delivering the governments housing objectives. Priorities include high quality; well-designed
housing offering a mix of affordable and market units and mix of tenures for all communities
including rural areas. Housing should be located in suitable locations and on previously
developed land
22

Paragraph 9 provides the strategic housing objectives and states that the Government’s key
housing policy goal is to ensure that everyone has the opportunity of living in a decent home,
which they can afford, in a community where they want to live. To achieve this, the
Government is seeking:
• To achieve a wide choice of high quality homes, both affordable and market housing,
to address the requirements of the community.
• To widen opportunities for home ownership and ensure high quality housing for those
who cannot afford market housing, in particular those who are vulnerable or in need.
• To improve affordability across the housing market, including by increasing the supply
of housing.
• To create sustainable, inclusive, mixed communities in all areas, both urban and
rural.
These housing policy objectives provide the context for planning for housing through
development plans and planning decisions. The specific outcomes that the planning system
should deliver are:
• High quality housing that is well-designed and built to a high standard.
• A mix of housing, both market and affordable, particularly in terms of tenure and
price, to support a wide variety of households in all areas, both urban and rural.
• A sufficient quantity of housing taking into account need and demand and seeking to
improve choice.
• Housing developments in suitable locations, which offer a good range of community
facilities and with good access to jobs, key services and infrastructure.
• A flexible, responsive supply of land – managed in a way that makes efficient and
effective use of land, including re-use of previously-developed land, where
appropriate.
PPS 4: Planning for Sustainable Economic Growth (29 December 2009) provides the
national planning framework for economic development and sets out how planning bodies
should, in the wider context of delivering sustainable development, positively plan for
sustainable economic growth and respond to the challenges of the global economy, in their
plan policies and planning decisions.
The PPS4 combines town centre and economic development policy into a single streamlined
statement that supports sustainable economic growth, protects local markets and small
23

shops and will help councils make the decisions to help speed up economic recovery in their
towns and rural communities.
It replaces Planning Policy Guidance 4: Industrial, Commercial Development and Small
Firms (PPG4) and Planning Policy Guidance 5: Simplified Planning Zones (PPG5) both
published on 10 November 1992; Planning Policy Statement 6: Planning for Town Centres
(PPS6) published on 21 March 2005; and the economic development sections of Planning
Policy Statement 7: Sustainable Development in Rural Areas (PPS7) published on 3 August
2004.
The government recognises that the UK planning system is a key lever which can contribute
towards greater productivity and economic performance. This PPS sets out how the
government expects planning bodies to develop a robust evidence base to underpin their
decisions and to ensure that they have a flexible and responsive approach to providing for
the needs of business not simply by identifying a supply of land, but by making better use of
market information to inform their plans and decision-making.
The Government’s overarching objective to achieve prosperous economies is sustainable
economic growth. To help achieve sustainable economic growth, the Government’s
objectives for planning are to:
1. build prosperous communities by improving the economic performance of cities,
towns, regions, sub-regions and local areas, both urban and rural
2. reduce the gap in economic growth rates between regions, promoting regeneration
and tackling deprivation
3. deliver more sustainable patterns of development, reduce the need to travel,
especially by car and respond to climate change
4. promote the vitality and viability of town and other centres as important places for
communities. To do this, the Government wants:
• new economic growth and development of main town centre uses to be
focused in existing centres, with the aim of offering a wide range of services to
communities in an attractive and safe environment and remedying deficiencies
in provision in areas with poor access to facilities
• competition between retailers and enhanced consumer choice through the
provision of innovative and efficient shopping, leisure, tourism and local
services in town centres, which allow genuine choice to meet the needs of the
entire community (particularly socially excluded groups)
• the historic, archaeological and architectural heritage of centres to be
conserved and, where appropriate, enhanced to provide a sense of place and
a focus for the community and for civic activity
5. raise the quality of life and the environment in rural areas by promoting thriving,
inclusive and locally distinctive rural communities whilst continuing to protect the
open countryside for the benefit of all
24

The PPS mainly applies to development within the B Use Classes, public and community
uses and main town centre uses. The policies also apply to other development which
achieves at least one of the following objectives:
• provides employment opportunities
• generates wealth or
• produces or generates an economic output or product
The main uses to which the town centre policies in this PPS apply are:
• retail development (including warehouse clubs and factory outlet centres)
• leisure, entertainment facilities, and the more intensive sport and recreation
uses (including cinemas, restaurants, drive-through restaurants, bars and
pubs, night-clubs, casinos, health and fitness centres, indoor bowling centres,
and bingo halls)
• offices, and
• arts, culture and tourism development (including theatres, museums, galleries
and concert halls, hotels and conference facilities)
Housing is not identified as a main town centre use however, is identified as an important
element in most mixed-use, multi-storey developments.
PPS7: Sustainable Development in Rural Areas (3 rd August 2004) sets out the
Government's planning policies for rural areas, including country towns and villages and the
wider, largely undeveloped countryside up to the fringes of larger urban areas.
The principles of sustainable development are at the heart of this PPS7 and it ensures that
decisions on development proposals are based on an integrated approach that considers-
– social inclusion, recognising the needs of everyone;
– effective protection and enhancement of the environment;
– prudent use of natural resources; and
– maintaining high and stable levels of economic growth and employment.
It puts particular emphasis on ensuring good-quality design and enhancing the character of
rural settlements. Protection of countryside, Nationally Designated Areas and Local
Landscape Designations is also given greater priority to ensure that they are not affected by
any potentially damaging developments and the vitality of the rural areas therefore is not
compromised.
Development of agricultural land and firm diversifications are the other key issues covered by
the PPS7.
The economic development sections of PPS7 have been replaced by PPS4: Planning for
Sustainable Economic Growth published on 29 December 2009.
25

PPG8: Telecommunications (23 rd August 2001) gives guidance on planning for
telecommunications development - including radio masts and towers, antennas of all kinds,
radio equipment housing, public call boxes, cabinets, poles and overhead wires.
PPS9: Biodiversity and Geological Conservation (16 th August 2005) sets out national
planning policies on the protection of biodiversity and geological conservation.
Paragraphs 4 and 5 states that local authorities should take an integrated approach to
planning for biodiversity and geodiversity when preparing local development documents.
They should ensure that policies in local development documents reflect, and are consistent
with, national, regional and local biodiversity priorities and objectives (including those agreed
by local biodiversity partnerships).
Local development frameworks should:
• indicate the location of designated sites of importance for biodiversity and
geodiversity, making clear distinctions between the hierarchy of international,
national, regional and locally designated sites; and
• identify any areas or sites for the restoration or creation of new priority habitats which
contribute to regional targets, and support this restoration or creation through
appropriate policies.
PPS10: Planning for Sustainable Waste Management (21 st July 2005) sets out the
Government's policy to be taken into account by waste planning authorities and forms part of
the national waste management plan for the UK.
Paragraph 3 states that all planning authorities must help deliver sustainable development
through driving waste management up the waste hierarchy, addressing waste as a resource
and looking to disposal as the last option, but one which must be adequately catered for;
• provide a framework in which communities take more responsibility for their own
waste, and enable sufficient and timely provision of waste management facilities to
meet the needs of their communities;
• help implement the national waste strategy, and supporting targets, are consistent
with obligations required under European legislation and support and complement
other guidance and legal controls such as those set out in the Waste Management
Licensing Regulations 1994;
• help secure the recovery or disposal of waste without endangering human health and
without harming the environment, and enable waste to be disposed of in one of the
nearest appropriate installations;
• reflect the concerns and interests of communities, the needs of waste collection
authorities, waste disposal authorities and business, and encourage competitiveness;
26

• protect green belts but recognise the particular locational needs of some types of
waste management facilities when defining detailed green belt boundaries and, in
determining planning applications, that these locational needs, together with the wider
environmental and economic benefits of sustainable waste management, are material
considerations that should be given significant weight in determining whether
proposals should be given planning permission;
• ensure the design and layout of new development supports sustainable waste
management.
PPS12: Local Spatial Planning (4 th June 2008) sets out the government’s policies on
different aspects of spatial planning, including the policy for the preparation and content of
Area Action Plans. It reflects the lessons learned from the first three years of operation of the
new planning system in England brought in by the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act
2004.
PPS 12 explains what local spatial planning is, and how it benefits communities. It also sets
out what the key ingredients of local spatial plans are and the key government policies on
how they should be prepared. It should be taken into account by local planning authorities in
preparing development plan documents and other local development documents.
PPG13: Transport (20 th April 2001) outlines the government’s aim of achieving reduced car
dependency via transport and planning policies that are integrated at the national, strategic
and local level. The Guidance places an emphasis on putting people before traffic, indicating
that new development “should help to create places that connect with each other sustainably,
providing the right conditions to encourage walking, cycling and the use of public transport.”
When assessing planning applications, PPG 13 requires local authorities to intensify housing
and other uses at locations which are highly accessible by public transport, walking and
cycling. The Guidance goes on to say that: “Local planning authorities in assessing the
suitability of sites for housing development should, amongst other things, consider their
location and accessibility to jobs, shops and services by modes other than the car, and the
potential for improving such accessibility” (paragraph 14).
PPG15: Planning and the Historic Environment (14 th September 1994) provides a full
statement of Government policies for the identification and protection of historic buildings,
conservation areas and other elements of the historic environment. It explains the role played
by the planning system in their protection. PPG15 emphasises the need for effective
protection of the historic environment whose presence adds to quality of life themes by
sustaining the sense of local distinctiveness which is an important aspect of our towns.
PPG16: Archaeology and Planning (21 st November 1990) sets out the Secretary of State's
policy on archaeological remains on land, and how they should be preserved or recorded
both in an urban setting and in the countryside.
27

Draft PPS15: Planning for the Historic Environment (Consultation draft- 24July 2009)
will update planning policy affecting archaeology, historic areas, buildings and landscapes.
Once finalised, it will replace the current Planning Policy Guidance notes PPG 15 and 16.
PPS 15 is much briefer and less discursive than PPGs 15 and 16 but all policy covered by
those documents is either covered in the PPS or falls within Government's plans for new
policy documents. The key principle at the heart of the PPS is no different from PPGs15 and
16. It maintains the same level of protection to the historic environment as the current PPGs
15 and 16 but expresses the policy much more succinctly.
PPS 15 ensures there is a focus on understanding what is significant about a building, site
or landscape and from that it becomes easier to determine the impact of the proposed
change. It uses the 'values' approach of English Heritage's adopted Conservation Principles
as an underlying philosophy to inform decision-making. It also puts more emphasis on the
benefits of pre-application discussion as a way of collaboratively resolving consent issues at
the earliest stage of the planning process.
The PPS 15 provides greater clarity on key topics e.g. archaeological interest, conservation
areas and their preservation and enhancement, World Heritage Sites, conflicts with other
planning priorities and recording, and also encourages best practice within local authorities.
For example, local authorities will be urged to create publicly-accessible Historic
Environment Records.
PPG17: Planning for Open Space, Sport and Recreation (24 th July 2002) seeks to protect
and where possible enhance open space and recreation facilities and promotes the creation
of high quality open spaces which are accessible and well-suited to the needs of the
communities they serve.
PPS22: Renewable Energy (10 th August 2004) states that local planning authorities should
recognise the full range of renewable energy sources, their differing characteristics,
locational requirements and the potential for exploiting them subject to appropriate
environmental safeguards. Consideration should be given to the opportunity for incorporating
renewable energy projects in all new developments.
PPS23: Planning and Pollution Control (3 rd November 2004) advises that any
consideration of the quality of land, air or water and potential impacts arising from
development possibly leading to impacts on health is capable of being a material planning
consideration in so far as it arises or may arise form or may affect any land use. The
planning system plays a key role in determining the location of development which may give
rise to pollution either directly or indirectly and in ensuring that other uses and developments
are not affected by potential sources of pollution. The statement reiterates that the
Government believes that planning should become a more strategic, proactive force for
economic, social and environmental well-being and attaches great importance to controlling
and minimising pollution.
28

PPS25: Development and Flood Risk (7 th December 2006) sets out Government policy on
development and flood risk. It's aims are to ensure that flood risk is taken into account at all
stages in the planning process to avoid inappropriate development in areas at risk of
flooding, and to direct development away from areas of highest risk. Where new
development is, exceptionally, necessary in such areas, policy aims to make it safe, without
increasing flood risk elsewhere, and, where possible, reducing flood risk overall.
Good Practice Guide on Planning for Tourism (16 th May 2006), which should be read
alongside national planning policies, is designed to ensure that planners understand the
importance of tourism and take this fully into account when preparing development plans and
taking planning decisions and ensure that planners and the tourism industry work together
effectively to facilitate, promote and deliver new tourism development in a sustainable way.
By Design: Urban Design in the Planning System - Towards Better Practice (15 th May
2000) is intended as a companion to Planning Policy Guidance (PPGs) [and subsequent
Planning Policy Statements (PPSs)] and aims to encourage better design and to stimulate
thinking about urban design. The guide is relevant to all aspects of the built environment,
from the design of buildings and spaces, landscapes, to transport systems; and for planning
and development at every scale, from streets and their neighbourhoods, villages and cities,
to regional planning strategies.
2.2 Regional Context
The regional and sub-regional policy context is set out in –
• The Northern Way Strategy for the North of England
• The Yorkshire & Humber Plan - Regional Spatial Strategy for Yorkshire and the Humber
• The Regional Economic Strategy for Yorkshire and the Humber
• The Regional Housing strategy for Yorkshire and the Humber
• The West Yorkshire Local Transport Plan
• Leeds City Region Development Programme
Moving Forward: Northern Way Growth Strategy (September 2004)
In order to promote economic growth in the regions the Government has set up Regional
Development Agencies (RDAs). The RDA for this region is Yorkshire Forward.
Yorkshire Forward, together with the RDAs for the North-West and the North-East, have
published ‘Moving Forward: The Northern Way’, in September 2004.
The Northern Way is a unique initiative, bringing together the cities and regions of the North
of England to work together to improve the sustainable economic development of the North
towards the level of more prosperous regions.
29

Formed as a partnership between the three northern Regional Development Agencies
(Yorkshire Forward, Northwest Regional Development Agency and One NorthEast), we also
work with local authorities, universities, the private sector and other partners to secure a
strong coalition in support of this goal. The Northern Way Initiative aims to influence policy
and delivery at a local, city region, regional and national level, to join up thinking and
encourage collaboration.
The Northern Way sets out a strategy for how the North of England can bridge the economic
gap with the rest of the UK. It identifies 8 city regions on which to concentrate economic
growth. Bradford is identified within the Leeds City Region.
The Leeds and Manchester city regions are highlighted as the most significant in terms of
driving growth in the north.
Figure : Bradford and the Northern way
30

The Yorkshire and Humber Plan – Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS), May 2008
This document provides the spatial strategy to guide the preparation of local authority
development plans and local transport plans so that they can deliver a coherent framework
for regional development.
The RSS aims to guide development over the next 15 to 20 years. It influences the future
direction of the economy, housing, transport, the built and natural environment. It provides a
long term strategy for the region to help it become more competitive and sustainable patterns
and forms of development, investment, and activity.
The RSS recognises that main city, town and village centres throughout the region are
critical in providing business services and performing a role as centres for social, cultural and
political life. Bradford sits within the Leeds City Region sub area. The RSS identifies Bradford
as a Regional City within the regional settlement network with Keighley and Ilkley as principal
towns.
Regional cities are to be the prime focus for housing, employment, shoping, leisure,
education, health and cultural activities in the region. These regional cities will be
transformed into attractive places where people want to live, work, invest and spend time in.
Whereas Principal Towns should be the focus of housing, employment, shopping, leisure,
education and health and cultural activities.
Policy YH1 deals with the location of new development, the policy seeks that first priority
should be for the re-uses of previously developed land and buildings within developed areas
within city and towns. The second priority is towards other suitable infill opportunities within
city and towns. The third priority relates to extensions to city and towns.
Policy LCR1 deals the Leeds City Region. It aims to transform Bradford as a regional city
through significant growth in economic development, jobs and homes through the
renaissance of the city and the development and regeneration elsewhere. Bradford is
identified by the RSS as a major engine to the economic development of the regional
economy. The policy also seeks to prmote strategic development in the Airedale areas
increasing development in Keighley (and Skipton).
Policy LCR2 deals with significant investment in the Leeds City Regional and seeks to
support the renaissance of Bradford City Centre.
Chapter 11 of the RSS deals with creating a success and competitive regional economy. The
RSS recognises the regional cites as a key driver of productivity to securing competitive
advantage. Policy E1 (i) recognises retail and leisure development as key economic and
employment generators. Policy E2 deals with town centres. The policy seeks to strengthen
the role and performance of existing city and town centre through strategies and investment
decisions. Bradford as a regional city should be the focus for office, retail, leisure,
entertainment, arts, culture, and tourism. Policy E2B seeks that other measures including
environmental enhancement, accessibility improvement and town centre management and
31

promotion can also improve the vibrance of existing centres. Policy E2C restricts new, or
large scale expansion of existing, out-of-centre regional or sub-regional shopping centres.
Fig 05: Bradford and the RSS
Policy E3 of the RSS deals with land and premises for economic development. The RSS
seeks to ensure that previously development land should be available to provide sufficient
land and premises in sustainable location to meet the modern economies requirements. The
32

need for additional office, retail and leisure floorspace is to be focused in existing city and
town centres.
Policy E5B deals with promoting tourism in City Centres such as Bradford, the RSS seeks to
realise the potential of heritage, leisure and cultural assets by promoting their roles as
modern, varied and destinations.
The adopted Yorkshire and Humber Plan can be viewed in full at:-
http://www.gos.gov.uk/goyh/plan/regplan/
The Regional Economic Strategy (RES) 2006-2015
The Regional Economic Strategy (RES) 2006-2015 provides the 10 year blueprint for
economic development in Yorkshire and the Humber.
It provides a framework of common priorities around which businesses, public agencies,
voluntary groups and communities can focus their investment and effort. The strategy is
owned, and can only be delivered, by the whole region.
The Strategy's six objectives are:
1. More Businesses that last – because higher levels of enterprise are so important
2. Competitive Businesses – making indigenous businesses more productive because they
innovate and invest
3. Skilled People benefiting business – with talents that employers value and which offer due
reward
4. Connecting People to good jobs – because levels of employment make a big difference to
people and the economy, and we need more people in jobs in deprived areas.
5. Transport, Infrastructure and Environment – a strong economy needs good sustainable
transport connections and to make the best of the environment and infrastructure
6. Stronger Cities, Towns and Rural Communities – to ensure they are attractive places to
live, work and invest
Further information can be found on the Yorkshire Forward website
http://www.yorkshire-forward.com/www/view.asp?content_id=106&parent_id=17
Regional Housing Strategy 2005- 2021
The Regional Housing Board is responsible for producing a Regional Housing Strategy as
the basis of advice to ministers on strategic housing priorities in the region. The Regional
Housing Strategy sits within the context of the region's strategic framework, Advancing
33

Together, and is consistent with other key strategies, such as the Regional Economic
Strategy, the Regional Spatial Strategy and the Northern Way Growth Strategy. Regional
Housing Strategies must also align with national priorities and strategies and Ministerial
requirements.
The Regional Housing Strategy has 3 main purposes:-
• To influence regional, sub-regional and local strategies across a range of housing
priorities such as delivery of affordable housing, energy efficiency, fuel poverty,
sustainable design and construction, and fair access to housing policies.
• To set out regional housing priorities to steer the use of the accompanying regional
investment strategy and its single housing pot
• To steer wider investment towards integrated housing, economic and social activity
Further information can be found on the Yorkshire and Humber Assembly website
http://www.yhassembly.gov.uk/index.cfm
2.3 Sub-Regional Context
Leeds City Region
Leeds City Region comprises the 10 local authority districts of Barnsley, Bradford,
Calderdale, Craven, Harrogate, Kirklees, Leeds, Selby, Wakefield, and York, which reflects
the true area of how the economy of Leeds and the other cities, towns and rural areas in the
city region functions; for example, 95% of people who live in the city region also work in the
city region.
A City Region Partnership comprising the councils of each of the 10 districts, plus North
Yorkshire County Council (which has strategic responsibilities in three of the districts), was
set up in 2004, and since then have been working together to look at how policy and delivery
at this broad area level can be changed to improve economic growth and competitiveness.
On the 1st April 2007 the Partnership became the City Region Leaders' Board, which is
constituted as a Joint Committee. The Board comprises of the Leaders of each of the eleven
constituent authorities, and has the remit of 'Promoting the economic wellbeing of the Leeds
City Region.' The Board will provide the political accountability and 'voice' of the City Region.
The City Region Development Programme (CRDP) November 2006 has been prepared and
agreed by the 11 councils and is essentially the economic plan for the city region, focussed
on areas where we can add value and deliver our Vision for the city region which is to
'Develop an internationally recognised city region; to raise our economic performance; to
spread prosperity across the whole of our city region, and to promote a better quality of life
for all of those who live and work here.' This second iteration of the CRDP builds on a 2005
34

document, but provides a more robust and evidence-based programme for prioritising policy
and programmes that will accelerate economic growth in the Leeds City Region.
Figure: Bradford in the Leeds City Region
The CRDP puts forward a growth scenario to achieve 4% per annum growth in GVA per
capita across the city region over the coming ten years. This growth rate would be sufficient
to close the productivity gap with the England average over the same time period and
contribute to the Northern Way's aim to close the £30 billion gap in the North. This would
create around 150,000 net new jobs and result in a £21.5 billion increase in GVA across the
city region over the ten year period.
The financial and business services sector is identified as the key industry that will drive the
city region's economic growth and competitiveness over the next 10 years. Future economic
growth will not be driven solely by the City of Leeds and therefore a key element of the
CRDP is to ensure that the city region has a 21st Century transport infrastructure that
supports stronger links around the city region, particularly between growth locations and to
rural hinterlands.
Realising a stronger and more competitive economy that will benefit all areas within the city
region will require co-ordinated and complementary action from all partners and stakeholders
within the city region as well as the support of Government in helping address barriers to
growth. Only then can the full economic potential of the Leeds City Region be realised and
the benefits felt throughout.
Priorities and Objectives of the Leeds City Region are to:-
• Improve city regional, inter-region and international connectivity
35

• Encourage a culture of innovation in both individuals and businesses in enterprise,
science and greater knowledge transfer
• Encourage and support the development of higher and more relevant skills in the
workforce
• Accelerate the development of a world-class infrastructure within which all
businesses innovate and can thrive
• Enhance and promote the City Region as a place to live and work
Local Transport Plan (LTP)
The West Yorkshire Local Transport Plan 2, (LTP2), was published in 2006. It covers the
period 2006-2011 and is prepared jointly by the five West Yorkshire metropolitan authorities.
It sets out the funding priorities for local transport schemes in the county. Priorities include
the Bradford City Centre and West Bradford Integrated Transport Scheme, the Airedale
Integrates Transport Scheme and Bradford Minitram. Improvements to the bus and rail
connections within the Interchange are also a possibility.
Further details can be found at http://www.wyltp.com
2.4 Local Planning Context
Bradford Replacement Unitary Development Plan
The Replacement Unitary Development Plan adopted in October 2005 is the statutory
development plan for Bradford District. On 30 th September 2008, the Council received the
Secretary of States Direction (under paragraph 1(3) of schedule 8 to the Planning &
Compulsory Purchase Act 2004) and Schedule of Saved policies.
The RUDP is composed of the Policy Framework which includes includes Part One of the
Plan, which consists of a written statement of the Council’s principal policies for the
development and other use of land in the District. This strategy looks forward to 2020 and
provides the context for the detailed policies and proposals in Part Two.
Part Two, is in general conformity with Part One, and contains detailed policies and
proposals for the development and other use of land, including the policies which will form
the basis for deciding planning applications. These policies and proposals have been
formulated to address the District’s needs in the period up to 2014 a period of some ten
years from the anticipated adoption stage as advised in PPG12. It also contains reasoned
justification for the policies and proposals in the Plan, indicating how national and regional
policy, and social, economic, environmental, financial and other relevant considerations have
been taken into account.
36

In addition there are five Proposals Reports and Maps showing the location of site specific
proposals contained in the Plan and identifying where area specific policies apply. Each
Proposals Report and Map relates to one of the five Parliamentary Constituencies in the
District. (Bradford North, West and South, Shipley and Keighley). There are also detailed
inset plans for the Bradford City Centre and the town centres of Keighley, Shipley, Bingley
and Ilkley and 2 District wide maps one illustrating the development strategy and a second
providing information relating to Flood Risk, Landscape Character and Wildlife Corridors
The aim of the Plan is to:
Devise a Plan which will promote a more sustainable district
The objectives are as follows.
• To maximise the potential for the built up areas to meet the development needs of the
District.
• To promote the conservation and improvement of the built and natural environment.
• Improve the quality of the built environment through a high standard of design in
buildings, streets, public spaces and neighbourhoods, which respects local
distinctiveness.
• To ensure the provision of adequate housing and community facilities to meet the
districts needs.
• To help promote economic success. To provide a location strategy for
accommodating development and ensuring environmental protection in a way which
promotes access to services and minimises dependence on the private car.
• To manage the use of the District’s natural and renewable resources including energy
efficiently and with care.
• To help ensure pollution and waste are minimised and managed efficiently.
The RUDP promotes the following settlement hierarchy:-
• First priority to locating development within the Main Urban Area of Bradford / Shipley
/ Baildon;
• Second priority is to meet development needs through the reuse of suitable
previously developed land and buildings within the urban areas of Keighley, Ilkley,
Bingley and Queensbury;
37

• Next is extensions to the above urban areas which provide integration of uses such
as transport, housing and industry, starting with the Main Urban Area;
• Then locating development at Menston, Burley, Steeton and Thornton which are
considered to be nodes in good quality public transport corridors
• Finally development to meet local needs in the less well located smaller settlements,
which are predominantly in the rural parts of the District.
For local housing provision the rUDP describes a sequential approach to identifying sites that
is in line with the relevant policies of the RSS. In the context of Bradford this sequence is set
out in the table below:
Source: Bradford rUDP (2005)
With regard to the Hierarchy of Retail Centres, Bradford City Centre is at the top of the
hierarchy as a city centre followed by Keighley, Ilkley, Shipley and Bingley as Town Centres,
and then by District and Local Centres.
38

The Replacement UDP can be viewed in full on the Council’s website at:
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/planning
Emerging Local Development Framework
The Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act reformed the English planning system in
September 2004. Unitary Development Plans (UDPs) and Supplementary Planning
Guidance (SPGs) will be replaced by a range of documents that will form the Bradford
District Local Development Framework (LDF).
The current Replacement Unitary Development Plan adopted in October 2005 is the
statutory development plan for Bradford District. On 30 th September 2008, the Council
received the Secretary of States Direction (under paragraph 1(3) of schedule 8 to the
Planning & Compulsory Purchase Act 2004) and Schedule of Saved policies.
The LDF is made up of different types of planning document known as Local Development
Documents (LDDs) which include:- Development Plan Documents (DPDs) and
Supplementary Planning Documents (SPDs), and will set out the guidelines for spatial
development in the Bradford District in conformity with the Regional Spatial Strategy. The
LDF must also seek to implement the spatial aspects of the Community Strategy prepared by
Bradford Vision.
The timetable for producing the documents is
set out in the Local Development Scheme
(LDS), which sets out the details for producing,
monitoring and reviewing Local Development
Documents.
The Statement of Community Involvement
(SCI) sets out how the Council will involve the
local community and stakeholders in the
preparation and review of Local Development
Documents.
All of the documents mentioned in the diagram
must take into account a number of important
and overarching issues. These include the
environment, sustainability, equality and the
needs and aspirations of the local community.
An integral part of preparing the Local
Development Framework is the Sustainability
Appraisal (SA) process. The aim of the process
is to assess the overall environmental,
Figure: Structure of the LDF
39

economic and social impact of the objectives and policies of the plans produced. The
Appraisal should ensure that the Core Strategy, and in time other parts of the Local
Development Framework, contribute towards achieving sustainable development.
The Council also produces an Annual Monitoring Report (AMR) to monitor the progress
made on preparing the LDDs.
The following illustrates relationship between the different DPDs and SPDs that are in the
process of being produced by the Council.
Figure: Key LDDs in the Bradford LDF
The Core Strategy is one of the key documents that forms part of the emerging Local
Development Framework for Bradford. It will:
• Set out the broad aims and objectives for sustainable development in the District for
the next 15-20 years until 2026;
• Set out broad policies for steering and shaping development within the district;
• Set out the broad locations for new housing, employment and infrastructure
investment; and
• Take account of national and regional policy and the Council’s aims as set out in the
Sustainable Community Strategy - ‘The Big Plan’.
• The Core Strategy will not allocate specific sites for new housing and employment
development.
The final Core Strategy will set out what is to be done, where and by whom to achieve the
over arching vision and objectives of the plan. There are a number of stages within the Plan
production which seek to identify the broad issues faced by the district and the options to
address these.
40

The first stage in the preparation of the Core Strategy was to consult and discuss with the
public and stakeholders the issues which the core strategy must address and the options for
responding to them. To kick off these discussions the Council produced a series of 8 topic
papers, which provided the background to the key issues and proposed a number of options
for tackling the issues, and consulted on these documents between February and July 2007.
The Council has recently consulted on a revised Spatial Vision and Objectives document
which looked at four possible options of where to locate housing and jobs over the next 15
years. Extensive public engagement took place between January and May 2008.
Currently the council is taking stock of all the information gathered during the Issues and
Options and Further Issues and Options Stages of the Core Strategy to produce the
Preferred Option for the Bradford District. Consultation on the Preferred Options stage of the
Core Strategy is planned for early 2009.
The Local Development Framework (LDF) process requires planning policies to be based on
a thorough understanding of the needs, opportunities and constraints within that area.
Therefore, the Council has assembled a range of information and commissioned strategic
studies to justify the "soundness" of the policy approach set out in Local Development
Documents, including physical, economic, and social characteristics of the area. These
reports and documents are known as the ‘Evidence Base’ for the LDF process.
The following documents form part of the Evidence Base for the Bradford LDF:-
• The Big Plan Sustainable Community Strategy and Background Papers
• Bradford District Retail & Leisure Study
• Bradford District Employment Lands Review Assessment
• Bradford District Strategic Housing Market Assessment
• Bradford District Strategic Housing Land Availability Assessment
• Bradford District Transport Study
• Bradford District Local Infrastructure Study
• Bradford District Strategic Flood Risk Assessment Level 1 and Level 2
• Bradford District Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study
• Bradford District Built Recreational Facilities Assessment
• Bradford District Conservation Area Assessments
• Bradford District Landscape Character Assessment
• Bradford District Biodiversity Action Plan
• Bradford District Tourism Strategy
• Gypsy & Traveller Accommodation Assessment
The Supplementary Planning Documents (SPDs) may cover a range of issues, both
theme based and site specific, which provide further detail to policies within a DPD. The
following SPDs are to be produced by the City of Bradford MDC:
• Bradford City Centre Affordable Housing – adopted in October 2008
• Bradford District Affordable Housing– scoping report out in October 2008
41

• Bradford City Centre Design Guide– adopted in March 2006
• Householder SPD – scoping report out in October 2008
• Landscape Character – adopted in October 2008
• Menston Housing Sites – adopted in October 2007
• Planning for Crime Prevention – adopted in June 2007
• Planning Obligations – adopted in October 2007
• Shop Front Design – adopted in December 2007
• Sustainable Design Guide – adopted in February 2006
• Tree Protection- not commenced
• Open Space and Built Facilities SPD- not commenced
42

3.0 REGENERATION CONTEXT
This section identifies and assesses a range of current and proposed regeneration initiatives
affecting the future of the district.
3.1 Bradford Vision – Local Strategic Partnership
Created in 2008 the Bradford District Partnership (BDP) is the districts Local Strategic
Partnership (LSP). The Government requires districts to have an LSP to assist in the
planning and delivery of more effective services for local people. The BDP will ensure that
the district’s Big Plan and Local Area Agreement (LAA) are delivered in the best way
possible - and that all the partners work closely together to make things happen.
In doing so the BDP will champion the well being and prosperity of all of the districts
residents and ensure that they have the opportunity to realise their true potential.
The aim is to achieve the vision for the future of Bradford District as set out in the 2020
Vision - Community Strategy 2006 - 2009– a plan that includes the five key ambitions local
communities have for their future. The Community Strategy has been prepared by the
Partnership with City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council (CMBDC) as part of the
partnership.
The Vision set out the 5 main objectives for the future of the district:
• Creating a vibrant economy and prosperous District
• Improving the District for children and young people
• Building safer and stronger communities
• Making healthier communities and improving the quality of life of older people
• Creating foundations for long term prosperity
The BDP Board has 15 senior people from some of the key partner agencies – the Council,
The Primary Care Trust, The Police, The Chamber of Commerce, Bradford Community
Housing Trust, The University, The Child and Young Peoples partnership, the Environment
Partnership and the Business and Voluntary/Community Sectors.
This means that when the BDP makes decisions the partners will be committed to making
them happen.
The Board is supported by 5 Strategic Delivery Partnerships covering the following themes:
• Children and Young People
• Economy, Skills, Housing and Transport
• Environment
• Safer Communities
• Health and Well Being
43

These partnerships have the responsibility for ensuring that an area of the Big Plan and LAA
is developed and delivered, raising any key issues with the Board where necessary.
To support the BDP Board and its partnerships, the council co-ordinates a multi-agency
officer team known as the Partnership Delivery Team (PDT). PDT is lead by the council’s
Deputy Chief Executive, and it helps the deliver and performance manage the Big Plan and
the Local Area Agreement.
The Strategic Delivery Partnerships and the Board are supported by a range of cross cutting
partnerships that work with them to ensure that a range of issues are reflected in all aspects
of the LSPs work. They include the following:
• The Cultural Consortium
• The Strategic Disability Partnership
• The Older Peoples Partnership
• The Neighbourhood Improvement Strategic Partnership (NISP)
• The Building Communities Partnership
• The Community Network (Cnet)
3.2 The Big Plan – Sustainable Community Strategy 2008 – 2011
The Big Plan is an update on the existing Community Strategy, which will cover 2008 – 2011.
The strategy has 6 main objectives:
1. Prosperity, including the transformational priorities of regenerating the city and major
towns, and improving skills, but also covering other economic aims including aspects
of housing and transport.
2. Children and Young People, including the transformational priority of improving
education outcomes so that people are prepared for an adult life of skilled, creative
productivity, personal, social and environmental responsibility, and engagement.
3. Safer Communities – building public confidence, trust and satisfaction in reducing
crime and anti-social behaviour, tackling its causes and increasing people’s feeling of
safety and security in their homes and neighbourhoods
4. Health and Wellbeing for All - dealing with the causes of major public health and lifestyle
problems and working across partners to prevent illness and extend productive
life
5. Environment – clean, attractive neighbourhoods; reducing and managing waste
sustainably and reducing our impact on climate change
6. Strong Communities and Thriving Neighbourhoods – working with citizens to develop
active engagement, self-confidence and local resources to invest in neighbourhood
improvement.
The objectives are similar to that of the existing community strategy, with the addition of an
objective on the environment. The priorities for achieving the objectives have been updated
and are as follows:
44

• Regenerating the city and our major towns to create opportunities and impetus for
sustained economic growth
• Improving education outcomes to prepare people for an active and prosperous life
• Improving skills at all levels to meet the needs of business and build a knowledge
economy.
The community strategy is still in the draft stage of production and expected to be adopted in
late summer 2008.
3.3 Bradford City Centre Masterplan
This Section provides a commentary on the masterplanning work that has been undertaken
for Bradford City Centre since the formation of Bradford Centre Regeneration (BCR) in 2003.
It starts by looking at the BCR Masterplan and the response to it, before looking at the
Bradford City Centre Design Guide Supplementary Planning Document (SPD) and the
Neighbourhood Development Frameworks (NDF) – which have been produced to take
forward the aims of the Masterplan.
Bradford Centre Regeneration (BCR):
In September 2002, the Government granted approval for the establishment of an Urban
Regeneration Company for Bradford City Centre. This company was established in February
2003 under the name Bradford Centre Regeneration (BCR). It is jointly funded by City of
Bradford Metropolitan District Council, Yorkshire Forward (the Regional Development
Agency) and English Partnerships (the national regeneration agency).
The key role of BCR is to engage the public and private sectors in order to transform the city
centre.
The BCR Masterplan:
In February 2003, Alsop Architects were appointed to prepare a Masterplan for the Bradford
City Centre. This was published in September 2003 and set out a new vision for the future of
the city centre.
The big idea of the Masterplan is to create a new city centre park that will change people’s
perceptions of Bradford and differentiate it from other cities.
The idea is based on exploiting Bradford’s topography – the city lies in a bowl formed by the
valley of Bradford Beck. The Masterplan proposes rediscovering the ‘BradfordBowl’ by
getting rid of poor quality buildings which we do not need and forming a new city centre park.
This would be a series of linked spaces, landscapes and water features, which breathes new
life into the city’s historic fabric.
The Masterplan identifies four separate neighbourhoods or ‘fingers of intervention’:
45

The Bowl – proposes a large pool of water outside City Hall at the centre of the new park.
Radiating out from the Pool are, a Pier attached to the National Museum, a new Business
Forest, and the other three neighbourhoods.
The Channel – proposes reintroducing the Bradford Canal to the city centre alongside which
is a new canalside community.
The Market – proposes an alternative multi-cultural retail offer with new public spaces.
The Valley – proposes bringing Bradford Beck back to the surface, with a green corridor
along Thornton Road including Wetlands and an Orchard.
The aim of this approach is to promote a step change in the economy, inspire better quality
development, and create a city centre that is used and cared for by all of the city’s different
cultures.
The Masterplan can be viewed in full on the BCR website -http://www.bradfordurc.com
The Response to the Masterplan:
The Public
A public exhibition of the Masterplan was held between 15th October 2003 and 19th
December 2003 at the former Dillons Bookstore on Market Street, Bradford. A total of 2,497
comment forms were returned.
Overall,
• 65% of the respondents rated the Masterplan as either ‘Wow’ or ‘Exciting’,
• 12% thought it was ‘OK’,
• 13% hated it, and
• 10% were undecided.
The Council
On 14th October 2003, City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council’s Executive welcomed
the Masterplan for the city centre. Subsequently at the meeting of the
Executive on 9th March 2004 it was resolved that the Council would:
• Prepare a replacement planning document for the Bradford Centre
Regeneration area as a high priority.
• Co-operate with BCR in the commissioning of studies and project plans.
At the meeting of the City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council Regulatory and Appeals
Committee on 8th March 2005 it was resolved that: The Masterplan for Bradford City Centre
be treated as a material consideration in the determination of planning applications.
The Council and BCR in 2005 and 2006 commissioned consultants to produce the following:
• City Centre Design Guide
• City Centre Streetscape Manual
• Neighbourhood Development Framework for each of the four neighbourhoods
identified in the Masterplan.
46

The purpose of these documents is to take forward the vision of the Masterplan and
demonstrate how it can be delivered.
Bradford City Centre Design Guide:
In 2005 a consultancy team led by Urbed was commissioned to produce a Design Guide for
the city centre for City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council.
The purpose of the Guide is to articulate the Masterplan vision for the city centre into a set of
design rules. This includes guidance on tall buildings, the character of streets, enclosure of
space and public realm.
The Guide is used to assess the design of new development proposals in the city centre. It
was adopted by the Council in March 2006 as a Supplementary Planning Document (SPD)
following public consultation. As an SPD, the guide is a material consideration when
determining any planning applications within the city centre.
The Bradford City Centre Design Guide can be viewed at –
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/bccdg or alternatively viewed at any of the Council’s Planning
Offices.
BCR in 2006 commissioned consultants Landscape Projects to take the public realm
guidance within the City Centre Design Guide further and produce a Streetscape Design
Manual for the city centre. This will provide a set of rules and specify a palette of materials
for new public realm works.
3.4 The Neighbourhood Development Frameworks (NDFs)
The Masterplan identifies four separate neighbourhoods in Bradford City Centre – The Bowl,
The Channel, The Market, and The Valley.
In late 2004/early 2005 consultants were commissioned by City of Bradford Metropolitan
District Council and BCR to produce a framework for each of the four neighbourhoods.
These have been called Neighbourhood Development Frameworks (NDFs). The purpose of
the NDFs is to build on the aims of the Masterplan andproduce a deliverable strategy and a
set of projects for each neighbourhood.
The NDF’s set out development proposals for each of the four separate parts of the city
centre and take into a account a number of issues that have been identified in each area.
The NDF’s carry out a baseline assessment of each area and a SWOT analysis, which they
have used to compile the regeneration proposals put forward in the frameworks.
The NDFs have been prepared by:
The Channel – Arup
The Market – Arup
The Valley – Urbed
The Bowl – Alsop
47

The Draft Neighbourhood Development Frameworks can be viewed in full at
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/environment/land_and_premises/planning/city
_centre_neighbourhood_developmen t_framework.htm
or alternatively by visiting any of the Councils Planning Offices
Response to the NDFs:
The Draft NDFs were published separately for public comment between March and
December 2006. The comments received have been used to inform the Bradford City
Centre Area Action Plan - Issues and Options Report (this document).
On 16th January 2007, the City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council considered
consultation responses to the NDFs and resolved that comments would be accepted as
evidence for inclusion in the preparation of the City Centre Area Action Plan.
On 7th February 2007, the City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council’s Regulatory &
Appeals Committee resolved that: the four Draft Neighbourhood Development Frameworks
for the City Centre be treated as material considerations in the determination of planning
applications pending the adoption of the Bradford City Centre Action Area Plan.
In addition to the above, a number of background and feasibility studies have been
completed as part of the masterplanning process. These are detailed in Section 1.4 ‘The
Evidence Base’ of the BCCAAP Issues and Options report.
3.5 Canal Road Masterplan
This sets out the plans for Canal Road and the land adjacent to the corridor. Similar to the
NDF’s, a baseline assessment was carried out to extract the issues the area faces and a
SWOT analysis was undertaken to establish the Strengths, Weaknesses, Opportunities and
Threats of the area. The plan centres round the reopening of the Bradford Canal as its major
regeneration project and the benefits that can bring. It also covers regeneration that could
develop prior, subsequent and during the reopening of the canal.
Its strategic objectives are to:
• To recognise the importance of the ‘Canal as a catalyst’ for regeneration;
• To ensure a ‘balance of functions’ within the Corridor;
• To ‘create a sustainable place’ to live, work and spend leisure time;
• To promote a positive and viable ‘mix of uses’ within the Corridor; and,
• To ‘enhance movement and connection’ within the Corridor.
Key Principles for development:
• Establish a mix of uses that support the role and function of the Corridor as a major
transportation corridor and series of sustainable neighbourhoods;
48

• Reduce the severance effect of Canal Road and improve cross corridor routes
through targeted access and environmental improvements;
• Optimise the alignment of the proposed canal to reduce conflict between new traffic
generating uses and Canal Road;
• Reduce the potential conflict between uses through the location of sensitive uses
such as residential properties away from the main road frontage;
• Encourage higher density uses close to public transport corridors and main road
frontages;
• Discourage large traffic generating uses; and
• Maximise the potential of the canal as a movement corridor to reduce the impact on
Canal Road
Other significant principles are the need to create sustainable communities, a mix of uses
and enhance movement and connection.
Character Areas and Principal Uses:
• Shipley Waterside - Town centre residential and office with some ground floor retail;
• Shipley Fields - Waterside open space, Bolton Woods Football Club and Shipley
College’s Horticulture and Sports Campus;
• Frizinghall Waterfront - Residential;
• Oswin Marina - Residential with some ground floor commercial uses and a sports
pitch;
• Bolton Hillside - Residential within extensive areas of high quality open space;
• Oliver’s Locks - A new residential community with a mix of retail, leisure, office and
employment uses; and
• Manningham Cross - Residential, large-scale retail and some commercial/leisure
opportunities.
Summary:
Although the Canal Road Masterplan is not an officially adopted document and not
specifically focused on the city centre, but it does raise some very valid issues and gives a
detailed description of areas around the city centre.
The main issues pointed out in the Masterplan are mainly physical, relating to the car
domination of Canal Road, resulting in an unattractive and unfriendly pedestrian atmosphere,
acting as a barrier to east-west movement across the Valley and poor quality built
environment along the road.
3.6 Manningham Masterplan
This masterplan envisages improving the link between Manningham and the City Centre. It
identifies that Drewton Street and Hamm Strasse form a large physical barrier between
Manningham and the city centre. The road is large, busy road corridor, which has no active
49

frontage and is surrounded on both sides by high retaining walls and planting. The entrance
to Manningham Lane is dominated by traffic and road infrastructure, with lighting columns,
signals and signs everywhere. This entrance to Manningham Lane currently creates a
negative impression, reinforced by the characterless frontages of the shops on the corner of
Manningham Lane and Drewton Street.
The Masterplan proposes a mixed used development to replace the existing shops on this
corner to satisfy the following objectives:
• Be of a scale large enough to sit comfortably next to the vast road junction
• Relate to the city centre buildings adjacent
• Have a high quality design to raise the prominence of this gateway location into
Manningham
• Suit the distinctive character that Manningham possesses
It is also proposed to encourage positive development on derelict and disused sites on the
road frontage and improve the appearance of the existing shop and business facades.
Summary:
The Manningham Masterplan picks up on the car domination of road on the periphery of the
city centre and how this effectives not only the city centre but also the surrounding areas, like
Manningham. This domination results in an unattractive/unwelcoming pedestrian
environment, which is further reinforced by the characterless shop fronts and the derelict
sites on the road. The Masterplan suggests possible improvements, which are in line and
combined with those in the City Centre Masterplan.
3.7 Airedale Corridor Masterplan
The Airedale Partnership was established in February 2003 to provide strategic leadership
for the regeneration of Airedale. This grouping of leaders from business, education and the
community, in conjunction with Bradford Council and Yorkshire Forward, saw the need for a
strategic masterplan to deliver the aspirations of the Bradford 2020 Vision for Airedale.
The aim of the masterplan and strategy is to establish a framework that will deliver a stepchange
in the local economy that benefits local people and protects and enhances the
environment. It will advise future planning frameworks and investment plans for the Bradford
District and the wider region.
The key aspects of the brief were to establish how to deliver the Bradford 2020 Vision in
Airedale and:
• Stimulate economic growth;
• Support the development of key employment sites;
• Encourage the renaissance of the town centres;
• Promote e-business technologies;
50

• Support skill development;
• Connect local people to economic opportunity;
• Support the rural economy;
• Develop cross boundary initiatives.
Airedale masterplan has a particular role in supporting the city centre initiatives, including
transport connectivity and developments along the line of the proposed Bradford Canal that
forms a green link between Airedale, Manningham and the city centre. Integration of the
thinking behind the Airedale, Manningham and Bradford city centre masterplans will deliver
major benefits to Bradford District, and together they will help to provide the evidence base
that will shape the future Local Development Framework.
3.8 Leeds Bradford Corridor Study
The Leeds Bradford Corridor covers a nine-mile area joining Bradford and Leeds city
centres. The project aims to revitalise the neighbourhoods, employment opportunities,
environment and transport links in the corridor, connecting people living there to the growing
economies in the two cities.
The Corridor represents a key transformational project which will build on the growing
linkages between the two cities and the objectives of the Northern Way strategy to boost the
economies in the north of England. The joint working between Bradford and Leeds within the
corridor area is one part of a wider project of collaboration between the two districts.
Based on a feasibility study (Leeds-Bradford Corridor Study by WYG) completed in summer
2007, work has been underway to develop and deliver activity under the following thematic
strands:
• Employment sites and economic development
• Local connectivity and transport
• Future housing growth and affordability
• Skills and employment
Fig 10: Leeds-Bradford Corridor
An officer steering group and thematic task groups have been established, overseen by the
two portfolio holders for Bradford and Leeds. Delivery to date has included:
51

Aims:
• Business engagement event
• Business needs survey
• Employment land mapping
• Cycle network mapping
• Regional Housing Board tour
• Logistics academy bid
• Job brokerage / housing services project development
• To enhance economic development and employment opportunities that would
support existing businesses and encourage new employers to the area.
• To enhance and improve transport quality and connectivity in order to improve the
quality of transport between the two city centres and enable better connectivity to
employment and business opportunities.
• To improve housing quality and choice that is available for local people, that will
attract new households, respond to changing demand for housing and that will
support any future economic growth.
• To improve the image and appearance of the Leeds-Bradford Corridor.
West Yorkshire Metro has also commissioned Arup to undertake an in-depth consideration of
transport issues between the city centres, and this work is continuing.
Due to the early stages this partnership is in, little is known on the possible future outcomes
that may result. However, while these studies were being developed, Leeds and Bradford
councils arranged a series of practice forums (Leeds-Bradford Masterclasses) between April
and July 2008 in order to facilitate effective networking between prominent officers and
elected members in both cities and to highlight that this potential could not be realised
without deeper and wider cooperation between the two authorities.
The presentations at the seven practice forums, combined with the reflections of discussion
groups at each event, provided a significant body of evidence of thinking and practice from
around the UK. Staff from both cities had the opportunity to enhance their knowledge of key
policy areas affecting them, and draw on the experience of practitioners who had grappled
with comparable issues. Bradford and Leeds are already taking forward key learning points
from the events, both at a strategic level and in operational terms.
3.9 Bradford Trident Masterplan
Building Design Partnership and Urban Strategy Associates were commissioned by Health,
Housing and Environment Working Group of Bradford Trident to produce a masterplan to
outline a strategy for the Bradford Trident area. The Masterplan concentrates on areas
outside of the Phase 1 Masterplan area. It does not propose radical physical change but
rather it seeks to focus on key sites where change is possible and on complementary
strategies for open space, lighting and movement. Importantly the Masterplan seeks to
develop on key design principles established in the Phase 1 Masterplan and notably the
52

'Living Street' idea to promote a comprehensive approach to physical neighbourhood
renewal and inclusion throughout the Bradford Trident area.
The report sets out a number of issues the Bradford Trident area faces:
� Poor Housing Conditions
� Poor environment and lack of quality spaces
� Crime and fear of crime
� Community exclusion and a lack of confidence
These issues are important for the City Centre because the Bradford Trident area borders
the City Centre and is one of the gateways into it.
The report also undertakes an appraisal of specific areas within Bradford Trident and
produces some useful information about how areas around Bradford relate to the City
Centre.
3.10 Bradford Learning Quarter Design and Delivery Framework
Farrell and Clark Architects were commissioned by the University of Bradford to produce a
masterplan for the University campus area. The study aimed to bring together a number of
development ideas in a format that demonstrates to others the intent of the University. It
seeks to illustrate the possibility for improvements to the public realm by improving and
clarifying the spaces around buildings, improving physical links and routes and allowing the
development of landscaping where appropriate.
The study undertakes an analysis of the area, covering 11 key themes:
1. Green Spaces
2. Car Parking
3. Vehicular Circulation
4. Pedestrian Routes
5. Key Buildings/Pedestrian Space
6. Bus Routes
7. Space Use Analysis
8. Building Heights and Topography
9. Street Patterns
10. Links to College and Coty
11. Cycle Provision
The study recognises a number of issues in these key themes:
• Mixed quality green space
• Car dominance
• Inconsistent poor quality pedestrian routes
• Mixed quality public realm
53

• No direct link between bus stops and circulation routes
• Poor land use planning
• Weak links to the City Centre
The University has also produced an Estate Strategy, 2004-2014. This sets out the
University’s vision for what the campus should look like in the next 10 years (from 2004). The
strategy covers key themes of Security, Landscaping, student facilities, conference facilities
and student accommodation.
3.11 Neighbourhood Development Plan (NDP) for Barkerend, Beech Grove, Bradford
Moor, Thornbury, Woodhall and Laisterdyke.
A Neighbourhood Development Plan (NDP) was jointly commissioned with Inspired
Neighbourhoods in 2008 in order to identify how committed and future funding could be used
to best effect in East Bradford to achieve the Council’s aims of:
• Regenerating the private sector housing stock
• Rejuvenating the failing housing market
• Transforming the public realm on this key route between Bradford and Leeds
The NDP area lies within the wider Leeds Bradford Corridor; this Corridor is identified in the
Housing Strategy as having the potential for growth.
The NDP looks to address priorities for prosperity and regeneration, safer communities,
improving the environment, and strong and cohesive communities as set out in the Big Plan
2008 – 2011. The NDP also addresses objectives relating to housing quality and growth,
affordability and sustainability identified in Bradford Council’s Joint Housing Strategy 2008 -
2020
The plan identifies six key themes for action, these are:
1. Existing Housing – how to improved standards
2. New Houses – how to provide greater choice
3. Local High Streets – how to make them more successful and attractive
4. Public Space – how to support a sense of community ownership
5. Green Space – how to improve access
6. Movement – how to make it safer
A total of 28 projects are identified that sit within the six themes, these projects are designed
to deliver the key regeneration outcomes. Projects range in terms of scale; a number of
projects require significant capital investment, others relate to the provision of advice and
support to residents and householders and require no capital investment.
The scope of the NDP which includes major regeneration initiatives suggests a delivery
timescale of 10 – 15 years.
54

Delivery of the interventions and projects identified in the NDP will achieve the following key
outputs:
• Improvement to 212 homes
• Construction of 1,408 new homes
• Improvement of 3,350 linear meters of backstreets
• Creation of 1.2 ha of public open space
• Improvement to 6,000 m2 of public high streets
• Improvement to 4km walking and cycling routes
The projects and interventions identified in the NDP, should they be implemented in full,
would achieve a total inward capital investment of £191 million. In order to deliver
interventions identified as short term priorities, (up to three years) total inward capital
investment £18 million will be required.
The NDP is available online from the following website:
http://www.inspiredneighbourhoods.co.uk/index.php
A detailed description of each Project Proposal can be found in Chapter Four of the NDP.
Chapter Five provides a quantative breakdown of the Project Proposals and a costing
breakdown that identifies short term, medium term, and long term indicative costs.
3.12 Neighbourhood Development Plans for Holme Wood & Tong and Manningham
The council has commissioned two other Neighbourhood Development Plans to provide a
vision and delivery framework for regeneration and housing quality and growth in two priority
neighbourhoods-
• Holme Wood & Tong
• Manningham
The Holme Wood & Tong area sits within the Leeds Bradford Corridor which holds strategic
importance at the Leeds City Region level as well as the District level. Linking a stronger
future for the neighbourhood to the emerging Local Development Framework which
recognises Holme Wood as an area of housing and economic growth will be one of the key
aspects of the Neighbourhood Development Plan (NDP). The NDP will identify short
medium and long term intervention able to achieve the vision. The plan will also contribute
toward the local development framework’s evidence base and therefore a sustainability
assessment of the options for investment.
The Manningham areas has benefited over recent years from significant economic
intervention underpinned by the 2005 Manningham master plan and investment from the
public sector led by Yorkshire forward and CBMDC and private sector partnerships. The
Manningham Neighbourhood Development Plan will build on the Manningham’s ambition,
vibrant community and rich heritage landscape and buildings expressed in the master plan.
The Neighbourhood Development Plan will identify short, medium and long term
interventions able to support the Manningham master plan in particularly in areas of housing
55

and environment. The plan will recognise the importance of the existing housing offer in the
neighbourhood but place it in the context of existing housing offer to the West and emerging
new housing market opportunities to the East and South. The plan will establish how and
when interventions primarily in Manningham will take place building on the areas unique offer
whilst complementing opportunities that exist and will arise in neighbouring areas.
The two Neighbourhood Development Plans are expected to be completed by November
2010.
3.13 Key Facts
• The Community Strategy is a key document for Bradford District, allowing a district
level focus through a tiered partnership approach, whilst outlining 5 key ambitions
that are of note for the Bradford City Centre Area Action Plan.
• The City Centre Masterplan and Neighbourhood Development Frameworks provide
good analysis of the entire city centre and comprehensive information on specific
areas of the centre. The masterplan and NDF’s are a good launch pad for the City
Centre AAP.
• The Canal Road Master Plan identifies some keys issues surrounding one of the
main corridors into the City Centre and set out details of a major regeneration
scheme, the reopening of the Bradford Canal that could have a significant impact on
the City Centre.
• The Airedale Corridor Masterplan sets out the future regeneration of Airedale, with
the City Centre Masterplan identifying the area as a major employment corridor. The
future development of this corridor will have a major influence on the City Centre and
the masterplan identifies key transport and developments along the Bradford Canal.
• The Learning Quarter Design and Delivery Framework will play an important role to
coordinate the development and environmental investment activities happening
around the university and college area. The spatial themes identified in the framework
would also help integrate the learning quarter with the city centre and achieve the
visions of the City Centre AAP by shaping the future role and function of the land
uses in this area.
56

4.0 SOCIO-ECONOMIC APPRAISALS
This appraisal is based on the analysis of a range of data on the socio-economic
characteristics of the Bradford District. Data and statistics at the district level have been
discussed along with that of the region to make it comprehensive in relation to a wider
setting. Where appropriate/relevant information on the district or region was not available
data for the UK as a whole has been considered.
The baseline assessment of the socio-economic characteristics of the Bradford District has
largely been a desk-base exercise using published data from a range of sources including-
• A Picture of the District (Annual report on the state of the District produced by
CBMDC Research and Consultation Service in March 2007)
• The Big Plan- Sustainable Community Strategy for Bradford 2008-11(CBMDC, 2008)
• Bradford and Airedale Joint Strategic Needs Assessment (CBMDC and Bradford and
Airedale PCT, 2008)
• Economic Strategy for Bradford District 2007-2020 (CBMDC, 2007)
• Leeds Bradford Corridor Study (Genecon, King Sturge, Gillespies 2007)
• Northern Way-Leeds City Region Diagnostic
• Bradford Positioning Statement (Regeneris, 2005)
• BCR Performance Framework ( Genecon, 04/05-05/06)
4.1 Demographic Characteristics
4.1.1 Population Structure
The latest population estimate (2007) is 497,000. The
ethnic minority population in the District accounts for
22% of the total population (86% of this total is of Asian
origin). Although the age structure of the UK is getting
older, this is not the case in Bradford. A higher
proportion of the population is made up of younger age
groups than the national population. This youthful
population is responsible for a high number of births in
the District and most of the population growth the
District is experiencing.
The percentage of people under 16 years of age in the
UK fell from 25% in mid 1971 to 19% in mid 2004. In
Bradford, children accounted for 14% of the total
population in 1971. According to the latest population
estimate for the Bradford District, there are 110,000
under 16-year olds, who make up 23% of the total
population.
57

As the population pyramid below shows, there are also more people under the age of 25
than the national average. In 2004, people under the age of 25 accounted for 31.1% of the
UK’s total population. In Bradford, this figure is higher. There are 172,100 under 25-year olds
in the District - accounting for 35.8% of the total population.
Figure 1: Age and sex breakdown - Bradford District (2001 Census)
4.1.2 Population Trend
Bradford has experienced rapid population growth over recent years, generated by both
natural increases (i.e. more births than deaths in the District) and by international
immigration. Based on the 2003 ONS mid year population estimates, the Districts population
as a whole is projected to increase by approximately 4000 people per annum up to 2018 with
an estimated 15% growth among the working age group by 2017. The population projections
are based on the population growth the District appears to have experienced since 2000, and
envisage that the population of the District will grow at a similar rate over the next 25 years.
Forecasts have also shown that Bradford’s population will contain larger proportions of
younger people, and also those from BME groups. In addition the highest growth is likely to
continue in the existing deprived parts of the District.
4.1.3 Ethnicity and Religion
The ethnic structure of the Bradford population is diverse with a relatively high proportion
from South-Asian background. The City has by far the largest Asian population in the region
58

which is only second to London in England as a whole. According to the 2001 Census,
78.3% of the population living in the District have a White British heritage and 14.5% have a
Pakistani ethnic background. Approximately 3% people in the district have an Indian heritage
and 1% a Bangladeshi one. By way of contrast, the black population is very small at less
than 1% of the population. The following map highlights the strong Black Minority Ethnic
(BME) concentrations in the centre of Bradford and in Keighley.
Figure 2: Bradford District Ethnicity by Wards
Source: Bradford City Centre Pool Feasibility Study (Driver Jonas, May 2009)
34,000 children, over ¼ of all children in the District, were either born outside the UK, or live
in households whose head of household was born outside the UK, the Irish Republic or the
Old Commonwealth. The under 25-year-old population has a similar ethnic group
breakdown. 2
In terms of religious profile, Bradford has the fourth largest proportion of people (16%)
identifying themselves as Muslim after Tower Hamlets, Newham and Blackburn.
60% of the population of Bradford District identified themselves as Christian while 13% of
people across the District indicated that they did not have a religion.
1% of the people in Bradford indicated that they were Hindu. This is similar to the rates
shown in Solihull, Peterborogh and Reading. 1% of the population identified them as Sikh.
This is closest to the levels reported in Leeds, Harrow and Barking and Dagenham.
Overall the religious – and to a lesser extent ethnic group - profile of Bradford is most similar
to that in Luton.
2 BMDC Research and Consultation Service (2006). A Picture of the District. Report Dated October
2006. Research and Consultation Service, Jacobs Well. Bradford.
59

4.1.4 International Migration
There is a lack of accurate and complete data relating to the number of people moving into
Bradford from abroad. Recent analysis of migration data from a number of official sources
suggest Bradford gained approximately 5,000-7,000 international migrants during the
2005/06 period. Informal sources of information suggest the number could be between 9,000
and 15,000, a significant contribution to population growth. According to National Insurance
Number Registrations (NINo) data from the DWP, the majority of migrants come from
Pakistan (26%) and Poland (20%). The other A8 countries combined make up another 27%
of the registrations. 3
Figure 3: Number of NINo Registrations from Overseas – West Yorkshire, 2005/06
Source: West Yorkshire B&ME Housing Market Study (Ecotec, 2007)
From the regional pint of view, the majority of economic migrants arriving in West Yorkshire
register for National Insurance numbers in Leeds and Bradford and 'A8' migrants now tend to
be the largest group. However, as Figure 3 indicates there is a considerable degree of
variation across the sub-region: In 2005/06 'A8' migrants accounted for around 64% of all
migrants in Wakefield; 60% in Calderdale; 48% in Bradford; 39% in Leeds; and 34% in
Kirklees. It is not possible to track precisely where these migrants are living but anecdotal
evidence suggests that the highest concentrations tend to be in lower value areas, almost
exclusively in private rented accommodation. 4
A recent study 5 conducted by a local working group has highlighted that the newly arrived
central and eastern European migrant in Bradford have been settling largely in five main
areas of the district, namely in Leeds Road, Great Horton Road, Girlington, Manningham and
West Bowling. Typically these are areas of cheap housing and have a history of migrant
populations. In Girlington alone there are unofficial estimates suggesting that an influx of
3 Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council (2007). Economic Strategy for Bradford District
2007-2020. Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council.
4 Ecotec (2007). West Yorkshire B&ME Housing Market Study. Report published in April 2007.
5 Bradford Central and Eastern European Working Group (2006). A8 Migration in Bradford: A
Template for Action. Report published in January 2006.
60

approximately 200 families have moved into the area (the core of Girlington has around 3500
households).
However, the impact of international migration on the total population of the district is
dampened by rates of migration from the district to other parts of the UK. The level of out
migration to other parts of the UK reduces the impact of international migration on the total
population figure for the district. Between 2008 and 2009 Bradford experienced a loss of
2,700 people through migration to locations in this country. Similar levels have been
experienced in the past and are expected to continue, which nearly cancels out the whole
population gain through international migration. Between July 2008 and 2009, Bradford’s
total net migration gain was 1,300. However, despite this minimal effect on total population
numbers, international migration has, and will continue to have, a dramatic effect on the
composition of the district’s population. 6
Most of the A8 migrants are in Bradford to work and create a new life for themselves and
their families. Migrants from Poland are often single men or women, although the number of
polish families is increasing and include polish people of Roma origin. Czech and Slovak
migrants (many of Gypsy/Roma origin) are often larger family groups usually with extended
families of parents, young teenagers, small children and babies.
The report also gives an indication of some of the acute issues faced by the migrants once
they arrive in the district-
• Health- access to GPs and hospital services.
• Housings- overcrowding, poor standard of accommodations, high rents.
• Education- lack of English, communication barriers, getting children into school.
• Employment- language barriers, exploitative labour.
• Knowledge of rights and entitlements.
Asylum seekers and refugees
Figure 4 below maps numbers of asylum seekers across the sub-region by parliamentary
constituency, clearly illustrating the high number of asylum seekers concentrated in those
areas of the sub-region with large established B&ME populations. The highest
concentrations are in inner urban areas of Leeds, Bradford and Huddersfield, and there are
also small but locally significant asylum seeker populations in Halifax and Wakefield.
However, and despite there being sizeable established B&ME communities in these areas,
Dewsbury (in Kirklees) and Keighley (in Bradford) are notable for not having high numbers of
asylum seekers, possibly a conscious decision given community cohesion issues. There is
an arc of neighbourhoods running from Hemsworth (in Wakefield); through Elmet; across
northern areas of Leeds and Bradford; and ending in the Calder Valley, where asylum
seekers are not represented.
6 Bradford Joint Strategic Needs Assessment 2010-11
61

Figure 4: NASS, Asylum Seekers by WY Local Authority and Parliamentary Constituency, June 2006
Source: West Yorkshire B&ME Housing Market Study (Ecotec, 2007)
The number of asylum seekers in West Yorkshire in June 2006 was around 3,830. West
Yorkshire accounts for well over half of Yorkshire and the Humber's asylum seeker
population, and nearly one tenth of the UK total. Overall, Leeds (1,800) has the highest
number of asylum seekers, followed by Bradford (755), Kirklees (710), Wakefield (335) and
Calderdale (230). The Constituencies of Leeds Central (745), Leeds East (535), Bradford
West (495) and Huddersfield (490) have the highest numbers of resident asylum seekers.
There are also likely to be a relatively small number of unaccompanied asylum seeking
children in the sub-region, not recorded by this data.
4.2 Deprivation Indices
A key characteristic of Bradford District is a significant variation in the levels of deprivation,
both between Bradford and other areas and between different neighbourhoods and
communities within the district. There is a clear link between deprivation and differing
experiences of health and wellbeing which presents Bradford District with the challenge of
narrowing this gap in experience.
In 2007, Communities and Local Government published the “Indices of Multiple Deprivation
2007” (IMD 2007), which are a means of measuring levels of deprivation in areas of England.
The Index assesses deprivation by seven different ‘domains’ and provides an overall
deprivation score for small geographical areas, known as ‘Lower Super Output Areas’.
Summary measures of the IMD 2007 are also produced at Local Authority District Level.
Bradford ranks 32nd (out of 354) in the Department for Communities and Local Government
(DCLG, now CLG) Index of Multiple Deprivation (2007). This places it squarely in the most
deprived 10% of local authorities nationally. Its position is worse than other West Yorkshire
authorities:
62

Table 1: Rank of Average IMD Scoreby LA (West Yorkshire)
LA Name Rank of Average Score (ID 2007)
Bradford 32
Wakefield 66
Kirkless 82
Leeds 85
Calderdale 107
Source: Neighbourhood Statistics
Some 42% of people in Bradford district live in the 20% most deprived areas of the country
and 5% (over 20,000 people) in the 1% most deprived.
The following map shows how the SOAs rank in a Bradford context. This enables a clearer
picture of where deprivation is most deep seated as well as giving a better indication of the
relatively less deprived areas in the District. It can be seen that a picture of a north/south
divide emerges, with a relative lack of deprivation in the north with deprivation concentrated
in the city of Bradford itself, notably in the inner city areas and the peripheral estates.
Figure 5: IMD 2207- Rank of overall score of Bradford LSOAs
Looking at individual aspects of deprivation, Bradford ranks 4th and 6th nationally for income
and employment deprivation respectively (IMD data). More than 32,000 people
experienced income deprivation in the Bradford District.
Nearly 3 in 10 Bradford LSOAs fell into the 10% most income deprived in England. This
amounts to 90 Bradford LSOAs, where typically at least 34% of the population were on very
low incomes. This rose to 75% of people in the most deprived area of Undercliffe.
63

Some 16% of Bradford’s LSOAs are in the 10% most employment deprived nationally. In
these 49 LSOAs typically 1 in 5 (19%) of the population are claiming key benefits such as
Job Seekers Allowance (JSA), Incapacity Benefit, (IB), Severe Disablement Allowance,
(SDA) or are on New Deal programmes. An area of Little Horton ward (ranked 69th
nationally) was the most employment deprived in the District, where 39% of its population are
on benefits. 7
The recent Regional Trends report 8 , published by the Office of National Statistics, also
reflects the outcome of the IMD 2007. According to the Regional Trends report Bradford is
one of the most deprived cities in the Yorkshire and Humber region with 41% of the areas
across the district among the most deprived in the country. The only place with more pockets
of deprivation in the Region is Hull. By contrast only 11% of the Bradford district is in the
least-deprived bracket.
Some of the places struggling most are in inner city areas including Bowling and Little Horton
and areas of Shipley and Keighley.
Deprivation is measured in the Regional Trends report by factors including low income,
unemployment, lack of education, poor health and crime. There isn’t one factor which drags
Bradford down overall, it has fairly high levels of deprivation for most of these factors.
Bradford also seems quite polarised. Barnsley and Wakefield, for example, have fewer
areas in the most deprived bracket than Bradford, but also fewer areas in the least deprived
bracket, and more in the middle. Most of the actual city of Bradford has high levels of
deprivation, and so does Keighley. Other areas to the north of the city centre, but still within
the local authority, such as Baildon, Bingley and Ilkley, have less deprivation.
4.3 Education and Skills
The skills of the population are central to the economic success and the competitiveness of a
locality. But in Bradford, skill levels in the workforce is relatively low which could act as a
constraint on the economy and prevent Bradford from taking advantage of its comparative
advantages with the neighbouring areas, especially low land values and office rental values.
4.3.1 Qualifications
Around 162,100 people of working age in Bradford are qualified to at least NVQ level 2.
While this has increased significantly over the past 5 years, Bradford still lags behind
regional and national averages. Bradford also has the highest proportion of people without
any qualifications among all West Yorkshire Districts. 9 Further, Bradford has the lowest
7 Bradford and Airedale Joint Strategic Needs Assessment (2009)
8 Office of National Statistics (2009) Regional Trends No 41. London: ONS.
9 Yorkshire Forward (2009) Bradford in Brief November 2006 [online]. Yorkshire Forward [accessed
20 th April 2009] < http://www.yorkshirefutures.com/cb.aspx?page=CC6934FF-85FD-4341-B2C3-
DB0804E8E103 >
64

incidence of employers providing training to their workforce. This indicates that the district is
likely to find it harder to increase productivity. 10
Table 2: Proportion of working age population qualified to NVQ level at 2006
Working age population: men aged 15 to 64 years & women aged 15 to 59 years
The skill level of Bradford residents varies significantly across the district. In some wards, for
example, a typical inner city ward like Little Horton, over half of all adults are without any
qualifications (or have qualifications whose level is not known), whereas Rombalds as a
typical affluent ward has far greater proportions (37%) of adults with higher level
qualifications.
4.3.2 GCSE Attainment
According to the following figure, only 46% of 16 years old in Bradford achieved the threshold
of 5 GCSEs grade A* - C, 10% below the England average of 56%. However, between 2005
and 2006 the proportion of Year 11 pupils gaining five GCSE grades A*-C (the equivalent of
NVQ level 2) in the District increased from 46.8% to 50.2% thus continuing to reduce the gap
between the local and national average pass rates. 11
Figure 6: GCSE and Equivalent - Percent of Pupils Gaining 5 A* - C 2004/05
60%
50%
40%
30%
20%
10%
0%
56% 55%
Source: DfES, in Your Area.
51%
49%
10 Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council (2007). Economic Strategy for Bradford
District 2007-2020. Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council.
8 Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council (2007). Economic Strategy for Bradford District
2007-2020. Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council.
46%
51%
Wakefield Calderdale Kirkless Leeds Bradford Y&H England
56%
65

From 2006 the DfES’s preferred measure of attainment at GCSE level is five passes grade
A*-C including English and Maths. On this measure, the gap between the District pass rate
and the national rate is considerably wider at 34% (Bradford) compared with 45.8%
(England) - although the gap has reduced since 2004.
Figure 7: % of 15 year old students achieving 5 or more A*-C GCSEs including English and Maths
4.3.3 Further & Higher Education
The proportion of Year 11 pupils staying on in full-time education has increased in Bradford
from 64.7% in 2004 to 73.1% in 2006. This is higher than the average for West Yorkshire
(72.9%) and similar to Yorkshire & Humber levels (73.4%), but still falls short of the national
figure (77.9%). 12
Nearly 52% of Bradford’s Year 13 pupils moved into higher education in 2006. In 2005/06
there were over 13,000 students studying at Bradford University. The University has around
140 degree courses at undergraduate level and around 80 at postgraduate level. These are
spread across the 7 Academic Schools of Engineering, Design and Technology, Health
Studies, Informatics, Life Sciences (including Archaeological, Geographical and
Environmental Sciences), Management, Social and International Studies, and the School of
Lifelong Education and Development, which also offers part-time courses.
The University also has an excellent graduate employment record, and was rated 2nd out of
99 UK Universities for employment in The Times Good University Guide 2006 and ranked
number 1 for employment in the North of England.
However, according to the Complete University Guide 2010 13 (based on data from the
2007/08 academic year), Bradford’s graduate prospects score has fell from 73.9, the best in
12 Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council (2007). Economic Strategy for Bradford
District 2007-2020. Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council.
13 The complete University Guide (2009) University League Table 2010 [online].
66

Yorkshire last year, to 70.4 – a trend only replicated in the region at York University and the
University has slipped eight places to 57th in a national higher education league table.
Students graduating with good degrees however rose by the third highest margin in
Yorkshire and Humber and it keeps its place as fifth best out of the nine universities in the
region, ahead of Sheffield Hallam but below Hull.
Despite its lower research score, the guide recognised that Bradford has several areas of
world-class research including in peace studies, polymers, mechanical engineering, medical
biosciences and archaeological science.
The guide reports that the university has more than 1,500 computer workstations across the
campus, 500 more than last year, while the main library contains more than 600,000 books,
up 20 per cent in 12 months.
The University received four applications per place during the past academic year, down
from seven last year. Its male/female student ratio is 49:51, state/private school ratio 96:4
and home/international ratio 84:16.
A study conducted by DTZ on the City Centre Housing Market has highlighted that Bradford
has relatively low level of graduate retention when compared to other cities although over
half of the city centre residents they surveyed possess qualifications at or higher than a first
degree/HND/GNVQ or equivalent. A separate report by the UoB Career Development
Services (2006) also shows that only 38% of the students graduated from Bradford
University in 2004/05 retained within Bradford.
4.4 Economic Activity
4.4.1 Economic Trends
Bradford has experienced economic growth in recent years but is underperforming generally
when compared to the national picture and to other districts in the region. Large falls in
traditional manufacturing employment have negated the impact of respectable service sector
growth. Despite these falls in manufacturing employment, Bradford has still a larger
proportion of people employed in these sectors (18.3%) than the Region (15.8%) and the UK
as a whole (12.6%). 14
In June 2009, the claimant unemployment count in Bradford district was 15,620, up by nearly
6,300 since June 2008, when unemployment levels began rising significantly, and is now at
its highest level for almost 12 years. The district’s claimant rate stands at 5.1% of the working
age population, compared to the Yorkshire & Humber regional rate of 4.7%, and the national
rate of 4.1%.
Probably a more comprehensive measure of economic well being in the District is The Index
of Multiple Deprivation 2007, which takes a measure of deprivation based on multiple
14 CBMDC (2007) Core Strategy Issues and Options Topic Paper 4: Economy and Jobs. CBMDC.
67

indicators. Overall Bradford is the 4th most deprived local authority on income deprivation
and the 6th most deprived on employment deprivation. Over 190000 people, 42% of the
District’s population live in wards that fall within 20% most deprived areas of the country and
5% (over 20,000 people) in the 1% most deprived.
It is not just the inner city areas which suffer from deprivation, the rural economies within the
Leeds City Region, including Bradford, face particular challenges, predominately as a result
of poor physical connectivity. Agriculture and farming have declined in recent years, there
been pockets of severe deprivation and social exclusion with problems of housing
affordability and poor access to services, and some places displaying significant disparities in
wealth together with low business survival rates.
Most of these general trends are not unique to Bradford and are characteristic of many
northern cities, but the data does suggest many of these problems are more prevalent in
Bradford. However the key points emerging from the analysis is that
• Bradford has a larger than average proportion of workers employed in the declining
traditional manufacturing sectors.
• It has relatively high levels of unemployment.
• Nationally in terms of key indicators it is one of the most deprived areas in the
country with particularly high spatial concentrations of deprivation
Tourism is an often overlooked contributor to the economy and the Good Practice Guide for
Tourism (May 2006) stresses the vital importance of tourism both to national and local
economies. For example tourism nationally contributes 74 billion to GDP therefore
accounting for 6.4% of the UK’s total GDP. At the local level the guide says that Tourism can
be the focus of regeneration of urban and rural areas and provide a catalyst for growth. It
can also provide opportunities for re-training the resident workforce and diversify economies
that are over reliant on a fairly narrow base of industries.
4.4.2 Location of Employment Activities: Regional Context
The growth sectors of the economy are changing and these new growth sectors have
different locational requirements to the older manufacturing sectors. Bradford has a larger
proportion of workers employed in the sectors that are expected to decline in the next 10 to
15 years particularly in the traditional manufacturing sectors.
The Leeds City Reion Development Programme (LCC, 2006) has highlighted that if the
prosperity of the Region is to be increased there is a need to provide land that is locationally
attractive for the new growth sectors so to try and increase the proportion of the district’s
workers employed in these growth sectors. Forecasts by Arups and Experian show that the
main growth areas in terms of employment are in the financial and business services, public
admin, health and education, sectors that are mainly office based.
The RSS states (Policy E3) that significant land should be provided in sustainable locations
to meet the needs of the modern economy and they should be in locations well served by
68

public transport links. However many sites that have been identified in the Replacement UDP
have not been taken up for development and are not in locations suitable for the growing
business sectors. Furthermore (Policy E2) that states that existing City and Town Centres
should be the main location for office uses.
4.4.3 Bradford Employment Land Review and Forecast
The Council commissioned ARUPS to carry out the study in late summer 2007 and the report
was delivered in December of that year. ARUPS were supplied with and assessed the
employment land supply portfolio in the Council’s monitoring systems, mainly current RUDP
allocations together with the sites previously considered in the draft RUDP and any windfall
planning permissions which were granted between 2002 and 2007. All of these sites were
assessed against a range of criteria to determine their suitability for inclusion in the future
supply, focusing on site constraints, deliverability, market attractiveness and availability in the
short medium or longer term. The study also assessed Bradford’s current market
performance for both the office and industrial sectors and looked at future strategies for
improving economic performance.
Current situation
In profiling Bradford District it regards the main asset as being the Districts role within the city
region and its relationship with Leeds. It focuses on the growing working age population
seeing this as positive opportunity to avail of employment opportunities in the Districts growth
sectors. It describes Bradford as having a strong economic base in the M606 and canal road
corridors with potential for growth along Airedale in the towns of Shipley, Bingley and
Keighley. It only pays passing regard to Wharfedale. It recognises the potential links of the
extended M606 corridor and to the north with Skipton, the potential for a growth in the small
businesses in the Leeds Bradford corridor. The report describes the economic shortfalls
within the District making general regional comparisons. The District has lower employment
rates, higher rates of youth employment, has a low wage low skill economy and lower than
average earnings. The existing large and small businesses come from a broad range of
sectors and they continue to perform well. The largest are located within Bradford’s urban
area but there is a noticeable absence within the central business district. There is strong
growth in SME’s and business start-ups compared to the rest of the region and this bears
well for future growth.
The property market is analysed using PROMIS data in terms of availability or otherwise. It
sees the office market in Bradford as underperforming with only a small offer of modern
stock. It suggests that there is considerable scope for new grade ‘A’ accommodation and
that this would be let. Shipley, Saltaire and Baildon perform weakly but proposed new
developments in Shipley can transform this image. Bingley has the building society and a
number of office premises in business parks. Development of Coolgardie and the auction
market sites could increase demand. In Keighley the majority of existing office available
accommodation is found in poor quality space above retail premises or converted mill
buildings and Devonshire Street is regarded as the hub of the office market. Similarly, in
69

Ilkley the offer is limited largely to local professional services in the town centre and future
demand is likely to be low.
The existing industrial market is described as being generally outdated with very little new
build in recent years. There has been little change across the market. Current availability is
256,000 sq m which is about 5% of total stock. This is below general averages. Demand for
space is for units of 25000 to 50000 sq ft. Premises are generally cheaper than national
averages. The M606 corridor is the key to new demand, sites on the western side of the city
are not attractive and the Bowling Back Lane area is the centre for ‘dirty’ uses. Industrial
accommodation in Shipley is focused around a select number of business parks and
industrial estates as well as smaller older units in and around the town but the construction of
the Shipley Eastern Bypass may unlock new development potential. Shipley is a clear
candidate for the delivery of the Advance Digital Institute and market. In Bingley town centre
industrial premises are largely confined to old mill building but there are a number of
industrial parks dispersed around the periphery. The key locations for future development
are at Coolgardie and the A650 corridor. Bingley and the proposed technology park will
provide a degree of complimentary business to Shipley and if this is delivered demand will be
good. Demand for industrial premises in Keighley is strong and the market comprises a
multitude of accommodation from light industrial to high quality warehouse distribution
premises and rents vary widely. However industrial land has developed sporadically and
around individual requirements over a long time horizon. The result is a substantial amount
of poor second hand stock part vacant and in disrepair. It appears there is too much old
second hand and not enough modern accommodation. Ilkley has minimal accommodation,
site having been developed for higher value uses. In general terms for the district 1, there is
an over supply of poor quality stock, 2, the older spatial distribution does not meet modern
markets or occupiers, 3, there is currently no central business district focus and 4, there is
inadequate provision of large industrial sites in the right locations to meet emerging demand
in both B2 and B8 requirements.
The current estimated supply of allocated undeveloped employment land is 150.5 ha. This
comprises 28 sites under 1ha, 24 sites between 1 and 5ha and 7 sites over 5ha. Of these, a
total of 26.47ha have an extant consent for employment uses whilst planning applications are
currently pending on a further 36.37ha. This would leave approximately 88ha of land
available but without planning backing. Historically the main take up of employment land has
been focused on constituencies Bradford North and Bradford South. Keighley has the 3 rd
largest rate of take up. The average rate of take up across the district over the last 10 years
has been 14.6ha although it has been characterised by peaks and troughs. The constraints
associated with the employment land supply relate to the lack of variety of sites with a
predominance of smaller sites under 5ha, poor quality sites with problems of contamination
and poor access. The current supply can be characterised as infill or expansion sites with
the exception of a few strategic sites. The nature of the supply therefore does not meet
modern business demands.
70

Future Change
Bradford has aspirations for transformational change and strategic economic growth. The
RSS and the Economic Strategies recognise significant opportunity to expand sectors of the
knowledge industry. Under an unconstrained growth forecasting model, continued economic
growth and job creation is envisaged in the business, professional and service sectors with
the financial and business services sector to grow by over 11%. Economic policy also
recognises the role of emerging sectors including design and technology, digital media,
construction, education and health with links to Bradford University. There is also projected
growth in retail, leisure and catering whilst forecasts show a decline in primary utilities and
other public services sectors. Statistics show a strong business start-up economy and
SME’s and Bradford needs to maintain the infrastructure to sustain this success. The result
means that there will need to be a supply of high quality sites for high density office based
uses. There will also be a need for sufficient land in particular locations which will enable the
co location of businesses which is important to establish growth clusters, incubator units and
innovation centres. Bradford’s traditional manufacturing base will still account for a
significant proportion of the districts employment and therefore there will still be a need for a
portfolio of low quality, low value sites to meet the demands of the manufacturing and
industrial sector.
The spatial focus for new development is in urban areas and main settlements. Any new
employment strategy will need to consider how outlying settlements contribute to meeting
need, with perhaps sustainable sites in Esholt, Silsden and Steeton. The Priority
Regeneration areas such as Canal road corridor will need to evaluate the displacement of
the older industrial fabric and the implications for maintaining supply of employment land to
support regeneration principles.
An analysis of future demand for employment land is based on various modelling techniques
and growth scenarios. The Employment Land Monitoring Returns Model has limitations but
is useful in that it shows trends on a financial yearly basis and informs understanding
regarding geographic interest. It shows which areas business and industry has considered
to be the right location for employment in the past. In this respect the winners were Bradford
North, Bradford South and Keighley. Commercial and Industrial Floorspace and Rateable
Value Statistics (ODPM 2005) help to differentiate between Use Classes and data can be
extrapolated to 2016. Historic trends show a reduction in demand of all employment land
uses up to 2016. However this does not take account of economic growth modelling and the
delivery of regeneration schemes. The Experian Regional Econometric Model is the data
source used for the final quantitative employment projection and two economic scenarios
have been applied to the data used for this study. These are 1, unrestrained growth which
forecasts 25901 jobs and 2, constrained growth which forecasts a 32% reduction in output.
Based on the two growth scenarios, the projected land requirement for the district between
2016 and 2021 is between 214ha and 148 ha. This includes:
B1a = 40ha to 30ha
B1b and c/B2 = 100ha to 68ha
B8 = 74ha to 50ha.
71

Future Strategy
The Review seeks to match demand and supply as well as make recommendations on the
strategic role of settlements to bring forward a flexible, varied and quality supply of
employment land. Given that there has been some take up from the base figure in April
2006, the residual projected demand is 129ha for constrained growth and 195ha for
unconstrained growth. The review of the existing allocated sites recommends that 127ha are
retained as allocated sites and 11ha are reconsidered while 13ha are de-allocated for other
uses. When supply is measured against supply, in an unconstrained growth scenario there
is need for a further 51.36ha of land. In a constrained growth scenario, there is an over
supply of 14.64ha. The residual demand for the unconstrained growth scenario is likely to be
for B2 uses.
From a spatial viewpoint, Bradford City Centre will meet approximately half of the projected
demand for B1a uses. Bradford South along the M606 should be the pipeline for future B2
and B8 uses although the projected demand for B8 will be provided by West Bowling Golf
Course. Bradford West can still supply smaller sites for local demand B2 and B8 uses.
Bowling Back Lane and Canal road are the main drivers in Bradford North constituency.
Shipley is dependant on major interventions through infrastructure schemes. Bingley can
avail of the Technology Park and its associated clusters. Proactive intervention is needed in
Keighley to enable strategic sites to come forward whilst Steeton and Silsden should provide
for a local sustainable market. Similarly Ilkley and Burley can accommodate local demand
and also provide for high quality new start up space.
4.4.4 Protecting Existing Employment Land and Buildings
The Replacement UDP has sought to protect existing employment buildings and sites from
being redeveloped for other uses in order to minimise the allocations of new land in the
District. It has also tried to ensure that existing employment land and buildings are reused
for employment where they are still fit for purpose.
Existing brownfield employment sites are coming under increasing pressure to be
redeveloped for other uses than employment. The RSS considers that opportunities to
redevelop older industrial areas for housing should be exploited and PPS3 states that
additional housing schemes should be supported in industrial areas no longer suitable for
continuing employment use. The LDF will therefore need to review both the extent, and
where it protects existing industrial areas from being developed for uses other than
employment.
Employment Land Forecasts suggest that less land overall is needed for employment in the
District and the land is needed in different locations. We may be therefore protecting land
and buildings that are now not either required, or in suitable locations for employment uses.
72

4.4.5 Rural Diversification
The District being two thirds rural it has a significant rural economy. This has undergone
major changes in recent years. Farmers are facing many challenges following BSE, foot &
mouth disease and the reform of the European Agricultural Policy. In response many farmers
are looking at new ways of generating income by diversifying into alternative enterprises
outside of their mainstream agricultural activities. The landscape of the District is important
to the quality of place for those living and working in the district therefore any change needs
to be managed sensitively.
4.5 Employment and Earnings
4.5.1 Economic Activity rates
Economic activity rates, together with rates of pay from employment, are critical factors in the
wellbeing of the local population and are inextricably connected with the economic welfare of
the district as a whole. They also underlie inequalities and relative deprivation across the
district.
Bradford has a lower proportion of economically active residents than Y+H and the country
as a whole. In 2006/7 73.9% of all working age residents in the District were economically
active. This compares to 78.5% nationally and 77.6% in Yorkshire and the Humber (Y+H).
Table 4: Economically Active and Inactive (Oct 2006- Sept 2007)
Source: Nomis web.co.uk
There are some differences in the types of employment available in Bradford compared to
Y+H and GB. For example, we have a lower proportion of professional occupations, a slightly
higher proportion of personal service occupations and a higher proportion of plant and
process machine operatives. (B+A Str Needs Assessment)
73

4.5.2 Employment rates
Latest data from the
ONS Annual Population
Survey shows that
208,800 working age
residents in Bradford
District were in
employment over the
period January to
December 2007, giving
an employment rate for
the District of 68.5%.
This rate is significantly
below the regional
(73.2%) and national
(74.3%) averages.
Although Bradford’s employment rate is relatively low, the number of Bradford residents in
employment has increased significantly over recent years from 200,700 (January to
December 2005) to 208,800 (January to December 2007), however, the District’s working
age population grew at a faster rate over the same period resulting in a fall in the
employment rate from 69.9% to 68.5%.
The decline experienced in employment rates in Bradford, over the years 2005 to 2007,
reflects similar downward trends in the Yorkshire and the Humber region, however, over the
same period the employment rate for the UK has remained fairly static. 15
4.5.3 Occupation Profile
38% of Bradford residents are employed in higher level occupations - Managers & Senior
Professional and Associate Professional & Technical occupations.
Table 5: Employment By Occupation Group
Figure 8: Working age employment rates 2007
15 Bradford Economy (2008) Employment Rates [online]. CBMDC [accessed 20 th July 2009].
.
74

GB
Y&H
Bradford
Figure Chart 09: 7: Employment by occupation by occupation
0% 10% 20% 30% 40% 50% 60% 70% 80% 90% 100%
4.5.4 Self-Employment
Self-employment can be
used as a measure of
entrepreneurial activity in
an area. The latest
Annual Population Survey
shows the rate of selfemployment
in Bradford is
11%. This rate has
fluctuated over the
previous two years and
has fallen just below the
regional average. 16
Managers & senior officials Professional occupations Associate professional & technical
Administrative & secretarial occs. Skilled trades occupations Personal service occupations
Sales & customer services occs. Process plant & machine operatives Elementary occupations
Bradford has been highlighted as an entrepreneurial District. Acxiom Household Lifestyle
Survey 2006 data revealed that 4.8% of households have an adult thinking of starting a
business; this is higher than sub-regional and regional figures.
4.5.5 Earnings & Income
Figure 10 : Self-employment Percentage in Employment
According to the Annual Survey for Hours & Earnings (ASHE) April 2007 data, Bradford
residents in full time employment earn on average £381.50 per week, compared to £425
regionally and £459 nationally. Between 2004 and 2007, median earnings for Bradford
residents rose by 7.5%, but this was lower than the regional and national increase. Male full-
16 Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council (2007). Economic Strategy for Bradford
District 2007-2020. Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council.
75

time earnings, however, are increasing significantly and at a faster rate than regional and
national average. 17
Table 5: Earnings 2007
Source: Nomis web.co.uk
The average gross household income
(including income from investments and
benefits) in the District was estimated at
£30,700 in 2007 (CACI Ltd). This is close to
the average for the Yorkshire and Humber
region, but lower than the national average
of £33,700.
The mean income figure masks the wide
variation in household incomes across the
District. According to statistics updated in
2007, nearly 15% of households in Bradford
have an average income of £50,000 or
17 Bradford Economy (2008) Average Earnings [online]. CBMDC [accessed 20 th July 2009].
< http://bradfordeconomy.com/facts_and_figures/people/average_earnings >.
76

more. Wharfedale and Ilkley Wards have
the highest average household incomes at
over £40,000. In these Wards, over 30% of
the households respectively have an
average household income in excess of
£50,000.
Conversely, inner city wards e.g. Little
Horton ward has the lowest average
household income at around £22,000 and
only 4% of households in the ward has
household incomes above £50,000. Such
disparities in wealth across the District do not
appear to be reducing.
4.5.6 Unemployment and Worklessness
The Strategic Engagement Team of the Council’s Economic Development Service produces
monthly unemployment updates with figures from the Office of National Statistics, Jobcentre
plus and other relevant sources. The following discussions highlight the latest unemployment
situation in Bradford District as published in the July 2009 bulletin which could be accessed
online at
http://bradfordeconomy.com/facts_and_figures/people/monthly_unemployment_updateUnem
ployment
Unemployment Trend
The unemployment rate in Bradford fell rapidly in previous years before the ongoing
recession affected the economy, but the more recent figures published in July 2009 show
that unemployment is increasing again in Bradford, despite a regional and national decline in
claimants since May 2009.
Table 6 : Monthly and annual change in claimant rates
Area
Claimants
June 2009
Monthly Change
(Apr 09-May 09)
Monthly Change
(May 09 - Jun 09)
Annual Change
(Jun 08 - Jun 09)
No Rate No % No % No %
Bradford 15,620 5.1 180 1.2 104 0.7 6,266 67.0
Leeds City Region 82,559 4.5 1,072 1.3 -305 -0.4 38,983 89.5
Yorkshire & Humber 152,746 4.7 1,433 0.9 -836 -0.5 71,919 89.0
United Kingdom 1,553,256 4.1 7,362 0.5 -11,722 -0.7 717,939 85.9
Source: Monthly unemployment updates June 2009 and July 2009
Figure 11: Income Distribution across the District (2005)
Source: CACI Paycheck Data 2005
In June 2009, the claimant unemployment count in Bradford district was 15,620, up by nearly
6,300 since June 2008, when unemployment levels began rising significantly, and is now at
its highest level for almost 12 years. The district’s claimant rate stands at 5.1% of the working
77

age population, compared to the Yorkshire & Humber regional rate of 4.7%, and the national
rate of 4.1%.
Figure 11: Claimant rate Trends- May 2008 to May 2009
Sources: Jobcentre Plus data, Nomis
The number of claimants in
Bradford increased by 104,
or 0.7%, over the month.
While this goes against a
drop in claimant numbers
regionally and nationally,
this increase represents the
smallest monthly rise than
has been seen over the last
year and Bradford’s overall
growth in unemployment
over the last 12 months has
been slower than regionally
and nationally.
Youth unemployment (aged 18-24)
There are currently 4,550 young claimants aged 18-24 (29.2% of all claimants) and this has
dropped slightly since May 2009. The number of youth claimants has increased by 58.6%
since June 2008, but they make up a lower proportion of the total claimants than last year.
The biggest percentage increases in claimants have been in the older age groups.
Youth unemployment is a growing concern nationally and locally. 8.5% of all 18-24 year olds
are claiming, and this is a higher rate than for the other age band. However, Bradford
compares with the regional rate (8.5%) and is below the national rate (7.7%) for youth
claimants. Further analysis is expected to be undertaken to better understand the issue of
Youth Unemployment in Bradford, and this will be published shortly.
Long-term claimants (over 12 months)
People who have claimed for 12 months or more are classed as long term unemployed –
there are 1,300 long term claimants in Bradford, which is 8.3% of all claimants. Due to high
on-flows over recent months, the largest (and most quickly growing) are those who have
claimed for less than a year. However, after a period of decline, the number of long term
claimants has been rising steadily since September 2008 and may continue to rise through
the recession.
Usual occupation
In June 2009 the majority of claimants (39.8%) stated their usual occupation as Elementary.
However, since June 2008 the occupation profile of claimants has shifted slightly.
78

Figure 12: Proportion of Claimants by Usual Occupation
A greater proportion of
claimants are from Skilled
Trades (increased by
133% since last year).
The increasing number of
construction workers
signing on is a key
indicator of local
economic conditions.
While numbers from
higher-level occupations
(managerial, professional
and technical) are still
Source: Jobcentre Plus data, Nomis
relatively small, the
proportion of claimants from these occupations has increased from 8.9% to 10.4% over the
last 12 months.
Constituencies and wards
Geographical analysis of claimant rates at ward level shows that unemployment is most
highly concentrated around the inner city areas within Bowling and Berkerend (8.1%), Tong
(8.0%), Little Horton (7.9%) and Manningham (7.9%). Hot spots also occur in Keighley
South, and Shipley East, which have unemployment rates above the district average. The
lowest unemployment is found in Wharfdale (1.6%) and Ilkley (1.8%) to the north of the
District.
Table 7: Claimant rates by Parliamentary Constituency
Parliamentary Constituency Claimants June 2009 Annual Change (June 08- June 09)
Number Rate Number % Change % Point Change
Bradford North 3,711 6.3 1,291 53.3 2.2
Bradford South 3,507 5.7 1,638 87.6 2.7
Bradford west 3,993 5.7 1,235 44.8 1.8
Keighley 2,222 4.0 978 78.6 1.8
Shipley 2,187 3.9 1,124 105.7 2.0
Source: Jobcentre Plus data, Nomis
In terms of electoral constituencies, Bradford North has the highest claimant rate (6.3%) and
Shipley Constituency has the lowest (3.9%). Bradford South has experienced the greatest
rise in the number of claimants over the year and the largest percentage point increase in its
claimant rate.
When looking at changes in unemployment rates in small areas it is advisable to calculate
percentage point changes. Table below contains these percentage point changes and shows
79

that the most significant increases in claimant rates over the last year have occurred in Tong
and Royds wards. Bowling & Barkerend, Windhill & Wrose, Keighley Central and Wyke have
also experienced a significant increase in claimant rates. Conversely, City, Heaton,
Manningham and Toller wards have experienced a lower than average increase in claimant
rate over the last year.
Table 8 : Claimant rates by Ward
Even at ward level, small pockets of unemployment can be hidden. The following map
presents claimant rates at Super Output Area (SOA) level. The district is split into 306 SOAs,
with between 9 and 12 in each ward. Rates have been estimated using ONS Mid-2007
working age population estimates for lower SOAs.
There are pockets of very high claimant rates (over 14%) in Holmewood, Barkerend, Little
Horton and Aireworth in Keighley.
80

Figure 13: Bradford JSA claimant rates by SOA
Source: Monthly Unemployment Updates (July 2009)
Vacancies
There were 1,481 live unfilled vacancies
registered at Bradford’s Jobcentre Plus
offices in June 2009. While this
number is significantly lower than at the
same time last year, vacancy numbers
have risen slightly since the beginning of
the year.
In June 2009 there was an average of
10 claimants for every live vacancy,
compared to 3 per vacancy 12 months
ago.
Figure 14: The Number of Unfilled Vacancies at
Bradford Jobcentre Plus Offices
Source: Jobcentre Plus data, Nomis
Jobcentre Plus does not list all vacancies in the economy. National research suggested that
between a third and half of all vacancies are listed by Jobcentre Plus, with a bias towards
lower-level jobs (Source: Labour Market Trends - July 2003, pp 349 – 362), but this will vary
over time, by area and by occupation and industry.
81

Alternative measures of unemployment
ILO unemployment
The Labour Force Survey is the government’s preferred measure of unemployment, and is
based on the International Labour Organisation (ILO) definition which includes all those who
are out of work and actively se eking employment. This measure of unemployment is greater
than the claimant-based measure due to its broader definition as it includes those who are not
eligible to claim benefits or choose not to claim.
National data released on 15 July 2009 showed that during the three months to May 2009,
unemployment in the UK had risen to 2.38 million, increasing the national unemployment rate
to 7 .6%.
At local level, the data lags further behind. The latest quarterly data refers to Jan 2008-Dec
2008, when there were 17,700 people unemployed in Bradford, a rate of 7.6% of the working
age population, compared to 6.5% for the Yorkshire & Humber region and 5.9% for the UK.
DWP benefit claimants
The Department of Work and Pensions (DWP) publish quarterly figures on working age
benefit claimants by client group. Working age benefits include JSA, Incapacity Benefit, Lone
Parent benefits, Carer and Bereavement benefits. Looking at the number of people claiming
one or more or these benefits gives us another picture of worklessness in the district.
According to the latest DWP working age client group figures, as of August 2008 there were a
total of 52,030 people claiming a workless benefit in Bradford, a rate of 17% of the working
age population, higher than the regional and national figures.
The largest group is Incapacity Benefit, with 24,160 people in this group.
Table 9: Working age benefit claimants by statistical group- August 2008
Individual benefits datasets have been updated to November 2008, but the next update of the
Working Age Client Group data (as above) will be available in summer 2009.
Worklessness & Benefit Dependency
Worklessness is a term used to describe all people of working age who are not in
employment. It includes those who are officially unemployed, and those who are
82

economically inactive (that is those who are of working age not in work, not in full time
education or training and are not actively seeking work). According to this definition, there
are 90,400 working age people in Bradford who are workless. This is 31.3% of the working
age population, a higher proportion than seen regionally and nationally.
Table 9: Worklessness Numbers and Rates
Bradford has a higher proportion of permanently sick / disabled than the rest of the sub
region, with higher levels of incapacity benefit claiming than elsewhere (excluding
Wakefield). In total over 24,000 (May 2007) people in Bradford are claiming Incapacity
Benefit, indicating the scale of this issue relative to the level of unemployment. While
Incapacity Benefit is generally a long term benefit, incidences of claiming for 2 years or more
form a higher proportion of all claimants in Bradford than elsewhere. 18
Table 10: Bradford Working Age Benefit Claimants
Overall, Claimant rates for working age benefits (including JSA, incapacity benefit, lone
parent benefits, etc) are high for Bradford when compared to regional and national levels. In
May 2007 there were 51,300 individuals are claiming a workless benefit, 16.9% of the
working age population in Bradford. This figure has fallen from 18.7% in May 2002. 19
Table 11: Working age benefit claimant numbers & rates at February each year
Note: Working age benefits are: Job Seekers Allowance, Incapacity Benefit/Severe Disablement Allowance, Income Support,
Carers Allowance, Disability Living Allowance, Bereavement Benefit. Housing Benefit and Council Tax Benefit is not included.
Source: WACG data set, DWP; Population estimates for SOAs, Neighbourhood Statistics; rates calculated by CBMDC,
Regeneration Dept.
18
Ekos Consulting UK Ltd (2006) West Yorkshire Strategic Economic Assessment. WY Economic
Partnership.
19
Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council (2007) Economic Strategy for Bradford District
2007-2020. Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council.
83

Total benefits claimants can be used as a proxy for worklessness and employment
deprivation at a sub-district level. Analysis has shown that very high levels of worklessness
exist within concentrated areas of Bradford. For example, in small parts of Keighley,
Holmewood, Barkerend and Little Horton between 40% and 50% of the working age
population are claiming a workless benefit.
Initial results from the 2007 Index of Multiple Deprivation (IMD) show that Bradford is the 5th
most employment deprived Local Authority in England, compared to its 6th place position in
the 2004 IMD rankings.
4.6 Car Ownership and Commuting
4.6.1 Car Ownership Levels
According to the 2001 census data, a higher proportion of households in Bradford (32.5%) do
not have a car or van compared to the regional and national averages. Whilst the percentage
of Bradford households owning 1 car or van in similar to the average for Yorkshire & Humber
and England & Wales, fewer than average own 2 or more vehicles.
Table 12: Car Ownership in Bradford
Source: 2001 Census, ONS
However, the proportion of households owning at least one car has increased during 2005-
2006. In 2006, on average, 66.9% of households across England have at least one car, (in
comparison to 62.6% in 2005); in Yorkshire and Humber it is 64.4%, (up from 60% in 2005),
and in Bradford local authority district it is 63.7%, (an increase from 60.4% in 2005). At
constituency level, car ownership ranges from a low of 56.3% in Bradford West, (down from
56.9% in 2005), to a high of 70% in Shipley, (up from 64.8% in 2005). Although levels of car
ownership vary at local areas it is evident that the overall proportion of households owning a
car is rising. 20
20 Yorkshire Forward (2009) Bradford in Brief November 2006 [online]. Yorkshire Forward [accessed
20 th April 2009] < http://www.yorkshirefutures.com/cb.aspx?page=CC6934FF-85FD-4341-B2C3-
DB0804E8E103 >
84

4.6.2 Commuting to Works
There are significant movements of commuters between districts within West Yorkshire,
although the highest two-way flow is between Leeds and Bradford Districts.
According to the census 2001 figures,
Bradford imported a net flow of
workers from surrounding Districts,
45,000 people commute into the
District to work, the majority of these
come from Leeds. A significant
proportion of in-commuters are
employed in higher level occupations
mostly in the city centre offices and
businesses.
Recent forecasts have shown that,
since the 2001 Census, the number of
out-commuters is likely to have
increased significantly, so that
Bradford is now a net exporter of
labour to Leeds and surrounding
Districts. 21
Commuting by mode of travel
Car is the dominant mode of transport for people travelling to work, accounting for 63% of all
trips to work made by Bradford’s employed residents – higher than the regional average. 80% of
out-commuters and 86% of in-commuters travel by car. Car travel accounts for 59% of trips by
people living and working within Bradford, where a higher proportion of trips to work are made
by bus, and on foot.
Travel by train is significant for commuting trips out of the District, with 9% of trips out being
made by train. A lower proportion of trips into Bradford (3%) are by train.
Commuting from Bradford Wards
People living in wards along Wharfedale (Craven, Ilkley, Rombalds, Baildon and Idle), are
most likely to commute outside the district to work. Nearly a third of the commuting trips out
of Bradford are made by people living in these wards. Over 40% of employed people living in
Rombalds commute outside Bradford.
Wyke and Queensbury wards to the south also have a significant proportion of employed
residents who commute out.
21 Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council (2007) Economic Strategy for Bradford District
2007-2020. Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council.
85

Much lower levels of commuting are found in Keighley, Toller, Thornton, Clayton, Great
Horton and Little Horton.
Leeds is a significant destination for out-commuters from all wards, however the wards along
Wharfedale, and those on the east side of Bradford have the highest proportion of residents
commuting to Leeds. Over 70% of the trips from Rombalds and Ilkley to outside the District
are to Leeds.
There are also significant commuter movements between Craven ward and Craven District,
and between Queensbury/Wyke wards and Calderdale.
Figure 15 : % of Employed Residents in Each Ward Commuting outside the District
Source: CBMDC statistical briefing, Feb. 2008
4.7 Health
The people in Bradford district have worse general health than the national average overall.
There are health inequalities in the district between men and women, between different
communities and between geographical areas.
There is considerable evidence linking deprivation to ill health, and local people experience ill
health in excess of the national averages. The following table shows the Standardised
Mortality Ratio (SMR) for West Yorkshire. (The Standardised Mortality Rate shows how
much more likely a resident in one area is to die relative to the national average [England].
Values over 100 indicate an above average risk of death).
86

Table 13: Mortality for all causes 2005
As the table shows, Bradford and Wakefield had the highest SMR for men, and the second
highest (after Wakefield) SMR for women in West Yorkshire in
2005. Life expectancy in Bradford is also lower than the national averages, and lowest in
West Yorkshire.
Table 14: Life Expectancy at birth (2003 – 2005)
The infant mortality rate is also relatively higher in Bradford. The infant mortality rate for
Bradford District fell substantially between 1974 and 2003. However in the period 1999 to
2003 the infant mortality rate had not significantly changed. In the years 2001 – 2003
combined Bradford babies were 1.7 times more likely to die in their first year than babies in
England and Wales as a whole. This gives an infant mortality rate of 9.0 infant deaths per
1,000 live births in the Bradford District compared with 5.4 per 1,000 live births in England
and Wales. (2001 – 2003 figures are used, as uncertainty exists about the infant mortality
figures for 2004)
There are wide variations in Infant Mortality across the district. The wards of Bradford Moor,
Toller, Manningham, and City had the highest infant mortality rates; and Craven, Ilkley,
Wharfedale, Baildon, Bingley and Worth Valley had the lowest. From 1993 – 2003 as a
whole, a baby born in the most deprived fifth (quintile) in the District was almost five times as
likely to die in their first year compared to the least deprived fifth (quintile). 22
Obesity is a growing concern and by 2010 it is expected to overtake smoking as the leading
cause of illness and death that is easily preventable. It has been estimated that just under
90,000 adults in Bradford are overweight. 23
22 BMDC Research and Consultation Service (2006). A Picture of the District.
Report Dated October 2006. Research and Consultation Service, Jacobs Well. Bradford.
23 BMDC (2007). Bradford District Sustainable Community strategy- Information pack and Fact
Sheets. Policy Development Service, Bradford Council.
87

Data provided by Bradford Health Informatics Service about obesity in children in 2006
shows that children are more likely to be overweight or obese by the time they reach 11, and
that boys are slightly more likely than girls to be overweight or obese.
Table 15: Weight of young children in Bradford
Malnourishment is also a key factor in elderly people being vulnerable to infection. It has
been estimated that 14,000 people over 65 are likely to be malnourished in Bradford. 24
In Bradford District as in the rest of England, Teenage pregnancy is a major issue. It is more
so in Bradford as it can be linked to deprivation. Girls from poorer backgrounds are ten times
more likely to become teenage mothers than girls from professional backgrounds. In
Bradford District there has been a 11% reduction in the rate of teenage pregnancy since
1998. In 2005, the national rate of pregnancies to women under 18 was 41.1 per 1,000
women aged 15-17. The rate for Bradford District was 50.1, higher than both the national and
West Yorkshire rate.
Across the district, there are still areas where teenage pregnancy is double the national
average. Three quarters of teenage pregnancies occur in the most deprived 40% of the
community and rates are generally higher in deprived wards with majority white populations.
Seven wards Tong, Shipley East, Wyke, Eccleshill, Little Horton, Thornton and Keighley
South have teenage pregnancy rates significantly above Bradford average. 25
24
BMDC (2007). Bradford District Sustainable Community strategy- Information pack and Fact Sheets.
Policy Development Service, Bradford Council.
25
The Annual Report of the Joint Director of Public Health Bradford and Airedale 2007/08
88

Figure16: Teenage pregnancy rate in Bradford 1998-2011 and by ward (2004-2006)
Source: Bradford and Airedale NHS Pct JSNA 2008 and 2009
The impact of HIV and sexually
transmitted infections in UK society is
increasing despite efforts to improve
clinical services aimed at reducing
them. HIV infection is associated with
serious illness and high costs of
treatment and care, as well as
significant mortality. Each year, many
thousands of individuals are
diagnosed with HIV for the first time. During recent years the rate of new HIV / AIDS cases in
Bradford district has remained between the England and the Yorkshire and Humber regional
rate. 26
Figure17 : Rate of new HIV/AIDS cases in Bradford
Source: Health Protection Agency
Yorkshire and the Humber region had the second highest rate of tobacco use in 2002 - 2004.
Following Leeds and Sheffield, Bradford District had the third highest number of smoking
attributable deaths in 2002-4.
Apart from smoking which is the single biggest preventable cause of illness and premature
death in the UK, it is estimated that the number of heroin and crack users in the Bradford
district are between 4200-5200. Of these, 3554 accessed treatment in 2005/6, the great
majority on methadone prescriptions. Bradford also has one of the worst records in Yorkshire
and Humber for both months of life lost and hospital admissions due to alcohol. 27
Cancer, cardiovascular disease and diabetes are still major causes of illness and death in
the District; rates of these illnesses are higher in Bradford than the national rates.
26 The Annual Report of the Joint Director of Public Health Bradford and Airedale 2007/08
27 BMDC (2007). Bradford District Sustainable Community strategy- Information pack and Fact Sheets.
Policy Development Service, Bradford Council.
89

Black and Minority Ethnic groups have distinct mental health needs; discrimination faced by
people from BME communities has a negative effect on mental health and general well
being.
There are more children in Bradford than elsewhere in the UK with deafness, cerebral palsy,
neurodegenerative disorders, primary micro and inborn errors of metabolism.
4.8 Crime
Changes in crime levels
Over the past four years, the total number of offences recorded has generally followed a
downward trend. Although the figures show an increase in 2002/3 this reflects changes in
recording practices. Had these changes not been introduced, there would have been a fall in
crime in 2002/3. It appears that overall crime reduction reached a plateau in 2004/5 and has
remained stable throughout the 2005/6 period. 28
Table 16: Number of offences recorded in Bradford District 2001/2–2005/6
The latest National Statistics (July 2009), released by the Home Office, show that the overall
crime in Bradford is slightly below the West Yorkshire average. Offences against person,
robbery, theft of and from motor vehicle all are down from the previous year. Robbery has
decreased by 12%, the highest in West Yorkshire. The only crime categories in the district to
show an increase is Burglary which is up by 16% from the previous year, the second highest
in the region and above the West Yorkshire average.
The tables below show the latest crime statistics both at the local authority level and breaking
them down into division level within the district.
28 BMDC Research and Consultation Service (2006). A Picture of the District.
Report Dated October 2006. Research and Consultation Service, Jacobs Well. Bradford.
90

Table 17: Recorded Crime Figures for 7 Key Offences in West Yorkshire (2008-09)
LA
Pop n
(000)
H’hold
(000)
Violence against
person
Per
1000
Pop n
08/09
%
change
07/08-
08/09
Per
1000
Pop n
08/09
Sexual
Offences
%
change
07/08-
08/09
Per
1000
Pop n
08/09
Robbery Burglary
%
change
07/08-
08/09
Per
1000
Pop n
08/09
Per
1000
H’hold
08/09
%
change
07/08-
08/09
Theft of motor
vehicle
Per
1000
Pop n
08/09
%
change
07/08-
08/09
Theft from motor
vehicle
Per
1000
Pop n
08/09
%
change
07/08-
08/09
Interfering with
motor vehicle
Bradford 497 196 15 -14 1 0 1 -12 11 27 16 4 -9 9 -8 1 -13
Calderdale 200 88 15 -21 1 1 1 24 6 14 22 4 -9 7 -24 1 -40
Kirklees 401 169 16 -11 1 7 2 17 8 20 14 4 11 10 7 1 1
Leeds 761 335 16 -6 1 -13 2 -6 12 28 9 4 -5 10 4 1 -12
Wakefield 322 141 17 -14 1 -16 0 -11 6 13 3 4 2 8 1 1 3
WY 2181 929 16 -11 1 -6 1 2 10 22 12 4 -3 9 -1 1 -11
Source: Crime in England and Wales (home office Statistical Bulletin, July 2009)
Table 18: Bradford District Crime Statistics over the last 12 months (July’08- June’09)
For Every 1000 Population
Bradford North Bradford South Keighley
In This District In West Yorkshire Total in the
Division
Division
Division
district
Burglary Dwelling* 37.2 36.0 14.5 26.3 24.3 9835
Vehicle Crime 14.6 17.2 6.9 12.1 12.5 10494
Serious Violence 0.2 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 219
Other Violence 7.8 14.8 5.6 8.7 9.0 7190
Anti-social
Behaviour
57.4 83.1 40.3 57.0 53.3 36350
Criminal damage 22.2 30.8 14.0 21.1 21.6 16188
Source: West Yorkshire Police Authority Crime Statistics http://www.beatcrime.info/index.htm
*For Every 1000 Households
Per
1000
Pop n
08/09
%
change
07/08-
08/09
91

Locations of crimes
The above table shows that crime rates in the District vary substantially between different
areas. However, in general the south and east of the District experience higher levels of
crime than the north and west. Anecdotal evidence also suggests that offenders committing
crimes within Bradford District also tended to live in the District, most of them living on a
housing estate with a high proportion of Community Housing Trust (formerly Council-owned)
properties. 29
The area with the highest level of recorded crime within Bradford District during 2005/06 was
Bradford City Centre. Based on the statistics on crime reported to the West Yorkshire Police,
there were a total of 7814 crime incidents recorded in the city centre during April 2005-March
2006 which shows a reduction of about 11% since the same period in 2003-2004. The
council has set a target of reducing further 23% of crimes in the city centre by 2007
(Genecon, 2007). 30
Table 19: Crime Statistics in Bradford City Centre (2003-2009)
Offence Type
Number of
Crimes
Apr 03-Mar 04
Number of
Crimes
Apr 04-Mar 05
Number of
Crimes
Apr 05-Mar 06
Number of
Crimes
Apr 08-Mar 09
Burglary Dwelling 261 214 224 200
Burglary Elsewhere 596 453 398 284
Criminal Damage 880 783 738 522
Drugs Offences 306 358 363 212
Fraud & Forgery 622 504 331 64
Handling 30 22 14 11
Other Crime 139 174 227 366
Other Theft 2529 2500 2750 1759
Robbery 172 97 102 74
Sexual Offences 112 118 93 45
Theft from Motor Vehicle 1033 614 723 459
Theft of Motor Vehicle 345 319 178 108
Violent Crime 1755 1946 1671 826
Homicide 0 0 2 7
Total 8780 8102 7814 4940
Source: (Genecon, 2010)
All crime recorded within the city and town centres relate both to crimes against businesses
and crimes against individuals. The city and town centres cannot be compared with
other areas of the District; since the crime rates are calculated on the number of
29 http://www.bradfordinfo.com/District/StateOfTheDistrict2003/Crime.cfm
30 Genecon (2007). BCR Performance Framework: Second Annual Update 2005/06-Final report.
Report Dated August 2007. Genecon Consultancy Ltd.
92

people living in the areas, and this does not reflect the number of people who travel to the
city centre each day for work, shopping or leisure.
Youth Offending
The number of first time youth offenders in the District shows a rising trend, increasing from
1,269 in 2004 to 1,480 in 2005. This increase is however heavily influenced by improvements
in local crime detection rates and the impact of the Government’s recorded crime initiative
‘Narrowing the Justice Gap’. 53% of the young people supervised by the Bradford Youth
Offending Team, during 2005 were accessing full-time education, training and employment.
There was a downward trend in re-offending rates for young offenders. 47.1% of the 2001
cohort of youth offenders re-offended, compared to 33.4% of the 2004 cohort, however
43.3% of the 2005 cohort re-offended within 12 months. 31
Drugs and Drug Related Crime
It is difficult to accurately estimate the total scale of drug use in the Bradford District but it is
thought that there may be in the region of 5,000 “problematic” heroin users.
In 2005/06, the number of drug users in treatment was 3,533; a 10% increase compared to
the previous year (3,202). 1,966 of those were new presentations to treatment. 32
Bradford police now test all offenders arrested for acquisitive crimes (e.g. shop lifting) for
heroin and cocaine. On average around 50% test positive, and most of these do so for heroin
and cocaine use. During 2005/06 the police recorded 325 arrests and disposals for dealing
Class A. This figure is also well in excess of the target set in the Safer Communities Strategy
for 2005/6 of 197.
Fear of drug users and drug dealers are still major factors in making people feel unsafe in
their neighbourhoods.
Anti-social Behaviour
Anti-social behaviour is difficult to define and can include serious incidents of harassment to
lower level incidents of littering, graffiti and illegal parking. The way in which the police
records incidents of anti-social behaviour changed in April 2005 and it is therefore not
possible to compare data since that date with previous years. Perceptions of and tolerance
toward anti-social behaviour is also varied due to its subjective nature. In 2005/6, the police
recorded 26,408 incidents of anti-social behaviour; the most common type was loutish
behaviour (almost a third of all incidents). Other types recorded were hoax calls, general
nuisance and vehicle related nuisance (e.g. illegal parking and motorcycle nuisance).
31 BMDC Research and Consultation Service (2006). A Picture of the District.
Report Dated October 2006. Research and Consultation Service, Jacobs Well. Bradford.
32 BMDC Research and Consultation Service (2006). A Picture of the District.
Report Dated October 2006. Research and Consultation Service, Jacobs Well. Bradford.
93

The latest crime statistics, as shown in table, highlights that ASB is one of the major
community safety issues faced by the district. the WY Police Authority has recorded 26,350
ASB offences over the past 12 months between July 2008 and June 2009. this is higher
than the WY average.
Anti social behaviour is not evenly distributed across the District. The highest number of
incidents was recorded in Bradford City Centre. ASB tends to be particularly problematic in
some of the District’s outlying estates.
4.9 Road Casualties
Bradford’s rate of road injuries and deaths is lower than the England average, at 56.3 per
100,000 compared with 59.6. Locally, there were 2,466 road casualties in 2007 - 255
involved death or serious injury - a drop of 9% over the 2006 figure of 2,700 33 .
Figure 18: Killed or Seriously Injured in Bradford
Source: Safer Communities Partnership (2009) Safer Together- Bradford District Road Safety Plan 2007 to 2009.
However this is the second highest casualty figure within the West Yorkshire that includes
the highest number of KSI incidents involving children and pedestrians.
Table 20: Road casualties by road user type and severity in WY local authority: 2007
1 Includes goods vehicles, buses, coaches and trams, horse riders and agricultural vehicle users.
Source: Road Casualties Great Britain 2007: Annual Report (September 2008). London: The Stationery Office
33 Bradford and Airedale PCT (2008) The Health and Wellbeing needs of the People of Bradford and
Airedale: Joint Strategic Needs Assessment 2008. CBMDC and Bradford and Airedale NHS PCT.
94

The ‘Safer Communities Partnership’ is working to reduce the road casualty figures within the
district and has set reduction targets to be achieved from the baseline of 1994-98. The target
is to reduce the numbers of people killed and seriously injured in road crashes in Bradford by
at least 40% by 2010 and to reduce the numbers of children and pedestrians killed and
seriously injured by at least 50% 34 .
Current provisional figures for 2008, however, indicate deterioration in the achievements that
were made previously in relation to reducing road casualties. The 2010 target reduction for
children killed and seriously injured was met in 2005 with just 32, but has since increased.
The provisional figure for 2008 is 50 with likelihood that a further small number will be added
when final figures are known. The provisional figures for all killed and serious injuries are 264
against a target reduction of 208.
Road deaths have fallen in 2008 to 19 from 27 – a substantial reduction despite there being
a number of crashes with multiple fatalities. 19 is the second lowest value on record for the
Bradford District. Overall crashes and casualty numbers continue to fall to their lowest ever
levels for the District 35 .
4.10 Emergency Services- Capacity and Performances
Fire and Rescue Service
The West Yorkshire Fire and Rescue Authority have the legal duty to provide fire and rescue
service that meets the needs of local communities. It is an independent body which bears the
responsibilities regarding the enforcement of fire prevention, petroleum and explosives
legislation.
The Yorkshire Fire and Rescue Service serve a resident population of 2,125,000 and rovides
an emergency response across 202,924 hectares. Our emergency response is currently
provided from 34 whole-time fire stations and 14 retained (part-time) fire stations, based
within the five Districts of the county. We employ 1,514 wholetime firefighters, 196 part-time
firefighters, 60 mobilisation and communication staff members and 343 fire and rescue (nonuniformed)
staff.
West Yorkshire Fire & Rescue Service has the following resources:
• 49 Fire Stations (10 located in Bradford District)
• 63 Pumping / Rescue Appliances
• 6 aerial appliances
• 6 Demountable Unit carrying vehicles
• 15 Demountable Units
• 1 Command Support Unit
34
Safer Communities Partnership (2009) Safer Together- Bradford District Road Safety Plan 2007 to
2009.
35
CBMDC (2009) Bradford District Transport Delivery Plan- Executive Committee Report published on
31 st March 2009. CBMDC.
95

The 10 Fire stations located in Bradford District are:-
1. Bradford
2. Ilkley
3. Keighley
4. Bingley
5. Shipley
6. Silden
7. Idle
8. Fairweather Green
9. Odsal
10. Howarth
The HQ of the Fire & Rescue Authority is based in Birkenshaw, Bradford.
Figure 19: West Yorkshire Fire and Rescue Service Stations
The Fire and Rescue Service is diversifying both within the organisation and within the
service it provides in an effort to better reflect the community it serves in Bradford, and the
services include: -
• the fitting of approx 15,000 smoke detectors to homes across the district
• providing valuable road safety information to the community
• working with schools and young persons
• assistance and advice with the clearance of waste materials in order to prevent
deliberate, opportunist fires
96

In addition, the Legislative Fire Safety Team continues to provide a valuable service to
business in Bradford, making premises safer for employees and members of the public.
The Fire Service states that the current operational capacity of the service is sufficient to
cater for Bradford District and its potential growth. The following figure shows the number of
total fire incidents (including false alarm and special service calls) that have been dealt by
the WYFS stations across the district over the past 3 years.
Figure 20: Fire incidents attended by WYFRS 2006-08
Total Incidents
3500
3000
2500
2000
1500
1000
500
0
Bradford
Source: WYFRS website
Ilkley
Keighley
2006 2007 2008
Bingley
Shipley
Silden
Idle
Fairweather
Green
Further details on the capacity and performances of the above fire stations are available by
clicking on the link below:-
http://www.westyorksfire.gov.uk/aboutUs/au_stations.htm
However, according to the recently published WYFRS Integrated Risk Management Plan
2009-2012 Bradford is at the top of the overall geographical risk levels associated with
Metropolitan Fire Authority areas 36 . There are also a number of areas where the fire and
rescue service are not currently able to meet their target response time. They aim to evaluate
the risk within these areas and implement appropriate prevention, protection and response
solutions where the risk is at an intolerable level.
36 West Yorkshire Fire & Rescue Authority (2009) Integrated Risk Management Plan and Action Plan
20009-12. WYFRA.
Odsal
Howarth
97

Figure 21: Areas covered by the target response time
Source: Integrated Risk Management Plan and Action Plan 20009-12 (WYFRA, 2009)
The latest WYFRS Bradford District Action Plan 37 has also highlighted that it still need to
continue responding when an ‘emergency’ has occurred. Being prepared and ready to deal
with emergency incidents, whatever the type, is a core duty alongside the prevention work
and all the firefighters within Bradford District will further be trained to deal with a wide variety
of emergencies, including: -
• fires
• road traffic collisions
• chemical spills
• water rescues
• rope rescues
Currently, through local operational information gathering, the WYFS have developed a
Performance Management System which sets both local responsibility and accountability
through a series of action plans and helps them identify the key risks in the area in order to
ensure that they are fully prepared for any eventuality.
Ambulance
Yorkshire Ambulance Service NHS Trust was formed on 1 July 2006 bringing together South
Yorkshire Ambulance Service, West Yorkshire Metropolitan Ambulance Service and the
North and East Yorkshire parts of Tees, East and North Yorkshire Ambulance Service.
37 West Yorkshire Fire & Rescue Authority (2009) Bradford District Action Plan 2008/09. WYFRA.
98

YAS operate out of 22 ambulance stations (3 stations based in Bradford District) and in
addition use numerous locations as standby points.
There are 3 ambulance stations within Bradford District, as follows:-
1. Bradford
2. Keighley
3. Menston
Standby points have been confirmed to date on the following sites in West Yorkshire (3
within Bradford)-
• Canal Road, Bradford
• Leeds Road Hospital, Bradford
• Odsal Fire Station, Bradford
• Rutland Lodge Medical Centre, Potternewton, Leeds
• Kirkstall Medical Centre, Leeds
• Beeston Fire Station, Leeds
• Pontefract Fire Station, Pontefract
A total of 24 more stand-by points are planned throughout Yorkshire in 2008/2009 to further
improve the speed of response to 999 calls. 38
The Air Support Unit operates out of Leeds Bradford International Airport. This unit operates
one aircraft, but further aircrafts could be made available through the Northern Air
Ambulance Support Group if required.
Ambulance provision across the District is provided by the above three stations and is
supplemented by stations within Leeds, Craven, Calderdale and Kirklees, if the incidence
requires additional assistance.
The current stations and the network of standby points provide a sufficient level of resource
for the District. If demand increased permanently, Bradford would seek to commission
additional resources to meet this demand through the Lead Commissioning arrangements.
The following map shows the area each ambulance station in Yorkshire covers within the
national eight minute response time target. It shows the majority of the District is covered for
a response time of 8 minutes by either a Bradford District or neighbouring Ambulance
Station.
38 See: http://www.yas.nhs.uk/Media/PressReleases/2008/standsbytogettopatie.html for more info.
99

Figure 22: ambulance stations in west yorkshire
Source: Yorkshire Ambulance Service NHS Trust Annual Report 2007/08.
During 2008/09 the YAS has received approximately 372,000 urgent and emergency calls,
an average of over 1,800 calls a day, and responded to a total of approximately 565,000
incidents.
Table 21: YAS operational performances 2007-08
Category
Category A calls
Response within 8 minutes
Category A calls
Response within 19 minutes
Category B calls
Response within 19 minutes
England
Average
Yorkshire Ambulance Service
2008/09 2007/08 2008/09
Target
74.3% 73.5% 69.4% 75%
96.9% 96.1% 96.1% 95%
91% 92.4% 90.6% 95%
Sources: YAS Annual Report and Summary Accounts 2007/08 and National Statistics: Ambulance Services England 2008/09
The overall performance of the YAS in dealing with accident and emergency incidents is
however below the national average and does not meet the nationally set performance
targets. The Healthcare Commission continues to monitor YAS and envisages that significant
progress would be made in near future towards achieving the standards with which YAS
were not compliant in the previous years.
100

4.11 Key Facts
• The district’s population is projected to grow and change in the next 20 years. It is
likely that it will have the fastest growing population of any area outside London.
• The population will become more ethnically mixed with significant growth among
younger age groups, BME groups and within the more deprived areas of the District.
This shift towards groups that traditionally experience lower labour market
attainment, poses a challenge for Bradford. The free flow of labour across Europe
and the effects of globalisation also suggest that communities will become more
culturally mixed.
• Bradford has one of the lowest proportions of working age residents in employment
of any local authority in the Yorkshire and Humber region and is lower than the
national average. Correspondingly the district has one of the highest unemployment
rates. However, recent data shows that employment rates continue to improve and
the gap with regional and national rates is narrowing. Economic activity rates are
also improving and the gap with national rates has reduced.
• Worklessness and dependency on benefits such as JSA and Incapacity Benefit is a
particular issue for Bradford, where significant pockets of worklessness within
Bradford push up the average figures for the District. Unemployment and
worklessness is higher among BME groups and the situation is not improving.
• Bradford as a whole ranks 32nd (out of 354) in the CLG Index of Multiple
Deprivation, placing it firmly in the bottom 10% nationally. Within the district there is
inevitably disparity between Wards in terms of deprivation, 42% of residents living in
areas that fall into the 20% most deprived nationally, and 5% living in areas that are
among the 1% most deprived. Overall, two-fifths of people live in some of the most
deprived areas in the country.
• Mortality and life expectancy data across the PCT’s four GP-based Alliance areas
demonstrate a link between deprivation and poor health outcomes exist within the
district.
• Economic activity rates in the district are lower than average (73.9%: 78.5%
nationally) and there are a high proportion of people without qualifications (21.8%:
13.8% nationally). Average weekly earnings are also below regional and national
average but have increased at a faster rate between 2006-2008.
• The district’s economy is worth around £7 billion, the third largest in the region.
Around 15,000 businesses provide 195,500 jobs and local residents hold about 78%
of these jobs. The district is forecast to have the fastest rate of economic growth in
West Yorkshire over the next ten years with a projected 50,000 increase in the
number of local jobs.
101

Sources:
• Bradford is an enterprising district where local residents are more likely to aspire to
start a business than people elsewhere in the region. Business start-ups and
survival rates are also improving faster than national and regional averages.
• Travel to work by car is increasing, and the level of out-commuting to surrounding
Districts is estimated to have risen significantly. This places increasing pressure on
the District’s road infrastructure and levels of congestion.
• People in the district have a lower risk of becoming a victim of crime. Youth
offending including anti social behaviour and the issues underlying it are being
tackled successfully.
• Arup (2005) Socio-Economic Baseline Report (part of NDF Technical
Appendices). Report dated July 2005. Arup Consultancy.
• BMDC (2002) Bradford Tourism Strategy. Report dated May 2002. Bradford
Council.
• BMDC (2004) Only Connect-Cultural Strategy for Bradford. Report dated March
2004. Bradford Council.
• BMDC (2007) Bradford District Sustainable Community strategy- Information pack
and Fact Sheets. Policy Development Service, Bradford Council.
• Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford Council (2007) Economic Strategy
for Bradford District 2007-2020. Bradford Economic Partnership and Bradford
Council.
• BMDC (2006) A Picture of the District. Report dated October 2006. Research and
Consultation Service, Jacobs Well. Bradford.
• BMDC (2007) A Picture of the District. Report dated October 2007. Research and
Consultation Service, Jacobs Well. Bradford.
• BMDC (2010) The State of the District. Department of Performance and
Commissioning. Report dated September 2010. Bradford.
• DTZ and Tescom (2005) Creating a Balanced City Centre Housing Market in
Bradford: Final Report. Report dated November 2005. DTZ Pieda Consulting
and Tescom Research and Consultancy Ltd.
• Genecon (2006) BCR Performance Framework: Second Annual Update 2004/05-
Final report. Report dated May 2006. Genecon Consultancy Ltd.
102

• Genecon (2007) BCR Performance Framework: Second Annual Update 2005/06-
Final report. Report dated August 2007. Genecon Consultancy Ltd.
• Genecon (2010) BCR Performance Framework: Annual Update 2009/10-draft
report. Report dated February 2010. Genecon Consultancy Ltd.
• Genecon, King Sturge, Gillespies (2007) Leeds Bradford Corridor Study. Report
dated July 2007. Leeds Bradford Corridor Group.
• Regeneris (2005) Bradford Positioning Statement. Report dated May 2006.
Regeneris Consulting.
• The Northern Way (2005) Leeds City Region Diagnostic. Report dated 2005. The
Northern Way.
103

5.0 Housing
The following section provides details of the types of residential properties in Bradford and
details of the housing and household characteristics within the district. It also highlights
details of the National, Regional, Sub-regional and Local policy framework with which any
future housing developments must conform, and outlines a detail analysis of the current
Housing Market in the district.
5.1 National, Regional and Sub-regional Housing Policies and Strategies
This section contains details on
• PPS3
• The Yorkshire and Humber Plan
• Local Housing studies
PPS3: Housing
In November 2006, the Government published Planning Policy Statement 3: Housing
(PPS3), which superseded PPG3. PPS3 underpins the delivery of the Government's
strategic housing policy objectives with the goal of ensuring that everyone has the
opportunity to live in a decent home, which they can afford in a community where
they want to live 39 .
PPS3 sets out the policy objectives for planning for housing. The specific outcomes
that the planning system should deliver are:
• High quality housing that is well-designed and built to a high standard.
• A mix of housing, both market and affordable, particularly in terms of tenure and
price, to support a wide variety of households in all areas, both urban and rural.
• A sufficient quantity of housing taking into account need and demand and seeking
to improve choice.
• Housing developments in suitable locations, which offer a good range of
community facilities and with good access to jobs, key services and infrastructure.
• A flexible, responsive supply of land – managed in a way that makes efficient and
effective use of land, including re-use of previously-developed land, where
appropriate.
Key policies in PPS3 are:
• Local and regional planning bodies will need to take more account of
affordability when determining how many new homes are needed in their area;
39 Planning Policy Statement 3: Housing
104

• Local authorities will need to identify more appropriate sites for housing.
Councils need to plan 15 years ahead, to ensure they have a rolling 5-year supply
of sustainable and deliverable sites;
• Stronger emphasis on improving the quality of design of housing and
neighbourhoods. PPS3 makes it clear that local authorities should turn down
poor quality applications;
• Stronger environmental standards. Developers and planning bodies will have
to take account of the need to cut carbon emissions as well as wider
environmental and sustainability considerations when siting and designing new
homes;
• A new emphasis on family homes, with consideration to be given to the housing
needs of children, including gardens, play areas and green spaces;
• A continuing focus on brownfield land, retaining the national target that at
least 60% of new homes should be built on brownfield land. Local authorities will
need to continue to prioritise brownfield land in their plans and will need to set
their own local targets to reflect available sites and support the national target.
They will also need to take stronger action to bring more brownfield land back into
use;
• More flexibility for local authorities to determine how and where new homes
should be built in their area, alongside greater responsibility to ensure the
homes are built. Local authorities will be able to set their own local standards for
density (with a national indicative minimum of 30 dwellings per hectare) and for
car parking. They will also be able to set separate targets for different kinds of
brownfield land where appropriate;
• Stronger policies on affordable housing, so that local authorities will be able to
require developer contributions to affordable housing on smaller sites where it is
viable; and,
• A stronger emphasis on rural affordable housing, so that local authorities and
regional planning bodies will have to take greater account of affordability
pressures in rural areas, and the need to sustain village life by providing
additional housing that is sensitive to the area and the environment.
Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS): The Yorkshire and Humber Plan
The Yorkshire and Humber Plan is the current Regional Spatial Strategy for the
Yorkshire and Humber Region. It was issued in May 2008 and is a primary
consideration for City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council (CBMDC) in
developing LDF policies.
The housing requirement in the RSS states that approximately 50,000 new homes
will have to be built in the Bradford district between 2008 and 2026, to meet the need
of the growing population and the increase in household formation. Predicted
residential growth is based on the figures specified in the RSS 2006-2026. This states
an anticipated provision for Bradford equating to 2,700 per year.
105

POLICY H1: Provision and distribution housing
A The region’s housing stock should be improved and increased to provide
appropriate accommodation for all households wanting homes, taking account of
strong economic growth in the Leeds City Region, regeneration and increasing
economic growth in South Yorkshire and the Humber Estuary sub area, and the
need to place a greater emphasis on meeting local needs in rural areas.
B Plans, strategies, programmes and investment decisions should ensure the
delivery of the average annual net additions to the dwelling stock set out in Table
12.1 in locations that accord with the Core Approach and Sub Area policies, taking
account of indicative timing set out in Table 12.2 .
Table 1. RSS Net Additions to dwelling stock for local authorities 2004-2026
S
Source: Yorkshire and Humber Plan 2008, p.159
The RSS aims to transform Bradford, and in this context there is potential for
significant job growth and a need to increase housing growth to reflect this and
demographic changes. In this context Bradford district needs to significantly increase
its housing supply.
106

Table 2. RSS Jobs and Homes Growth in the Leeds City Region
Source: Yorkshire and Humber Plan 2008, p.163
Under Policy LCR1: Leeds City Region sub area policy, the RSS states that the role
and function of place for Bradford is to transform the Regional City of Bradford with
significantly increased growth in economic development, jobs and homes through the
renaissance of the city centre and development and regeneration elsewhere.
In terms of strategic patterns of development for Bradford, LCR1 states the following:
1. Encourage growth across the south of the city region (broadly south of Bradford
and Leeds city centres) particularly within the Regeneration Priority Areas, and
manage growth across the north of the city region with a greater emphasis on
delivering affordable housing
2. Focus most development on the Regional Cities of Bradford and Leeds and the
Sub Regional Cities and Towns
3. Promote development at the Principal Towns to strengthen their service centre
roles, and where necessary to aid regeneration and/or to provide more affordable
housing
4. Encourage regeneration and growth in the following broad locations (supported by
the investment priorities set out in policy LCR2):
• Airedale (Bradford city centre to Skipton) – increasing employment
opportunities and focussing development in Keighley and Skipton
• Bradford-Leeds Corridor – restructure and regenerate east Bradford and
west Leeds to better support economic growth of both cities
The RSS contains two policies, which are relevant to affordable housing provision in
the region:
• H4 The Provision of Affordable Housing
• H5 Housing Mix
Policy H4 sets out indicative estimates for the proportion of new housing that may
need to be affordable across the region. As is recognised in the Regional Housing
Strategy, there are differences across the region in terms of affordability. Provisional
107

estimates of the proportion of new housing that may need to be affordable are as
follows:
• Over 40% in North Yorkshire districts and the East Riding of Yorkshire
• 30-40% in Kirklees, Leeds, Wakefield and Sheffield
• Up to 30% in other parts of South and West Yorkshire, Hull, North
Lincolnshire and North East Lincolnshire.
It is likely that there will be considerable variety in what is required within the districts.
These figures will be reviewed in the light of the findings from emerging local
Strategic Housing Market Assessments.
Policy H5 states that plans should ensure the provision of homes for a mix of
households that reflects the needs of the area.
Local Housing Studies
CBMDC has collected and produced substantial evidence on housing markets and
housing need in the district. These include the following studies;
• Bradford Strategic Housing Market Assessment 2009 (SHMA): The SHMA is
a key element of the LDF's evidence base. It analyses the housing market in
Bradford advising on the types of housing needed in different areas and the
amount and pattern of need for affordable housing.
• Local Housing Assessment 2008: The study comprehensively examined the
local housing market, the key drivers of local housing demand and supply and the
level of housing need within the district.
• Bradford Housing Requirements Study 2007/08: The study seeks to
supplement the LHA with an evidence base for assessing future housing need.
The study draws on a range of primary and secondary data, including a random
sample of 3253 households.
• Future of Social Housing Study 2007/08: The study examines attitudes to
affordable housing, specifically amongst different demographics.
• Private Sector Stock Condition Survey 2008: Provides an updated picture on
stock condition.
• Housing Market Tracker: A set of 55 indicators that track the state of the
housing market in Bradford.
• Joint Housing Strategy for Bradford 2008-2018: The three key objectives in the
strategy are more homes, quality and inclusion. The housing strategy outlines the
future plans for growth including five growth areas The Canal Road Corridor,
108

Manningham, The Leeds/Bradford Corridor, The Airedale Corridor and the City
Centre.
Housing Development Frameworks
The joint Housing Strategy outlines plans for growth, and for improving the success of
existing neighbourhoods, include a focus on our major area regeneration projects.
Housing Development Frameworks are being developed to exploit housing
opportunities within the Masterplan areas and to establish realistic plans and delivery
frameworks to regenerate these areas and make a difference. These are the Canal
Road Corridor, Manningham, Airedale, the Leeds/Bradford Corridor, and the City
Centre. We will work with the Homes & Communities agency to deliver our ambitions
for these areas.
The Canal Road Corridor offers the opportunity for the creation of new successful
mixed neighbourhoods with up to 6000 dwellings, alongside new employment
opportunities, but also enables adjoining communities, such as Manningham, to
benefit from the buoyancy created by the new area.
In Manningham, existing successful regeneration plans can be extended to new
opportunities for high quality housing to complement key employment sites. We will
work with any employer within the area or developer to assist housing growth and to
transform Manningham into a sustainable area where people would choose to live.
Green spaces will be enhanced and sites such as the reservoir site- a Bradford
Wildlife Site- will be protected.
The Leeds/Bradford Corridor involves joint working to make the most of the
powerful links between the two cities to boost the success of the neighbourhoods
along the corridor – including Holmewood, Ravenscliffe, and Laisterdyke – and to
exploit opportunities in areas in between these neighbourhoods. Significant growth
opportunities exist in the area between Bradford and Leeds and upwards of 6000 new
homes could be provided in this area.
109

The Airedale Corridor is strongly focussed on economic growth. It will include
opportunities for new market-led housing development that will also create scope for
new affordable housing close to work and transport.
In the City Centre there is still substantial scope for the development of high-quality
modern apartment-type housing aimed principally at younger people owning or
renting – encouraging a vibrant city centre both during the day and at night. A further
6000 homes can be provided in addition to the existing residential supply in the city
centre
5.2 Housing Profile of the District
This section provides details on:
• The current housing stock
• Building Activity
• Future Housing stock
• Property type
• Tenure
• Stock Condition
• Vacancy
• Occupancy
5.2.1 Current Housing Stock
Total dwelling stock as at April 2009 was 208,473 residential dwellings across
Bradford District. Over the past 10 years, total dwelling stock has increased 4.8%
from a total of 198,958 in 1999 (Bradford SHMA, 2009).
5.2.2 Building activity
Table 4 shows new build housing supply between the years 2002/3 to 2006/7. Private
sector new builds in the district have fluctuated at around 1,100 properties annually
for the past few years, with a slight dip in 2003/04. A modest increase to around
1,200 completed units occurred in 2005/06. In 2006/07, new build constructions fell
slightly to 1,100 properties once again.
Over the same period new builds in the social housing sector have been much more
modest, averaging at just over 80 units per annum, according to CBMDC Planning
and NHBC figures although, the real figure is thought to be more like an average of
220 properties per annum (LHA).
110

Table 4: New Build Activity
Source: Local Housing Assessment 2008, p.46
Table 5 (below) shows that recent social housing new build activity in the district has
been relatively modest - averaging at around 200 new units per year but dropping to
181 new properties in 2004/05 and 148 properties in 2005/06, before rising
significantly during 2006/07.
111

Table 5: Social Housing completed new builds
Source: Local Housing Assessment 2008
The reduction in number of social housing new builds in 2004/05 was because of a
significantly reduced level of Housing Corporation Social Housing Grant in 2003/04
through the National Affordable Housing Programme of £7.9m compared to £17.5m
in 2002/03. The effect was also carried over into 2005/06. The reduction in funding
has created an increased burden on PPS3 schemes to provide more affordable
housing.
5.2.3 Future Housing Stock
Clearance in the private sector has been negligible in comparison to the size of the
sector as a whole. With around 1,200 private sector properties being supplied
annually the private sector will continue to grow.
The housing requirement for Bradford from the RSS is high, with a requirement to
deliver roughly 50,000 new homes across the district by 2026. This represents almost
a doubling of the annual target from 1390 to 2700.
The effect of a limited social sector supply and high RTB figures for the short term will
probably mean a reduction in social sector stock in the next couple of years to a
possible low of around 30,005 properties. After this, albeit with similar funding levels
from the National Affordable Housing Programme and comparable levels of PPS3
supply, it may be expected that in the medium term the social sector will reach more
stability as RTB pressures ease and new supply creates a net effect.
The overall effect on tenure will be an increase in the private sector as it continues to
grow, not withstanding future planning restrictions and a reduction in social sector
tenancies. The level of owner occupation within the private sector may reduce as
affordability becomes an issue and renting increases.
5.2.4 Property type
Table 6 reviews the profile of occupied dwelling stock by size and type. Overall, the
vast majority (78.8%) of properties are houses, 14.5% are flats/maisonettes and 6.5%
are bungalows.
112

Table 6: Property type and size
No.
Bedrooms
Property Type (Table %)
Detached Semidetached
Terraced Bungalow Flat or
Maisonette
Caravan Total Base
One 0.1 0.1 1.6 0.9 6.7 0.1 9.6 18234
Two 0.5 3.6 13.8 3.9 6.4 0.0 28.3 53733
Three 4.2 26.3 11.6 0.9 0.6 0.0 43.6 82652
Four 6.1 1.5 5.4 0.8 0.1 0.0 14.0 26509
Five 1.1 0.9 0.9 0.0 0.0 0.0 2.9 5518
Six 0.4 0.2 0.2 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.8 1523
Seven 0.0 0.0 0.1 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.1 228
Eight 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 88
Bedsit 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.6 0.0 0.6 1232
Total 12.5 32.6 33.7 6.5 14.5 0.1 100.0 189717
Base 23730 61935 63929 12392 27464 267 189717
Source: 2007/8 household survey
Figure 1: Property type by sub-area
100%
80%
60%
40%
20%
0%
City Central City North
East
City South City West Bingley Wharfedale Keighley &
Worth Valley
Detached Semi-detached Terraced Bungalow Flat or Maisonette Caravan
Source: 2007/8 household survey
5.2.5 Tenure
The last Census found that owner-occupation was a more dominant tenure in
Bradford than across the region as a whole, making up 71% of the total housing stock
of the district. Levels of social renting are well below regional averages (at 16.3%
compared to 21% across Yorkshire and the Humber).
Total
113

Table 7: Tenure profile
Tenure of
household
Bradford
(No.)
Bradford
(%)
Owned 129,288 71.7 67.6
Social Rented 29,350 16.3 21.0
Private rented 17,584 9.8 9.1
Living rent free 4,024 2.2 2.3
Total 180,246 100 100
Source: 2001 Census, Bradford Regional SHMA, p.26
Yorkshire &
Humber %
In March 2002 66% of Bradford's Council tenants voted in favour of transferring the
ownership and management of their homes by LSVT to Bradford Community Housing
Trust Group (BCHT). The group is a Registered Social Landlord.
The long-term trends of decline of the social rented sector and growth of owneroccupation
and private renting have served to dramatically change the nature of the
housing market over the last 25 years. Right-to-buy (RTB) and demolition of local
authority housing reduced the stock of social housing markedly during the 1980’s and
1990’s. Most recently, the growth of buy-to-let has sped up private rented sector
growth, particularly in lower value, inner core neighbourhoods.
The private rented sector has expanded over the last few years, this has occurred for
a number of related reasons. Firstly, general factors influencing increased demand
include greater household dissolution, a growth in single person households and an
emphasis on job mobility; secondly, the rapid expansion of the buy-to-let investment
market; thirdly, rising house prices across the district have made affordability for
owner-occupation increasingly difficult for first time-buyers and fourthly, the increased
provision of flats and apartments across the District being typically attractive to the
investment market and young professionals.
The latest tenure profile of Bradford District is summarised in Figure 2. Variations in
broad tenure groups by sub-area is summarised in Figure 3. Overall, based on
survey evidence, 70.1% of occupied dwellings are owner-occupied, 15.1% are social
rented, 14.1% are private rented and 0.3% are intermediate tenure (e.g. shared
ownership).
114

100%
80%
60%
40%
20%
Figure 2: Bradford District tenure profile
Owned Outright
Owned with mortgage
Bradford CH Trust
Rented from Housing
Associations
Private Rented
Tied accommodation
Shared ownership
379
569
Source: 2007/8 household survey
11,193
18,023
26,371
- 20,000 40,000 60,000
59,381
73,800
Tenure profile varies to some extent across the District (Figure 3). Proportions of
social rented properties were highest in City Central (24.2%), City South (16.8%) and
Keighley & Worth Valley (16.4%). The proportion of households renting privately was
highest in City Central (22.1%), City South (17.5%) and Keighley & Worth Valley
(15.2%). The proportion of households who were owner-occupiers exceeded 80% in
Wharfedale (87.1%) and Bingley (81.6%), compared with a District average of 70.1%.
0%
Figure 3: Bradford District tenure profile by sub-area
City Central City North
East
City South City West Bingley Wharfedale Keighley &
Worth
Valley
Owner Occupied Social Rented Private Rented Intermediate
Source: 2007/8 household survey
Total
115

5.2.6 Stock condition
In the private sector Bradford is dominated by older terraced housing. 25% of the
stock is small terraced housing (compared with an English average of 12%) and 24%
is medium/large terraced housing (compared with 17%). Flats make up only 6%
compared with a national average of 12%. 6% (9500 homes) are back-to-back, a
fundamentally unsatisfactory house type that is now largely confined to Bradford and
Leeds. This older terraced stock brings with it serious housing condition problems
that continue to be a major challenge.
Figure 4: Dwelling type profile The City of Bradford and England
Source: Private Sector House Condition Survey 2008, p.21
The age profile of the total private stock in the district differs from the average for
England in that the stock profile contains a larger proportion of pre-1919 and interwar
(1919-1945) stock compared to the national average. There is a consequent dip in
the number of dwellings post 1944, particularly in the post 1964 dwellings, however
this has been steadily increasing in recent years as the result of private sector new
build.
116

Figure 5: Dwelling age profile England and the City of Bradford District
Source: Private Sector House Condition Survey 2008, p.20
The following characteristics were identified in relation to private sector non-decency
in Bradford, as seen in Table 8.
Table 8: Bradford Private Sector Non-decency
Source: Private Sector House Condition Survey 2008, p.6
Over 65,000 homes fail the Decent Homes standard (40.5% of private sector stock,
substantially higher than the English average of 27.1%). The problem is worse in both
the private rented stock (58.8% compared with 40.6% nationally) and owner-occupied
stock (37.6% compared with 24.9% nationally) 40 .
Bradford’s private sector housing stock has a higher level of non decency than that
found nationally, particularly with thermal comfort and category 1 hazard failures.
Practical issues regarding improvement to older dwellings exist, and meeting national
priorities especially for improving energy efficiency will be challenging in many
cases 41 .
48.6% (23,580) of private residents classified as vulnerable live in non-Decent homes
(compared with an English average of 33.9%). Of the 23,580, 17,950 are owneroccupied
(76%) and 5990 (24%) private rented. To reach the national target of 70%
40 District Housing Strategy 2008-2020
41 Private Sector House Condition Survey 2008
117

of vulnerable households in the private sector to be in decent homes by 2010 will
require 9025 homes to be improved to the Decent Homes Standard. The shortfall
against the Decent Homes Standard is a major challenge in its own right, but the
quality issues associated with older private housing, go well beyond the basic Decent
Homes Standard. Poor environment and street-scene, and poor and cramped internal
layouts are also common problems 42 .
In the private sector 7% of all dwellings unfit. This is the highest proportion across the
5 West Yorkshire local authorities. The MSOA areas with the overall poorest
condition of housing stock are: Laisterdyke, Manningham Central, West Bowling,
Bradford Central and Girlington. The MSOA with consistently the best condition is
Eldwick/Crossflatts/Bingley Moor 43 .
In the social sector all housing associations are on target to achieve the Decent
Homes standard by 2010. By 2010, therefore the physical condition of social rented
housing will be the best it has been for many years 44 .
5.2.7 Vacancy
The overall vacancy rate is around 7.0% which is much higher that the regional
average of 4.1%. The vacancy rate is highest in the City Central sub-area (10%) and
Keighley/Worth Valley (7.1%) and lowest in Wharfedale (5.2%) (Table 4.1)
Table 9: Vacancy rates by sub-area
Sub-areas Occupancy
Empty
New build
and not
occupied
Occupied Total
Vacancy
Rate (%)
Bingley 1772 374 28428 30574 5.8
City Central 5480 388 48727 54595 10.0
City North East 1549 166 26927 28642 5.4
City South 1560 118 25386 27064 5.8
City West 1227 161 19706 21094 5.8
Keighley and Worth Valley 1921 103 25224 27248 7.1
Wharfedale 1006 141 18109 19256 5.2
Total 14515 1451 192507 208473 7.0
Source: CBMDC Council Tax 2009
5.2.8 Overcrowding
The 2007/8 household survey identified a total of 9,181 households across Bradford
District living in overcrowded conditions Table 10 shows that the proportion of
42 Private Sector House Condition Survey 2008
43 Local housing Assessment 2008
44 District Housing Strategy 2008-2016
118

households who were overcrowded averaged 4.8% across Bradford District and was
highest in the City Central sub-area (10.7%).
Table 10: Overcrowding by sub-area
Sub-areas
No.
Overcrowded
Households
Total
Households
City Central 4644 43467 10.7
City North East 1047 29418 3.6
City South 941 24791 3.8
City West 705 22145 3.2
Bingley 770 28072 2.7
Wharfedale 436 18585 2.3
Keighley & Worth Valley 638 23239 2.7
Bradford 9181 189717 4.8
Source: 2007/8 household survey
5.3 Household characteristics
This section contains information on:
• Household composition
• Household structure and formation
• Future changes in household numbers
5.3.1 Household composition
% Over
crowded
There are approximately 191,900 households in Bradford (2006 figures), an increase
of around 11,200 or 6.2%, since 2001 45 .
The average household size in the Bradford district fell from 2.75 in 1981 to 2.59 in
2004. This was not such a dramatic decrease as in many other areas due mainly to
the sizeable local BME community.
Compared with regional and national data (Table 11), the household type profile of
Bradford District generally mirrors that of the Region and England, although the
District does have considerably more multi-person households and lower proportions
of couples with no children compared with the Region and England.
45 Bradford Regional SHMA, 2008
119

Table 11: Household structure
Household Type
Bradford
(%)
Y & H
(%)
England
(%)
Single Person 28.5 30.6 28.4
Couple (no children) 23.3 29.4 29
Couple (with dependent children) 23.9 20.7 22.1
Lone Parent (with dependent children) 6.9 6.6 7.2
Other multi-person household 17.4 12.7 13.3
Total 100 100 100
Base 187,717 2.1m 20.7m
Source: 2007/8 household survey; 2008 ONS Regional Trends
5.3.2 Household structure and formation
The age profile of Bradford District suggests that the population is generally younger
than that of the region and England (Table 12). Overall, 57.2% of the population are
aged under 40 in comparison with 51.6% for the Region and 51.5% for England.
Table 12: Age profile
Age Group
Bradford
%
Calderdale
%
Leeds
%
Y & H
%
England
%
0-19 28.2 25.2 23.4 24.4 24.2
20-39 29.0 25.3 33.3 27.2 27.3
40-59 24.6 28.5 24.0 26.7 26.9
60-74 11.6 13.6 12.2 14.1 13.9
75+ 6.6 7.4 7.1 7.6 7.8
Total 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0
Base (000s) 497.4 200.1 761.2 5177.3 51092.0
Source: ONS 2006 Mid-Year Population Estimates
There is considerable ethnic diversity within Bradford. 18.4% of households are
headed by someone who identifies with a Black and Asian Minority Ethnic group. The
largest BAME group is Asian/Asian British – Pakistani (11.4%) of the population
followed by White (other than British/Irish) (3.1%), Asian/Asian British – Indian (1.9%)
and Black/Black British (1.4%).
120

Map 1 Black and Asian Minority Ethnic Households in Bradford District
Source: 2007/8 household survey
In Bradford the proportion of all student households in 2001 was 0.3% (or 465
households). While this was lower than the proportion for the region as a whole
(0.6%) it was nonetheless the district with the 7 th highest student population in the
region. The student housing market therefore represents an element of the Bradford
market that should be given due consideration within more detailed local studies 46 .
5.3.3 Gypsies and Travellers
Across the District there are two Local Authority sites. The first, of which, opened in
1973 and is in Esholt – providing 19 plots. The second is the Mary Street site, which
opened in 1976 and now has 28 plots. Overall there is a caravan capacity of 94 – with
56 capacity at Mary Street and 38 at Esholt 47 .
. Latest figures published by LGYH suggest an overall shortfall of 51 pitches over a ten
year period 48 , comprising 37 residential pitches, 6 transient pitches and 8 sites for
travelling showpeople across Bradford District.
46 Local Housing Assessment 2008
47 Local Housing Assessment 2008
48 Brown, P and Niner, P Overview of Gypsy and Traveller Accommodation Assessments: Yorkshire
and Humber Region, Final report for Yorkshire and the Humber Regional Assembly, University of
Salford, March 2009
121

5.3.4 Household Formation Typology
A profile of household formation across all the MSOAs has been developed by the
Housing Strategy section. This profile allows a typology of household formation in
each area to be recognised (Map 2 below).
Map 2: Household Formation Typology
S
Source: Local Housing Assessment, p.27.
122

5.3.5 Future changes in household numbers
Population projections for Bradford District suggest that the total population will
increase from 505,900 in 2008 to 626,300 by 2026 and 655,000 by 2031. What is
particularly noticeable about Bradford’s population projections is the expected
increase in population across all age cohorts (Table 13), with the biggest absolute
increase in the 25-39 age group (31,100 increase to 2008-2026) and the biggest
proportionate increase will be amongst the 75+ age group (42.5% increase 2008-
2026).
Table 13: Population projections for Bradford 2008-2031
Age
Group
No. households (000s)
280
260
240
220
200
180
160
140
120
100
Year and population (000s
2006 2011 2016 2021 2026 2031
Year
Change in
total no.
2008 2011 2016 2021 2026 2031 2008-
2026
2008-
2031
% Change
2008-
2026
2008-
2031
0-14 107.1 113.2 125.7 134.9 138.5 140.2 31.4 33.1 29.3 30.9
15-24 75.7 75.9 73 74.5 82.5 89.6 6.8 13.9 9.0 18.4
25-39 107 114.4 129.1 138.6 138.1 136.6 31.1 29.6 29.1 27.7
40-59 123.6 127 130.9 134.8 143.9 154.7 20.3 31.1 16.4 25.2
60-74 59.3 61.9 66.1 72.3 76 81 16.7 21.7 28.2 36.6
75+ 33.2 34.4 36.9 40.2 47.3 52.9 14.1 19.7 42.5 59.3
Total 505.9 526.8 561.7 595.3 626.3 655 120.4 149.1 23.8 29.5
Source: Sub-national population projections 2006-based
The number of households in Bradford District is expected to increase from 191,000
in 2006 to 253,000 by 2026 (a 32.5% increase) (Figure 6). By 2031, the number of
households is projected to be 269,000 (a 40.8% increase on 2006 figures). For the
period 2006-2026, this equates to an average annual increase of 3,100 households
(which compares with an RSS build rate of 2,700 each year).
Figure 6: Projected household change 2006-2031
Source: Sub-national household projections 2006-based
123

5.4 Housing Markets
This section contains information on:
• Bradford Housing Market Area
• Property values
• Affordability
• Housing Need
5.4.1 Bradford Housing Market Area
Following official guidance, and taking into account travel to work and migration
patterns, research for the regional SHMAs defined Housing Market Areas (HMAs) by
aligning them with whole local authorities or groups of local authorities (Map 3). In
West Yorkshire this led to the definition of five HMAs, made up as follows:
• Leeds;
• Bradford;
• Calderdale;
• Kirklees; and
• Wakefield.
Although the boundaries of the Bradford HMA coincide with the district boundary, it is
recognised that there are important overlaps with adjacent areas 49 .
Map 3: Yorkshire and the Humber: housing market area boundaries
Source: Bradford Regional SHMA 2008, p.9.
49 Bradford Regional SHMA 2008
124

The Bradford HMA represents a self-contained housing market. According to the
2001 Census, 65.0 per cent of individuals’ most recent moves in the year prior to the
Census both originated and ended in the Bradford HMA. Despite this selfcontainment
there are clearly links with other areas, particularly the adjacent HMAs 50 .
The Bradford SHMA concluded that the Bradford District can be described as a selfcontained
housing market area, with 76.8% of households moving within the District
and 78.6% of employees working in the District. This corroborates the findings of
Regional SHMA work prepared by ECOTEC 51 .
5.4.2 Housing Markets in Bradford
The SHMA also considered a range of data to identify a number of distinctive subareas.
The urban area of Bradford was split into four localities, with the remainder of
the District divided into: Bingley, Baildon and Shipley; Keighley and Worth Valley; and
Wharfedale.
Map 4: Bradford sub-areas
50 Bradford Regional SHMA, 2008
51 Strategic Housing Market Assessments for Yorkshire and the Humber: Final Report Bradford Housing Market
Area, Ecotech, June 2008
125

Having carried out this analysis, the proposed sub-areas were considered by the
project steering group and the Housing Partnership. There was general agreement
that this sub-area breakdown was appropriate for Bradford District. However, it is not
suggested that these are different housing market areas but rather distinctive subareas
of a larger Bradford Housing Market Area.
5.4.3 Property Values – Levels and Trends
Figure 7 shows how house prices across Bradford District have increased a
staggering 298% over the period 1996 to 2008, with average prices peaking at
£129,950 during 2008. Figure 8 summarises the latest house price data for Bradford
District which suggests that average prices have been falling since reaching this peak
and by May 2009, average prices had fallen by 23.5% to £103,293. In comparison,
regional prices have fallen by 21% since February 2008.
Within Bradford District there are considerable variations in house prices (Map 3.1).
Map 5 summarises median house prices across Bradford District, clearly illustrating
highest prices in Wharfedale (with prices in excess of £180,000); prices of between
£150,000 and £180,000 in the Bingley/Shipley area, with lowest prices in City Central
and City South areas with median prices of between £90,000 and £120,000. Within
other suburban areas of Bradford City and Keighley/Worth Valley, prices are around
£120,000 to £150,00
Figure 7: House price trends 1996 to 2008: Bradford, Leeds and regional data
Median House Prices (£)
140,000
120,000
100,000
80,000
60,000
40,000
Q1
1999
Source: Land Registry
Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1
2002
Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1
2005
Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1
2008
Bradford Leeds Yorkshire and Humber
126

Figure 8: Recent price trends: Bradford and Y&H Jan 08 – May 2009
Average Price (£)
150,000
140,000
130,000
120,000
110,000
100,000
Jan-08
Source: Land Registry
Mar-08
May-08
Jul-08
Map 5: Median house prices in 2008
Source: Land Registry
Sep-08
Nov-08
Jan-09
Bradford Y&H
Mar-09
May-09
127

5.4.4 Affordability
The relative affordability of open market dwellings in Bradford District is compared
with other 21 districts in Yorkshire and the Humber in Table 3.1. Table 3.1 presents
lower quartile house prices, lower quartile gross income of full-time workers and a
ratio of lower quartile incomes to house prices. Compared with other districts Bradford
ranks as the 8 th most affordable District, with an income to house price ratio of 6.1
(which compares with a ratio of 6.0 for the Region).
Table 14: Relative affordability of lower quartile prices by Local Authority
District
Lower
Quartile
House Price
LQ Gross
Income
each week
Annual
Gross
Income
Kingston upon Hull £75,000 £301 £15,643 4.8
North East Lincolnshire £79,000 £309 £16,043 4.9
Doncaster £85,000 £330 £17,178 4.9
Calderdale £90,000 £337 £17,521 5.1
Barnsley £85,000 £309 £16,091 5.3
Rotherham £93,500 £318 £16,520 5.7
Kirklees £101,000 £332 £17,247 5.9
Bradford £95,000 £301 £15,627 6.1
North Lincolnshire £100,000 £314 £16,347 6.1
Wakefield £100,000 £312 £16,202 6.2
Sheffield £102,167 £316 £16,426 6.2
Leeds £110,000 £336 £17,471 6.3
East Riding of Yorkshire £119,500 £352 £18,290 6.5
Craven £128,000 £371 £19,310 6.6
Scarborough £119,000 £320 £16,618 7.2
Selby £121,500 £312 £16,244 7.5
Hambleton £145,000 £367 £19,100 7.6
Richmondshire £138,000 £324 £16,848 8.2
York £148,100 £342 £17,774 8.3
Ryedale £142,000 £315 £16,400 8.7
Harrogate £160,000 £352 £18,286 8.7
Yorkshire & Humber £100,000 £323 £16,782 6.0
Sources: CLG House Price Statistics; Annual Survey of Hours and Earnings 2008
Income to
House Price
ratio
Within Bradford District there are considerable variations in house price and relative
affordability (see Map 3.1). Map 3.4 considers the relative affordability of properties by
comparing lower quartile incomes with lower quartile property prices. This suggests a
four-way split between highest ratios in Wharfedale (where lower quartile prices are
9.8 times a lower quartile income); a ratio of 7.9 in the Bingley/Shipley area; ratios of
6.1 in City West and City North East sub-areas; and ratios between 5.2 and 5.7 in
remaining Bradford City areas and Keighley/Worth Valley.
128

Map 6: Relative affordability of properties in Bradford
In order to inform the development of the affordable housing policy, extensive
analytical work was carried out by the Housing Strategy Section using
Geodemographics. The results were grouped into three broad HMAs which will form
the basis of affordable housing policy:
• Cluster 1 - High Provision
Characterised by lower than average density, higher incomes, and high lower quartile
house prices. Lower than average level of affordable stock (band A), low social sector
provision. NB: Density is used in an inverse way - as in where there is low density
there is little availability of land for building
• Cluster 3 - Medium Provision
High demand for social rented, above average lower quartile house prices, lower than
average social sector and affordable stock provision.
• Cluster 2 - Low Provision
High social sector, high levels of affordable stock (band A) but high levels of
overcrowding so still substantial need, and average demand for social rented.
129

Map 7: Affordable Housing Requirement
Source: Local Housing Assessment 2008, p.161
5.4.5 Housing Need
A robust and defensible assessment of housing need is essential for the development
of affordable housing policies which need to be articulated in Local Development
Frameworks. PPS3 defines housing need as:
‘the quantity of housing required for households who are unable to access
suitable housing without financial assistance’.
Table 15: Housing need in Bradford District
Category Factor
Homeless
households or
with insecure
tenure
Mismatch of
housing need
and dwellings
N1 Under notice, real threat of notice or lease coming to
an end
N2 Too expensive, and in receipt of housing benefit or in
arrears due to expense
No.
Households
599
437
N3 Overcrowded according to the 'bedroom standard'
2538
model
N4 Too difficult to maintain 30
N5 Couples, people with children and single adults over
25 sharing a kitchen, bathroom or WC with another 415
household
130

Dwelling
amenities and
condition
Social needs
N6 Household containing people with mobility
impairment or other special needs living in unsuitable
accommodation
N7 Lacks a bathroom, kitchen or inside WC and
household does not have resource to make fit
N8 Subject to major disrepair or unfitness and
household does not have resource to make fit
N9 Harassment or threats of harassment from
neighbours or others living in the vicinity which cannot
be resolved except through a move
2109
Total no. households with one or more housing needs 7425
Total Households 189717
% households in need 3.9
Note: A household may have more than one housing need.
Source: 2007/8 Household Survey
In addition to establishing the overall affordable housing requirements SHMA analysis
breaks this requirement down by sub-area grouping, property designation (i.e.
general purpose and older person) and property size (number of bedrooms) as
shown in Table 4.12.
Table 16: Annual affordable housing requirement (gross) 2008/09-2012/13
Designation
No.
Beds
Bingley City
NE
City
Central
Sub-area
City
West
City
South
Keighley
and
Worth
Valley
490
842
316
Wharfedale Total
General
needs
1 -38 -130 -134 -48 8 -25 -8 -375
2 161 -140 219 36 17 -11 70 351
3 -21 176 -35 230 286 -81 49 604
4 27 -6 11 -6 52 28 1 108
Older person 1 -33 50 59 -21 34 -19 10 81
Total
2 6 -3 -6 -6 -6 -4 -2 -21
Net 103 -53 114 185 391 -111 120 749
Gross 194 227 288 266 396 28 130 1530
Source: 2007/8 Household Survey
Conclusions
Future housing development needs to be managed to address relevant markets in
the district, including the BME and affordable markets and meet identified housing
needs of specific groups. It will be vital that planning policy considers housing mix
alongside future economic growth and re-structuring to enable access by all groups,
whilst also addressing the current trend of out-migration, especially within higher
income groups.
131

The RSS requires the District of Bradford to increase its supply of housing target
considerably from 1,390 units per year to 2,700 per annum. Recent research
supports the need for 25-30% of these new homes to be affordable. The current rate
of new housing development averages 1400 homes per year over the last decade, of
which only a small fraction is affordable. These new targets will be a major challenge
to achieve.
5.5 Latest Housing Data
Much of the housing baseline data has been collected from studies which have been
completed over the previous few years. Housing markets are dynamic and therefore it
is important to have the latest figures and data possible to inform policy. The following
studies provide the most up to date analysis of the housing markets in Bradford.
5.5.1 Progress in Leeds City Region (LCR)
The Progress in Leeds City Region Report was published in March 2009, therefore
provides relatively up to date statistics on key indicators.
Table 17: Mean House Prices based on Land Registry Data (£) by LA, 1998-2007
Source: Housing Market and Price Statistics, DCLG. Progress in LCR- Report, 2009
Table 18: Number of Households on LA Waiting Lists, 1998-2008
Source: Housing Statistics, DCLG. Progress in Leeds City Region Report 2009
132

Table 19: Annual Net Housing Completions by LA, 2002/03 - 2007/08
Source: Yorkshire and Humber Assembly. Progress in Leeds City Region Report 2009
5.5.2 Implications of the Economic Recession on LCR Housing Delivery
This report examined the potential impact of the current economic recession on the
long term housing delivery, of the Leeds City Region. The report states that the
housing targets set in the RSS were raised substantially in the early part of 2008, and
within six months the UK entered the first economic recession since the early 1990s.
It is likely that some of the assumptions underpinning at least the early years of
regional housing plans need to be re-examined.
The report states that there are a number of factors at work which will result in the
City Region being unable to meet its RSS numbers in the foreseeable future –
(i) the availability of investment finance for developers,
(ii) the new restrictions on mortgages,
(iii) the general uncertainty over house prices,
(iv) an increasing nervousness about future employment prospects amongst
prospective house buyers
(v) fewer people in employment, reducing the numbers of first time buyers.
Added to this, is the unknown loss of capacity within the development industry.
A further factor with longer term implications is the collapse of the apartment market.
This high density model has played a major role in the recent increase in housing
completions, accounting for 70%-80% of completions in some areas. It now appears
to be substantially and possibly permanently damaged. There is a need to consider
whether a new urban model is required, possibly based on an adapted apartment
model (lower density, higher quality) to provide the scale of new housing required by
the City Region. It is not obvious that the development industry in its current state is
able to develop this model.
133

Figure 7: LCR Housing Completions Scenario based on 1990’s Recession
Source: Implications of the Economic Recession on LCR Housing Delivery-A Report 2009
Figure 8: LCR Housing Completions Scenario
Source: Implications of the Economic Recession on Leeds City Region Housing Delivery, 2009
The report concludes that the current economic and housing market conditions make
the current RSS target un-achievable in the foreseeable future, unless there is
substantial intervention to change conditions on both the supply and demand side.
On the supply side, the availability of finance for investors is crucial, as is the
availability of sites and supporting infrastructure to accelerate new development. Of
134

equal importance is the development of a new model to replace the apartment model
which has dominated development is recent years.
Also there is now considerable uncertainty with regard to population growth and
household formation rates. The economic recession is likely to reduce the number of
economic migrants in the region as employment opportunities decline, and lower
levels of employment and the effect of the credit crunch will reduce new household
formation, particularly with regard to younger people. As important, the ability of the
development industry and financial sector to deliver a high number of completions
year on year is now open to question.
5.6 Key Facts
Stock Profile
• Total dwelling stock as at April 2009 was 208,473 residential dwellings across
Bradford District
• The stock is dominated by private sector dwellings, with levels of social housing
well below the regional average.
• Levels of private renting have increased over the last few years.
• The stock is dominated by terraced housing, which accounts for roughly half of
the total stock, and semi-detached housing.
• Reflective of limited local offer of higher value housing is the fact that detached
homes make up a smaller proportion than the regional and national average.
• Flats represent a smaller percentage of the stock than the national average.
Stock condition
• The stock contains a larger proportion of pre-1919 and interwar stock compared
to the national average. Roughly 40% of Bradford’s total stock was built pre-1919
compared to the national average of 25%.
• Bradford has very high levels of private sector non-decency and a higher
percentage of dwellings unfit than other West Yorkshire authorities.
• 6% of homes are back-to-back, a fundamentally unsatisfactory house type that is
now largely confined to Bradford and Leeds. This older terraced stock brings with
it serious housing condition problems that continue to be a major challenge.
135

Household characteristics
• Compared with regional and national data the household type profile of Bradford
District generally mirrors that of the Region and England, although the District
does have considerably more multi-person households and lower proportions of
couples with no children compared with the Region and England.
• The average household size in the Bradford district is 2.5. This is not as low in
many other areas due mainly to the sizeable local BME community.
• Roughly a quarter of Bradford’s population is under 15, this is higher than regional
and national averages.
• Bradford has a significantly higher proportion of minority ethnic households than
the region as a whole.
• The older population in Bradford is not as significant as in some other areas of the
region
Future Change in Households
• The population of Bradford is growing and is forecast to grow very strongly in
future years. Economic growth and restructuring across the sub-region; strong
B&ME population growth; and changing and increasing patterns of international
migration are major drivers which will continue to determine the direction of
housing market change in Bradford over coming years.
• The period 2008-2026 is expected to see substantial household growth in the
Bradford district, with an additional 62,000 households estimated.
• This predicted increase in households is reflected in the doubling of the RSS
annual housing target for Bradford to 2700 per year.
• The most significant increase is predicted in single person households, which are
predicted to become the single most dominant household group in Bradford by
2029.
• Average household size is predicted to decrease, though not by as much as other
regional local authorities, due to Bradford’s large BME population.
• Although growth of the older population (aged 65+) is not expected to be as
marked in Bradford as in some other areas of the region, the district will need to
commence planning for increasing demand as nearly a third of the district’s
population increase will be accounted for by a growing population of older people.
136

• Bradford has a significantly higher proportion of BME households than the region
as a whole. Independent forecasts predict very strong population and household
growth in Bradford driven by strong natural growth amongst the indigenous South
Asian population.
Housing Markets
• Bradford HMA is relatively self contained but there are links to Leeds, Kirklees,
Craven and North Yorkshire.
• Bradford consists of a range of complex and diverse housing markets, and
although many areas have healthy housing markets others exhibit symptoms of
fragility.
• Despite house prices increases across the district over recent years, the highest
priced markets remain concentrated in suburban and semi-rural locations such as
Wharfedale, Bingley and Baildon.
• The inner suburbs remain characterised by lower sales values, although the
expanding city centre market is emerging as an area of higher value properties at
the very centre of Bradford.
• The shortage of affordable housing in rural areas is a key issue for the district.
• Overcrowding and poor housing are issues in central Bradford. The inner suburbs
of Bradford suffer from higher levels of overcrowding than other areas of the
district due to a coalescence of small properties and large household sizes.
• The District’s B&ME community is the major driver of population and household
growth and as such, due to a mix of issues including lower incomes and strong
ties to specific neighbourhoods, there is a high risk that established B&ME
neighbourhoods at the urban core of the District will ‘overheat’.
Affordability
• House prices are below the regional average, but in the few years the district has
experienced faster rising house prices than nationally and regionally.
• Affordability ratios for Bradford are slowly increasing, though are still below those
of West Yorkshire and the Region. However, the district-wide picture masks much
larger localised affordability problems.
• Affordability issues are most obvious in Wharfedale, Airedale, the Worth Valley
and some outlying suburbs of Bradford.
137

Sources:
• Affordability is a major issue for both urban and rural areas due to a low income
and high house prices respectively.
• The annual shortfall of affordable housing supply is currently estimated to be in
the region of 749 (net) units per year
• BMDC (2008) Bradford District Local Housing Assessment 2008. Bradford Council.
• BMDC (2008) Bradford Future of Social Housing Study 2007-08. Report Dated
August 2008. Bradford Council.
• BMDC (2008) Bradford Housing Requirements Study 2007-08. Report Dated July
2008. Bradford Council.
• BMDC (2008) Private Sector House Condition Survey 2007. Report Dated June
2008. Bradford Council.
• BMDC (2009) Joint Housing Strategy for Bradford. 2008-2020. Report Dated
February 2009. Department of Regeneration, Bradford Council.
• BMDC (2010) Joint Housing Strategy for Bradford Delivery Plan 2010-12. Bradford
Council.
• BMDC (2010) Bradford District Strategic Housing Market Assessments 2010. Report
Dated June 2010. Bradford Council.
• ECOTEC (2007) West Yorkshire B&ME Housing Market Study. Report Dated April
2007. West Yorkshire Housing Partnership.
• EKOS Consulting (UK) Ltd (2009) Implications of the Economic Recession on Leeds
City Region Housing Delivery. A Report to Leeds City Region. Report Dated February
2009.
• Yorkshire and Humber Assembly (2008) Strategic Housing Market Assessments for
Yorkshire & the Humber Final report: Bradford Housing Market Area. Report dated
June 2008. Y&H Assembly.
138

6. SOCIAL AND COMMUNITY FACILITIES
Planning Policy Statement 1 supports the promotion of health and well being and requires
local planning authorities to recognize the link between social inequalities in the provision of
social and community facilities including health services, access to open spaces in the
natural and built environment and the location of schools, shops and other facilities to reduce
the need to travel. In delivering such facilities it is important that the LDF ensures that
suitable locations are found for these uses which address local needs, whilst continuing to
protect and enhance the natural built environment with high quality and inclusive designs.
Previous studies by the council have highlighted that there are a number and variety of social
and community facilities located within Bradford district with various degree of service
capacity and catchment area. Although there are evidence of overall lack in quantity and
quality of such provisions, access to these facilities are generally very good across the
district. For example 96.9% and 99.8% of all households in the districts are within 15 and 30
minutes of a GP by public transport. 90.5% and 99.7% of all households are within 30 and
60 minutes of a hospital by public transport. 92.2% and 99.7% of 12-17 years are within 20
and 40 minutes of a secondary school by public transport. Figures are similar for access to
primary schools. 97.5% and 99.8% of people of working age are within 20 and 40 minutes of
an employment centre by public transport. Employment centres are defined as Super Output
Areas with more than 499 jobs. 52
This section of the baseline analysis report will look into the detail of these existing social and
community facilities spread across the district and will highlight their performances and the
major issues they are facing. Findings from a number of existing studies and reports have
been used for this purpose including the following-
• The Big Plan- Sustainable Community Strategy for Bradford 2008-11(CBMDC, 2008)
• Bradford Positioning Statement (Regeneris, 2005)
• Open Space and Built Recreational Facilities SPD (CBMDC, 2007)
• Bradford Open Space, Sport and Recreation Study (July 2006)
• Sport and Recreation Facilities Assessment (Strategic Leisure ltd., 2008)
• Bradford District Children and Young People Needs Analysis (CBMDC, 2008)
• Children and Young People’s Plan 2009-12 (CBMDC,2008)
• Strategic Learning Plan 2006-09 (Bradford and District Learning Partnership, 2007)
• West Yorkshire Fire and Rescue Service- Bradford District Action Plan 2007/8-2008/09
• Yorkshire Ambulance Service Annual Report + Corporate Plan (YAS, 2007-09)
• West Yorkshire Police Annual Report 2006/7-2008/09 (West Yorkshire Police, 2006-2008)
• West Yorkshire Gypsy and Travellers Accommodation Assessment (Powell R. et al, 2008)
52 CS SA baseline.
139

6.1 Education
Councils as Local Education Authorities have a statutory obligation to provide education
according to the Department for Education and Skills (DfES) guidance.
Following Bradford LEA's critical OfSTED inspection of 2000, Bradford Council decided to
establish a strategic partnership for the provision of school-focused educational services.
This involved the procurement of a direct service provider who would work in partnership with
and under contract to the Council. The contract was awarded to Serco which took up its
responsibilities in the contract under the name of Education Bradford in July 2001. It is a ten
year contract and the largest of its type in Europe. The contract is coming towards an end in
July 2011 and the council is currently working towards setting up programmes for delivering
the future education and related services in the district.
6.1.1 Schools in Bradford
There are over 230 schools across Bradford District. The majority of these schools are state
schools managed by the Local Education Authority (LEA), others are independent.
ADD GIS MAP SHOWING STATE RUN NURSERY SCHOOLS, PRIMARY, SECONDARY SCHOOLS
Faith state schools
• 19 Catholic voluntary aided primary schools and 3 secondary Catholic voluntary
aided schools.
• There are 14 Church of England voluntary controlled primary schools and 11 Church
of England voluntary aided primary schools.
• There is 1 Muslim girl’s secondary school.
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/faith_state_schools/
Foundation Schools
There are 12 foundation schools in the district. 9 of these are primary schools and the others
are secondary.
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/foundation_schools/
Dixon academy is currently the only selective school in the district.
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/selective_schools/
All Through schools
There are 2 all through schools, age range 2 – 18, which are both Academies.
Academies
There are 3 other secondary Academies.
140

Specialist schools
All secondary schools now have a specialism.
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/specialist_schools/
Special schools
• There are 3 co-located primary special schools.
• There are 3 co-located secondary special schools
• There is 1 Communication and Interaction special school.
• There is 1 special school for deaf children.
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/state_special_school
s/
Supplementary Schools
The LEA has been providing support to Supplementary Schools for mother tongue teaching
since 1983. There are over 80 Supplementary Schools registered with Education Bradford
providing a range of mother tongue teaching classes in Arabic, Bengali, Gujarati, Punjabi,
Hindi, Polish, Italian and Urdu as the main languages. These schools cater for approximately
8,000 minority ethnic pupils involving 300 community tutors. Full detail of the supplementary
schools education services can be found from the following lnk-
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/supplementary_scho
ols/
Voluntary Controlled and Aided Schools
There are 39 voluntary Aided schools in the district. 31 of these are primary schools and
others are secondary.
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/voluntary_aided_sch
ools/
There are 15 Voluntary Controlled schools in the district. 14 of these are primary schools and
1 is a secondary school.
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/voluntary_controlled_
schools/
Nursery and pre-school
There are 7 state nursery schools in Bradford district.
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/state_nursery_school
s/
141

Primary
There are 159 primary schools in Bradford district.
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/state_primary_school
s/
Secondary
There are 29 secondary schools in Bradford district.
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/state_secondary_sch
ools/
6.1.2 School Performances
Bradford has 7 Nursery Schools, 159 Primary Schools, 29 Secondary Schools, 11 Special
Schools, 4 Secondary Pupil Referral Units (PRUs), 1 Primary PRU and 2 Hospital based
PRUs. In addition, there are 4 Academies.
In January 2008 the total pupil population was 87,335, of which 52,915 were in the Nursery
and Primary Sector. The number of pupils in Bradford schools is increasing in the younger
age groups.
Nursery and Primary schools
The 7 state nursery schools in Bradford district are:
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/state_nursery_school
s/
The 159 primary schools in Bradford district are:
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/state_primary_school
s/
The latest figures from DCSF statistics 53 show that although there is significant variation in
achievement level over time for each school in Bradford, most Primary schools are showing
an overall improvement in their KS2 results since 2003 and the local authority average has
risen closer to the national average; It also highlights that pupils in most deprived areas of
the district are attaining a lower level than other pupils in the comparatively affluent areas,
impacting on the future skills and opportunities available to them. This will also impact on the
desirability of schools for new families moving into the area.
Table: Bradford Key Stage 2 results 2008
English Mathematics Science
both English
and
Mathematics
Average
point
score
L4+ L5 A/T L4+ L5 A/T L4+ L5 A/T L4+
LA Average 77% 25% 75% 26% 83% 37% 69% 27.1
England
Average
Source: DCSF
81% 30% 79% 31% 88% 44% 73% 27.9
53 http://www.dcsf.gov.uk/cgibin/performancetables/group_08.pl?Mode=Z&No=380&Base=p&Type=LA&Begin=s&Phase=p&Year=08
142

Table: Bradford GCSE attainment rate
% of 15 year old pupils achieving 5+A*-
C (and equivalent) including English
and maths GCSEs
Data collected from the primary schools at the end of June 2009 showed a reduction in the
number of schools below the government’s floor target as compared with 2008.
Source: Bradford and Airedale NHS PCT JSNA 2009
By 2010, the aim is that the number of primary schools below 65% in both English and
mathematics will have been reduced to five and that by 2011, no schools will be below the
floor target.
Overall outcomes at this stage for 2008 remained low but there were signs of of improvement
that contrasted with the previous declines. KS2 and KS4 attainment levels show steady
improvement over time.
Secondary schools
% of 15 old pupils achieving 5+A*-C
(and equivalent)
2005 2006 2007 2008 2005 2006 2007 2008
LA Average 32.3% 34.0% 36.2% 36.7% 46.5% 50.0% 51.9% 56.4%
England Average 44.3% 45.3% 46.0% 47.3% 56.3% 58.5% 60.9% 64.8%
Source: DCSF 54
There are 29 secondary schools in Bradford district
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/education_and_skills/schools/school_types/state_secondary_sch
ools/
The percentage of Bradford students gaining 5 or more A*-C GCSE grades is well below the
national figure, reflecting the problems the LEA has faced in achieving strong results.
However, secondary schools have shown a continuing rapid improvement in standards year
on year, faster than the national rate of improvement. There has been an overall 17.1%
attainment improvement for pupils achieving at least 5 GCSE’s (A-C grades) since 2003
compared to the national average of 13.5% with some schools showing exceptional
improvement levels of over 20%. 55 Schools like Bradford Grammar School, Bradford Girls’
Grammar School and Dixons City Academy have achieved 99% -100% success rates which
is well above the national achievement rate.
54 http://www.dcsf.gov.uk/cgibin/performancetables/group_08.pl?Mode=Z&Type=LA&Begin=b&No=380&Base=c&Phase=1&F=1&L=50&
Year=08
55 Bradford Strategic Education partnership Annual Review 2008.
143

In 2008 nine secondary schools were below floor targets. Of these six are predicting
improved performance above their targets. Four schools are not expecting to meet floor
targets in 2009. There are three further schools whose estimates are only just above floor
targets.
Source: Bradford and Airedale NHS PCT JSNA 2009
However, on the positive side, Schools in bradford are becoming more self-evaluating, selfimproving
and have the strategies in place to be able to bring about sustainable changes. 4
of the district's secondary schools (Belle Vue Girls' School, Carlton Bolling College, Grange
Technology College and Laisterdyke Business and Enterprise College) were among 56
schools nationally which recorded a good Value Added score in a report by the Specialist
Schools and Academies Trust.
Buttershaw Business and Enterprise College, Greenhead High School, Queensbury School,
Rhodesway School and Visual Arts College and Thornton Grammar were also among 359
specialist schools and academies which were recognised by the Trust earlier this year for
making outstanding improvements to their GCSE results.
There are however, some schools which still rate significantly under the national average and
consequently the Government are now supporting Bradford in a further re building and
renewal programme at both primary and secondary level in Bradford.
6.1.3 Other Achievements
Outstanding performance
More than one in ten Bradford schools have now been judged as Outstanding by Ofsted
since the inspection framework changed in 2005. Out of 205 schools in the district, Ofsted
has now rated 25 as Outstanding. Eight of these schools were specifically praised and
named in Ofsted's recently published Annual Report. They are: Allerton Primary School,
Burley Oaks Primary School, Burley and Woodhead C of E Primary School, Dixons City
Academy, Feversham College, Grange Technology College. Shibden Head Primary School
and St Joseph’s Catholic Primary School, Bingley.
The others judged as Outstanding by Ofsted since 2005 are: All Saints' CE Primary (Ilkley),
Canterbury Children's Centre and Nursery, Carlton Bolling College, Copthorne Primary,
Eldwick Primary, Killinghall Primary, Lilycroft Nursery, Long Lee Primary, Midland Road
Nursery and Children's Centre, Myrtle Park Primary, Netherlands Avenue School &
Community Nursery, Newby Primary, Oakworth Primary, St Anthony's Catholic Primary,
144

(Clayton), St John's C of E Primary, The Sacred Heart Catholic Primary and Woodlands C of
E Primary School.
Improved attendance
The figures for unauthorised absence across the district have reduced over the years. This
reflects the hard work of parents, schools and the LEA, and means that all those children
whose attendance has improved can expect to see improved results at school. The
Department for Children, Schools and Families (DCSF) reported that the number of half-days
missed without permission by pupils between the beginning of the autumn term in 2007 and
the end of the spring term in 2008 had gone down by nearly four per cent. It should however
be noted that unauthorised absences in district’s primary and secondary schools are still a
great challenge. Data released by the Department for Children, Schools and Families shows
that between autumn 2008 and spring 2009 term, 1.28 per cent of all half days missed in
Bradford primary schools were down to unauthorised absence – almost twice as bad as the
national average, 0.65 per cent.
The percentage of primary school pupils classed as persistent absentees is also the worst in
the county, at 3.4 per cent, despite there being 214 fewer persistently-absent pupils
compared with the same period the year before.
By percentage of overall absence, the rate of unauthorised absence in Bradford’s secondary
schools is only better than Hull out of all 15 local authorities in Yorkshire and the Humber.
However, persistent absences have fallen by more than 20 per cent in secondary schools,
with 509 fewer students persistently absent than during the same period the year before.
Overall attendance in secondary schools has also risen by 0.4 per cent to 91.45 per cent. 56
Madrassah* Literacy Project
Education Bradford has been working in partnership with Quest for Economic Development
(QED-UK), a Bradford based charity on the Madrassah Literacy Project to develop better
links between mainstream and supplementary schools. The project has two major aims. The
first is to raise levels of attainment. The second, which is equally important, is to promote
community cohesion. Developing collaborative ways of working will create a better
understanding of the role and importance of Madrassahs to the Muslim community and the
positive benefits they can have on behaviour, attendance at school and ultimately attainment
levels. Mainstream schools will get an opportunity to learn more about how Madrassahs
operate and they, in turn, will get an opportunity to learn different approaches to teaching
from mainstream schools.
(*An after-school learning centre based in a more traditional mosque setting where Muslim
children learn and discuss the practices of their religion.)
New technology to combat bullying
Pupils in some Bradford schools are now using a new online risk assessment tool which
efficiently and effectively measures and identifies pupils who may be at risk of being bullied,
56 http://www.thetelegraphandargus.co.uk/news/4693274.Truancy_rates_are_worst_in_Yorkshire/
145

or have issues which have not previously been detected. The new technology “Assesswise
to beat bullying” is an online survey which has been designed through a partnership between
an educational software provider and the charity Beatbullying with support from Education
Bradford’s Children and Young People’s Public Health Team. This tool highlights if any pupils
are at risk, thereby allowing intervention from the relevant professionals. This ties in greatly
with school improvement across schools as it allows any problem to be dealt with
immediately giving students a greater chance of achieving their full potential. Pupils can
complete the survey at any time from any location as it is web based.
National Healthy Schools success
Bradford's National Healthy Schools Programme continues to improve. With a total of 76% of
primary, secondary PRU and special schools now having achieved the award the district
retains its green rated Government status. Bradford’s Secondary PRU was the first of such
provision to achieve the status and highlighted as models of good practice determining the
framework now being rolled out from Government Office.
Hospital Teaching
The two units which provide education for children whilst they are in hospital have been
praised by Ofsted for providing "outstanding care, support and guidance". Both units, based
at Bradford Royal Infirmary and Airedale Hospital, are run by Education Bradford, and have
received Good overall judgements from the regulatory body.
Parental Involvement
Bradford Council’s Parental Involvement Programme, now in its sixth year, provides a broad
framework of positive parental engagement. There are currently 80 school - based Parental
Involvement Workers providing opportunities for parents to become involved in ways which
will support learning and lead to significant improvements.
This is achieved within a framework of three broad areas; parents’ involvement in the life of
the school; involvement in supporting children at home and developing their own learning
and skills, all of which have a profound impact on the well being of the family. This leads to a
positive impact on a child’s behaviour, attendance and achievement.
Since launching the Investors in Families quality mark in April 2008, six schools have
successfully received the award, and now others are working towards the quality mark.
Investors in Families promotes the importance of family-friendly approaches and enables
schools to demonstrate a whole school commitment to working with families.
6.1.4 Management of Schools
The Learning and Skills Council (LSC) is responsible for post-16 education in the area and
Bradford Council is the Local Education Authority (LEA), which is in charge of all primary and
secondary education in the area. Higher education establishments are not the responsibility
of either of these organisations. They are quasi-autonomous bodies.
146

Across Bradford District education provision for under 18’s has been contracted out, with
BMDC giving authority to Education Bradford (managed by Serco/QAA) to provide
educational support services to all the schools in the district for 10 years. In 2000 Bradford
failed its OFSTED inspection, and it was not felt that the existing BNDC education
department had the capacity to deliver improvements. The new organisation was therefore
formed in 2001 to take responsibility for managing and providing school improvement
services, special education needs, learning support, personnel, finance, policy and planning,
data and research, admissions, exclusions, welfare transport, music, library and outdoor
educational services. With a contract life value of £360 million, the key priority for Education
Bradford is to raise levels of achievement for pupils across the district.
So far perceptions of Education Bradford have been positive. The stakeholders questioned
felt that schools had improved and that the organisation had been able to attract high quality
effective management staff that would otherwise not have been accessible to the District.
However, as the organisation is a private entity, it delivers only within the responsibilities of
its contract, and this may have implications for any efforts to provide integrated Early Years
and post-18 education which falls outside of their remit.
The two-tier system
A reorganisation of primary and secondary schools in the Bradford district following the failed
OFSTED led to the merger of middle schools into a two-tier system. The changes came into
force in 2000 with the closure of middle schools and secondary establishments beginning to
accept Year 7 and Year 8 pupils. The rational behind these changes relates to the current
testing regime, which sees Key Stage testing at ages 7, 11 and 16, whilst middle schools
would host children aged 9-13, thus overlapping these boundaries. In addition, upper schools
are better equipped than middle schools and therefore as secondary schools can give a
wider range and better standard of facilities to younger pupils.
There are arguments against the merger, including the mixing of Year 7 and 8 pupils with
much older children at senior schools and the difficulties in adapting facilities and teaching
staff to the new roles. The impacts of this restructuring are starting to filter through, but a
period of settlement is required before the full impact will be felt within the city’s educational
institutions. The changes to the system aim to improve the quality of the worst performing
schools, particularly those in inner city locations such as those for whom the City Centre area
falls into the catchment.
Confederations
The secondary schools in the area are organising themselves into Confederations. The
Confederations co-ordinate post 16 (and sometimes post-14) education for each area of 5-6
schools and colleges within Bradford, to provide an educational guarantee system for the
district.
The LSC have taken control of funding for post 16 education away from schools and it is now
distributed through the confederations, ensuring that schools, colleges and work-based
learning providers co-operate on provision. The idea is to rationalise post 16 provision to
provide more choice, new courses, specialist provision etc. and to make the provision
147

available more effective. The Confederations will equalise funding between schools and
provide the more economical delivery of a wider range of courses. This approach forces
organisations to take a strategic approach to delivery within the city and may change the
current nature of provision outlined in this report.
6.1.5 School Places
The number of children in primary schools has been growing steadily over the last 5 years
due to an increase in the birth rate and consequent increase in the number of 4 year olds
being admitted into reception year. However, the total number of pupils in secondary schools
has remained relatively stable over the same period, although the smaller number of
students in the upper age range masks the rise in the number of students being admitted to
Year 7.
Based on birth data provided to the Local Authority by the Health Authority the number of
reception places required is forecast to rise further. Secondary pupil numbers are also
forecast to rise by at least 14% by 2018 and by 2015 an additional 3,500 new student places
are needed, made up of increased statutory age pupil places (11-16) and post -16.
However the increase in demand for places is not evenly distributed across the District but
concentrated in specific geographical areas, particularly the inner-city, its immediate
surrounding areas and Wharfe Valley which experience the greatest pressure where
population density has increased significantly.
In addition parental expectations together with their cultural and religious beliefs often steers
parents towards making choices about specific schools. However, school performance and
hence popularity of schools changes over time which makes it increasingly difficult to identify
where changes in demand will occur. There is, therefore, a need to have the surplus allowed
by the DfE (5%) to be able to accommodate parental choice.
Moreover, the number of appeals against allocated school places in Bradford is already the
highest in the country. Anticipated increases in the school-age population will have a
negative impact on the schools’ ability to meet parental preferences and further increase the
number of appeals lodged unless additional places are created.
Responding to demand- Over the following 5 year period in order to remedy the shortfall in
places the District needs to have increased permanent capacity by 800 in each year group
from Year 2 to Year 6 to accommodate the children as they progress through the primary
sector, a total of a further 4000 places across the Primary School estate, as a minimum.
To accommodate this anticipated growth the Local Authority has embarked on a programme
of creating additional school places within a number of existing primary schools across the
District. This will be delivered through a gradual increase in the size of a number of schools
over a seven year period as the increased cohorts move through the school. When fully
implemented these increases will result in an overall surplus capacity, based on current
figures, across the primary sector of approximately 5%.
148

The building work to accommodate these increased numbers has been started with the first
phase of a multi phased programme. Capital funding to cover the costs of these expansions
is provided by the DfE. However, the Local Authority has only received notification of the
level of capital funding for 2011/12 with further levels of funding yet to be announced.
In the secondary sector to accommodate the total number of additional pupil places for 11-16
and the additional post 16 provision would require providing the equivalent of two new
schools. The growth areas are unpredictable but over time there is a pattern of pupil
increases concentrated in the inner Bradford area, North and West of the inner area in the
Wharfe Valley.
Building Schools for the Future (BSF) Phase 3 had provided a plan for the delivery of the
growing young population in the district. Population growth was not increasing when Phase I
& II schools were planned. Under the BSF Phase 3 plans for 16 forms of entry increase (480
per year group) were to be accommodated across 9 schools. It was proposed that two school
buildings would be completely replaced. The remaining schools were to be remodelled and
refurbished. The schools were:-
Belle Vue Boys: +2 FEs
Belle Vue Girls +2 FEs
Carlton Bolling +2 FEs
Challenge College +1 FE
Ilkley Grammar +1 FE planned rebuild
Laisterdyke BEC +2 FEs
Nab Wood +3 FEs planned rebuild
Queensbury +1 FE
Thornton Grammar +2 FEs
In addition, it was proposed that Bingley Grammar should be substantially rebuilt in order to
address suitability and condition issues. 57
However with the cessation of the BSF programme other sources of capital are now being
actively pursued to address the situation. For admissions in September 2011, a number of
secondary schools have voluntarily agreed to admit above their Published Admission
Number (PAN) to cater for the additional places required.
Two Free Schools have been approved in the District. The Kings Science Academy is for
children aged 7 to 11 and has opened in September 2011 with 140 year 7 pupils. A further
57 The Council completed 3 new secondary schools built on time under BSF Phase 1 at Titus Salt,
Tong High School and Buttershaw BEC, and which were opened on schedule in August 2008. Under
Phase 2 the LA has provided and funded three new primary special schools at Chellow, Delius and
Phoenix, together with a new primary mainstream school, Merlin Top, all opened on time in April 2010.
The LA has also provided four new, fit-for- purpose secondary mainstream schools co-located with
three new secondary special schools and a hearing impaired unit. They were completed in 2011.
149

free school, Rainbow Free School for children aged 4 to 11 has also been approved to preopening
stage for September 2011.
Further free school applications have been submitted to the Department for Education (DfE);
however it has not been possible to anticipate which of these might be successful.
Schools converting from maintained to Academy status have had little if any impact on
admissions for September 2011. However, as these schools become their own admissions
authority with the ability to set their own admission numbers and admissions policies this
could have future implications. As yet this is difficult to anticipate but the LA will maintain
close scrutiny of the situation as it develops.
6.1.7 Further and Higher Education
There are four further education sixth form colleges in Bradford district, they are:-
• Bradford College- Bradford College offers more university level qualifications than
any other college in England with approximately 170 full and part time HE courses to
choose from. Most of the college's degrees are validated by Leeds Metropolitan
University; previously they were validated by the University of Bradford with the final
cohort graduating in December 2007. Bradford College plans to apply for university
status and award their own degrees, the application process due to formally start in
May 2008.
• Park Lane College, Keighley- this is the former Keighley College now merged with
the Park Lane College Leeds to form the new Leeds City College.
• Shipley College The college is mainly based in the village of Saltaire but there is a
Bingley Connection building, which is a building based in the centre of Bingley.
There are a wide range of courses offered at Shipley College, but they mainly offer
BTEC's as full time courses. The BTECs on offer include BTEC National Diploma,
First Diploma and Introductory Diplomas and Certificates.
• Bowling Community College Bowling College offers full and part-time courses for
students, from first steps back into education through to GCSEs, NVQs, NOCN
Level 2 Progression Award and Access to Higher Education. Student can study at
the main site in East Bowling or at various community venues in Barkerend,
Undercliffe, Canterbury, West Bowling, Girlington and Woodside.
ADD GIS MAP SHOWING LOCATION OF FE COLLEGES AND UNIVERISTY IN BRADFORD.
The University of Bradford is the only establishment offering Higher Education in Bradford
District.
150

The University has around 140 degree courses at undergraduate level and around 80 at
postgraduate level. These are spread across the 7 Academic Schools of Engineering, Design
and Technology, Health Studies, Informatics, Life Sciences (including Archaeological,
Geographical and Environmental Sciences), Management, Social and International Studies,
and the School of Lifelong Education and Development, which also offers part-time courses.
The University also has an excellent graduate employment record, and was rated 2nd out of
99 UK Universities for employment in The Times Good University Guide 2006 and ranked
number 1 for employment in the North of England.
However, according to the Complete University Guide 2010 58 (based on data from the
2007/08 academic year), Bradford’s graduate prospects score has fell from 73.9, the best in
Yorkshire last year, to 70.4 – a trend only replicated in the region at York University and the
University has slipped eight places to 57th in a national higher education league table.
Students graduating with good degrees however rose by the third highest margin in
Yorkshire and Humber and it keeps its place as fifth best out of the nine universities in the
region, ahead of Sheffield Hallam but below Hull.
Despite its lower research score, the guide recognised that Bradford has several areas of
world-class research including in peace studies, polymers, mechanical engineering, medical
biosciences and archaeological science.
The guide reports that the university has more than 1,500 computer workstations across the
campus, 500 more than last year, while the main library contains more than 600,000 books,
up 20 per cent in 12 months.
The University received four applications per place during the past academic year, down
from seven last year. Its male/female student ratio is 49:51, state/private school ratio 96:4
and home/international ratio 84:16.
Information on current admission levels, demand for college places and adult learning
requirements and demand is not available at present. This data will be requested from the
appropriate key partners and used to update and inform this report.
6.2 Health
Health care remains the responsibility of central government through the Department of
Health (DoH). A number of organisations including Bradford and Airedale Primary Care Trust
(PCT), Bradford Teaching Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust and Airedale NHS Trust
implement the local provision of health care within Bradford. They direct financial resources
to primary and secondary care providers and regulate the primary care activities of General
Practitioners (GPs), Dentists, Optometrists and Pharmacists.
Their primary objectives are to:
58 The complete University Guide (2009) University League Table 2010 [online].
151

6.2.1 Primary Care
• Provide excellent primary and acute health care
• To ensure patients receive a seamless “care pathway” through Primary
Services to acute where relevant.
• To reduce inequalities in health outcomes.
Bradford and Airedale Teaching Primary Care Trust is reponsible to provide primary health
care and community services or to commission them from other providers. The tPCT merged
from four separate PCTs (Airedale, North Bradford, South and West, and City) in 2007.
Bradford and Airedale tPCT is also a ‘Teaching Primary Care Trust’, which has specific
hospitals where medical students can learn in a practical setting.
The tPCT is managed by a Board of directors made up of eight directors and headed by a
Chief Executive. The Chairman of the Trust is a non-executive director. The finances of the
tPCT, like most PCTs and tPCTs, are largely determined by directives set by the Strategic
Health Authority or the Department of Health.
One of the challenges faced by Primary Health Care in the district is to replace or refurbish
Health Care Premises that are no longer fit for purpose. The Department of Health policy
paper, ‘Our Health, Our Care, Our Say’, promotes Primary Care Trusts to develop care
facilities in local communities, in liaison with Social Services Departments. In the Bradford
District, a new provision is being achieved through:
• Remodelling of existing G.P Surgeries
• Re-siting of GP Surgeries into multi-purpose Community Health Centres
• Re-siting of Health Care Services into Multi-Agency shared facilities
Bradford and Airedale tPCT has achieved a very positive progress over the recent years
against a number of key performance indicators, while many of their objectives still require
consistent action over a number of years before the achievement can be confirmed. In
particular, attention is drawn to the following positive performance areas:
• addressing health inequalities –
- successfully achieved the demanding target of supporting over 4,000
people to quit smoking at four weeks. Not only has performance in terms of
the number of successful quitters been exceptional but the quit rate has
increased to over 50%compared to our 2006/07 figures
- NHS dentistry in Bradford and Airedale received a £2.1m boost in 2007-
2008, making way for over 26,000 additional patients to be treated locally.
An extra £1.5m will be spent annually to establish and maintain three new
NHS dental surgeries in Keighley, Bradford and Ilkley. The surgeries will
provide on-going preventative NHS dental care up 15,000 patients living in
the district.
152

Currently there are 62 dental practices in the district providing some level
of NHS dentistry. A further four provide only orthodontic care. Four
practices operating in Ilkley and the Wharfe Valley have limited lists,
meaning they will only see children and patients exempt from paying NHS
charges.
An additional £1.9 million is being invested in NHS dentistry in 2008-2009.
• securing high quality healthcare –
- the Bradford and Airedale health economy achieved the 18 week referral to
treatment national milestone for March 2008. Performance in terms of
admitted patients seen within 18 weeks was 86.4% and for non-admitted
patients was 91.1%- above the milestone targets of 85%and 90%
respectively.
- up to 60 percent of patients were able to book direct into a first outpatient
appointment of their choice, when referred by their GP, using the new
Choose and Book system. From April 2008, ‘free choice’ will be introduced
where the majority of patients can choose to go to any hospital or treatment
centre across the country.
- Bradford and Airedale tPCT is one of the first PCTs in the country to pilot a
new weather forecasting system with help from the Met Office to alert
people suffering from chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) with
conditions such as emphysema or bronchitis about any spells of cold
weather. Bradford has around 9,000 people with COPD, and some of the
highest rates of people admitted to hospital with COPD in the country.
Around 5,000 COPD patients across the district received a phone call last
winter to let them know in advance about such changes in weather and
helped them stay well and avoid being admitted to hospital.
• system reform –
- significant progress has been made by the four alliances concerning
practice-based commissioning, demonstrated by the delivery of
commissioning plans which reflect their health priorities. Additionally, they
have commissioned an enhanced range of services from the voluntary and
community sector to address health inequality priorities, including obesity,
smoking, mental health, isolation and loneliness, and sexual health.
- The tPCT is an ‘early adopter’ of the NHS Care Records Service which will
allow authorised doctors and nurses to share patient information
electronically - so helping patients to get quicker, better, safer care. The
Ridge Medical Practice, Bradford, and three Keighley practices - Farfield,
Ling House Medical Centre and Holycroft Surgery are the first to join the
scheme, with more coming on board in the next financial year.
153

• provider development –
- good progress has been demonstrated in learning disability, mental health
and end of life care services. One-sixth of the population in England
suffers from a mental health problem every day, costing the nation £77
billion a year 59 . With this in mind, an Early Intervention in Psychosis (EIP)
team has been set up to provide immediate and intensive treatment for
people with early signs of psychosis. Earlier this year, reviews of both
adult and older people’s mental health services were undertaken in
partnership with Bradford Council. Both reviews aim to transform services
to meet the needs of the diverse populations, ensuring they are equitable,
fair and culturally sensitive. Findings from the reviews will be used to
develop commissioning plans for both services.
- Both Manorlands Hospice, at Oxenhope, Keighley, and Marie Curie
Hospice, Bradford, provide day therapy and outpatient services as well as
inpatient services to people with life-limiting illnesses. The focus of all of
these services is to enhance patients’ quality of life. Both hospices use art
as a therapeutic tool to help palliative care patients.
• capacity and capability –
- continued to implement the organisation development strategy as part of
the fit for purpose development plan. Furthermore, work on the current
infrastructural development projects are also progressing well to provide
improved and wider access to health services across the district. some of
the ongoing developments are:
Despite this progress there are a number of areas where the Bradford and Airedale tPCT
faces challenges and need to improve their performance. In particular, improvements are
essential in the following areas where performance was below target in 2007/08:
• addressing health inequalities - percentage of 15-24 year olds screened for
chlamydia need to be increased by implementing additional incentive schemes
• securing high quality care – while there was a 20%reduction in reported MRSA
cases in 2007/08 compared to 2006/07, this still represents underperformance
against the national target.
• system reform – there has been success by increased uptake of first consultant
outpatient appointments through Choose and Book, achieving 61% in April 2008
compared to national performance of 51%. However this still remains below the
national target and as a result the tPCT have retained the existing incentive
scheme for an additional six months
59 Breaking Down Barriers, Department of Health report, Louise Appleby, 11 May 2007.
154

• provider development – performance by Yorkshire Ambulance Services NHS
Trust was below national targets for both category A and B response times.
Details on this performance by ambulance services could be found later in the
chapter.
6.2.2 Secondary Care
District wide, there are three main hospitals; St Lukes, Bradford Royal Infirmary are
controlled by the Bradford Teaching Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust, and Airedale General
Hospital is operated by the Airedale NHS Trust. £70 million 60 of funding has been announced
in 2006 by the Trust for the modernisation and rationalisation of the 2 city hospitals which
involves land disposal, new buildings and refurbishment. Airedale General Hospital at
Steeton, is already undergoing significant expansion and refurbishment.
Bradford Teaching Hospitals NHS Foundation Trust is responsible for providing acute
hospital care services for the people of Bradford and neighbouring communities. It has
around 1,200 beds serving a community of over a million people, has an annual budget of
£230 million and employs over 5,000 staff. Continuous professional development for all
staffing groups is encouraged and supported within the foundation trust, which has Investors
in People accreditation.
The organisation is managed and led by the Board of Directors, which comprises of a
chairman, six non-executive directors, four executive directors and a chief executive. The
Board is responsible for approving policy, ensuring financial viability of the organisation and
monitoring performance.
Clinical services are provided from twelve clinical directorates each being led by a clinical
director and supported by a general manager.
Foundation trusts are new flagship hospitals in England and awarded to high performing
organisations. They were approved to be a foundation trust on April 1 2004 - one of the first
in the country, due to excellent performance, which has continued with the foundation trust
being rated as 'good' for use of resources and 'good' for quality of services, in the
Healthcare Commission's Annual Health Check.
In April 2007 The Foundation Trust were recognised as the third safest hospital in England
and the safest outside London with the rates of MRSA Bacteraemia reducing by 40% over
the last three years.
Based on the latest rate for patients who died in hospital between July 2007 and June 2008,
hospitals in Bradford and Airedale are among the safest in the country. Airedale General
Hospital is the safest hospital in the region and in the top five nationally, while Bradford’s
hospital appeared as the tenth safest in the country.
60 T&A 27/11/06
155

The Foundation Trust also has an excellent record of meeting the national targets such as
treatment within 18 weeks from referral, being seen within 4 hours in A&E and treating
cancer patients quickly.
Some of the operational and infrastructural improvements achieved by The Foundation Trust
over the recent years are highlighted below-
• Two new wards were created in a new £10m block at BRI creating extra capacity to
meet the increased demand on hospital services, especially during winter.
• A new £3m Sovereign Lecture Theatre has been opened which acts as a focal point
for staff skill development and facilitates healthcare innovation.
• A new pain management centre has been opened at St Luke’s Hospital which
includes a dedicated pain relief clinic and other supporting facilities.
• A new macular centre has also been opened at St Luke’s Hospital in shared
facilities with the pain management service.
Despite all these achievements, there are a number of challenges remain for the Foundation
Trust to tackle. As home to one of the NHS’s biggest, and busiest, maternity units, the trust
need to reduce the prevalence of smoking during pregnancy, as well as increase the
breastfeeding rate among new mums.
Moreover, there are recognised areas of high deprivation within the geographical locations
covered by the Foundation Trust and this is likely to generate increased pressure on health
services as the full impact of the recession plays out and unemployment rises.
Apart from the above two trusts, there is the Bradford District Care Trust who provides
mental health and learning disability services to the diverse communities of Bradford,
Airedale and Craven. Established in 2002, Bradford District Care Trust services are provided
across six care groups:
• Adult Mental Health
• Older People’s Mental Health
• Child and Adolescent Mental Health (CAMHS)
• Learning Disabilities
• Substance Misuse & Alcohol and Forensic.
Details of their services and care groups across the district could be found on the
website: http://www.bdct.nhs.uk/index.php
6.2.3 Hospitals
As mentioned before, there are two A&E Hospital departments in Bradford District:-
• Bradford Royal Infirmary, Bradford
• Airedale Hospital, Steeton (ADD MAP)
A list of all Bradford & Airedale hospitals is given below:
156

• Airedale General Hospital
• Bingley Hospital
• Bradford Maternity Hospital
• Bradford Royal Infirmary
• Coronation Hospital, Ilkley
• Eccleshill Community Hospital
• Eccleshill NHS Treatment Centre
• Leeds Road Community Hospital
• Lynfield Mount Shipley Hospital
• Skipton General Hospital
• St Luke's Hospital
• Westwood Park Diagnostic and Treatment Centre
• Westwood Park Community Hospital
• Yorkshire Eye Clinic
Bradford Royal Infirmary and St. Luke’s Hospital
The current BRI was built in the 1930s at Ducworth Lane. It replaced a Victorian edifice in the
city centre. Today it is part of the Bradford Teaching Hospitals NHS Trust. The infirmary is
affiliated with Leeds School of Medicine. As well as the BRI the trust also incorporates St.
Luke's Hospital in Little Horton.
Bradford Royal Infirmary has an Accident and Emergency department and the majority of
inpatient services are based there. St Luke’s Hospital provides about a third of our services
and is centred mainly around the recently built Horton Wing, delivering outpatient and
rehabilitation services.
• The foundation employ almost 5000 staff in the two hospitals and serve a population
of around 500000.
• A total of 77% of staff are female, and 23% are male. At December 2008, the
gender breakdown of senior staff (those on band 8 and above, and all medical staff)
was 50% female and 50% male.
• Bradford Royal Infirmary has 971 beds and is also home to one of the busiest A&E
departments in the country, with more than 100,000 attendances each year.
• BRI’s maternity unit is also one of the NHS’s busiest, delivering more than 5,000
babies every year.
157

• St Luke’s Hospital has 119 beds and houses the renal dialysis unit.
• Saint Luke's Sound is the hospital radio station serving the patients and staff.
Airedale General Hospital
Airedale Hospital was opened in 1970 by Prince Charles and is an award winning hospital
providing acute, elective and specialist care. The Trust headquarters are at Airedale NHS
Trust, Airedale General Hospital, Skipton Road, Steeton, Keighley, BD20 6TD.
Airedale Trust provides high quality, personalised healthcare for a population of over 200,000
people from a widespread area covering 500 square miles within Yorkshire and Lancashire -
stretching as far as the Yorkshire Dales and the National Park in North Yorkshire, reaching
areas of North Bradford and Guiseley in West Yorkshire and extending into Colne and
Pendle in the East of Lancashire.
• Airedale Hospital employ 2100 staff and have 350 committed volunteers
• In a year Airedale Hospital treat 25,000 inpatients, 22,000 day cases and 104,000 out
patient appointments.
• Airedale Hospital Accident and Emergency Department sees and treats over 47,000
patients every year
• Around 2300 babies are born each year at the hospital
There are currently a number of other small hospitals and treatment centres across the
District, which may be replaced by other facilities in time.
6.2.4 Health Centres/GP surgeries
Primary care practitioners such as GPs are not directly employed by the PCT - they run as
independent 'contractors' under the umbrella of the PCT.
There are 89 GP practices (August 2007) in the Bradford and Airedale Primary Care Trust
district 61 . Over 70% of GP practices in Bradford and Airedale open their doors earlier in the
morning or later at night to offer more flexible appointment times.
A comprehensive list of all GPs, dentists, pharmacists and opticians operating in Bradford
are included on the website:
http://www.bradford.nhs.uk/wp-content/uploads/2010/07/HealthMatters2010.pdf
ADD MAP SHOWING LOCATION OF GP, DENTISTS, PHARMACIES AND OPTICIANS
61 http://www.bradford.nhs.uk/Pages/GPPractices.aspx
158

6.3 Children’s Services
The Councils - Bradford Early Years, Childcare and Play (BEYCP) promotes, develops, and
supports the highest quality childcare, early education and play provision, offering equality of
opportunity and access for all.
Play, early education and childcare are essential elements of achieving the very best
outcomes for children and young people as part of Every Child Matters.
BEYCP are responsible for delivering the government’s 10 Year Childcare Strategy and its
vision for a Sure Start for all children, as well as meeting duties under the Childcare Act,
which came into force in 2008. Priorities include ensuring that sufficient childcare is available
to meet demand and that free, part time nursery places are available for all 3 and 4 year
olds.
BEYCPs aim is to provide greater choice for parents so that they can balance work
commitments and family life, and ensure that flexible childcare is available for all families with
children. A major focus of the strategy is reducing social disadvantage by enabling parents to
access training and work.
Establishing Children’s Centres, offering integrated services for children aged 0-5 and their
families, is a central feature of the national strategy. So far, the Council has established 33
children’s centres in Bradford, bringing together early education, childcare, health and family
support for the 0-5’s.
Children’s Centres
Sure Start is a Government initiative which aims to give every child the best possible start in
life. Children’s Centres are places where children under five and their families can access
services and information from a range of professionals. An example of some of the services
offered include:
• Chatterbox – helps children to develop early language and communication skills;
• Baby massage – teaches parents techniques, which relax their baby and helps with
their sleep;
• Play and Stay – offers activities for children to learn through play;
• Information – available on employment opportunities, childcare and training;
• Incredible years – for parents to develop skills to deal with everyday behaviour; and
• Family Support – offering individual support for families in their home or in the centre.
The SureStart Children’s Centres in Bradford have been developed in accordance with
Government guidance, building on existing developments including Local SureStart
Programmes, Neighbourhood Nurseries and the Early Excellence Centre and then later
Nursery and Primary School sites. This has created a very mixed economy.
159

The 8 ex Local SureStart programmes in the District have completed their transition to
Children’s Centre focus and now support 14 of the 33 Phase 1 and 2 Children’s Centres in
Bradford.
Four of the District’s five Family Centres operate as co-located Children’s Centre sites whilst
investment in the fifth will support partnership working with all Children’s Centres within its
locality.
All seven of the Districts Nursery Schools are leading on delivery of the Children’s Centre
offer on their sites. Fourteen Primary Schools operate as co-located sites for Children’s
Centres. All Children’s Centres are linked with the Extended Schools clusters.
Six of the Councils Children’s Centres are ‘Children’s Centre Plus’ sites, a model unique to
Bradford. These are specifically designed and resourced to provide enhanced facilities for
children with complex health needs. These Children’s Centre Plus sites are located at:
• Canterbury Nursery School and Centre for Children and Families
• Strong Close Nursery School and Children’s Centre
• St Edmund’s Nursery School and Children’s Centre
• Woodroyd Children’s Centre
• Barkerend Children’s Centre
• Hirstwood Nursery School
City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council has one of the largest Children’s Centre
programmes in the country having already established 33 Children’s Centres in the 30%
most disadvantaged areas of the District through Phases 1 and 2 and by commissioning the
development of 7 new Phase 3 Children’s Centres to cover the remaining 70% areas of the
District between 2008 and 2010. Each Centre is expected to ‘reach’ between 800 to 1200
children aged 0-5 years with an overall reach totalling 37,015 children by 2011.
160

Phase 1 and 2 Children’s Centres in the Bradford district.
161

162

Bradford has been allocated capital totalling £3.8 million to support the development of up to
11 new Phase 3 Centres and maintenance of all Centres between 2008-2011. Revenue
totalling £48.5 million will provide direct funding and funding for centrally managed services
contributing to the core offer in Phases 1, 2 and 3 between 2008-2011.
Children’s Centres and their locations are detailed below (ADD MAP), with many of the
centres sharing space within existing facilities such as schools. The sharing of space within
existing facilities ensures the centres are located in accessible and convenient locations for
local residents to access.
163

See link below for map of Children Centres in Bradford District:-
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/NR/rdonlyres/E849B60B-BBEC-4EE4-895B-
19DDD98D6492/0/ChildrensCentresMap.pdf
See Draft Bradford District Children’s Centres Strategy (Feb, 2008) by clicking link below:-
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/NR/rdonlyres/66AF3C80-167B-4B88-BCE7-
F3BC53351A63/0/DraftChildrensCentresStrategyDocFeb08.pdf
6.4 Neighbourhood Management and Community Strategy
Neighbourhood Management is one of the 'big ideas' in the Government's campaigns to
tackle social exclusion and it forms a key part of the National Strategy for Neighbourhood
Renewal. The Neighbourhood Management initiative aims to tackle quality of life (‘liveability’)
issues in the community through better management of the local environment, particularly
through:
• Increasing community safety;
• Improving housing stock;
• Working with young people; and
• Encouraging employment opportunities.
Within Bradford District 80 ‘natural neighbourhoods’ have been defined by local communities
and often determined by physical features such as roads, opens spaces and parks.
Seventeen of the 80 take the same boundaries as local Town / Parish / Community Councils.
The recognition of these neighbourhoods has stemmed from the district’s long-standing
arrangements for area and locality based engagement and planning (e.g. through Area
Committees, Area Coordination, and Neighbourhood Forums). The new delivery
arrangements mean that structures and resources can be developed to better connect
residents, service providers and elected Members, to work together to identify and implement
plans for their areas.
164

The diagram above shows how locality plans sit below the delivery plans within the district.
The locality plans retain links to the Big Plan themes whilst neighbourhood partnerships, area
committees and residents have an opportunity to influence priorities, as translated into the
action plans for their locality.
Index of Neighbourhoods:
Area Committee Action Plans are based on wide consultation and neighbourhood plans as
well as available data. Neighbourhood Forums and other public involvement and consultation
events are held regularly in every neighbourhood throughout the Area in order to give local
residents the chance to have their say on local issues. Neighbourhood Forums are organised
and run by the five Area Co-ordinators and their teams one for each of the parliamentary
constituencies.
• Bradford North: Bolton & Undercliffe, Bowling & Barkerend,, Bradford Moor,
Eccleshill, Idle & Thackley, Manningham
• Bradford South: Great Horton, Tong, Queensbury, Royds, Wibsey, Wyke
• Bradford West: Thorton & Allerton, City Ward, Clayton & Fairweather Green, Toller,
Heaton, Little Horton
165

• Keighley: Craven, Worth Valley, Ilkley, Keighley Central, Keighley East, Keighley
West
• Shipley: Baildon, Bingley, Bingley Rural, Shipley, Wharfedale, Windhill, Wrose
The ‘Area Committee Action Plans’ set out a range of social, economic and environmental
priorities for the area and thereby help decision making of the area committee in relation to
funding allocation and encourage contributions, both practical and financial, from partners.
The action plans are usually divided into themes, same as those within the ‘Big Plan’
(District’s Sustainable Community Strategy), and the priorities are informed by consultations
carried out through a range of activities including neighbourhood forums, neighbourhood
action planning process, community consultations, urban village action planning etc. The
Area Committee Action Plans also provide a framework against which progress can be
measured in every two years and be reported to the area committee, partners and the public
before setting/renewing targets for the next action plans.
Map: Bradford Ward Map
166

To know more about the Neighbourhood Services and the Area Committee Action Plans
please visit the following webpage:
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/bmdc/neighbourhoods/your_neighbourhood.htm
In order to ensure effective community engagement a comprehensive community strategy is
also needed at neighbourhood and district or city-wide level. Bradford District’s current
‘Sustainable Community Strategy’ is known as The Big Plan and it has replaced the
previous community strategy that existed in the form of 20:20 Vision, prepared by Bradford
Vision (the name of Bradford’s Local Strategic Partnership). The purpose of the Sustainable
Community Strategy (SCS) is to aim to enhance the quality of life of local communities and
contribute to the achievement of sustainable development through action that will improve
the economic, social and environmental well-being of the area and its inhabitants.
Evidences were gathered and critical issues identified around ten themes which later helped
identify linkages and cross-cutting issues, as well as specific long-term ambitions and
medium-term priorities in order to inform LAA outcomes and targets, and the specific
strategic and operational plans of key partnerships and partners, such as the Council’s
corporate plan.
The Big Plan themes:
1. Children and Young People
2. Safer Communities
3. Stronger Communities
4. Healthier Communities
5. Older People
6. Economic Development and Enterprise
7. Environment
8. Housing
9. Culture
10. Transport
The analysis of evidence, consultation and subsequent impact assessment of the
Sustainable Community Strategy (SCS) has identified that the overarching challenge the
district faces is to bring about long-term, sustainable prosperity which is shared across
communities, including businesses and residents. At the heart of The Big Plan are three
major tasks which are fundamental to transforming the district. These “transformational
priorities” are:
• Regenerating the city and our major towns to create the opportunities and impetus for
sustained economic growth;
• Improving education outcomes to prepare people for an active and prosperous life;
and
• Improving skills at all levels to meet the needs of business and build a knowledge
economy.
167

This community strategy and its priorities will provide a framework to guide the way the
council and its partners plan and work together over the next three years and beyond. It will
also inform the negotiation, consultation and implementation of the important plans, policies
and agreements to be made by the authority.
6.5 Community Services
6.5.1 Market and shopping facilities
Vibrant town and local shopping facilities, which successfully compete and provide local
choice, make a valuable contribution to the local community, which they serve. There are a
wide range of shopping and marketing facilities provided in the city, town, district and local
centres of Bradford.
Traditional Markets
The following are the major traditional market and shopping facilities currently being
managed by Bradford Council.
Indoor
Kirkgate Market, Bradford: Located in the Kirkgate Centre, this shopping hall sells a wide
range of commodity from fancy goods to footwear and designer jeans to duvets all usually at
lower prices than high street retailers.
Oastler Shopping Centre: This venue is located off Westgate in the City's Northern Quarter.
A newly created food hall offers quality fish, meat and fresh fruit and vegetables from all over
the world. The centre has lift access from the adjacent car park, shop mobility facilities and
nine cafes and food outlets.
Keighley Market: Located in the centre of Keighley, the Market has long tradition of being a
colourful and lively shopping destination with quality food retailers to the latest in fashion,
jewellery, materials, homeware and more. It's easily accessible by public transport or via car.
Wholesale
St James Market: St. James Wholesale Market is located on a six-acre site off the A650
Wakefield Road, Bradford. It is easily accessible from the city centre and only minutes away
from the motorway links to the M62, M1, etc.
Ample parking is provided for buyers in the main hall where the bulk of the selling takes
place. A wide range of fresh fruit and vegetables, exotic produce and flowers are available. In
response to demand, the product range has been extended in recent years to include prepacked
supplies to cater for restaurant owners.
168

Outdoor
Shipley Market: Shipley Open Market provides a focal point to the town centre; the open
market operates on a Monday selling a great selection of second-hand items and bric-a-brac.
On a Friday and Saturday, a wide selection of miscellaneous goods and fresh food products
are available on over 40 stalls.
Bingley Market: Bingley Open Market now trades on the newly refurbished Town Square
with 36 stalls featuring Fresh Bread, Fish, Meat and Game, Fresh Fruit & Vegetables,
Flowers & Plants, Shoes and much more.
These markets and the centres they are located in offer particular advantages namely:
• the wide range of services and facilities that they offer, which encourages
competition from which all consumers are able to benefit;
• their high accessibility by public transport, which benefits public transport users,
particularly those without access to a car, and provide for the most sustainable
pattern of development in the future;
• their attractive built environment and urban heritage.
The centres do however exhibit inherent planning problems compared with out of centre
locations namely:
• sites for development are not always easy to obtain, assemble and develop;
roads within the centres are more congested;
• access to and use of car parking facilities is not always as convenient. There is a
need to cater for those who wish to use cars since failure to do so will inevitably
result in continuing pressure for out of centre development;
• there is a legacy of buildings which are not easily adapted for current activities.
These are often small, having upper floors, and no parking or loading facilities.
Areas of neglect and dereliction are created where these buildings are underused
or vacant.
Shopping Malls
In the wake of recent financial downturn there have been significant losses to the shopping
range throughout the district. The city centre particularly has suffered as a result of the delay
in the completion of the proposed Broadway development. Over the coming years this is
expected to be resolved by the development of a brand new shopping centre which together
with additional investment in the rest of the district will allow Bradford to compete with other
centres in the region, by clawing back shoppers who currently go elsewhere.
169

Westfield/ Broadway Shopping Centre: Westfield Bradford is a £275 million development
project that will create a modern shopping experience to meet the needs of the thriving
catchment. The retail component will be a mix of national and local fashion, food and lifestyle
brands – a spectacular retail environment to address the current under provision in the city.
Key Facts:
• 51,466 sq m retail floorspace
• 75 stores
• 1,345 parking spaces
A revised planning permission for the development was approved in October 2011 and the
groundworks stage of the retail mall has been completed. The developer has already
invested about £80m in the scheme and currently working on signing in the necessary
number of pre-lets before proceeding with the final stages of the construction. Detail plan for
the next phase of the development which includes offices and apartments is expected to be
finalised within seven years.
The Broadway development is expected to serve a catchment of more than 735,000 people,
including large proportions of middle-income customers. It is also estimated that about 4,000
jobs will be created between the construction phase and the completed centre.
Airedale Shopping Centre, Keighley: The Airedale Shopping Centre is a 250,000 sq ft
town centre development with an adjoining 460-space multi-storey car park.
The single level Centre is readily accessible for all visitors and public transport links are
particularly well catered for since the February 2002 opening of the award winning bus
station which stands alongside the shopping malls.
The Centre has a mall café, public telephones, public conveniences (including facilities for
the disabled) and a parent & baby room
5Rise Bingley: With 59,500 square feet of retail space and 18 individual shop units, 5Rise is
a modern shopping centre development that has revitalised the town of Bingley. A major £5
million regeneration project, the 5Rise scheme is built on the ground of former Myrtle
Shopping Centre and once again has become the main shopping destination of Bingley's
residents.
The anchor tenant is a brand new 12,000 sq ft Co-operative food store and will be shortly
joined by Home Bargains, Santander and Browns Café Bar as well as existing retailers such
as Boots, Natwest, Greggs, Superdrug, Timpsons, Klick, and Betfred.
The District's shopping centres are already protected for retail use from other development
by polices in the rUDP and in the government's Planning Policy Statement 4. However there
is a growing trend for existing food superstores and supermarkets in suburban locations to
sell a wider range of comparison goods. This action competes with the roles of city and town
centres to be the main destinations for comparison shopping. There is also growing
170

pressure from superstore / supermarket operators to build new and larger stores across the
District which can also pose a threat to established centres.
Food stores
According to the Bradford District Retail and Leisure Study (WYG, 2008) supermarkets within
the district cater for almost two-third (72%) of the main food shopping done by the district’s
residents. The district is well represented by a number of supermarkets ranging from the
branches of all main national multiples to locally developed chain food stores.
Tesco has traditionally dominated the grocery sector in the UK and so has in Bradford with
by far the largest market share (49%) of all main food shopping trips. Asda, Morrisons and
Sainsbury are also well represented throughout the district operating mainly from the town
and district centres. Branches of Netto, Lidl and Aldi are also concentrated in and around the
main urban areas of the district. On the other hand Co-op convenience stores have a much
wider reach than any other supermarkets with their branches located in many rural areas of
the district including local and village centres.
Locations of all major supermarkets within Bradford
The table below provides a list of supermarkets located within the city, town and district
centres of the district.
171

Table: Supermarkets in City, Town and District Centres
Bradford City Centre
• Morrisons, Westgate
• Marks and Spencer, Darley Street
Bingley Town Centre
• Co-op, 5Rise, Bingley
Ilkley Town Centre
• Tesco, Springs Lane, Ilkley
• Booths, Ilkley
• Co-op Late Shops, Brook Street, Ilkley
• Marks and Spencer, Station Road, Ilkley
Keighley Town Centre
• Morrisons, Worth Way, Keighley
• Sainsburys, Cavendish Street, Keighley
• Asda, Bingley Street, Keighley
• Aldi, Gresley Road, Keighley
• Netto, Keighley
• Marks and Spencer, Low Street, Keighley
• Iceland, Gresley Road, Keighley
• Farmfoods, Cooke Lane, Keighley
Shipley Town Centre
• ASDA, Manor Lane, Shipley
• Aldi, Tony Miller Approach, Briggate, Shipley
• Co-op Late Shops, Wrose Road, Shipley
District Centres
• Five Lane Ends- Morrissons, Enterprise 5, 275 Bradford Road, Idle.
• Girlington- Morrissons, Victoria Shopping Centre, Young Street.
• Great Horton- Tesco Extra (on the edge of the centre)
• Greengates- Sainsbury, 760 Harrogate Road.
• Mayo Avenue- Morrissons, 110 Mayo Avenue.
• Thornbury- Morrissons, Rushton Avenue.
• Tong Street- Netto, Oasby Croft, off Tong Street.
Source: Bradford Retail and Leisure Study (WYG, 2008)
All the district centres in Bradford has at least one supermarket serving the catchment. The
only local centre to attract any significant proportion of main food shopping trips is
Buttershaw, which contains a large-format Tesco. Apart from these, the other important freestanding
stores include Asda at Rooley Lane and Tesco at the Peel Centre, Valley Road. In
terms of foodstore outside the district, the Morrisons at Otley Road, Guiseley (Leeds
authority area) appears to be the most popular to the resident of the district.
6.5.2 Community Centres
Community centres in Bradford offer facilities for a wide range of events including parties,
corporate and social events, meetings, conferences and sporting activities. These centres
play an important part in contributing towards community vibrancy. MAP below shows the
location of all of the Community Centres in Bradford.
ADD MAP SHOWING THE LOCATION OF COMMUNITY CENTRES
172

The current provision of centres which provide wider community facilities are often located in
the centre of a community whether that be in the town centre, local centre or in the middle of
a housing estate, wherever the wider needs of local people can best be served.
There are 96 Community Centres across the Bradford Sitrict according to the data held by
DIVA – the voluntary organisations database for Bradford District.
• Activity and Recreation Centre (ARC)
• All Saints Landmark Centre
• Anand Milan Centre
• Baildon Community Link
• Bangladeshi Community Association -
Bradford (BCAB)
• Bangladeshi Community Association -
Keighley (BCA)
• Bedale Centre
• Bierley Community Centre
• Bolton Villas HUB Project (The HUB)
• Bolton Woods Community Centre
• Bracken Bank and District Community
Association
• Bradford Moor Community Centre
• Bradford Moor Youth Sports
Association
• Braithwaite and Guardhouse
Community Association
• Braithwaite People's Association
(BPA)
• Buttershaw Christian Family Centre
(BCFC)
• Cafe West
• Canterbury Youth and Community
Centre
• Checkpoint / Bradford West Indian
Community Centre Association
• Claremont Community Trust
• Clayton Village Hall Community
Centre
• Community Association of Great
Horton
• Communityworks
• Communityworks in Buttershaw and
Cooperville
• Cottingley Cornerstone
• Crosley Wood Tenants Action Group
• Cullingworth Village Hall
• Delius Arts and Cultural Centre
• Eccleshill Youth And Community
Association Ltd
• Edward's Rainbow Family Community
Centre
• Kirkgate Community Centre
• Kirkland Community Centre
• Laisterdyke Trinity Community Centre
• Light of The World Community Centre
(LOTWCC)
• Long Lee Village Hall
• Manningham Mills Community
Association (MMCA)
• Marshfield Community Association
(MCA)
• Millan Centre
• Newton Street Day Centre
• North Community Centre
• North East Windhill Community
Association (NEWCA)
• Pakistan Community Neighbourhood
Association
• Pan African Arts and Cultural Group
(PAACG)
• Park Lane Community Association Ltd
• Parkside Community Centre
• Parkwood Risers
• Polish Community Centre - Friday
Group
• Princeville Community Association
• Queensbury Community Centre
• Queensbury Community Programme
(QCP)
• Ravenscliffe Community Association
(RCA)
• Ravenscliffe Youth Centre
• Rockwell Centre
• Royds Community Association (RCA)
• Ryecroft Community Centre
• Sangat Community Association
(Sangat Centre)
• Scholemoor Community Association
• Shree Krishna Community Centre
• South Square Centre
• Springfield Youth And Community
Centre
• St Christopher's Youth Project
• St John's Centre
• St Mary's New Horizons Care in the
173

• Equity Partnership - Bradford LGB
Strategic Partnership
• Fagley Youth and Community Centre
• Friends of The Gateway
• Frizinghall Community Centre
• Frontline Initiative
• Girlington Community Association
(GCA)
• Grange Interlink Community Centre
• Greenwood Youth and Community
Association
• Gulberg Community Resource Centre
• Hainworth Wood Community Centre
• Haworth Community Centre
• Heaton St Barnabas Village Hall
• Highfield Community Centre
• Holmewood Activity Centre
• Hopes Centre (HCCC)
• Idle Baptist Church and Community
Centre
• Karmand Community Centre
• Keighley Association Women's and
Children's Centre (KAWACC)
Community (New Horizons)
• St Oswald's West End Centre
• Sutton Community Association (SCA)
• The Diamond Community Cafe (DCC)
• The Khidmat Centre
• The Source
• The Vine Trust
• Thornbury Centre
• Victor Road Community Project
• Wilsden Village Hall
• Woodside Action Group (WAG)
• Wrose Community Centre
• Wyke Christian Fellowship (WCF)
• Wyke Community And Children's
Centre Ltd
• Wyke Manor Community Centre
• YMCA - City of Bradford
The Council is currently undertaking a review of community centres in the District. Once the
findings of this review are available, the information will be used to update and inform this
Plan.
6.5.3 Post offices
Post Office Ltd is a wholly owned subsidiary of Royal Mail Group. With a nationwide network
of Post Office branches across the country the Post Office network is the UK’s biggest
retailer.
Post Office branches were established originally for the acceptance of mail, but their use
expanded to include the payment of pensions and other financial transactions. Post Office
Ltd. now offer more than 170 different products and services, including telephony, financial
services, bill payment, banking and travel related products. Post Office Ltd is the largest
provider of foreign currency in the UK and the leading independent provider of travel
insurance.
Post Office services are provided online and by phone in addition to face to face. There are
lots of different types of outlets in the network including Crown Office branches in city
centres, outlets run by subpostmasters that combine a shop with the Post Office branch, as
well as Outreaches Services including mobile Post Offices, and services that visit village
halls or churches.
Post Office Ltd serves over 22 million customers a week who make 34 million visits and
174

approximately 63 million transactions. Approximately 93% of the UK adult population visit a
Post Office branch each year.
The Government has recognised that fewer people are using Post Office branches, partly
because traditional service, including benefit payments are now available in other ways, such
as online or directly through banks. It has concluded that the overall size and shape of the
Post Office network of branches needs to change.
Post Office Ltd has now in place a Network Change Programme to implement measures
proposed by the Government. The programme will involve the compulsory compensated
closure of up to 2,500 Post Office branches (out of a Network of 14,000 branches) with the
introduction of about 500 service points known as Outreaches to mitigate the impact of the
proposed closures.
Bradford District is covered by two Post Office Network Change Programme Area Plan
Proposals:-
• Area Plan Proposal for West Yorkshire
• Area Plan Proposal for North Yorkshire with Yorkshire East and Keighley Area
Each of the above Area Plan Proposals has been subject to public consultation during
2007/2008 to ensure that the views of the local people are taken into account before any final
decisions are made by Post Office Ltd.
Post Office Ltd. has confirmed that the following 16 Post Office branches within the Bradford
District are to close:-
• Ashbourne Estate, Bolton Road, Bradford
• Bradford Road, Stocksbridge, Keighley
• Chellow Dene, 1-3 Pearson Lane, Bradford
• City Road, Bradford
• Duckworth Lane, Bradford
• East Morton, 7-9 Main Road, East Morton, Keighley
• East Bierley, 59-60 Southview Road, Bradford
• Highfield, 21 Belgrave Road, Keighley
• Leaventhorpe (Temporaily closed), 1009 Thornton Road, Bradford
• Leeds Road, 812 Leeds Road, Bradford
• Leeds Road, 24 Dean Street, Ilkley
• Manningham, 14-18 Green Lane, Bradford
• St Pauls Road, 51 Bradford Road, Shipley
• Undercliffe, 10 Harrogate Road, Bradford
• Wibsey, 96 High Street, Bradford
• Woodhall Avenue, Bradford
175

Post Office Ltd has considered the relative convenience of alternative branches for those
customers whose closest branch will close. Of the 10.2% of customers who use a branch
that has closed, 10% do have access to Post Office services within one mile as measured by
road distance (3% being within half a mile of their nearest alternative). According to Post
Office Ltd, in total 99.8% of the population will either see no change, or will be within one
mile of an alternative branch.
The plan shows that the remaining 64 sub post offices are evenly dispersed throughout the
District and that Post Office Ltd are confident that the remaining post office branches
conform to the national accessibility criteria set by the Government.
See link to the Network Change Programme here
http://www.postoffice.co.uk/portal/po/content1?catId=57600693&mediaId=57600697
6.5.4 Job centre plus
Jobcentre Plus is a government agency supporting people of working age from welfare into
work, and helping employers to fill their vacancies. Job Centre Plus is part of the
Department of Works and Pensions (DWPS) and plays a major role in supporting the
Department’s aim to ‘promote opportunity and independence for all through modern,
customer-focused services’.
There are 4 Job Centre Plus locations in Bradford District:-
• Vicar Lane, Bradford
• Wainman Street, Shipley
• Worth Way, Keighley
• Manningham Lane, Bradford
Other Job Centre Plus locations adjacent to the district include:-
• Newmarket Street, Skipton
• Otley Road, Guiseley, Leeds
• James Road, Halifax
6.5.5 Local benefit/Tax Offices
The Council Tax Payment Office is located at Britannia House, Hall Ings, Bradford.
Council Tax Enquiry desks are located at:-
• Bdirect, Centenary Court, Bradford
• Shipley Town Hall
• Bingley Council Shop
• Manningham One Stop Shop
Her Majesty’s Revenue & Custom (HMRC) Tax Office (West Yorkshire & Craven Tax Office)
is located at:-
176

Centenary Court
1 St Blaise Way
Bradford
BD1 4YL
6.5.6 Cemeteries and crematoria
There are 67 sites classified under this typology of cemeteries, churchyards and burial
grounds equating to 109 hectares of provision in Bradford.
Bradford Council provides cemeteries at:-
• Bingley
• Bowling
• Charlestown
• Clayton
• God’s Acre (Burley-in-Wharfedale)
• Haworth
• Ilkley
• Menston
• Morton
• Nab Wood
• North Bierley
• Oakworth
• Oxenhope
• Queensbury
• Scholemoor
• Silsden
• Stanbury
• Steeton
• Thornton
• Tong
• Utley
• Wilsden
• Windhill
Crematoria facilities are also provided at:-
• Scholemoor
• Nab Wood
• Oakworth
177

Figure: Cemeteries sites mapped against settlement areas with catchment applied
PENDLE
CRAVEN
KEIGHLEY
KEIGHLEY
CALDERDALE
Steeton Steeton
Steeton Steeton
Haworth
Haworth
Oxenhope
Oxenhope
Silsden
Silsden
Addingham
Addingham
Keighley
Keighley
Cullingworth
Cullingworth
Cullingworth
Cullingworth
Denholme
Denholme Denholme Denholme
Harden
Harden
Queensbury
Queensbury
Wilsden Wilsden Wilsden
Wilsden Wilsden Wilsden
Bingley
Bingley
Ilkley
Ilkley
SHIPLEY
SHIPLEY
Shipley
Shipley
BRADFORD BRADFORD WEST WEST
WEST WEST
Baildon
Baildon
Bradf Bradf ord
ord
Burley Burley in in in in Wharf Wharf edale
edale
Menston
Menston
BRADFORD BRADFORD NORTH
NORTH
KIRKLEES
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
HARROGATE
BRADFORD BRADFORD SOUTH
SOUTH
ADD GIS MAP SHOWING ALL OF THE CEMETERIES AND CREMATORIA FACILITIES
Bradford District Open Space Assessment Catchment mapping, based on all current
provision, shows that there are only a small number of gaps across the settlements of
Bradford in terms of cemeteries, churchyards and disused burial grounds. These are in the
Shipley and Keighley analysis areas, especially in Keighley. However, it is not considered
appropriate to consider covering these catchment gaps through extra provision of this
typology because of its nature.
The existing capacity within each of these cemeteries is detailed in BELOW. The data
indicates that in the AREA X there is XX years supply, and in the AREA X an average of XX
years supply, with Cemetery NAME X at capacity.
DETERMINE SUPPLY AND CAPACITY, NEED FROM BRADFORD COUNCIL
CEMETERIES AND CREMOTORIA
6.5.7 Courts and prison
Bradford Magistrates Court is located at The Tyrls, Bradford (Court number 2978). The
Magistrates Court is working as part of the Governments Community Justice Programme and
covers Criminal, Civil, Youth Court and Family Work.
There are proposals to relocated the Magistrates Court next to the Law Courts at Exchange
Square as part of the Bradford City Centre Regeneration proposals.
LEEDS
178

Bradford Law Courts (Combined Court Centre) is located at Exchange Square, Drake Street,
Bradford (Court number 141 , County Court number 141). The Law Courts covers Criminal,
Civil, Youth Court and Family Work, Divorce and Bankruptcy.
There are no current prison facilities within the District, or any specific proposals or sites
identified for new prison development in Bradford District at present.
However, the National Offender Management Service (NOMS) which incorporates HM
Prison Service have requested that the LDF include a criteria based policy to deal with a firm
prison proposal should it arise during the Plan period. The demand for such facilities will be
discussed with NOMS and used to update and inform this Plan.
The nearest prison facility is HM Prison Leeds, located in West Leeds at 2 Gloucester
Terrace, Stannngley Road, Armley, Leeds.
HMP Leeds is a category B local prison. It accepts all adult male prisoners from West
Yorkshire. It has an operational capacity of 1004 as of 1st January 2008
HM Prision Leeds has a total 551 cells spread across six residential units, a segregation unit
and in-patients Healthcare Facility.
ADD DETAILS OF HMP REQUIREMENTS FOR WEST YORKSHIRE
6.5.8 Places of worship
Bradford District contains Places of Worship serving people from all the major religious
background. There is no comprehensive record of all places of worship located within the
district; however the following web links provide a general list of all major places of worship in
the district.
For a list of churches: http://www.eden.co.uk/churches/bradford/index.html
For a list of mosques: http://councilformosques.org.uk/direct.pdf
For Hindu temples: http://www.bradfordmandir.org/
Alternatively a list of places of worship could be accessed from the online directory links
below-
BD POST CODE
http://www.yell.com/ucs/UcsSearchAction.do;jsessionid=6512E362751A06976EE1421FCBF
5C3BC?keywords=Places+of+Worship&companyName=&location=bd&scrambleSeed=3958
0979&searchType=advance&M=&lastKeyword=Places+of+Worship&lastClarifyIndex=&lastCl
arifyOptions=&lastSearchall=&lastSearchallTax=&lastbandedclarifyResults=&bandedclarifyR
esults=&ssm=0
LS29 POST CODE
179

http://www.yell.com/ucs/UcsSearchAction.do?keywords=Places+of+Worship&companyName
=&location=LS29&scrambleSeed=17907614&searchType=advance&M=&lastKeyword=Plac
es+of+Worship&lastClarifyIndex=&lastClarifyOptions=&lastSearchall=&lastSearchallTax=&la
stbandedclarifyResults=&bandedclarifyResults=&ssm=0
The following plan shows the current location of Buddhist, Christian, Hindu, Jewish, Sikh and
Muslim places of worship within the District. Once information on the level of use and other
community services the places of worship provide is available, it will be used to update and
inform this Plan.
LIST THEM OR MAP THEM FROM THE LINK BELOW. BREAK THEM DOWN INTO
CHRISTIAN, MUSLIM, JEWISH, SIKH, HINDU, BUDDIST, OTHER
6.6 Emergency Services
6.6.1 Police
West Yorkshire Police is the Home Office Department Police Force responsible for policing
West Yorkshire. It is the fourth largest force in England and Wales by number of officers, with
5671 officers.
West Yorkshire Police Authority contains 9 councillors, 3 magistrates and 5 independent
members. The councillors are appointed by the five borough councils in the area - Bradford,
Calderdale, Kirklees, Leeds and Wakefield.
Proposals made by the Home Secretary on March 21, 2006 would see the force merge with
North Yorkshire Police, South Yorkshire Police and Humberside Police to form a strategic
police force for the entire region. These plans are currently under review and not expected to
take place in the foreseeable future.
For operational purposes, West Yorkshire Police is divided into 8 divisions. Bradford District
is covered by two divisions:-
Airedale & North Bradford Division covering the following neighbourhood policing areas
with Police Stations at Keighley (Airedale & North Bradford Divisional HQ), Ilkley, Shipley
and Eccleshill.
• Bingley & Worth
Bingley, Bingley Rural and Worth
• Eccleshill
Bolton, Undercliffe, Eccleshill and Idle, Thackley
• Keighley
Bogthorn, Exley Head, Fell Lane, Bracken Bank & Ingrow, Braithwaite, Guard House
and Laycock, East Morton and Riddlesden, Hainworth & Woodhouse, Keighley
Fields, Keighley Town Centre, Knowle Park, Utley & Beechcliffe and Worth Village
180

• North Bradford
Allerton & Lower Grange, Clayton, Fairweather Green, Frizinghall, Heaton, Sandy
Lane and Thornton
• Shipley
Baildon, Shipley and Windhill, Wrose
• Wharfedale & Craven
Addingham, Burley-in-Wharfedale, Ilkley, Menston, Silsden and Steeton-with-
Eastburn
Bradford South Division covering the following neighbourhood policing areas with Police
Stations at Nelson Street Bradford (Bradford South Divisional HQ) and Lilycroft Road,
Manningham
• NP Area 1
Bradford City Centre, Bradford University and College and Brown Royd and Horton
Grange
• NP Area 2
Bradford Moor, East Bowling & Tyersal and Wapping, Undercliffe, Barkerend
• NP Area 3
Bierley and Euroway Trading Estate, Holmewood, Low Moor, Oakenshaw, Tong and
Wyke
• NP Area 4
Buttershaw, Clayton Heights, Queensbury, Wibsey & Odsal and Woodside
• NP Area 5
Great Horton, Lidget Green and Scholemoor, Little Horton and West Bowling
• NP Area 6
Daisy Hill and Girlington and Manningham
ADD DETAILS OF NUMBER OF PC AND POLICE COMMUNIT SUPPORT OFFICERS
HERE+ ADD GIS MAP SHOWING POILCE STATIONS AND POLICE DIVISIONS
The current Police provision is monitored on a daily basis across the District and the Police
Stations operate on a fluid basis. Where by if demand requires Officers from one Station
area to support another area, they are relocated.
British Transport Police
The role and responsibilities of the British Transport Police is similar to that of the Home
Department police forces. The British Transport Police provide a police service on any land,
premises or property of any person who has entered into a Police Service Agreement made
181

under the relevant Act of Parliament. These premises etc. are mostly, but not entirely,
Network Rail and Train Operating Companies.
British Transport Police is a national police force which is divided into 8 Areas. The Area
which covers West Yorkshire is the North East Area. There is a Police Station at Leeds City
Station and a Police Station at Bradford Interchange Station.
6.6.2 Fire Services
The West Yorkshire Fire and Rescue Authority is an independent body with a legal duty to
provide a fire and rescue service that meets the needs of local communities. It also has
responsibilities regarding the enforcement of fire prevention, petroleum and explosives
legislation.
The authority is made up of 22 people who are appointed annually by the county’s five
district councils: Leeds, Bradford, Kirklees, Wakefield and Calderdale.
West Yorkshire Fire and Rescue Service serve a resident population of 2,125,000 and
provides an emergency response across 202,924 hectares. The service’s emergency
response is currently provided from 34 whole-time fire stations and 14 retained (part-time)
fire stations, based within the five Districts of the county. It employs 1,514 wholetime
firefighters, 196 part-time firefighters, 60 mobilisation and communication staff members and
343 fire and rescue (non-uniformed) staff.
All 999 calls are received by a central control room at HQ in Birkenshaw, Bradford.
Appliances can then be mobilised from 48 fire stations. Each front-line fire engine is
equipped with state-of-the-art rescue equipment -- some are also geared up for heavy
rescue. There is also a fleet of specialist back-up appliances.
West Yorkshire firefighters are trained to cope with a whole range of emergencies, not just
fire. These include: road, rail or air crashes, floods, chemical spills and even terrorist attack.
West Yorkshire Fire & Rescue Service has the following resources:
• 48 Fire Stations (10 located in Bradford District)
• 63 Pumping / Rescue Appliances
• 6 aerial appliances
• 6 Demountable Unit carrying vehicles
• 15 Demountable Units
• 1 Command Support Unit
There are 10 Fire stations located in Bradford District at:-
11. Bradford
12. Ilkley
13. Keighley
14. Bingley
15. Shipley
182

16. Silden
17. Idle
18. Fairweather Green
19. Odsal
20. Howarth
West Yorkshire Fire & Rescue Authority HQ is based in Birkenshaw, Bradford.
Further details on the above fire stations are available by clicking on the link below:-
http://www.westyorksfire.gov.uk/aboutUs/au_stations.htm
Map: Fire service stations across West Yorkshire
The Fire Service states that the current operational capacity of the service is sufficient to
cater for Bradford District and its potential growth.
Fire Stations located in Bradford District are supported by neighbouring Fire Stations in
Craven, Leeds, Calderdale and Kirklees during major incidences and high demand periods.
The Fire and Rescue Service states that the scope to design out the risk of fire, with the use
of modern materials and design standards, helps to reduce the risk of fire and the number of
incidences the service responds to. To ensure incidences can be dealt with promptly, all new
buildings (of 280m2 or more) are required to be located within 90m of a fire hydrant. The
provision of fire hydrants is currently provided by the Fire and Rescue Service.
183

6.6.3 Ambulance
Yorkshire Ambulance Service NHS Trust was formed on 1 July 2006 bringing together South
Yorkshire Ambulance Service, West Yorkshire Metropolitan Ambulance Service and the
North and East Yorkshire parts of Tees, East and North Yorkshire Ambulance Service.
YAS operate out of 22 ambulance stations (3 stations based in Bradford District) and in
addition use numerous locations as standby points.
There are 3 ambulance stations within Bradford District, as follows:-
4. Bradford
5. Keighley
6. Menston
Standby points have been confirmed to date on the following sites in West Yorkshire ( 3
within Bradford)-
• Canal Road, Bradford
• Leeds Road Hospital, Bradford
• Odsal Fire Station, Bradford
• Rutland Lodge Medical Centre, Potternewton, Leeds
• Kirkstall Medical Centre, Leeds
• Beeston Fire Station, Leeds
• Pontefract Fire Station, Pontefract
A total of 24 more stand-by points are planned throughout Yorkshire in 2008/2009 to further
improve the speed of response to 999 calls. 62
The Air Support Unit operates out of Leeds Bradford International Airport. This unit operates
one aircraft, but further aircrafts could be made available through the Northern Air
Ambulance Support Group if required.
Ambulance provision across the District is provided by the above three stations and is
supplemented by stations within Leeds, Craven, Calderdale and Kirklees, if the incidence
requires additional assistance.
The current stations and the network of standby points provide a sufficient level of resource
for the District. If demand increased permanently, Bradford would seek to commission
additional resources to meet this demand through the Lead Commissioning arrangements.
The following map shows the area each ambulance station in Yorkshire covers within the
national eight minute response time target. It shows the majority of the District is covered for
62 http://www.yas.nhs.uk/Media/PressReleases/2008/standsbytogettopatie.html
184

a response time of 8 minutes by either a Bradford District or neighbouring Ambulance
Station.
Map: ambulance stations across Yorkshire
During 2008/09 the YAS has received approximately 372,000 urgent and emergency calls,
an average of over 1,800 calls a day, and responded to a total of approximately 565,000
incidents.
Table: Ambulance service emergency call response rate
England
Average
Yorkshire Ambulance Service
Target
2008/09 2007/08 2008/09
Category A calls
Response within 8 minutes
74.3% 73.5% 69.4% 75%
Category A calls
Response within 19 minutes
96.9% 96.1% 96.1% 95%
Category B calls
Response within 19 minutes
91% 92.4% 90.6% 95%
Sources: YAS Annual Report and Summary Accounts 2007/08 and National Statistics: Ambulance Services
England 2008/09
The overall performance of the YAS in dealing with accident and emergency incidents is
however below the national average and does not meet the nationally set performance
targets. The Healthcare Commission continues to monitor YAS and envisages that significant
progress would be made in near future towards achieving the standards with which YAS
were not compliant in the previous years.
185

6.7 Social services/over 50s support
In line with national trends, Bradford has an aging population, with a projected increase by
2025 from 68,600 to 90,800 in the over-65’s. A further demographic analysis has been
presented in the Adult & Community Services 5-Year Strategy 2007-12 which in turn has
informed the District’s statutory Joint Strategic Needs Assessment, and the development of a
joint commissioning strategy for older people (‘joint’ refers principally to joint commissioning
of health and social care with NHS Bradford & Airedale tPCT). The key points, as highlighted
by the reports, in respect of delivering services to the elderly population of Bradford are that
the rate of growth is higher amongst very elderly people than the 65+ population (the number
of people aged 85 and over is already increasing, and is set to increase by 45% in the next
15 years, from 9,200 to 13,400) and there will be increasing numbers from ethnic minority
groups. There will also be increased numbers of older people and carers living with long-term
conditions, affecting both physical and mental health; for example estimated numbers of
people with dementia will increase in the same period from 5,400 to 7,100 (+31%).
Table: Bradford District older people population projections
Source: Bradford Adult Services 5-year Strategy 2007-2012
Table: 5 year projected growth in Bradford’s older people population 2007-12
Source: Bradford Adult Services 5-year Strategy 2007-2012
Bradford Council’s Adult Services is responsible to support older people and other adults in
the district including those with physical, sensory or learning disabilities, mental health
problems, drug or alcohol dependence and those with HIV/Aids.
186

In Bradford there are 91 care homes alongside 63 care homes with nursing facilities. A
comprehensive list and details of each of the care homes could be found in Bradford District
Care Services Directory 2008/09 downloadable from the following link-
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/health_wellbeing_and_care/adult_care/bradford_care_services_directory.htm
THE MAP below shows the location of adult social care facilities in Bradford. In terms of adult
social care facilities, this includes day care centres, resource centres (which offer services
and activities for adults who have physical or sensory disability, support people who wish to
gain paid employment, enter voluntary work or take part in further/higher education and run
courses in Business Administration, Computer Use, Music, Drama and Personal
Development), and older people’s residential care homes.
ADD MAP SHOWING ADULT SERVICES FACILITIES ACROSS THE DISTRICT (DAY
CARE CENTRES, RESOURCE CENTRES, OLDER PEOPLE RESIDENTIAL CARE
HOMES)
Apart from responding to the challenges of meeting the continued need and demand for care
and support from the district’s aging population, the adult services have to make a strategic
move towards providing greater choice and control to service users. The emphasis in social
care is on support for the individual rather than physical facilities. Care within the community,
fostering and a national policy emphasis on care within the recipient’s own home are altering
the traditional notions of residential institutions. Public and private sector partnership is also
increasingly the main delivery mechanism for social care.
The following points sets out some of the features that will define future care and support in
Bradford district:
• Predominately home-based support, including extra care and supported housing.
• Increased use of a range of assistive technologies, e.g. telecare.
• A high level of self-assessment and self-directed care underpinned by information,
advice, advocacy and brokerage support.
• An increased emphasis on prevention.
• An ability to respond to outcomes as defined by users.
• An ability to respond flexibly to users’ preferences and choices.
• Promotion of social inclusion.
• Specialist services, normally delivered jointly with health, where individual needs are
very complex.
From financial point of view, the future challenge to the adult service will depend on the
impact of demographic change leading to increased needs alongside decisions about the
care models required to meet these needs. At present, the department is unable to meet
current levels of need with budget pressures of £5m. It is estimated that demographic
pressures will increase this by an additional £5.4m over the next 5 years. Alongside this
there are additional service pressures of £8.5m, which lead to a possible budget shortfall in 5
years of approximately £18.9m. Analysis of spend in the comparator group of authorities
187

indicates that the department is currently spending an average £14.75m less on Adult
Services.
The significant increase in overall costs is reflected in the Wanless Review63, which
attempts to project the cost of social care for older people up to 2026. Using current service
provision models, it projects an increase of 139% in the gross cost of provision. Local
analysis of the demographic impact on older people’s funded care home placements
indicates costs could increase by £5 - £7.5m over the next 15 years.
Based on this emerging trend of future needs and aspiration of older people in Bradford and
the financial challenges being faced by the service, the council recently has carried out an
assessment of the care and support services it provides in the council owned 11 residential
care homes and in the 7 extra-care housing schemes commissioned by the council. The
Council’s eleven residential care homes are currently providing a very wide range of
services, covering long-stay (permanent) care; short-stays (mainly to provide carer breaks);
rehabilitation and assessment (intermediate care); and specialist care for people with
primarily mental health needs. But unfortunately the current assessment has found that all
these 11 residential care homes are unlikely, in their current condition, to meet future
expectations for the quality of their environment and accommodation. (This is no reflection on
the quality of care provided by the staff teams). None of them would meet all the statutory
registration standards for room size and en-suite facilities if they were opening new or being
reregistered; they all rely on lower standards applied to existing homes. There fore the
council is currently working on finalising option for the future of these 11 care homes. The
options include securing capital investment over the next 5-10 years to ensure that the care
homes meet standards and expectations for high quality accommodation, focussing on
specific care provisions, and/or closing all in-house provision over the next 10 years.
Further information on Adult Services can be found here:-
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/health_well-being_and_care/adult_care/
The Councils Guide to Over 50s can be found by clicking on the link below:-
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/NR/rdonlyres/B519825C-38A2-4FEB-ADC8-
6CF134A3B7F5/0/W18685AZGUIDEOVER50SJune08final.pdf
6.8 Gypsies and travellers facilities
The distribution of the Gypsy and Traveller population across West Yorkshire is relatively
uneven with heavier concentrations in the larger authorities of Bradford, Leeds and
Wakefield. This pattern is mirrored in terms of the incidences of unauthorised Encampments.
Bradford, Leeds and Wakefield currently provide a total of 126 pitches on their local authority
sites. There are a further 17 pitches on private authorised sites in the sub-region
concentrated in Bradford and Kirklees.
63 The Wanless Review ‘Securing good care for older people’ (2006) used a model based on
estimating the numbers of older people with different levels of functional impairment. See Bradford
District Adult Services Five Year Strategy 2007-12 for more detail.
188

Council Gypsy and Traveller sites at October 2007
Source: WY Gypsy and Travellers Accommodation Assessment (Powell R. et al, 2008)
These sites are large by national standards and occupancy rates are relatively high across
all sites. There has been no change in the number of pitches over the past 5 years at any of
the sites. All these sites are currently managed by a site manager or warden employed by
the local authority, however the post at Mary Street in Bradford is presently vacant. The
previous site warden at Mary Street was a site resident but resigned in 2005 and has not
been replaced. The intention is to find a replacement from the same source if possible.
Facilities and Living Quality of Council Gypsy and Traveller Sites
Site facilities
Facilities in amenity units
Quality of surroundings /environment
Location and access to schools/shops
- Amenity units for each pitch;
- Site office;
- Animal grazing (Esholt Lane only).
- Bath and shower;
- WC with access from lobby;
- Space/provision for cooking and laundry;
- Space for eating/ sitting;
- Effective heating in bathroom.
- Very good (Esholt Lane)
- Very poor (Mary Street)
- Very good (Mary Street)
- Good (Esholt Lane)
Site condition and maintenance - Very good (both sites)
Any known disputes etc over last year?
- Disputes between residents (Esholt Lane)
- Vandalism (Mary Street).
Source: Source: WY Gypsy and Travellers Accommodation Assessment (Powell R. et al, 2008)
189

Amenity provision on the sites appears to be good, but there are environmental and access
issues at Mary Street.
There are also 5 authorised private sites identified in Bradford.
Table: Authorised Private Sites in Bradford
Site Pitches/caravans Planning Status
Raglan Terrace 1 pitch Approved
Square Street 1 pitch Approved
Mill Car Hill Road 2 pitches Application submitted
Westgate Hill Street 2 pitches Approved
Westgate Hill Street 1 pitch Approved
Generally, these are very small encampments, usually only consisting of one or two
caravans or trailers and in every case just one family/household. However, the WYGATAA
Study has highlighted that given the sheer geographical scale of the sub-region and the
infrequency of the caravan count it is possible that there are more 'hidden' private sites within
West Yorkshire including Bradford.
Incidents of unauthorised development of Gypsy and Travellers sites are not as common as
they are in the wider region or in the national context. However, the above study has
identified six cases of possible unauthorised development in West Yorkshire, 3 of them being
within Bradford. Moreover, there have been 53 incidents of unauthorised encampments were
recored in 2006 with an average duration of statying of 10.1 days. The majority of
encampments on LA land are resolved by negotiation. Only four encampments out of 25
involved a court order.
There are also two sites within the district that accommodates 17 plots for the travelling
showpeople.
- Paley Road (1.97 hectares- 15 households) in Bowling, Bradford West
Constituency. The site is owned by the BMDC and rented to the Guild-also used
as parking space for vehicles.
- Gain Lane (2 households)
Future needs
An Accommodation Study was produced in May last year by CRESR (commissioned by the
West Yorkshire Housing Partnership) which assessed the future needs of G&T sites across
the WY region. It has identified a need for 80 additional pitches in Bradford in the period to
2026 but there is a shortfall now which needs pressing action. The study revealed that the
majority of the new accommodation will need to be social provision. Although there are
Government grants currently available for sites, so far most of the grant take up regionally
has been for refurbishment of existing sites.
190

Table: Summary of estimated G&T site need in Bradford
Need for 2008-12
19 standard pitches +
6 transit pitches
Gypsy’s &
Travellers
Need for 2013-15
(based on family growth)
Total Requirement 2008-15
6 standard pitches
31 pitches
Additional requirement 2016-26 31 pitches
Total Requirement 2008-26 62 pitches
Travelling
Showpeople
Need for 2008-12 6 pitches
Need for 2013-15
(based on family growth)
2 pitches
Total Requirement 2008-15 8 pitches
Additional requirement 2016-26 10 pitches
Total Requirement 2008-26 18 pitches
Council’s Housing Strategy reflects the requirements for future pitches but there is no action
plan in place as to how the needs will be met. Moreover, it is possible that the existing Mary
Street site may be needed for a new Waste Management facility – therefore a consequent
replacement for the site would be additional to the pitches needed specified above.
The sorts of areas suitable for gypsy and traveller sites will be addressed in the LDF Core
Strategy and in particular allocations DPDs.
6.9 Culture and Leisure
6.9.1 Museums/galleries
Bradford District is home to some of the most exciting museums and galleries in Yorkshire.
From the Baroque splendour of Cartwright Hall Art Gallery to the intimacy of Ilkley's Manor
House Museum and Art Gallery, there is always something new to do or see, and admission
is free.
Specialist museums like Bradford Industrial Museum and Keighley's Cliffe Castle Museum
bring our District's history and heritage to life through ever-changing displays; while
interactive exhibits and family events at the Brackenhall Countryside centre help young
people learn to enjoy and respect the countryside.
The Councils Education team run regular workshops and special events with schools and
other groups, and will be delighted to help you make the most of your visit.
Many of the museums, galleries and community halls have rooms for hire for meetings and
special events - some are even licensed for marriages.
There are 7 museums and galleries managed by the Council within Bradford District:-
1. Bradford 1 Gallery
2. Cartwright Hall
3. Bradford Industrial Museum
4. Cliffe Castle
191

5. Manor House
6. Bolling Hall
7. Bracken Hall
Bradford is also home to the National Media Museum as well as the following privately run
museums and galleries-
Name and Location Type of attraction
• Saltaire Brewery & Visitor Centre, Saltaire Museum & Gallery
• Salts Mill Gallery, Saltaire Museum & Gallery
• Brontë Parsonage Museum, Haworth Museum & Gallery
• Keighley Bus Museum, Keighley Museum & Gallery
• Impressions Gallery, Bradford Museum & Gallery
• Gallery II, Bradford Museum & Gallery
• Colour Museum, Bradford Museum & Gallery
• Peace Museum, Bradford Museum & Gallery
• Museum of Reed Organs and Harmoniums, Shipley Museum & Gallery
• Ilkley Toy Museum, Ilkely Museum & Gallery
• Brontë Weaving Shed, Haworth Museum & Gallery
• East Riddlesden Hall, Keighley Historic House
• White Wells Spa Cottage, Ilkely Historic House
Figure: Location of Attractions in and around Bradford
192

6.9.2 Theatres/Concert Halls
Bradford District is home to 5 theatres/concert halls mainly located in Bradford City Centre
close to public transport interchanges and the road network. The first three of the list below
are run by the Council. Bradford Theatres attract 400,000 visitors yearly with over 90,000
people in the eight weeks of Pantomime seasons.
St. George's Hall
St. George's Hall is renowned for exceptional acoustics
and an intimate atmosphere. The venue seats over 1,500
people and is a popular choice for bands at the cutting
edge of British. The venue hosts one of the UKs longest
running Orchestral Seasons, with the Hallé as resident
orchestra. The hall also attracts big names in variety
entertainment and receives regular children's shows and
amateur productions.
St. George's Hall offers a unique and unrivalled setting for meetings, events and corporate
hospitality, and conferences (limited to certain times of year only).
Alhambra Theatre
The Alhambra Theatre is regarded as the North's premier
touring venue and hosts the best in large scale
entertainment from ballet and opera to variety and comedy,
musicals, drama and Yorkshire's biggest panto.
The venue seats 1,400 people and is a popular choice for major touring companies including
Northern Ballet Theatre, Royal Shakespeare Company and Bill Kenwright (Joseph, Cabaret,
Blood Brothers). It has staged major West End shows including Chitty Chitty Bang Bang and
Starlight Express. It is a member of The Dance Consortium, a group of theatres who work
together to bring the best in international dance to the UK.
The Alhambra also offers a unique and unrivalled setting for meetings, events, corporate
hospitality and conferences in Bradford (conferences at certain times of year only).
The Studio
The Studio offers a flexible space for theatre, exhibitions,
meetings, conferences, wedding receptions, private parties
and themed events.
With a range of options from buffet dining for 140 to raked
seating for 200, and even standing for 300 people, this
Bradford venue has the potential for many types of event.
193

It is also home to Bradford's favourite comedy club, A Bag of Quips. Now in its 10th year, the
monthly comedy club is famed for its intimate atmosphere and top class comedians - past
headliners have included Russell Howard and Alan Carr.
Bradford Playhouse
Bradford Playhouse (formally known as The Priestley, The
Priestley Centre for the Arts or Bradford Playhouse and Film
Theatre - and originally Bradford Civic Playhouse) is a 290
seat proscenium arch theatre with circle and stall seating
based in Little Germany. The Priestley also has a studio
space which has flexible lighting, sound, and seating
arrangements.
The King's Hall & Winter Garden
The King's Hall and Winter Garden are located in the heart
of Ilkley. The Hall comprises a traditional theatre and with
the adjacent glass roofed spa Winter Garden.
The King's Hall and Winter Garden currently host a wide
range of events and community provision, from local
amateur dramatic and performing arts companies, to lifestyle
fairs and community events, as well being a key venue for
the Summer Festival held in August.
For details of each of the theatres/concert halls visit the website:
http://www.bradford-theatres.co.uk/venues
ADD MAP SHOWING LOCATION OF THE THEATRES
6.9.3 Cinemas
In terms of cinemas, the district contains -
• 16 screen Cineworld at Leisure Exchange, Vicar Lane, Bradford
• 13 screen Odeon at Gallacher Leisure Park, Thornbury, Bradford
• IMAX at The National Media Museum, Bradford
• 2 screen cinema at The Picture House, North Street, Keighley
The National Media Museum also houses two more cinemas, the Pictureville and Cubby
Broccoli, which regularly screens the best contemporary and classic films, and frequently
welcome guests from the cinema industry to talk about their work.
194

6.9.4 Ten Pin Bowling alleys, Casinos/Bingo Halls
10-pin bowling facilities in the District comprise Hollywood Bowl at Vicar Lane, Bradford (28
lanes), AMF Bowling at Keighley (20 lanes) and Go-Bowling at Shipley Lanes (12 lanes). In
addition to small and informal bingo clubs, large format bingo halls in the District include
Buckingham Bingo, Bradford Interchange; Mecca Bingo, Little Horton, Bradford; Gala Bingo,
Tong Street; Oxford Bingo, Dudley Hill Road, Bradford; and Gala Bingo, Alice Lane,
Keighley.
6.9.5 Libraries
Bradford Council manages 31 libraries across Bradford District. These are listed below:-
1. Addingham Library
2. Allerton Library
3. Baildon Library
4. Bingley Library
5. Burley Library
6. Central Library
7. Clayton Library
8. Denholme Library
9. East Bowling Library
10. Eccleshill Library
11. Girlington Library
12. Great Horton Library
13. Haworth Road Library
14. Heaton Library
15. Holme Wood Library
16. Idle Library
17. Ilkley Library
18. Keighley Library
19. Laisterdyke Library
20. Manningham Library
21. Menston Library
22. Queensbury Library
23. Shipley Library
24. Silsden Library
25. St. Augustine's Library
26. Thornbury Library
27. Thornton Library
28. Wibsey Library
29. Wilsden Library
30. Wrose Library
31. Wyke Library
ADD GIS PLAN SHOWING THE LOCATION OF THE LIBRARIES
There are also 3 mobile libraries that travel to different locations around the District. The
Libraries provide a range of services including loaning of books, DVDs, CDs and audio
books, 24/7 web access to the library catalogue and other information resources. All libraries
offer free internet access, free requests for in stock items, storytimes and activities for
children and families. Many libraries also offer reading groups and informal learning
opportunities. Larger libraries also have meeting rooms, photocopying facilities, local and
family history material and business information.
195

The size of library members and the number of annual and average weekly visits, as shown
in the following table, indicate that existing libraries in Bradford are well used by the
communities across the district.
Table: Library usage in Bradford District
Library Name Annual Visit numbers Average visits per week Library Members
Addingham 3335 64.1 543
Allerton 19730 379.4 2046
Baildon 65919 1267.7 4201
Bingley 99253 1908.7 8861
Burley 35340 679.6 2397
Central 294421 5661.9 51043
Clayton 22199 426.9 2271
Denholme 4751 91.4 539
East Bowling 11461 220.4 1054
Eccleshill 116892 2247.9 12689
Girlington 21318 410.0 2070
Great Horton 34883 670.8 3870
Haworth Road 15829 304.4 1470
Heaton 3023 58.1 207
Holme Wood 28266 543.6 2854
Idle 10225 196.6 567
Ilkley 131396 2526.8 11796
Keighley 271603 5223.1 25412
Laisterdyke 59692 1147.9 6297
Manningham (estimate) 120000 2307.7 8361
Menston 29291 563.3 2194
Queensbury 9787 188.2 1179
Shipley 309791 5957.5 24052
Silsden 14659 281.9 2043
St. Augustine's 7776 149.5 894
Thornbury 21157 406.9 1784
Thornton 12480 240.0 1113
Wibsey 34154 656.8 5677
Wilsden 4450 85.6 251
Wrose 5554 106.8 546
Wyke 47924 921.6 4216
Mobile Library Service
(incl Home
delivery/delivery vans)
29829 573.6 1957
TOTAL 1896388 36469.0 194454
Source: Bradford Libraries, Department of Culture, Tourism and sport, CBMDC.
The role of the library within the community is changing resulting in libraries working in
partnership with other community services and sharing resources and accommodation
whenever possible.
The recent review of library services in the District recommends further development of
partnership working and commissioning of services, working closely with local communities
to ensure local libraries meet local needs and moving towards a more flexible operation able
to delivery library services in a variety of settings.
196

6.9.6 Children’s play areas
There are over 140 play areas the Bradford District, many of them within Parks or Recreation
Grounds. (ADD GIS MAP SHOWING PLAY AREAS IN BRADFORD DISTRICT)
In addition to conventional play areas the Council also provide Skateparks, BMX facilities
and Multi-Use games courts for older children and young people.
The Council works with local groups to create new play areas. This may include helping them
apply for funding or with design and sourcing the best equipment. All play areas managed by
the service are inspected by qualified staff, on a regular basis, to ensure they are maintained
in a safe and good condition.
In total, there are 215 play areas for children and young people in the District, totalling 20ha.
The Bradford District Open Space Assessment (2006) has concluded that in areas of slight
catchment gaps, the upgrading of certain play areas from Local Area for Play (LAPs) to Local
Equipped Areas of Play (LEAPs) could be considered.
However, in other areas of significant gaps, such as in north and south Shipley and west
Keighley, the installation of new equipped play areas is required in some to reduce the
significant catchment gaps.
6.9.7 Sports pitches and courts
Bradford District Open Space Assessment (2006) has been prepared by KKP on behalf of
the Council.
Football
There are a total of XX senior football pitches and 19 mini football pitches which are spread
throughout the Bradford district.
The Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006) highlighted that there is large
deficiency of designated mini and junior soccer pitches across the District. Although a
surplus of senior pitches (to meet peak demand) was identified it was established that this
would not make up for the deficiencies in mini and junior provision even if it was redesignated.
197

Figure: Bradford Football and Cricket pitches
Bradford Football Pitches
Assessed by Quality / Capacity
Over Use
At Guidance Level
Under Use
No specified usage
PENDLE
CRAVEN
CALDERDALE
Steeton
Haworth
Oxenhope
Silsden
Addingham
Keighley
Keighley
Harden
Cullingworth
Denholme
Queensbury
Wilsden
Bingley
Ilkley
Bradford West
Shipley
Burley in
Wharf edale
Menston
Baildon
Shipley
Bradf ord
HARROGATE
Bradford North
Bradford South
KIRKLEES
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
In terms of area based assessment, the study concludes that the current pitch stock in the
Bradford North area has capacity to accommodate strategic reserve and future demand
while those in Bradford South would not currently be able to meet the requirements.
The current pitch stock in Bradford West could just cope with accommodating strategic
reserve but the pitch stock in Ilkley and Keighley is not capable of accommodating strategic
reserve and latent/future demand.
The current pitch stock in Shipley has the capacity to accommodate strategic reserve, latent
and future demand if improvements are made to existing sites.
Cricket
The Open Space Assessment has highlighted that there is a slight deficiency in pitch
provision at peak times and that demand is increasing for cricket pitches on parks and
recreation grounds in Bradford North, Bradford South and Bradford West.
See location of cricket pitches across the district below:-
LEEDS
198

Figure: Cricket pitches in Bradford
PENDLE
CRAVEN
CALDERDALE
Steeton
Silsden
148
143
Addingham
185
Keighley
Keighley
162
159
146
Queensbury
66
161
153
Ilkley
156
Shipley
205
224
150
154
Burley in
Wharf edale
Menston
194
70
281
230
233
Bradford South
HARROGATE
168
170
175
169
215 Bingley
157
Baildon
229
279
32
173
Haworth
174
Oxenhope
177
Harden
195
197 228 199 29 36
209
232
27
Shipley
Wilsden
109
20
115
Cullingworth
236 172
119
218
Bradford West 112
38
Bradford North
Denholme 120
126
Bradf ord
83
22
113
37
12
62
71 69
2 5
67
88
90
94
84
55
86
KIRKLEES
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
Rugby union
The Yorkshire Rugby Football Union (RFU) administers rugby in Bradford. A full-time
development officer is responsible for the West Yorkshire region and works closely with all
the clubs to maximise their potential. This work involves developing club structures, including
working towards the RFU Seal of Approval and the development of school-club structures.
Figure : Rugby Union pitch sites in Bradford District
Bradford Rugby union Pitches
Assessed by Quality / Capacity
Over Use
At Guidance Level
Under Use
No specified usage
PENDLE
CRAVEN
CALDERDALE
Steeton
Haworth
Oxenhope
Silsden
Addingham
282
Keighley
Keighley
Denholme
Queensbury
Burley in
Wharf edale
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
Harden
Cullingworth
Wilsden
239
Bingley
Ilkley
Bradford West
155
Shipley
197
137
154
60
Menston
Shipley
283
Baildon
Bradf ord
284
Bradford North
Bradford South
HARROGATE
9
5
86
KIRKLEES
LEEDS
LEEDS
199

There are relatively few issues affecting rugby union compared to other sports in Bradford.
The quality of pitches in Bradford is good and many private clubs own their own facilities and
are able to maintain them to a high standard.
There are catchment gaps of both clubs and facilities for certain areas of Bradford (Bradford
South and Bradford West) but these shortfalls are currently being met by surpluses in other
areas. The usage of school facilities by rugby union clubs is very high. Often, these pitches
are used on an ad-hoc basis if the main sites are unusable.
There is no latent demand at senior level for rugby but demand for more junior pitches is
growing which will become more acute if clubs individual development plans are realised.
Table: Summary of rugby union pitches in Bradford
Site name Area
Site Community Senior Junior Mini
Owner Use G A P G A P G A P
Bradford Cathedral
Community College
Hanson School
Tong School
Northfield Road Playing
Fields
Thornton Grammer School
Braford Salem Rugby Club
Bradford
North
Bradford
North
Bradford
South
Bradford
South
Bradford
West
Bradford
West
LA Yes 1
LA Yes 1
LA Yes 1
0 Yes 1
LA Yes 1
0 Yes 2
Ilkley Grammar School Keighley LA Yes 1
Ilkley Rugby Union Club Keighley Private Yes 4 2
Cougar Park Keighley 0 Yes 3
Bradford & Bingley Sports &
Social Club
Shipley Private Yes 4
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
School sites with rugby union pitches in Bradford are significantly underused by clubs. Ilkey
Grammar School is used on a weekly basis by Ilkley Rugby Club to accommodate its junior
development programme.
Two of the main clubs in Bradford, Keighley Cougars and Ilkley Rugby Club, make use of
other sites in Bradford to play matches. These are used on an ad-hoc basis and are not
therefore shown as being played to capacity.
Rugby league
There is a considerable amount of rugby league activity in Bradford. The majority of this
activity takes place within a small number of clubs, all of whom field several senior teams
and a number of teams at junior level.
200

Figure : Rugby league pitch sites in Bradford District
Bradford Rugby league Pitches
Assessed by Quality / Capacity
Over Use
At Guidance Level
Under Use
No specified usage
PENDLE
CRAVEN
CALDERDALE
Steeton
Haworth
Oxenhope
Silsden
165
Queensbury
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
Bradford has a stronger and larger grass roots base than other areas of West Yorkshire with
all ten clubs either working towards, or having achieved Clubmark to date. The two
professional clubs, Bradford Bulls and Keighley Cougars, have both achieved Clubmark and
are used as flagship clubs to promote club accreditation to amateur clubs.
The following table indicates club accreditation in Bradford.
190
Addingham
149
Keighley
167
160
Keighley
Harden
Cullingworth
Denholme
Burley in
Wharf edale
Table: Rugby league clubs accredited in Bradford
Club Accreditation status
Queensbury Accreditation achieved
Victoria Rangers Accreditation achieved
Bradford Dudley Hill Accreditation achieved
West Bowling ARLFC Accreditation achieved
Keighley Cougar Cubs Accreditation achieved
Thonrton ARLFC Registered – working towards
Wyke ARLFC Registered – working towards
Wibsey Juniors Registered – working towards
Clayton Registered – working towards
Wilsden
Bingley
Ilkley
Shipley
Bradford West
120
7
207
107
54
152
56
The majority of rugby league clubs are located in the north of Bradford reflecting an uneven
distribution of clubs across the District. The Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation
Study (2006) however demonstrates that the current stock of rugby league pitches is not
being played to capacity; particularly in Bradford South where there is a disproportionate
number of teams compared the rest of the District.
89
Menston
Shipley
92
Baildon
91
194
HARROGATE
17
18
Bradford North
74 Bradf ord
10
76
80
Bradford South
55
KIRKLEES
LEEDS
201

Table: Rugby league pitches in Bradford district
Site name Area
Site
Owner
Community
Use
Senior
G A P
Junior
G A P
Emsley Memorial Recreation Ground Bradford North LA Yes 1
Lowerfields Primary Bradford North LA Yes 1
Victoria Rangers Ground Bradford North Private Yes 1
Apperley Bridge Playing Fields Bradford North LA Yes 1
ASA Briggs Park Bradford South LA Yes 1
Bankfoot Cricket Ground Bradford South Private Yes 1
Beldon Lane Recreation Ground Bradford South LA Yes 1
Lidget Green Cricket and Athletic
Club
Bradford South LA Yes 2
Neil Hunt Memorial Ground Bradford South LA Yes 1 1
Odsal Recreation Ground Bradford South LA Yes 2
Wibsey Park Bradford South LA Yes 2
Wibsey Park Primary Bradford South LA Yes 1
Woodside Primary Bradford South LA Yes 1
Delph Recreation Ground Bradford West LA Yes 1
Hill Top Rd Bradford West LA Yes 2
Silsden Park Keighley LA Yes 1
East Holmes Field Keighley LA Yes 2
Highfield Recreation Ground Keighley LA Yes 2
Oakbank Sports College Keighley LA Yes 1
Utley Recreation Ground Keighley LA Yes 2
The Holy Family Catholic School Keighley LA Yes 1
Baildon Rugby and Cricket Ground Shipley Private Yes 2
Crossflats Recreation Ground Shipley LA Yes 1
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
Hockey
On a County level, hockey is strong and junior development is well structured in Bradford.
However, considering the demographic make up of the District there is a lack of true
‘community’ work and more could be done to increase participation in the deprived areas for
disadvantaged young people. Most participation/activity is based around the grammar
schools, which risks bringing an ‘elitist’ label to the game in Bradford.
There are six ATPs identified in use by the local teams.
Table: ATPs in Bradford District
Venue Area
Thornton Sports College/Recreation Centre Bradford West
Oakbank Sports College Keighley/Ilkley
Beckfoot Technology College Shipley
Bradford Girls Grammar School Bradford North
Carlton Bolling College Bradford North
Grange Technology College (under construction) Bradford West
Ben Rhydding Sports Club Keighley/Ilkley
202

All of the above facilities are full size sand based artificial turf pitches. In addition there are a
number of smaller artificial turf surfaces, which are suitable for hockey training and some
junior play.
Table: Small ATPs in Bradford
Venue Area
Parkside School Keighley
Maningham Sports Centre Bradford North
Scotchman Road Activity & Coaching Centre Bradford North
Highfield Community Centre Keighley
University of Bradford – Trinity Road Bradford West
The ATP at Marley Playing Fields has been replaced with a 3 rd generation field turf pitch and
as such is no longer a suitable surface for competitive hockey. It was the only pitch managed
by CBMDC with ‘100% community use’. All the other pitches were within the education and
private sector. Use of ATPs is considered to be at capacity.
Figure : Artificial turf hockey pitches in Bradford District
PENDLE
CRAVEN
CALDERDALE
Steeton
Oxenhope
Silsden
Haworth
Addingham
Keighley
165
Keighley
Cullingworth
Denholme
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
Harden
Queensbury
Wilsden
Burley in
Wharf edale
Hockey is not a priority sport for CBMDC sports development unit but support for clubs is
available through the B Active networks set up in each area.
Athletics
There are two athletics tracks servicing competitive athletics in the Bradford District:
Bingley
Ilkley
Bradford West
137
Shipley
196
105
Greenhead High School, Keighley: Greenhead is an eight-lane synthetic, floodlit track on
the grounds of Greenhead School in Keighley. It is managed by CBMDC, which employs a
150
Shipley
Menston
Bradf ord
103
Baildon
116
37
Bradford South
HARROGATE
Bradford North
50
KIRKLEES
LEEDS
203

part-time track manager. The quality of the track is ‘adequate to poor’ evidenced by
deteriorating track edging, poor drainage on surround grass areas and uneven surfaces on
run up areas etc.
Greenhead is the home of Keighley & Craven Athletics Club (KCAC) and is also used by a
number of other local clubs and schools e.g. the Oakbank School Sport Partnership
secondary schools, cluster primary schools as well as other schools from neighbouring Ilkely,
Bingley and Skipton. It is considered by sportKeighley, the Three Valley’s SSP and the
Airedale Masterplan and Airdale Primary Care Trust to be a key sports development facility
for the area.
Greenhead School is in phase two of CBMDC’s BSF programme. Whilst this will involve
demolition of the School’s buildings and reconstruction adjacent to the track, the track will
remain in its current position. Funding from the Community Athletics Refurbishment
Programme (CARP) has recently been secured for basic renovation of the track. This is
intended to support the existence and development of K&CAC and facilitate an athletics
development centre as well as provide good quality facilities for sport and physical activity
through curricular and extra curricular activities for all schools in the area.
Horsfall Playing Fields, Low Moor (Bradford South): Horsfall track is located at Horsfall
Playing Fields, off the A6036 Halifax Road heading southwest away from Bradford. The site
is a multi-sport facility with grass pitches for cricket and football adjacent to the track. The
athletics track also has a football pitch in the middle, which is used by Bradford Park Avenue
FC.
Horsfall track is a six lane track and, as such, is not certified for anything other than local
level competitions. It is the home of Bradford Airedale Athletics Club (BAAC) and is
occasionally used by other local clubs for training sessions. According to the Athletics
Development Officer for West Yorkshire Sport the venue is not used by West Yorkshire
Schools Athletics Association, Bradford Schools Athletics Association or West Yorkshire
Athletics Association for meetings/competitions due to the poor quality changing rooms and
the fact that it is only a six lane track.
The track is currently being considered as part of proposals to develop ‘Odsal Sports Village’
at the existing Odsal Stadium, home of Bradford Bulls. The scheme involves relocating and
upgrading the track from Horsfall to an eight-lane track as part of a regional sports complex
including leisure centre, swimming pool and artificial turf pitches.
204

Figure: Athletics tracks in Bradford District with a 30-minute drive time catchment
RIBBLE VALLEY
HYNDBURN
BLACKBURN
WITH DARWEN
BOLTON
ROSSENDALE
PENDLE
BURNLEY
CRAVEN
Greenhead High School
CALDERDALE
BURY ROCHDALE
DONCASTER
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
A number of schools mark out tracks on grass or redraw areas in the summer in order to
deliver curriculum activities. School competitions and sports days are carried out either at
Horsfall, Greenhead or at tracks outside the District.
All the local track and field clubs in Bradford has constituted Bradford Athletics Development
Group (BADG) which is led by the athletics development officer from West Yorkshire Sport
with input from the Keighley area sports development officer from CBMDC who also has a
responsibility for athletics across the District. The group comes together to discuss the
delivery of activities steered by West Yorkshire Sport and the Bradford school sports
partnerships, local and area competitions and to share good practise and resources. The
clubs are-
• Keighley and Craven Athletics Club (K&CAC)
• Bradford Airedale Athletics Club (BAAC)
• Bingley Harriers & Athletics Club (BHAC)
• Idle Athletics Club(IAC)
• Wharfedale Harriers
Horsfall Playing Fields
KIRKLEES
HARROGATE
WAKEFIELD
Public consultation with these clubs as a part of the Council’s Outdoor Sports Facilities
Assessment has highlighted the urgent need of improving the quality of tracks and ancillary
facilities at Greenhead School as well as development of a new track at Odsal. If a track is
not developed at Odsal, with the loss of Horsfall, there would be a significant gap in provision
covering the centre and south of the District. The study also identified demand for a training
track (e.g. three lane straight and bend) in the Shipley/Bingley area.
There are also a number of other road running clubs in the District including:
• Baildon Runners – based at Baildon Cricket & Rugby Club.
LEEDS
SELBY
YORK
205

• Eccleshill Road Runners – based at Idle Cricket Club.
• Ilkley Harriers – based at Ilkley Lawn Tennis & Squash Club.
These clubs train on the roads, footpaths and canal towpaths around the District. Activities
are essentially supported by being linked to another sports club which enables them to
access changing and in most cases, social facilities.
Bowls
Bowls in West Yorkshire is predominantly played on crown greens.
Figure: Bowling greens in Bradford District
PENDLE
CRAVEN
CALDERDALE
Steeton
266
Haworth
Oxenhope
Silsden
259
Addingham
149
Keighley
Keighley
260
Queensbury
Burley in
Wharf edale
262
171
Harden
256
Bingley
263
Wilsden
229
261
Baildon
258
Shipley
28
26
15
Cullingworth 272
212
Denholme
267 Bradford North
Bradford West 275
33
129
269
Bradford
257
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
276
There are a total of 52 bowling greens in Bradford district located at the following parks and
club sites.
Table: Number and Location of bowling greens in Bradford
Site name Area No. greens
Greengates Recreation Ground Bradford North 1
Idle Recreation Ground Bradford North 1
Institute Road Recreation Ground Bradford North 1
Lister Park Bradford North 3
Peel Park Bradford North 3
Asa BriggsBowling Club Bradford South 1
Brackenhill Park Bowling Club Bradford South 1
Bradford Moor Bowling Club Bradford South 2
Foxhill Park Bradford South 1
Harold Park Bradford South 1
274
65
268
Ilkley
Shipley
277
150
270
Menston
89
Bradford South
68
273
264
271
78
HARROGATE
265
72
KIRKLEES
LEEDS
206

Table: Number and Location of bowling greens in Bradford
Site name Area No. greens
Knowles Recreation Ground Bradford South 2
Low Moor Harold Bowling Club Bradford South 2
Oakenshaw Park Bradford South 2
Wibsey Park Bradford South 2
Clayton Victoria Park Bradford West 1
Horton Park Bradford West 3
Thornton Bowling Club Bradford West 1
West Bradford Bowling Club Bradford West 1
West Park Bradford West 2
Ben Rhydding Sports Club Keighley 1
Burley In Wharfedale Bowling Club Keighley 1
Crossroads Park Keighley 1
Haworth Bowling Club Keighley 1
Ilkley Bowling Club Keighley 1
Keighley Bowling Club Keighley 1
Lund Park bowling green Keighley 2
Silsden Park Keighley 1
Steeton Bowling Club Keighley 1
Whinswood Bowling Club Keighley 1
Crowgill Park bowling green Shipley 1
Cullingworth Bowling Club Shipley 1
Foster Park Shipley 1
Menston Bowling Club Shipley 1
Myrtle Park Shipley 2
Royd House Park Bowling Club Shipley 1
Salts Playing Fields Shipley 2
The Shipley Club Shipley 1
Most of the clubs rent greens from the Council while a small number of clubs lease the
greens from the Council. There are also few private bowling clubs in the district. Overall the
existing bowling greens meet the current demand for such sports facilities in the district;
however the Outdoor Sports Facilities Assessment has identified thee need for two additional
bowling greens to meet future demand.
Vandalism of bowling greens and pavilions is the biggest issue for bowls for the District as a
whole. A large proportion of bowling greens also do not have appropriate access for players
or spectators with disabilities.
Tennis
Bradford has the following tennis courts spread throughout the district.
207

Table: Tennis clubs in Bradford district
Site name Area No. courts
Carlton Bolling College Bradford North 5
Hanson School Bradford North 8
Lister Park Bradford North 2
Undercliffe Tennis Club Bradford South 3
Thornton Grammer School Bradford West 4
Heaton Tennis Club Shipley 9
Eldwick Lawn Tennis Club Keighley 2
Greenhead High School Keighley 5
Ilkley Tennis Club Keighley 6
Keighley Tennis Club Keighley 4
The Holy Family Catholic School Keighley 7
Beckfoot Technology College Shipley 4
Beckfoot Tennis Club Shipley 4
Saltaire Tennis Club Shipley 3
Salts Playing Fields Shipley 3
St. Peter's Tennis Club Shipley 2
Figure: Tennis court provision across Bradford District
PENDLE
CRAVEN
CALDERDALE
Haworth
Steeton
Oxenhope
Silsden
190
Addingham
Keighley
Keighley
185
288
Cullingworth
Denholme
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
Harden
Queensbury
287
292
Wilsden
Bingley
Ilkley
Shipley
Bradford West
137
285
Burley in
Wharf edale
Tennis in Bradford is administered by Yorkshire LTA which is responsible for the delivery of
the LTA’s national plan at a local level, the main body of this being the Club Vision
Programme. Club Vision is the LTA's strategy to provide progressive clubs with greater
support and resources at both national and county level. It is an investment programme that
supports not just tennis clubs but also public 'pay and play' indoor tennis centres (ITI
centres), schools and local authority venues; it also helps the club and county tennis
286
Menston
196 229
289
Shipley
267
Baildon
Bradf ord
Bradford South
HARROGATE
9
Bradford North
50
KIRKLEES
LEEDS
208

development officer identify areas or projects for the club to work on and where funding or
other resources may be required.
The Council’s Outdoor Sports Facilities Assessment states that the existing tennis facilities
are adequate to meet the demand for such facilities in the district. There is however a need
for more courts at some clubs (Saltaire and Eldwick) to meet a league demand which is
currently being met by hiring courts at other venues.
Golf
Bradford District has the following golf facilities:
Table: Golf clubs in Bradford
Club
Ownership/
management Club
Ownership/
management
Baildon Private The Manor Private
Ben Rhydding Private Marriott Hollins Hall Hotel Private
Bingley St. Ives Private Northcliffe Private
Bracken Ghyll Private Phoenix Park Private
Bradford Private Queensbury Private
Bradford Moor Private Riddlesden Private
Branshaw Private Shay Grange Golf Centre Local authority
Clayton Private Shipley Private
Fardew Private Silsden Private
Headley Private South Bradford Private
Ilkley Private West Bowling Private
Keighley Private West Bradford Private
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
According to the Outdoor Sports Facilities Assessment (2006) it appears that the existing golf
facilities can accommodate the demand in the district. However, the ongoing golf
development work (e.g. golf being introduced as an extra curricular activity in schools in
Bradford through the school sport partnerships) may potentially increase demand in the short
to longer term. Although only a few municipal courses provide affordable opportunities for
young people/beginners to play regularly, there is potential for many of those clubs to
develop junior activities and make courses/membership more accessible to young people.
Most clubs also have good access for non-members.
209

Figure : Golf courses and driving ranges in Bradford
PENDLE
CRAVEN
CALDERDALE
Keighley
Shipley
Bradford West
Bradford
South
Bradford
North
KIRKLEES
Source: Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study (2006)
7
1319
6.9.8 Sports Centres and recreation facilities
22
4
10
3
11
12
21
18
8
2
16
20
1
5
15
6
17
9
HARROGATE
The current community strategy of the district is economy-led but it realises that sustainable
regeneration must go hand-in-hand with environmental improvements and real progress on
other issues such as education, sports, health, citizenship and community safety. The council
has recently commissioned a comprehensive and independent review of district wide Sports
and Recreation Facilities 64 with an aim to produce a plan to establish strategies and policies
to protect, enhance and provide facilities in response to shortfalls or over provision, both now
and up to 2018. The report has identified the existing provision of sports and recreation
facilities across the district and highlighted the key issues faced by this sector.
In terms of existing provision the District contains a wide array of gyms, swimming pools and
health clubs, both in private membership and publicly run facilities. The followings are the
council-run Sports Centres and Swimming Pools in the Bradford District:
• Baildon Recreation Centre, Green Lane, Baildon, BD17 5JH
• Bingley Pool, Myrtle Place, Bingley, BD16 2LF
• Bowling Pool, Flockton Road, Bradford, BD4 7RY
• Doe Park Water Activities Centre, Foster Park View, Denholme, BD13 4LN
• Eccleshill Pool, Harrogate Road, Bradford, BD10 0QE
• Grange Sports Centre, Haycliffe Lane,Bradford, BD5 9ET
• Greenhead Track, Greenhead Road, Utley, BD20 6ED
64 BMDC (2008). Sports and Recreation Facilities Assessment. Draft Report dated February 2008.
Strategic Leisure Limited.
25
23
24
14
LEEDS
210

• Horsfall Stadium, Cemetery Road, Bradford, BD6 1JQ
• Ilkley Pool & Lido, Denton Road, Ilkley, LS29 0BZ
• The Leisure Centre, Victoria Park, Keighley, BD21 3JN
• Manningham Sports Centre & Pool, Carlisle Road, Bradford, BD8 8BA
• Marley Activities & Coaching Centre, Aireworth Road, Keighley, BD21 4DB
• Nab Wood Sports Centre, Cottingley New Road, Bingley, BD16 1TZ
• Queensbury Pool, Station Road, Queensbury, BD13 1AB
• Rhodesway Pool, Oaks Lane, Bradford, BD15 7RU
• Richard Dunn Sports Centre, Rooley Avenue, Bradford, BD6 1EZ
• Shipley Pool, Alexandra Road, Shipley, BD18 3ER
• Thornton Recreation Centre, Leaventhorpe Lane, Bradford, BD13 3BH
• Tong Sports Centre & Pool, Westgate Hill, Bradford, BD4 6NR
Apart from the above swimming pools and sports centres there are also a number of other
local facilities spread throughout the district. Some of the health and fitness centres
frequently visited by the residents are listed below-
• Fitness First (Westgate, Bradford / Horton Park Avenue, Bradford / Worth Way,
Keighley / Victoria Road, Eccleshill)
• Cannons Health Club, Cottingley New Road, Bingley
• Esporta, Gallagher Leisure Park, Thornbury
• Greens Health and Fitness, Fred Atkinson Way, Baildon
• Workouts, Oakworth Road, Keighley
• Bradford University Gym, Bradford
• Kents Leisure Centre, Undercliffe Road, Bradford
• Hi-Energy Dance, Health& Fitness Studio, Russell Street, Keighley
• Streamline Fitness, Park View Mills, Bradford
• Planet Fitness, Buttershaw Mills, Bradford
• Heaton Tennis & Squash Club, Crofton Road, Bradford
• We are not a Gym, Unit E1, Enterprise Way, Bradford
• Fitness Fusion, The Grove Promenade, Ilkley
• Bingley Grammar School Sports Centre, Keighley Road, Bingley
Although these facilities are generally widespread across the district, there appears to be
insufficient quality, fit for purpose facilities to meet the identified demand and provide
opportunities to increase and improve participation in sport and physical activity. There is
also an under provision of some fit for purpose facilities, particularly 25m pools across the
district which is exacerbated when the issue of accessibility is taken into account. A number
of facilities are located on school sites which provide for school use only and the policy for
community access is limited.
Sports Hall Provision is generally well provided for in quantitative terms, but there are issues
with accessibility. There is a slight deficiency to meet future demand for provision. This could
be met by the increased number of halls to be provided through BSF programme and by
providing significant health and fitness facilities within the Amaechi Basketball Centre
211

(ABC) under the Odsal Sports Village development, provided that these are available for
community use and managed appropriately to maximise community accessibility.
The 2 main athletics facilities in the district- Horsfall Athletics Stadium and Greenhead Track
meet the current standard but there are issues with quality and size of the facilities to
accommodate identified need. The new provision at Greenhead School through the BSF
programme however is expected to address the quality issues.
The Sports and Recreation Facilities assessment has also identified 15 synthetic turf pitches
(STP) across the district (consisting of 14 full size pitches and 2 x half-size) of varying quality
and access. These STPs are well distributed across the district in terms of accessibility, as
indicated by the catchment areas (20 min drive). However, the majority of provision is located
in Bradford West. Possible deficiency in parts of Shipley area and Bradford South for small
sided games areas.
6.9.9 Festivals and town centre programmes
There are more than 200 festivals and events programmed to be celebrated across the
district from January 2009 and December 2010. The Bradford events calendar, which could
be accessed through the www.visitbradford.com website, shows a comprehensive list of all
the current and future events planned for the district. This ranges from classical music
concerts to film festivals celebrating bradford’s newly gained the World’s First UNESCO ‘City
of Film’ status and art exhibitions to vintage car exhibitions.
Most of the major events and festivals are organised throughout the summer months e.g.
Bradford Mela, the Ilkley Literature Festival, the Bingley Show and Bradford city centre
events. Events traditionally held in the winter months include a Victorian Fayre and a
Christmas Carol Service.
Bradford is also well-known for its three film festivals including the Bradford Film Festival
(March), Bite the Mango (September) and the Bradford Animation Festival (November) which
are organised by the National Media Museum.
Other highlights include the Ilkley Summer Festival, the Saltaire Festival and Christmas
events in Haworth.
The events in Bradford with the highest profile include:
• Bradford Mela: usually held over a weekend in July, the Bradford Mela has been running
since 1989 and attracts up to 140,000 people annually. It provides an opportunity for the
local community to come together to share and celebrate their culture. Events include
markets, bazaars, international food stalls, art, crafts, educational ‘zones’ and traditional and
contemporary music, dance and theatre.
• Bradford International Film Festival: first festival was held in 1995. The event showcases
classic films as well as works of new and up-coming European directors.
212

• Bite the Mango: initially conceived as a showcase for Black and Asian filmmakers in Britain,
it now attracts cinema from Africa, South Asia, Central America and the Far East. It
showcases a mix of feature films, documentaries, shorts, masterclasses and seminars.
• Bradford Animation Festival: UK’s longest running and biggest animation festival which
includes talks, workshops and the annual BAF awards celebrating best in new animation
from around the world.
• Bradford International Market: Held in 2004 and 2006 in the city centre with stallholders
from many countries and extensive entertainments. In 2006, the event is estimated to have
attracted 700,000 visitors from across the region and generated revenue of over £9 million.
• Bradford Classic: Vintage vehicles on display in the city centre. In 2006 it was held in
Centenary Square, 120 cars were displayed and 6,000 people attended the show.
• There is increasing use of the BBC Big Screen in Centenary Square to attract audiences
and people downtown for example for televised concerts and opera. The Council owns the
screen.
6.9.10 Parks and open spaces
Well designed open areas are hugely valuable in their ability to reduce social barriers,
improve health and well being and generally enhance and define local areas. Poorly
designed they can encourage anti social behavior, which discourages the use of the area by
the wider community.
There are a large number of protected informal and formal open spaces including, parks,
playgrounds, recreation grounds, village greens and allotments across the District. The
current replacement UDP also contains policies, which require the developers of new
housing to make a contribution toward the improvement of existing spaces or the creation of
new open spaces including sites for children’s play, which serve the development itself and
the wider community.
Some areas in the district are less well served by open space than other areas. The quantity,
attractiveness and accessibility of open space, recreation and leisure facilities determine the
success of the local area in terms of creating a prosperous community and in attracting new
investment. There is presently little facility by the Council to secure new areas of open space
unless the land is being re developed for residential use. A key issue for the emerging LDF
would therefore to explore how best this issue can be resolved to ensure that a fair and
equitable supply of green open areas is be delivered through the planning system.
Parks
The Bradford District has thirty six public parks, totalling an area of over two hundred and
seventy hectares. Ten of the parks are on the English Heritage Register of Parks and
213

Gardens of Special Historic Interest in England. (ADD GIS MAP SHOWING PUBLIC PARKS
IN DISTRICT)
Lister Park has undergone extensive refurbishment and was recently voted 'Britain's Best
Park 2006' in a national competition. The park has also been awarded a Civic Trust, Green
Flag award for a fifth year running, placing it among the top parks in the country.
Central Park Haworth, Peel Park and Harold Park are also winners of the Prestigious Green
Flag Award.
Many of the parks have active 'Friends' groups, which work with the Parks and Landscape
Service to care for, protect and improve their local parks.
Click on park name for further details:
• Bowling Park
• Brackenhill Park
• Bradford Moor Park
• Central Park
• Cliffe Castle Park
• Cross Roads Park
• Crowgill Park
• Devonshire Park
• Foster Park
• Foxhill Park
• Burley Grange Park
• Greenwood Park
• Harden Memorial Park
• Harold Park
• Horton Bank Country Park
• Horton Park
• Ladyhill Park
• Lister Park
• Littlemoor Park
• Lund Park
• Menston Park
• Myrtle Park
• Northcliffe Park
• Oakworth (Holden) Park
• Peel Park
• Prince of Wales Park
• Riverside Gardens Park
• Roberts Park
• Russell Hall Park
• Shipley Central Park
• Silsden Park
• St. Ives Estate (Country Park)
• Victoria Park, Clayton
• Victoria Park, Keighley
• Victoria Park, Oakenshaw
214

• Wibsey Park
• West Park, Girlington
• West View Park (Darwin Gardens)
The Bradford District Open Space Assessment Catchment mapping exercise 65 , based on all
current provision, shows that the majority of the District is adequately provided for in terms of
parks and gardens. However, there are significant catchment gaps in Addingham, Steeton,
Baildon and Menston and minor catchment gaps in Bradford South and Bradford West.
However, these areas may be covered by provision in neighbouring authoritiesof Craven and
Leeds.
Open space forests and woodlands
Approximately five percent of the Bradford District is covered by woodland, some of it steep
sided valleys and 'cloughs' which support remnants of the ancient Oak and Birch woodlands
of the South Pennines.
The Council owns and manages large areas of woodland. Some of these are listed in the
Collins Guide to the most beautiful woodlands in Yorkshire and the North East including:
Middleton Woods (Ilkley), Judy Woods (Bradford), St Ives Estate (Bingley)
Buck Wood, Judy Woods, St Ives Estate and Northcliffe Woods have active 'Friends of'
groups, who work with the service to care for and protect the woodlands.
Other woodlands across the District include:
Bierley Woods, Hebers Gill Wood, Black Carr Wood, Holden Park Woodland, Chellow Dene
Woods, Horton Park Country Park, Crabtree Gill Woodland, Jer Wood, Crossley Wood, Low
Wood (Keighley), The Dell Woodland, Midgley Wood, Elam Wood, Milner Wood, Esholt
Woodland, Nailor Rough, Fairbank Wood, Northcliffe Woods, Gravel Pits Woodland,
Panorama Wood, Griff Wood, Park Wood, Heaton Woods, Shipley Glen Woodland, Hirst
Woods.
Bradford District Open Space Assessment Catchment mapping shows mainly minor
catchment gaps in the provision of natural and semi-natural greenspaces across the District.
The major catchment in Burley in Wharfedale and Menston may be covered by neighbouring
authority provision as they are close to the Bradford boundary with Leeds. It is interesting to
note that much of the urban area of the District is adequately provided for in terms of natural
and semi-natural provision.
Green public realm
Trees, grassed areas and verges on the public highway are mainatened by Bradford Council.
65 CBMDC (2006) Bradford Open Space, Sports and Recreation Study.
215

National parks
A short stretch of the Bradford District Boundary near to Addingham abuts the Yorkshire
Dales National Park to the north.
Allotments
Allotment gardening provides a wide range of benefits to communities and the
environment.
Apart from providing low cost food, they also provide valuable recreational opportunities
involving healthy activity and social contacts. Allotments are significant to our green spaces
and provide habitats for many forms of wildlife.
The first legislative reforms date back to the Enclosures Act of 1845. Today, the Council has
a statutory requirement to provide allotments for the public. The council manages a total of
38 allotment sites across the district. There are 86 sites classified as allotments in Bradford
equating to 98 hectares.
ADD GIS MAP SHOWING THE ALLOTMENTS IN BRADFORD DISTRICT
There are 27 allotment gardens across the City of Bradford. See links below for more
information:-
• Abb Scott Lane Allotments
• Avenue Road Allotments
• Bowling Park Allotments
• Bullroyd Allotments
• Cecil Avenue Allotments
• Chapel Lane Allotments
• Common Road Allotments
• Derby Road Allotments
• Greengates Allotments
• Harewood Street Allotments
• Haycliffe Lane Allotments
• Heaton Allotments
• Highfield Terrace Allotments
• Legrams Lane Allotments
• New House Lane Allotments
• Park Road Allotments
• Queen's Road B Allotments
• Scotchman Road Allotments
• Speeton Road Allotments
• Stanacre Allotments
• Stanley Street Allotments
• Sunny Bank Road Allotments
• Top Royd Street Allotments
• Undercliffe Allotments
• Valley Allotments
• Whetley Grove Allotments
• Worthing Head Allotments
The are 3 allotments across the Keighley area, listed as follows:-
216

• Haworth Rec Allotments
• West Lane Allotments
• Woodside Road Allotments
There are 8 allotments across the Shipley and Bingley area, listed as follows:-
• Beck Lane Allotments
• Carlton Avenue Allotments
• Caroline Street Allotments
• Commercial Inn Allotments
• Esholt Lane Allotments
• Northcliffe Allotments
• Red Beck Allotments
• Stanley Street Allotments
The following are self administered allotments. The day to day management of these sites is
the responsibility of the allotment society.
• Moorside Road Allotments
• Charlestown Allotments
• Thompson Lane Allotments
• Warren Lane Allotments
Allotment sites across Bradford district are often oversubscribed. For the latest waiting lists,
see link below:-
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/government_politics_and_public_administration/public_administr
ation/asset_management/allotments/sites_with_waiting_lists/
The Bradford District Open Space Assessment has concluded that there are a number of
catchment gaps in the provision of allotments across Bradford. However, neighbouring
authority provision may cover some of the gaps close to the District boundary.
Village greens
Village greens form local additional site-based access provision within the District. Similar to
common land, they provide some rights of access to the public, which may vary from place to
place. There are 18 registered village greens within the District which total approximately 130
acres (54 hectares).
Consultation as part of the Bradford District Open Space Assessment identified that the
perception is, that there is a lack of amenity greenspace in Bradford. Catchment mapping
shows that there are a number of catchment gaps for this typology, particularly in the rural
settlement areas. The mapping indicates that the urban area surrounding the City Centre is
adequately provided for in terms of amenity open space
ADD GIS AP SHOWING VILLAGE GREENS OPEN COUNTRY AND REGISTERED
COMON LAND
217

Open country
In September 2004 a new statutory right of access to “open country” commenced in the
Bradford District, introduced through Part 1 of the Countryside and Rights of Way Act 2000.
This confers a right of access, on foot, to “mountain, moor, heath and downland” as defined
by the Countryside Agency. In the Bradford District, some 20.8 square miles (33.5 sq.kms) of
additional land was mapped as open country and subsequently opened up for walkers – over
and above the existing urban commons.
These new access areas include moorland areas west of the Worth Valley, such as Stanbury
Moor and the moors above Airedale (Bradup, Morton, Bingley and Hawksworth Moors). They
also includes smaller pockets of land such as Catstones Moor near Bingley.
6.10 Key Facts
• The District is generally well served with the essential community facilities e.g.
schools, community centres, libraries, post offices, food stores, police stations etc,
but this would need to be reviewed in the face of significant changes in demand
caused by residential development.
• In the more rural areas the district scores badly in terms of access to housing and
services. People face geographical and wider barriers to GP surgeries,
supermarkets, primary schools and post offices, as well as housing.
• Educational attainments at all key stage levels remained relatively low but there
were signs of improvement that contrasted with the previous declines. Unauthorised
absence from district’s primary and secondary schools is still remains a big
challenge for the district.
• Although the district’s primary and secondary healthcare providers have achieved
significant progress over the years in securing high quality health care and
addressing health inequalities, there still remains some areas e.g. MRSA cases,
teenage pregnancy, infant mortality which represents underperformances against
national targets.
• The district is adequately served by the current open space and outdoor sports
facilities although certain catchment gaps still remain in some areas which are
currently being met by surplus facilities located in other areas of the district.
• There is an under provision of fit for purpose indoor sports/recreation facilities and
they are generally of average quality with some requiring a significant level of
investment to bring them up to a standard to meet the requirements of future use.
• A number of sports facilities are located on school sites which provide for school use
only and the policy for community access is limited.
218

Sources:
• The district is served by highly accessible leisure and cultural facilities which offer a
wide range of services and facilities to the residents. However, the issue remains
how to better integrate them to improve the viability, vitality and vibrancy of the
centres they are located in particularly in the evening.
• BCR (2005) Socio-Economic Baseline Report (part of NDF Technical Appendices).
Report dated July 2005. Arup Consultancy.
• BMDC (2004) ‘Only Connect’: A Cultural Strategy for Bradford District. Report dated
March 2004. BMDC.
• BMDC (2006) Bradford Open Space, Sport and Recreation Study. Report dated July
2006. Knight, Kavanagh & Page (KKP).
• BMDC (2007) Bradford District Sustainable Community strategy- Information pack
and Fact Sheets. Policy Development Service, Bradford Council.
• BMDC (2007) Open Space and Built Recreation Facilities SPD. Report dated March
2007. BMDC.
• BMDC (2008) Bradford District Children and Young People Needs Analysis. Report
dated June 2008. BMDC.
• BMDC (2008) Children and Young People’s Plan 2006 – 2009 (reviewed 2008).
Report dated June 2008. BMDC.
• BMDC (2008) Sports and Recreation Facilities Assessment. Draft Report dated
February 2008. Strategic Leisure Limited.
• Genecon (2007) BCR Performance Framework: Second Annual Update 2005/06-
Final report. Report dated August 2007. Genecon Consultancy Ltd.
• Regeneris (2005) Bradford Positioning Statement. Report dated May 2006.
Regeneris Consulting.
• West Yorkshire Fire & Rescue Service (2007) Bradford Station Action Plan 2007/08.
Report dated 2007. Bradford Fire Station.
• West Yorkshire Fire & Rescue Service (2009) Bradford District Action Plan 2008/11.
Report dated 2009. WYFRS.
219

7.0 LANDSCAPE CHARACTER AND HISTORIC ENVIRONMENT
To understand Bradford District as a place it is useful to understand the physical form and
the landscape character of the area and also the influence of the historic environment and
the built heritage of the district. This section therefore undertakes an assessment of the
existing landscape and historic environment of the district and the contribution these aspects
have on the overall shaping of the area.
The documents and reports that helped analyze these aspects of the District include-
• Heritage at Risk register 2009 (English Heritage, 2009)
• Landscape Character SPD (CBMDC, 2008)
• Saltaire WHS Environmental Capacity Study (Atkins, 2006)
• Conservation Area Assessments (CBMDC, 2003-2005 )
• Listed Buildings at Risk Survey (CBMDC, 2001-2005)
• Bradford City Centre Design Guide SPD (Urbed, 2007)
• Good-Bad-Ugly: Notes on a Heritage Weekend Walk in Bradford City Centre (Bradford
Building Preservation Trust, 2004)
• Land Ownership Schedule for Bradford City Centre (Land Aspects, 2006)
• Archaeological Evaluation of the Broadway Centre Site (WYAS, 2002)
• City Centre Streetscape Design Manual (BCR and CBMDC, 2006)
7.1 General Overview of the District’s Natural Landscape Elements
The City of Bradford Metropolitan District comprises about 370 km 2 . Only about one third of
the District is built up but this area contains about 86% of the population (See Figure 1 –
Settlement Map). The main population areas of Bradford, Keighley, Shipley, Bingley and
Ilkley are separated by areas of agricultural land, isolated villages, areas of undeveloped
moorland, woodland and parkland (See Figure1 - Landcover Map).
One of the most striking features of the District is the quality of its landscape and in particular
the proximity of the main urban areas to areas of high landscape value. The character of the
District’s landscape is very varied, ranging from the rugged open moorland of the South
Pennine uplands to rolling farmland, and open river valleys to wooded hillsides.
The landscape elements of Bradford are the product of the interaction of both physical and
human influences. This section of the report describes the main physical influences including
topography, geology, soils, climate and biodiversity.
220

Figure 1: Settlement and Landcover
7.1.1 Landform
The District comprises a series of escarpments of plateaux with elevations up to 455m O.D.,
and a general decrease in the height of plateau in the east. The escarpments are dissected
by the Rivers Aire and Wharfe and a number of smaller rivers, including Bradford Beck and
the River Worth. The valley sides are commonly very steep, in contrast to the flat nature of
the valley bottoms. The main urban areas and transport routes occur within the valley floor
of the district. Within these urbanised areas the topography has often been altered
artificially, with large areas of made ground, disturbed ground and excavation.
Geographically, the area is considered to be part of the upland Pennine peneplain generally
slopes eastward complicated by valley incisions, and a series of step like features marking
breaks in slope.
Rivers tend to flow eastwards following the actual slope of the land along major fault lines.
See Figure 2 - Landform Map.
221

7.1.2 Geology
The bedrock is composed entirely of rocks deposited during the Upper Carboniferous period,
about 315 to 310 million years ago.
The south east of the District, including the main Bradford conurbation and the outlier of
Baildon Moor is underlain by Coal Measures. The District is located at the northern margin
of the exposed Yorkshire Coalfield.
Figure 2: Landform and Geology
The Coal Measures have been extensively exploited notably during the 19 th Century, not only
for coal, but also for fireclay, brickclay and ironstone.
Although mining of these resources in Bradford was not at the same scale as the further
south in the coalfield, it has had great effect in shaping the landscape, notably in triggering
adjacent industrial growth.
The coal measures are underlain by the Millstone Grit, which outcrops over most of the north
and west of the District and has been used extensively for building stone.
222

The dominance of the Millstone Grit is not only limited to the underlying geology. Its use has
shaped the whole of the landscape we see today. The rock has been mined for centuries
and has provided the material for the network of dry stone walls enclosing the pasture land
and for the distinctive architecture of villages, towns and cities in the district. See Figure 2 -
Geology Map.
The period of deposition of material to form the Millstone Grits and Coal Measurers was
completed some 280 million years ago and was followed by folding of the earth’s crust. The
asymmetric anticline created the upstanding mountain ridge, which, although considerably
eroded, still dominates the District today.
About 60% of the District is covered by drift (natural superficial) deposits, most of which are a
product of glacial and post glacial activity. Boulder clay is the main glacial deposit in the
District forming an extensive featureless spread, generally less than 5m in thickness. The
exceptions are the Aire and Wharfe valley bottoms where thickness exceeding 50m are know
to exist. Various alluvial deposits of sand and gravel are evident throughout the District, for
example at Keighley in the Aire Valley where deposits are up to 17m thick. Silty sand
pebbles and gravels can also been seen exposed on the riverbank of the Wharfe and have
previously been exploited creating the Ben Rhydding gravel pits, now a Site of Ecological or
Geological Interest (SEGI).
7.1.3 Soils and Agricultural Land Classification
Soils which form the final layer on the landform reflect the interaction of solid and drift
geology, altitude, climate and past human land use. Generally local soils are poor and
naturally acid, due to the high silica content of the parent material, lack of neutralising
minerals such as lime, and due to the high rainfall. The often relatively low temperatures in
the District result in slow rates of soil formation, whereas the high rainfall leaches out soluble
minerals such as calcium from the soil.
Thin soil tends to develop on steep slopes due to the progressive downslope creep of soils
as they develop.
Although areas of higher quality soils that could support arable farming are to be found in the
Wharfe Valley, they are not extensive enough to be economically viable.
As a result most rural land is either permanent grass for pasture, or rough pasture or
moorland.
Agricultural land
Most of the agricultural land in Bradford consists of improved and semi-improved pastures on
the upland fringes of the north-west of the District or the neutral (neither alkaline nor acidic)
grasslands to the east and south of the City. Agriculture in Bradford is generally based
around rearing stock, mainly sheep, although cattle rearing take place in areas along the
river valleys and on the lowlands to the east of the District.
223

Most of the farmland in Bradford District can be described as marginal, constrained by
climate and physical topography. Nearly half of the farmland is classed as Grade 4 or 5 66 ;
that is, land with severe limitations which significantly restricts the range of crops and is
mainly suitable for pasture grazing. However, there are also some grade 3 lands made up of
alluvial soils along the flood plains of the River Wharfe and River Aire which are more
productive.
Figure: Bradford agricultural land classification 67
Grade 3
Grade 4
Grade 5
An interactive map showing the agricultural land classifications within Bradford can be
viewed online by clicking the link below.
http://www.magic.gov.uk/website/magic/opener.htm?startTopic=maglandclass&xygridref=408
406,438698&startScale=250000
66 The ALC system classifies land into five grades, with Grade 3 subdivided into Subgrades 3a and
3b. Grade one is best quality and Grade five is poorest quality. A number of consistent criteria used for
assessment which include climate (temperature, rainfall, aspect, exposure, frost risk), site (gradient,
micro-relief, flood risk) and soil (depth, structure, texture, chemicals, stoniness).
67 http://www.self-willed-land.org.uk/rep_res/rur_vis_bfd.ppt
224

Countryside recreation is increasingly important as a rural land use and people are visiting
the countryside in increasing numbers. However, it is important to recognise the impact
visitors have on the countryside and that the pressures which result need to be carefully
managed in order to prevent the quality of the countryside from being diminished.
7.1.4 Climate
With a difference of 300m between the highest western part of the District and the low areas
of the city centre, relief plays a major part in influencing local climate, affecting rainfall, the
temperature and the number of hours of sunshine. Bradford has an annual rainfall of 34.15
inches, an annual mean temperature of 8.8 C with 1242 hours of bright sunshine. These
figures indicate a much less favourable climate especially for agriculture, than that to the east
of the county in, for example, the Vale of York.
The Pennines act as a climatic barrier, so that Bradford lies in the rain shadow of the upland
mass and therefore benefits a lesser extent from the warming effects of the prevailing
westerly winds. With a growing season defined as months over 6.1 C, Bradford has a
growing season of about seven months in the lower lying areas and about six months over
275m.
The poor soils combined with this harsh climate restricted Bradford to small-scale, isolated
agricultural settlements prior to the industrialisation of the 19 th Century.
7.1.5 Biodiversity
“…the diversity within habitats and ecosystems, the diversity of species and the interaction
between species and their habitat…” 68
The biodiversity of the Bradford District is not only varied but also contains good quality
habitats and an interesting range of wildlife, including many internationally, nationally and
regionally notable species of flora and funa.
Of particular note are the internationally important South Pennine Moors, a Special
Protection Area of nearly 21,000 hectares (of which 4489 hectares are located with in the
Bradford District). This area is significant for the variety and rarity of its bird life, including the
merlin and golden plover, which is supported by the diverse and extensive upland plant
communities. The South Pennine Moors are also a Special Area of Conservation designated
for the variety of the upland habitat mosaic.
The main habitats through the Bradford District can be categorised as:-
68 Source = UK Bio Diversity Action Plan: 1994
225

Moorland
The large areas of peat covered moorland give rise to a rich mosaic of habitats, including
blanket bog, heather moors, wet heaths and ‘in-bye’ 69 land. These areas are remote and
less likely to suffer from development pressure but they are fragile ecosystems and can
easily be affected by pollution or changes in management brought about by declining
agricultural activity.
Woodland
Only 4.6% of the Bradford District is covered
by woodland, compared with the national
average of 10%, although a large area is
exposed moorland and upland, which would
limit the growth of trees. Many of the
woodlands are recently planted (within the
last 150 years) but there are numerous
examples of steep sided valleys and cloughs
whose base-poor and acid soils support the
remnants of ancient woodland,
characterised by the oak/birch woodlands of
South Pennines, many of which have an
ecologically diverse ground flora.
Grasslands
Much of Bradford’s landscape is covered by
grassland surrounded by the traditional
gritstone walls. They are a mixture of
improved, semi-improved and natural
grasslands depending on the character of
the underlying soils, the topography and
management influences. Acidic grassland
communities tend to be found on the exposed uplands and are generally species poor by
nature. Although these are often classed as permanent pasture, many have been limed and
fertilised to improve their grazing capacity; consequently, they have a greener, visually
improved appearance but are ecologically poorer than the diverse meadows. The lower lying
pastures in the valleys tend to be neutral short-growing grassland communities which have
been improved and can be managed as short-term leys; some of these have a greater
species diversity and were possibly former hay meadows. These have more interest for
nature conservation and are increasingly rare. Surprisingly, Bradford has a larger proportion
than Kirklees or Calderdale 70 . Wet grasslands are increasingly rare in Bradford District and
69 Enclosed moorland of wet rush pasture which is also important as feeing and breeding areas for upland birds.
70 Bradford Grassland Survey 1996
Figure 3: Ecology and Heritage
226

are often under pressure for land improvement and drainage schemes. However, they can
contain a great variety of plant communities suited to damp conditions.
Wetlands
The characteristic landform of the Bradford District has been carved as a result of the Ice
Age, with glacial overflow channels and cloughs (steep sided tributary valleys) forming the
frameworks for the water collection from the uplands. Many of these overflow channels now
form valuable wetlands. Numerous reservoirs also collect water from the uplands which are
not only an important water catchments area but these water bodies and the surrounding
wetlands also provide important wintering and breeding habitats for the wide variety of
wildfowl and waders. Small streams, springs and wet flushes slow from the uplands into the
Rivers Worth, Aire and Wharfe. The Leeds and Liverpool Canal also acts as a valuable
wildlife corridor across the District and a network of neglected mill ponds – a legacy of
Bradford’s industrial heritage – have been re-colonised by amphibians. In addition there are
a few fragments of lowland raised mire, which are ecologically valuable but fragile and
threatened habitats.
Wildlife
Bradford District contains a wide variety of wildlife, according to the range of habitats. In
particular, have healthy populations of deer and badger. The deer numbers are increasing
and are generally migrating from the north towards Calderdale in the south west and also
east along the Leeds and Liverpool Canal 71 , badgers are also well presented throughout the
District and successfully protected against persecution. A range of bird species can be found
in all habitats throughout, especially on the moorlands, as stated above. Bats are found in
roosting sites such as trees, buildings (old and new), old parkland and bridges, especially
over rivers. Amphibians and reptiles, however, are limited to the common species; great
crested newts are unknown in the Bradford area. West Yorkshire was the northern limit for
some butterflies and insects, however with global warming some species have increased
their range northwards and the loss of diverse grasslands generally will have a long-term
effect on these populations, with subsequent consequences throughout the ecosystem as a
whole.
Biodiversity Assets
There are 4 levels of designated nature conservation sites within Bradford District. In
addition to the 4 SSSIs, there are 21 Sites of Ecological or Geological Importance and 16
Regionally Important Geological / Geomorphological Sites (RIGS). One of these SSSIs, the
South Pennine Moors, represented by Rombalds Moor and Haworth Moor has been
designated a Special Protection Area (SPA) due to the importance of its breeding bird
populations. It is also a Special Area of Conservation (SAC), under the European Habitats
Directive because it contains habitats which are rare or threatened within a European
71 Bradford Deer Survey 1996
227

context. There are also 152 sites of local nature conservation value, designated for both
biodiversity interest and community benefits.
Table 1: Biodiversity Asset
Designation No Area/Details
Special Protection Area (SPA) SPA 1 No 4489 ha – South Pennine Moors
Special Area of Conservation (SAC) SAC 1 No 4489 ha – South Pennine Moors
South Pennine Moors, Bingley
Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) SSSI 4 No South Bog, Trench Meadows.
Yeadon Brick Works
Sites of Ecological/ Geological Interest
(SEGI)
SEGI
Ecological 21 No
340ha – Leeds/Liverpool Canal
and River Wharfe
Geological 16 No
Third Tier Sites
Over
100 No
Yet to be verified
A detail assessment of the habitats and wildlife species in Bradford district is also discussed
in the ‘Environment’ chapter of this baseline report.
7.2 Landscape Types
The landscape character spd has identified the patterns of landscape within the Bradford
District on two levels. At one level, the district has been broken down into ten specific,
distinct, and unique landscape character areas that are all very different from each other, e.g.
Airedale, Wharfedale, and Tong Valley, etc. At another, more detailed, level, it has identified
areas of land very similar to each other that recur throughout the District, (and in theory
throughout the country), for example moorlands, wooded valleys, and settlements. These
are the generic landscape types.
There are 10 different landscape types identified within the district. These are summarised
below:
1. Gritstone Moorland: The moorland landscape is typified
by its wild open character; its uninterrupted views; its
apparent, if not actual, naturalness; and by its extent and
uniformity; as well as its subtlety of colour and texture.
228

2. Upland Pasture: A smooth, open treeless, landscape,
dominated by bold linear patters of drystone walls
3. Mixed Upland Pasture: An open landscape with
rectangular pasture fields enclosed by drystone walls,
and having some trees. Contains a wide variety of other
landscape elements, giving the landscape a much more
mixed character than the upland pasture, with more
human influences.
4. Wooded Valley: These are narrow, linear, incised,
wooded valleys cut into the landscape by the branching
patters of streams. This results in a very enclosed
environment where the topography has strictly governed
the landcover to produce a very strong and distinctive
feature in the wider landscape.
5. Wooded Incline: Visually prominent blocks of mainly
native broad-leaved woodland stretching along the
sloping sides of Bradford’s open valleys.
6. Enclosed Pasture: Enclosed pasture has a strong sense
of enclosure brought about by the framework of small
woods and tree groups that cross the pasture farmland.
It is generally found on lower lying concave slopes of
Bradford’s open valleys.
229

7. Parkland: Broad open grassland dominated landscape
which lacks small scale field enclosure and contains
woodland and mature fields trees.
8. Floodplain Pasture: A very distinct, flat, open landscape
with relatively large, rectilinear fields enclosed by hedges,
occupying the low-lying floodplains of Bradford’s open
valleys.
9. Industrial Corridor: An enclosed, low lying landscape
dominated by industrial development and the corridors of
transport infrastructure necessary to support it.
10. Settlement: It is a very enclosed landscape, which exists
where there is an area of land dominated by large
numbers of mainly residential buildings, such that views
within it are restricted primarily to sequences of short
views contained by building groups.
Source: Landscape Character SPD (CBMDC, 2008)
The identification and definition of Bradford’s ten landscape types was carried out through
the completion of field study forms and photographic records on site; and their subsequent
analysis through discussion and debate within the study team.
The Issues
Some landscape types have been easier to identify than others. The Gritstone Moorland is a
particularly characteristic landscape with fairly distinct boundaries. Likewise the wooded
230

valleys, wooded inclines, settlements, and floodplain pastures are relatively easy to identify
in the landscape because the boundaries correspond to sudden, sharp, changes in
topography or landcover.
However, the rest of the landscape often has very gradual, subtle, changes in landscape
character, for example the pasture landscapes. These landscapes do vary dramatically, for
example the pastures above Steeton are very different to those in the Tong Valley, which are
very different to those between Denholme and Thornton. But the boundaries between these
areas of very different character are often difficult to map because there is not strong visible
boundary on the ground. This is an inherent quality of some landscapes and should inform
the way that the inevitably exact lines on maps are interpreted and used in the future.
Summary Table of Distinguishing Landscape Elements
Table 2 was drawn up in order to provide a summary of the most easily perceivable
landscape characteristics and elements that distinguish the ten different landscape types
from each other.
It should be understood that the purpose of this table is to show how one landscape type can
be distinguished from another, and not comprehensively describe each landscape type.
Consequently the list of landscape elements down the left hand side is not a comprehensive
list of all the landscape elements present in every landscape type, nor are the elements
weighted in importance in any way. The elements listed have been chosen simply because
they are those that most easily enable a person to distinguish between the ten landscape
types.
231

TABLE 2: LANDSCAPE TYPES IN THE BRADFORD DISTRICT
Gritstone
Moorland
Upland
Pasture
Mixed
Upland
Pasture
Wooded
Valleys
Characteristics
differentiating
between
landscape
types
6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9 6.10
PHYSICAL FEATURES
Altitude HIGH HIGH LOW LOW
Landform INCISED SLOPES SLOPES FLAT
Context BELOW MOOR WATER ESTATE NEAR RIVER
Enclosure OPEN OPEN OPEN ENCLOSED ENCLOSED ENCLOSED ENCLOSED
FIELDS
Fields ● ● ○
Field pattern ●
Walls ●
◐
◐
Wooded
Incline
◐
○
○ ○
Hedges ○ ○
Enclosed
pasture
Parkland
● ●
Fences ○ ○ ○
TREE COVER
Woodland
Blocks
Tree Clumps
Isolated Trees
◐
◐
● ●
○ ○
◐
◐
◐
◐
○ ○ ○ ● ○
BUILDINGS
Farmsteads ○ ○ ○ ○
Building Groups ○ ○
Detached
residential
○
◐
Settlement ●
Industrial ● ○
OTHER ELEMENTS
Quarries ○ ○
Recreation ○ ○ ○ ○
Telegraph Poles ○ ○ ○ ○
Pylons ○ ○ ○ ○
INFRASTRUCTURE
Major Roads ●
◐
Roads ○ ○ ○
Lanes ○ ○
Tracks ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
Car movement ○ ○ ○
◐ ◐
Car parks ○ ○
Traffic signs ○ ○
◐
Street lights ○ ○
Kerbs ○ ○ ○
Street furniture ○
Detail ● ● ● Dominant Dominant description features features of the elements and distribution ◐ ◐ Significant Significant of each features features features of the landscape types could ○ ○ Features Features be found that that in may may the be be SPD. present
present
The dominance or otherwise of certain elements in each landscape type is representative of the typical state of that
Detail description of the elements and distribution of each of the landscape types could be found in the SPD.
○
●
Floodplain
pasture
●
◐
◐
◐
Industrial
Corridor
○
◐
232
Settlement
6.11
○
●
◐

7.3 Landscape Character Areas
The landscape of the Bradford District has been broadly influenced by its physical
characteristics such as geology, soils and climate (especially glaciation) and subsequent
modification by man in terms of land use.
The Joint Countryside Commission/English Nature ‘Character Map of England’ subdivides
the District into three main character areas:
36 South Pennines
37 Yorkshire Southern Pennine Fringe
38 Nottinghamshire, Derbyshire and Yorkshire Coalfield
A small area in the north of the District lies within the YORKSHIRE DALES Character Area
21, but has limited influence on the landscape character of the Bradford District.
Southern Pennines
This area lies between the Peak
District National Park and the
Yorkshire Dales National Park. A
sweeping landscape of upland moor
and pasture, over 7 million people
live within 1 hours drive of the South
Pennines and the demands for
transport, mineral extraction, power
transmission and generation, urban
encroachment, recreation sport and
tourism have shaped the character
accordingly. The heavily populated
valleys contrast with the marginal
economic viability of the uplands
where the dual economy of part-time
FIGURE 4: CHARACTER AREAS
farming subsidised by other
occupations prevails. Sheep grazing
and small dairy/beef herds are the
main agricultural occupations;
stonewalls and small fields reflect
the fluctuating moorland/grassland
fringe. The moorland plateau gives
extensive views over the lower lying
towns, which reduces the sense of
isolation. Whilst the quarries and
vertical elements such as wind
turbines, transmitter masts and
pylons are often prominent and detract from landscape quality, there are also a strong
industrial heritage of buildings and other remnants of the wool and cotton industries.
233

Yorkshire Southern Pennine Fringe
This character area represents the transition of the Pennine Uplands to the lower undulating
landscape of the Nottinghamshire, Derbyshire and Yorkshire Coalfield, characterised by
gritstone industrial settlements in the valleys surrounded by pastoral agriculture in the
foothills. The gritstone buildings and stone walls of the pastures give a visual unity to the
landscape. Mills, factories and towns associated with the main transport routes lie in the
valley bottoms. Tall mill chimneys and terraces are packed into the valley bottoms and rise
up the hillside. Pylons and masts are prominent on the skylines. The industrial archaeology
gives the area a strong historical character and visual identity.
Nottinghamshire Derbyshire and Yorkshire Coalfield
This is a large area of densely settled countryside embracing major industrial towns. It has
a low lying, rolling landform with escarpments and broad valley resulting from sloping
alternate bands of wet shales and dry sandstones. This area is dominated by extensive
urban influences and rapid expansion of industry, settlement and transport networks.
Likewise the rural areas suffer from urban fringe influences and the resulting landscape is
downgraded – the soils are relatively poor and the graded pastures are bounded by a
mixture of walls, occasional hedgerows and post and wire fencing. ‘Horticulture’ is a popular
activity among the complex mosaic of land uses, ribbon development and transport route
dominated landscape. Broad-leaved woodlands, often large and fragmented, are relatively
common.
The Countryside Commission’s character areas have been determined at a national level
and are therefore broad-brush descriptions of large areas of countryside. The boundaries
between theses are not distinct and often occur gradually over several kilometres.
The Landscape Character SPD however, has defined the character of Bradford in more
detail at a local scale by subdividing the district into 10 Character Areas on the basis of their
overall characteristics and the recurring pattern of landscape elements contained within
them. These are:
1) Airedale
2) Esholt
3) Pennine Upland
4) Rombalds Ridge
5) South Bradford
6) Thornton/Queensbury
7) Tong Valley
8) Wharfedale
9) Wilsden
10) Worth and North Beck Valleys
See Figure 4 - Character Areas Map
234

These Landscape Character Areas are defined on a geographical basis and named
according to local terminology for ease of identification and recognition by a wide range of
people.
Of the ten areas, two correspond to the major broad, deep, glacial river valleys of the AIRE
and WHARFE, running parallel to each other approximately NW-SE, separated by a third
character area of higher land in between forming the ROMBALD’S RIDGE and connecting
Baildon Moor to Ilkley Moor and beyond towards Grassington and the Yorkshire Dales. The
settled and industrialised wooded valleys contrast with the open empty windswept moorland
and sparsely settled farmland of the Rombald’s Ridge. Airedale is extensively develop yet
retains a strong though fragmented green character with its wooded slopes and remnants of
pastoral agriculture on the valley sides. The settlements in Wharfedale have well defined
edges with substantial woodlands and tree cover giving the valley a more enclosed and ‘lush’
character.
Three smaller character areas lie immediately next to Bradford’s urban core. These areas
are ESHOLT, TONG VALLEY and SOUTH BRADFORD. They all show more common links
to the Coal Measurers character area in the complexity of their elements and more urbanised
influences, with low lying, rolling landform and fragmented woodland cover.
The four remaining character areas are all pasture dominated landscapes with typical stone
wall boundaries overlooked by bleak windswept moorland on higher exposed land, affording
long views and intersected by small intimate wooded valleys or cloughs. THE WORTH and
NORTH BECK VALLEYS character area has a stepped profile with valley bottoms crowded
with settlement and a patchwork of pastures on the upper slopes. It is surrounded to the NW
and SW by the PENNINE UPLAND character area of high unenclosed moorland, isolated
farmsteads, a treeless landscape with high nature conservation value where resources
exploitation such as mineral extraction wind and water power generation and recreation have
left their mark on the landscape. The WILSDEN and THORNTON/QUEENSBURY character
areas, although similar in that they contain small/medium villages within a farmed landscape
sloping to the east, are dominated by urban/sub-urban influences. Differences in landform,
altitude and layout however do occur to make them distinct. The Wilsden character area is
more domesticated, with improved enclosed pastures, smaller villages and more woodland
cover.
The area covered excludes the urban core of Bradford City Centre, Shipley, Keighley and
Ilkley. It also excludes all ‘inset’ areas defined as ‘urban’ or ‘village’ in the rUDP. It is
intended that these areas will be the subjects of settlement studies at some future date.
Detailed description and analysis of the landscape of each character area along with a
succinct set of policy guidelines for each landscape type is to be found in the Landscape
Character SPD.
235

7.4 Policy Context- Landscape
Planning Policy Statement 1: Delivering Sustainable Development seeks to protect and
enhance the quality, character and amenity value of the countryside and urban areas as a
whole. Protection should be given to those areas that have been recognised for their
landscape value. Planning Policy Statement 7: Sustainable Development in Rural Areas
encourages local authorities to maintain or extend local landscape designations to protect
areas from unsustainable development and to also enhance local distinctiveness of the areas
and preserve the intrinsic qualities of the countryside.
The Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS) for the Yorkshire and the Humber region (adopted May
2008) provides the Regional Planning Policy context. This Plan will be used as material
consideration within the Planning process. The Plan maintains the need for Local Authorities
to recognise and protect the distinctive landscape character of the region. Policies LCR1 (C,
1, 5) and ENV 10 within the Plan should be referred too.
Other Framework
The Standing Conference of South Pennine Authorities (SCOSPA) published a regional
based Landscape Assessment, Landscape Guidelines and Countryside Design Summary for
the South Pennines, which include the majority of Bradford’s non-urban areas. In addition,
SCOSPA has also prepared an Integrated Management Strategy and Conservation Action
Plan for the South Pennine Moors SPA, which emphasises the conservation importance of
the moorland landscape.
The Forest of Bradford Initiative and the Woodland Strategy (1992) aim to undertake
strategic measures to increase general tree cover with the District and guide appropriate
areas for action.
7.5 Built Heritage and Historic Environment
Bradford’s District is a rich and diverse historic environment. It consists of the following
elements which, when viewed as an entity, form the essential characteristics of local
distinctiveness and environmental identity. These elements are highly valued today, for the
positive contribution they make to the quality of the environment as well as for the benefits to
the economy and tourism in particular.
7.5.1 Policy Context- Historic Environment
PPS1: Delivering Sustainable Development, PPG15: Planning and the Historic Environment
and PPG16: Archaeology and Planning promote good design and the protection and
enhancement of the historic environment. The RSS states that ‘the heritage resource makes
a very important contribution to the Region’s distinctive character, identity and sense of
place; it also greatly adds to the quality of life of residents, and in particular the local and
regional economy’. Policy ENV9 states:-
236

‘The region will safeguard and enhance the historic environment, and ensure that historical
context informs future development and regeneration. All development strategies, plans,
programmes and decisions in the Region will conserve distinctive elements of the historic
environment and enhance local character and distinctiveness ……..’
Relevant heritage priority areas identified are industrial landscapes, housing areas and civic
buildings, especially in West and South Yorkshire.
The RSS identifies as an issue the vulnerability of the heritage resource to decay and
deterioration and the impact of poor design nearby. There is a need to recognise the
benefits of the heritage resource to the local and regional economy and ensure new
development adds to this, rather than detracts from it. This is especially important in terms of
providing a sense of place in urban areas. The RUDP contains a range of policies seeking to
protect Bradford District’s rich and diverse built heritage and historic environment.
One of the key principles in PPS1: Delivering Sustainable Development is that planning
policies should promote high quality inclusive design in the layout of new developments and
individual buildings in terms of function and impact, not just for the short term but over the
lifetime of the development. Design which fails to take the opportunities available for
improving the character and quality of an area should not be accepted. It also states that
‘good design should contribute positively to making places better for people’. An objective
that is reinforced by the Commission for Architecture and the Built Environment (CABE) in its
guide ‘By Design’. ‘Good design is essential if we are to produce attractive, high-quality,
sustainable places in which people will want to live, work and relax.’
7.5.2 Listed Buildings
Bradford has over 5800 buildings, listed by the Secretary of State as being of special
architectural or historic interest. These range from large industrial mill complexes to
weaver’s cottages; and from agricultural farmsteads to stately halls and manor houses.
These buildings of architectural and historic interest make a vital contribution to the heritage
character and attractiveness of the District.
Those buildings of the greatest historical or architectural value, listed grade I and II* form a
fraction of the total. In Bradford district buildings of this status comprise less than a third of
the national average, hence the need to ensure that the elements which contribute towards
their special character are safeguarded. Examples include Upper Headley Hall, Thornton
with its courtyard walling, entrance gateway and aisled barn and the church of All Saints,
Bingley. (National percentage grade I 2.5% City of Bradford area 0.34% national percentage
grade II* 5.2% City of Bradford 1.6%)
The first listed building survey was carried out from 1993 to 1995; this systematically
surveyed all listed buildings in the district using the standard procedure. Recently the Council
have completed a re-survey (2001-2005) of all the buildings to highlight changes since the
previous survey (1993-1995). Whilst many listed buildings are reviewed regularly, especially
if in a critical condition, or a subject of ongoing discussions, the district wide survey indicates
237

if the number of buildings at risk is decreasing, identifies any new buildings at risk and shows
any patterns of problem buildings or areas, which may need different approaches.
Current indications show that some 300 buildings and structures were identified as being ‘at
risk’ or vulnerable. This information has since helped the Council identify priorities, targets
efforts or resources and try to reduce the numbers.
Description of all the Listed Buildings in Bradford could be found in the following weblink-
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/the_environment/planning_service/heritage_and_conservation/lis
ted_building_descriptions.htm
There is also an online register of Bradford’s Listed Buildings at Risk which could be
accessed from this link-
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/the_environment/planning_service/heritage_and_conservation/on
line_register.htm
7.5.3 Conservation Areas
The District currently has 57 designated Conservation Areas, which vary from Victorian
suburbs such as Little Horton Lane representing the 19 th century growth of Bradford, to the
historic linear upland villages such as Stanbury. The periodic re-assessment of boundaries
and consideration of additional areas ensures the relevance of the designations remain valid.
The process of character assessment and boundary review was carried out between 2001
and 2005. This has resulted in there being a Conservation Area Assessment document for
each of the 59 conservation areas in the district.
The list of links below lead to the conservation area assessment document and the current
boundary map for each conservation area.
• Addingham
• Apsley Crescent
• Baildon
• Baildon, Station Road
• Ben Rhydding
• Bingley
• Braithwaite
• Brunthwaite
• Burley in Wharfedale
• Cathedral Precinct
• City Centre
• Clayton
• Cullingworth
• Devonshire Park and Cliffe Castle
• East Morton
• Eldon Place
• Little Germany
• Little Horton Green
• Little Horton Lane
• Little London
• Low Utley
• Lower Wyke
• Menston
• Micklethwaite
• Middleton
• North Park Road
• Oakworth
• Oxenhope Lower Town
• Oxenhope Station Road
• Oxenhope Upper Town
• Queensbury
• Ryecroft
238

• Esholt
• Goitside
• Goose Eye and Laycock
• Great Horton
• Hainworth
• Haworth
• Heaton Estates
• Hodgson Fold
• Idle and the Green
• Ilkley
• Keighley Town Centre
• Leeds Liverpool Canal
• Leeming
Potential Conservation Areas
• Saltaire
• Silsden
• Southfield Square
• St Paul's
• Stanbury
• Steeton
• Thornton
• Tong
• Undercliffe Cemetery
• Whetley Grove
• Wilsden
• Wrose
Residents, Councillors and organisations have contacted the Council and have suggested
that, in their opinion, new conservation areas should be designated in certain localities. The
Council’s Conservation Team has assessed these suggested areas in order to determine
whether all or any of them would be recommended for conservation area designation.
The areas which have been considered for potential conservation area designation are listed
in the table below. After undertaking detail field surveys and following a period of public
consultation in each area the Conservation Team has reported their findings to Area
Planning Panels and Area Committees and recommended that only two of the areas, Baildon
Green and Eldwick Beck, are appropriate characteristics to be designated as Conservation
Areas.
Table: Areas with Potential Conservation Area Reports Completed
• Ambler Thorn
• Apperley Bridge
• Baildon Bank
• Baildon Green
• Beechcliffe
• Burley Woodhead
• Carr Syke
• Charlestown, Baildon
• Damems
• Eldwick Beck
• Greenholme
• Hawksbridge
• Heaton Village
• Ingrow
• Keighley Station
• Marsh
• Marsh Top
• Moor Side
• Mountain
• Oakworth Station
• Plevna Terrace, Bingley
• Thackley
• The Brow
239

7.5.4 World Heritage Site
The District has a World Heritage Site
identified by UNESCO as having worldwide
significance in association with the
textile trade and the industrial revolution.
UNESCO inscribed Saltaire as a World
Heritage Site on 16 th December 2001. It is
one of 27 in the United Kingdom.
Developed from the 1850’s and still an
almost complete model village, Saltaire
illustrates the combination of industrial
processes and transport systems, the use
of power and the early concepts of Town
Planning with provision of model housing
and social amenities. All of these factors
are unified by dignified architectural
detailing, the use of local materials and
technological advances which illustrate a
significant stage in human history and
contribute to make the site of outstanding
universal value.
Figure 5: Cultural Heritage
Today, its textile mills, public buildings and
workers' housing continue to operate as a living and working community. It is the duty of the
international community as a whole, to co-operate in its protection. Saltaire has a
Management Plan in place to direct this function. Recently an Environmental Capacity
Study 72 has been carried out for the site in order to gain an appreciation of the level and type
of change that can be accommodated within the World Heritage Site and its setting. The
study also provides a mechanism to allow for positive change to take place, whilst putting
management arrangements in place to monitor the impact of change and prevent change
that exceeds the environmental capacity of the Site. This included addressing a range of
pressures and demands facing the Site due its location in a strategic corridor e.g. traffic and
transport issues, the need for economic and social regeneration and the maintenance of a
high quality of life for residents.
The ECS has identified 8 key capacity issues which could affect the Site’s Key Values now or
in the future and employed a “monitor and manage” approach founded on a series of
Capacity Indicators. The indicators measure changes in data through time and trigger action
when thresholds are exceeded. This ranges from the need for further analysis and
monitoring through to possible physical actions such as the provision of more car parking
spaces in the area.
72 Atkins (2008) Saltaire World Heritage Site Environmental Capacity Study. Atkins Heritage, Leeds.
240

The ECS also includes a timetable for the ongoing monitoring of the Site. This has been
established over a rolling 6-yearly programme to tie-in with the UNESCO periodic review
process. This is not however a static document and will continue to be reviewed and
developed over the coming years as new challenges and issues emerge at the Site.
The ECS will play a significant role in the development of a revised WHS Management Plan
for the Site. It will also inform a number of other emerging strategies including a tourism
strategy and planning documentation within the Local Development Framework (LDF). The
indicators identified by the ECS may be used as part of the annual monitoring report on the
LDF and the accompanying Sustainability Appraisal.
7.5.5 Parks and Gardens
There are 13 sites within the District that are included in the Register of Parks and Gardens
of Special Historic Interest in England designated by English Heritage. This is a reflection of
the fact that the urban areas of Bradford are well provided with Victorian municipal parks.
The historic layouts, planting and the structures generally survive to indicate the original form
of the parks and gardens. Examples of notable significance include Bradford’s ‘city of the
dead’ at Undercliffe Cemetery and the private grounds at Heathcote, Ilkley.
Table: English Heritage Register of Parks and Gardens of Special Historic Interest in Bradford
Name Grade Date Registered
1) Bowling Park, Bradford II 02 Apr 2001
2) Central Park, Haworth II 13 Nov 2002
3) Horton Park, Bradford II 02 Apr 2001
4) Lister Park II 01 Dec 1984
5) Lund Park, Keighley II 02 Apr 2001
6) Peel Park, Bradford II 02 Apr 2001
7) Prince Of Wales Park, Bingley II 14 Mar 2001
8) Roberts Park, Shipley II 01 Dec 1984
9) Heathcote, Ilkley II 12 Jan 1984
10) Whinburn, Keighley II 02 Sep 2002
11) St Ives Estate, Harden II 28 Apr 2009
12) Scholemoor Cemetery II 09 Jan 2002
13) Undercliffe Cemetery II 20 Jul 1998
Source: English Heritage
Further details about each of the above historic parks and gardens can be found on the
Council’s Leisure and Culture website below-
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/leisure_and_culture/parks_and_gardens/parks_and_gardens.htm
The District also contains four recognised Local Historic Parks and Gardens. These sites are
of local interest, (not included on the national register) which display evidence of designated
landscapes that are of local interest and any proposals, which affect the site or setting,
should demonstrate a clear understanding of the original design and layout.
241

Table: Local Historic Parks and Gardens
1) Bierley Hall Wood, Bradford
2) Heber’s Ghyll, Ilkley
3) Cliffe Castle and Devonshire Park, Keighley
4) Milnerfield, Gilstead
Source: Bradford rUDP
7.5.6 Scheduled Ancient Monuments
Bradford Metropolitan District has 202 scheduled monuments that range from the site of the
Roman Fort at Ilkley to prehistoric earthworks and the unique concentration of carved stones
on Ilkley Moor. The vast majority of the monuments are located in the north of the district.
7.5.7 Historical Battlefields
The Register of Historic Battlefields in England is compiled and maintained by English
Heritage. The inclusion of a site on this Register brings with it no additional statutory controls,
but it is a material consideration when determining planning applications in the area.
The historic interest of a battlefield is judged by the documentary evidence that is available to
pin point the site and the surviving physical features, such as the topography and
archaeological evidence. Bradford Metropolitan District has one historic battlefield included
on the Register: Adwalton Moor 1643 which extends into the districts of Kirklees and Leeds.
Adwalton Moor 1643 - gave the Royalists control of the North of England for the remainder of
that year. It was second only in significance to Marston Moor in the history of the Civil Wars
in the North. The battlefield landscape of 1643 was one of hedge-lined fields on the lower
242

slopes and moorland with coal pits, some of which can still be identified today. The
encroachment of development especially the railway, road and built developments over the
last 150 years has dramatically altered the character of the battlefield by changes to the
landscape. Nevertheless many elements of the landscape of the time of the battle remain
such that it is still possible to trace the various phases of the conflict and to interpret the
progress of the battle.
Further detail about the historic battlefield can be found from the web links below-
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/NR/rdonlyres/181CA68E-AA97-476E-B4C1-
35172A5A759C/0/battle_of_adwalton_moor.pdf
And http://www.english-heritage.org.uk/upload/pdf/Adwalton.pdf
7.5.8 Heritage at risk
The English Heritage publishes annual ‘Heritage at Risk Register’ which identifies historic
assets that are in danger of losing their significance across the Yorkshire and Humber
region. Recent reports (2009 to 2011) have summarised that while the condition of the
region’s historic assets has improved over the years, generally they are facing slightly
greater levels of risk than nationally, and highlighted the scale of the challenge and the
resources needed for their enhancement and protection, both at a national and local level.
Figure: Heritage at risk in Yorkshire and the Humber
Source: Heritage at Risk Register (English Heritage, 2011)
243

According to the latest 2011 ‘Heritage at Risk’ report a total of 41 heritage sites, monuments
and buildings are currently deemed ‘at risk’ in the Bradford District. Nine new sites have
been added since 2009 assessment- an extra three conservation areas and six places of
worship.
Table: ‘At Risk’ Heritage Assets in Bradford
Buildings 4
Places of worship 6
Scheduled monuments 19
Registered parks and gardens 1
Registered battlefield 1 (stretches into Leeds and Kirklees)
Conservation areas 10
Source: Heritage At Risk Register ( English Heritage, 2011)
The number of ‘at risk’ conservation areas is particularly high in the District compared to any
other Local Authority area in Yorkshire and Humber. The mills listed above are particularly
vulnerable because they lack interests from developers and remain largely empty.
The Battle of Adwalton Moor battlefield is also in the English Heritage’s register. It is judged
to be of a generally satisfactory condition but is said to be declining.
7.5.9 Archaeology
Bradford District contains a large number of significant archaeological sites, some of which
are of international interest and many of which are of national or high regional importance.
Bradford District falls into three land-use zones: upland, lowland and townscape. The upland
zone comprises unenclosed moorland and enclosed rough pasture. The lowland zone
roughly follows the lines of the area’s watercourses and comprises improved enclosed
pasture and other agricultural land, centred around scattered farmsteads. The townscape
zone consists of all intensively settled land.
The Upland Zone: The little-disturbed upland landscape retains a large number of
Prehistoric (Middle Stone Age to Iron Age) features. Many of the upstanding remains are
designated as Scheduled Ancient Monuments. Known features include hundreds of carved
rocks on the moorland above Ilkley, Keighley and Baildon. Other Prehistoric funerary/ritual
sites survive here and elsewhere in the District. Settlement sites are also represented by a
number of well-preserved earthworks. There are probably similar sites which now lack
above-ground remains. Bradford District was crossed by a network of Roman roads, the true
routes of which are not yet known in most instances. Currently unknown Roman sites may
survive along the road lines. Medieval settlement in the uplands was scattered in small,
dispersed settlements or farmsteads rather than discreet nucleated villages. Upstanding farm
buildings, apparently of 18th- or 19th-century date, may have Medieval origins. Redundant
farm buildings have been little studied, and represent a finite and diminishing building stock
of archaeological interest. From the Medieval period onward, mineral deposits in the uplands
have been extensively exploited, and well-preserved associated remains survive.
244

The Lowland Zone: The lowlands also appear to contain Prehistoric settlement remains.
Large finds of worked flint along the Aire corridor suggest the presence of Middle and New
Stone Age campsites, while a few known Prehistoric settlements, numerous spotfinds of
Bronze Age metalwork, and scattered Roman finds indicate that occupation continued into
later periods. Most Medieval settlement took the form found in the uplands. A small number
of sites were administrative centres for the surrounding area, and here a number of fine Late
Medieval and Post-Medieval houses survive which may have associated below-ground
remains. The site of a Medieval convent survives at Esholt and a number of granges (small
agricultural/industrial sites owned by the Medieval church) survive in the District. Wellpreserved
industrial sites survive, including iron-working sites, pottery kilns and corn mills.
Some Medieval settlement sites evolved over into prominent private estates after the mid-
17th century. These were often furnished with significant landscaped grounds. Early waterpowered
industrial sites were also redeveloped in the 18th century and later. Many of the
District’s numerous textile mills retain late 18th/early 19th century features or contain
evidence for the development of technology over the course of the 19th/20th centuries.
Townscape Zone: Most of the evidence for Roman occupation in Bradford District roughly
coincides with the areas of modern settlement, with occupation along the Wharfe valley (the
Roman fort and associated civilian settlement at Ilkley), through Bingley and into central
Bradford. Occupation continued into the Early Medieval phase, with Anglo-Saxon remains
apparently surviving within Addingham, Ilkley, and central Bradford. With a few exceptions
(Keighley; Addingham, where a number of small settlement foci merged to form a single
settlement; Bingley, where the available evidence suggests the possible presence of a
castle; Ilkley, where settlement formed around the area of the Roman fort; Bradford, where
settlement formed at a crossing point of Bradford Beck), Medieval settlement consisted of
small, dispersed building groups lying along a network of roads and access tracks.
Industrialisation and population growth during the 19th century led to ribbon development on
these road lines which enveloped pre-existing settlements. This type of development can be
traced in areas where the Late Medieval and Post-Medieval building stock survives and
forms a settlement ‘core’. In areas such as central Bradford where the ‘core’ of earlier
buildings has not survived, the modern building stock may mask below-ground Medieval and
Post-Medieval remains. Recent work in urban centres has made it clear that the effect of
19th/20th century cellarage on the below-ground archaeology has not been as severe as
formerly believed, and that appreciable pockets of early material may survive in situ.
Bradford’s current replacement UDP aims to protect three categories of archaeological
areas, identified by the West Yorkshire Archaeology Advisory Services (WYAAS), which are
registered in the County Sites and Monuments Record. These are:
Class I -Class I areas are sites and landscapes of national importance which are protected
as Scheduled Ancient Monuments under the terms of the Ancient Monuments and
Archaeological Areas Act 1979.
Class II and Class III- Class II areas are sites and landscapes which are regionally important
but unscheduled, and which merit preservation in situ. Class III areas are sites registered in
the County Sites and Monuments Records as containing or likely to contain remains of
245

archaeological importance. The locations and extent of all Archaeological Areas are shown
on the County Sites and Monuments Record.
Archaeological significance is not confined solely to below-ground remains but may be also
assigned to any or all structures on a site. Where a Class II or Class III archaeological area is
adversely affected by a development proposal, the current rUDP requires an archaeological
evaluation is to be undertaken to assist in determining the importance of the archaeological
remains and the appropriate course of action.
Up until now most of the existing knowledge about Bradford’s past has come from written
records and surviving maps. A historical map surviving from the 1720s, as well as
descriptions from earlier records, was the only sources to provide an impression of Bradford
as it might have appeared at the end of the Middle Ages:
Map 03 : Bradford City Centre c1720
Although Bradford was a bustling place in medieval times its earlier layout was almost
completely masked by the city's dramatic growth in the 19th century. Even its main
watercourse, the Bradford Beck, together with the 'broad ford' which is widely regarded to
have given the settlement its name, is hidden beneath today's streets and buildings.
The demolition of the 1960s buildings and an archaeological evaluation undertaken by the
WYAS in the Forster Square Area was the first of its kind in Bradford city Centre and it
discovered historical evidences about the streets in 17th and 18th century Bradford and the
industrial activities around the site. The archaeologists excavated an area between Forster
Square and Cheapside near the site of the bridge which replaced the ford. Beneath the
modern cables and piping, and even the remains of a 19th century pub, traces of what are
probably 16 th century buildings were discovered. Smaller finds included coins, pottery, clay
tobacco pipes, a bone spoon and a bone toothbrush. Remains of buildings with some hint of
some industrial processes going on down by the beck, a good water source there for
246

industrial activity, were also found. It was the earliest archaeological evidence found in
Bradford 73 .
Earlier, in 2000 a desk-based assessment of the same site was carried out by WYAS. 74
Several artefacts (mostly coins) were found in the area date to the Romano-British period
suggesting the possibility of an early settlement in the vicinity of the city centre. In addition, a
possible late Roman/early Saxon empty stone coffin was found near Leeds road. The
presence of early medieval settlement, suggested by documentary evidence, is supported by
the presence of Anglo-Saxon masonry within the cathedral walls.
By the 14 th century the town centre was flourishing with buildings erected surrounding the
cathedral. Documentary evidence shows that the occupied area extended from Berkerend in
the east towards Kirkgate and Westgate in the west. During the post-medieval period
Bradford city centre was affected by a dramatic increase in wealth and population caused by
the growth of the textile industry. This lead to the expansion of the town centre and also to
the redevelopment of the medieval core. The current city centre therefore should contain
significant medieval and post-medieval remains.
The expansion and redevelopment of the town centre continued during the 19 th and 20 th
centuries, possibly destroying the evidences of earlier activity. However, documentary
evidence regarding the 20 th century development of the area (i.e. the extent of cellarage),
combined with the results of a recent test-pitting investigation at the junction of Kirkgate and
Queengate, confirm the existence of undisturbed archaeological deposits in the city centre.
In summery, although the city centre has not been greatly disturbed in the past, the area is
known to be of archaeological potentials that could be uncovered in the future through
modern disturbances because of the huge amount of development in the city centre. The
archaeological excavations in the Forster Square site were the first real field excavations in
the city centre and indicate that medieval or earlier remains may still be well-preserved in
small pockets in some areas within the city centre.
7.6 Key Facts:
• The character of the District’s landscape is very varied, ranging from the rugged
open moorland of the South Pennine uplands to rolling farmland, and open river
valleys to wooded hillsides. Much of our moorland and woodland provides important
conservation habitats, and draws visitors who enjoy our countryside.
• The landscape is, however, facing major pressures for change due, in particular, to
agricultural change, diversification and increasing demand for leisure and recreation
73 BBC (2008). Beneath Bradford’s Streets! [online]. BBC [cited 19 June 2008]. Accessed on:
74 Keith, K. (2000). Broadway Centre, Hall Ings, Bradford, West Yorkshire: Desk-based Assesment.
Unpublished WYAS report (R778, 2 vols).
247

Sources:
activities in the countryside. It is important that the distinctive character of the
District’s landscape is conserved and enhanced and that development which occurs
is sympathetic to its character.
• The district enjoys a rich built heritage, including the World Heritage site of Saltaire,
Little Germany, and the redeveloped Lister’s Mill site. Four of our parks have green
flag status, including the award winning Lister Park.
• Bradford District contains a rich and diverse historic environment which consists of
elements that range from Victorian parks and buildings to historic battlefields and old
cemeteries and form the essential characteristics of local distinctiveness and
environmental identity. These elements are highly valued today for the positive
contribution they make to the quality of the environment as well as for the benefits to
the economy and tourism in particular.
• Grade I and ii* listed buildings are of the greatest historical or architectural value but
they form a fraction of the total heritage assets and comprise less than a third of the
national average. Hence there is need to ensure that the elements which contribute
towards their special character are safeguarded.
• The nature of district’s conservation areas and scheduled ancient monuments varies
significantly across the district and adds values to the historic landscape of the area.
The number of such heritage assets at risk in Bradford is relatively low compared to
other regional cities but they still need to be protected from disuse and decay as well
as from pressure of new developments. Redevelopment of some of these assets
e.g. residential conversion of Manningham Mills has been encouraged.
• Heritage at Risk register 2009-2011 (English Heritage, 2009-2011)
• Landscape Character SPD (CBMDC, 2008)
• Saltaire WHS Environmental Capacity Study (Atkins, 2006)
• Conservation Area Assessments (CBMDC, 2003-2005 )
• Listed Buildings at Risk Survey (CBMDC, 2001-2005)
• Bradford City Centre Design Guide SPD (Urbed, 2007)
• Good-Bad-Ugly: Notes on a Heritage Weekend Walk in Bradford City Centre (Bradford
Building Preservation Trust, 2004)
• Land Ownership Schedule for Bradford City Centre (Land Aspects, 2006)
• Archaeological Evaluation of the Broadway Centre Site (WYAS, 2002)
248

8.0 COMMERCIAL APPRAISAL
The following section provides an overview of the Bradford district property market. The
purpose of the overview is to provide a series an audit of Bradford districts property market
and ensure future development proposals are supported by sound property market analysis
and advice on retail, residential property, office, leisure and industrial (including
warehousing) markets.
Baseline information has been taken from a number of local and regional reports and studies
including the following-
• Bradford District Economic Assessment (BMDC, 2010)
• Leeds City Region Development Programme (LCC, 2006)
• Bradford District Retail and Leisure Study (WYG, 2008)
• Bradford Strategic Housing Market Assessment (Arc4, 2009)
• Yorkshire & Humber Strategic Housing Market Assessment (2008)
• Bradford Employment Land Review (Arup, 2007)
• Bradford Office Audit (Donaldsons, 2007)
• Bradford City Centre Market Activity Report (Knight Frank, 2006-2008)
• Destination Bradford Tourism Assessment & Strategy (Locum, 2008)
8.1 Regional Context
The current Yorkshire and Humber Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS) highlights that the main
urban areas of Bradford, Dewsbury/Batley, Halifax, Huddersfield, Leeds and Wakefield would
be the focus for economic and housing development in the Leeds City sub region during the
plan period.
The RSS has designated Bradford as a ‘Regional City’, due its scale, significance and growth
potential. Policy LCR1A(3) of the RSS specifically states that: Plans strategies, investment
decisions and programmes for the Leeds City Region should:
“Transform the Regional City of Bradford with significantly increased growth in economic
development, jobs, and homes through the renaissance of the city centre and regeneration
elsewhere.”
Policy LCR1 of the RSS has been designed to reflect Bradford’s status as a regional city,
support Bradford as a major engine of the regional economy, improve public transport within
and between regional and sub regional cities, and implement stronger demand management
in relation to the strategic road network. It particularly encourages regeneration and growth in
Airedale (Bradford City Centre to Skipton) and the Bradford-Leeds Corridor, to support the
economic growth of both cities.
Policy LCR2 promotes investment in order to support the renaissance of Bradford City
Centre; provide infrastructure to support site assembly, manage flood risk and improve
249

access to town centres and public transport interchanges in Airedale; and to take advantage
of the close proximity of the regional cities, and deliver housing market renewal, training
programmes and support site assembly in west Leeds and east Bradford and improve the
quality and capacity of public transport links along the Leeds- Bradford Corridor.
The RSS predicts that for the B1 office sector, Bradford would experience the highest annual
employment growth followed by Leeds and Sheffield; Hull, York and Wakefield are forecast
to also increase by over 2,000 jobs in the next 10 years.
Manufacturing and industry is forecast to experience an overall decline in employment in
Humber, but numbers employed will continue to increase in the rest of the region. The
highest increases in jobs are forecast for Leeds, Bradford and Doncaster 75 .
In terms of overall employment growth between 2006 and 2016 Leeds, Bradford, Sheffield
and York are forecast to experience the greatest levels of growth, followed by Rotherham,
Kirklees and Doncaster where employment growth for each district is forecast at over 15,000
people over 10 years. Selby is forecast to experience an overall reduction in employment
numbers; however growth is predicted in the retail and miscellaneous employment sectors 76 .
Furthermore, employment in all Financial and Business Service (FBS) sub-sectors within the
city-region grew by 75,000 from 1996, reinforcing its regional and national role. Future
growth however is predicted to slow significantly in line with national trends, although
Bradford is expected to raise its profile in the sector, adding 6600 jobs to Leeds 7200. The
table below also indicates that five other centres each have around 18,000-22,000 jobs in the
sector, with the city-region as a whole employing over 273,000. Moreover, FBS is continuing
to increase its share of city-region jobs, expected to be almost 1 in 5 by 2016 77 .
Employment in mainstream financial services are also expected to grow strongly in the next
decade, especially in Leeds, Bradford, Calderdale and Craven 78 .
It also appears that Bradford is set for the highest economic growth out of all districts within
Leeds City Region, both in terms of output and employment growth.
Through all economic growth projection scenarios for Leeds City Region, Bradford is forecast
significant growth. The LCR Development Programme suggests that this growth will need to
be accommodated through a number of changes in Bradford, mainly the addressing the lack
of Grade A office accommodation and thus realising the potential of Bradford as an economic
centre in Leeds City Region.
75 Update of the job growth and employment land figures in Draft Regional Spatial Strategy
76 Update of the job growth and employment land figures in Draft Regional Spatial Strategy
77 Henderson. R (2006) Leeds City Region Development Programme- Appendix 2 (Financial and
Business Services: Cluster and / or Catalyst). Report Dated August 2006. Leeds Metropolitan
University.
78 Leeds City Region Development Programme – Appendix 2
250

8.2 Local Context
Bradford is the sixth largest city in the UK, by population size, and the fourth largest
Metropolitan District in England. Population projections for the District show annual growth in
the population of 4,000 per year to 2028 - making Bradford the fastest growing Metropolitan
District outside London.
Bradford also has a relatively young population, in 2004, Bradford had the lowest average
age population of all major urban areas in the North of England at 34.8 years.
Bradford’s economic performance has been growing in terms of output (GVA) and number of
jobs, although the rate of improvement has not matched regional or national growth. Future
developments in the District including £2bn of construction work will boost economic
performance, and the District is currently predicted (Source: Experian Regional Econometric
Model) to have the fastest growing economy in the region over the next 10 years.
Bradford retains a significant manufacturing sector (the third largest in the UK) but recent job
losses in the face of global competition have strengthened the need to diversify the economic
base in Bradford.
Today's fastest growing employment sectors are the professional, commercial and service
industries - including tourism. Bradford's reputation as a base for high technology, scientific
and computer based industries is growing, building on long traditions of innovation, skills and
quality products.
Bradford district has a diverse and varied employment base including retailers, major utilities,
financial and business services and manufacturing. Several major companies are based in
the District including Wm Morrison plc, Otto UK, Hallmark Cards UK and three of the UK’s
largest financial institutions - Yorkshire Building Society, Bradford & Bingley Building Society
and Provident Financial.
The University of Bradford has leading national research departments in management,
peace studies and archaeology, health and medical sectors and has strong links to industry
and the community. The University’s School of Management is ranked 8th in Europe. In
2006, the University was ranked 2nd in the UK for graduate employment.
Bradford District covers 143 square miles of which around 60% is classified as rural,
stretching over parts of the Airedale and Wharfedale Valleys and the Pennine Hills and
Moors.
Bradford has a strong cultural offer. Saltaire model village is one of only two World Heritage
Sites in Yorkshire and includes the world’s largest collection of works by the artist David
Hockney. Haworth and Bronte Country attracts visitors from all over the world while the
National Media Museum in the city centre is the most visited museum outside London.
251

Bradford does not feature as one of the current top 50 UK retail locations according to CACI
2007 Retail Footprint. This demonstrates that Bradford does not have a sufficiently strong
mix of the attractions to warrant a place in the top 50, which is surprising for one of the
largest cities in the UK.
Map: Location of Top 20 Employers in Bradford District
8.3 Office Market Profile
This section provides an overview of Bradford’s office market from the Employment Land
Review Assessment by Arup & DTZ, focussing on the key locations and settlements.
Bradford Urban Area
Bradford’s office market is occupied by a variety of businesses with a wide range of needs.
At present, office stock is largely secondary, in many cases refurbished, which does not meet
the needs of the modern office occupier. What little high specification stock that is built, such
as No.1 The Interchange, is usually occupied quickly. It is possible that local business will be
more likely to occupy existing stock since they have little choice in the geographical area in
which they must operate. However, if Bradford is to compete for office occupiers on a
252

egional and national scale then it will need high quality office space with which to meet their
needs.
Achievable headline rents for high specification office units are in the region of £15 per
square foot based on the two recent lettings at No.1 The Interchange. Current asking prices
for the remaining space at No.1 The Interchange are £164 per m² (£15.25 per sq.ft.). This
was achieved May 2005 when space was let to The Consulting Consortium and we see no
reason why that figure could not be repeated in either this or another similar high quality
development. Indeed we see the market going beyond this figure if a degree of critical mass
is delivered. As new accommodation is delivered and the market begins to mature, the
potential to re-base rentals to £172 per m² (£16 per sq.ft.) and above will be realistic. As can
be seen from the recent office lettings, there is not a definitive quantity of office space that
satisfies potential occupier’s desire. As such, flexible floor space which could meet a range of
occupational needs would be desirable. It is the professional opinion of DTZ that grade A
accommodation is delivered in the city centre, it will let. This is supported by Knight Frank’s
market deliver report for Bradford City Centre. Developer interest is around large scale
schemes such as those proposed at the Business Forest.
Shipley, Saltaire and Baildon
Occupational activity in the Shipley / Saltaire area is relatively weak, particularly for large
office suites. Accommodation can remain on the market for some time, for example the
Chandlers Wharf development has been on the market for approximately 4 years. The
locality tends to take its market and value cues from Bradford, where rents have struggled to
exceed £161.50 per sq.m (£15 per sq.ft) for grade ‘A’ space. However, the area forms one of
the major regeneration successes in the region and Shipley has attracted occupiers such as
Halliday Clark Architects, Robinson Design Group, Filtronc Plc and HMRC (formerly the
Inland Revenue). The office market in Shipley has historically focused on converted mill
properties and upper floor premises in the town centre, however new developments have
been constructed which have focused on more high quality accommodation, especially on
the edge of the town.
The Airedale Masterplan identifies that several office schemes are proposed in the Shipley
area. The Advanced Digital Institute (ADI) is a commercially-led design and development
project supported by the major digital industries within the Shipley area and Yorkshire
Forward. It is intended to be a national digital research resource. It is proposed that the ADI
is situated on the canal front adjacent to the Shipley Interchange in order to be as accessible
to the wider region as possible, however a decision on location remains to be concluded.
Focussing the Shipley market at the Advanced Digital Institute will ensure a clear and
definable role for the market going forward. A new college development for Shipley College
will also provide new courses linking into the neighbouring creative arts, digital industries,
horticulture and health care businesses. An accommodation strategy has been produced and
the College are currently undertaking a site feasibility study. The proposed development of
Shipley Eastern Link Road will potentially reduce traffic in the town centre and ensure that
the transition between the existing employment offer and the town centre is greatly
enhanced. Another factor here is that the Shipley town centre offer is very poor and
253

outmoded. Redevelopment in the future will contribute to an overall improvement in image to
potential occupiers making Shipley a more attractive office location.
Bingley and Cross Flats
Bingley is home to Bradford and Bingley Building Society HQ and as such attracts a number
of spin-off businesses to the area. Much of Bingley’s supply of office premises is located on
purpose built business parks and sites outside of the town centre. The rent at which this
purpose built premises is let is highlighted in the table below.
Table: Typical office rental values in Bingley and Cross Flatts
Source: Bradford Employment Land Review (Arup, 2007)
With a lack of large, deliverable sites identified within Bingley town centre itself, the
Coolgardie and Bingley Auction Market sites essentially form one large development site
(close to Crossflatts Railway station) which could ultimately deliver a significant quantity of
office development strategically located along the A629 corridor with good rail access, and
would align with the aspirations of the Airedale Masterplan.
Keighley
There is an extremely limited provision of office accommodation in Keighley which is perhaps
surprising given that the town historically had a significant manufacturing and distribution
base. Given the size of this market one would expect there to be a more significant provision
of office accommodation for supporting financial and business service functions.
Office accommodation is currently being marketed at Universal Mills, on the fringe of the
town centre available to let on short flexible terms at competitive rents equating to £86 per
sq.m (£8 psf). Self contained office accommodation is available to let on Devonshire Street
on the edge of Keighley town centre close to the Airedale Shopping Centre, at a level which
equates to circa £75 per sq.m (£7 psf). Surrounding occupiers are mainly professional
services such as accountancy or insurance firms.
Other accommodation in the town centre is on the market at rents in the region of £5 psf or
on an all inclusive basis and would be suitable for professional occupiers or those seeking all
inclusive rents.
254

However, the majority of existing office accommodation available in the town consists of poor
quality space located above retail premises or in converted, often obsolete, mill buildings. At
present, we consider that developer demand is low for constructing offices in Keighley
(particularly speculatively) as the likely low rental values achievable would render
development unviable.
Ilkley
Although it is in an attractive setting and is a significant rural centre, there is limited
accommodation currently available in the centre of Ilkley, especially a shortage of
accommodation with large floorplates. This is in part due to competition for the provision of
competing higher value uses. The majority of accommodation is available in converted
terraced properties or at first floor level (space above retail shop units). Much of this
accommodation is poor in quality and unlikely to be attractive to the wider market. Occupiers
are mostly limited to professional services in the centre of the town with larger occupiers
being historically attracted to nearby larger settlements of Bradford, Skipton, Keighley or
Shipley. Local business start ups therefore have a relatively poor choice of space in the town
and attracting small businesses from outside of the town is subsequently difficult.
Because of the lack of maturity in the office market, prevailing rental values are considered to
be low and currently would make development of new offices unviable. Developers are
unlikely to build any quantum of offices speculatively (or otherwise) in the town without
funding or without also providing other uses (ie. residential) to cross-subsidise the build costs
as part of a mixed use scheme.
8.4 Industrial Market Profile
This section provides an overview of Bradford’s industrial and warehousing market from the
Employment Land Review Assessment by Arup & DTZ, focussing on the key locations and
settlements.
Bradford Urban Area
Very little of Bradford’s industrial and warehousing stock is considered to be new build (built
in the past 5 years) and in addition in 2006 there was no reported new space completed.
Current availability of premises was estimated to be 256,000 m² by the end of 2006 (Bradford
District Council), compared to a peak of 343,650 m² as at end of 1993. Availability is
currently 5% of total stock compared to a North & Scotland average of 7.1%. The number of
vacant premises has remained relatively constant over the last year whereas nationally the
number of vacancies grew by around 3.7% on average.
Around a quarter of all demand has been for units of 2,323 – 4,646 sq.m (25,000 to 50,000
sq.ft).There is also a significant amount of industrial development in the pipeline (with
planning permission or proposed).
Top rents in Bradford for industrial space were reported to be £54 per m² (£5.00 per sq.ft.) at
the end of 2006 and have remained relatively stable over the last year although rents in the
North & Scotland have risen by approximately 1%. Historically industrial premises have been
255

slightly cheaper on average than the rest of the North & Scotland and considerably cheaper
than the national average. This is illustrated in the table below.
Table: Prime Industrial Rents (£ per sq.ft.)
Source: Bradford Employment Land Review (Arup, 2007)
Bradford Urban Area needs to focus on delivering high quality industrial sites in the best
locations. The M606 corridor provides the greatest opportunity to provide accommodation
that will meet the needs of the modern industrial and logistics market. In addition, these
areas should seek to capitalise on the proximity to the M62.
On the western side of the city the existing allocations, save for those which allow for the
expansion of existing occupiers, are largely redundant in terms of ability to deliver modern
occupational accommodation.
Bowling Back Lane offers an opportunity to contain heavy industrial and traditional
manufacturing uses in one area, specifically the area bounded by Sticker Lane, Wakefield
Road and the Bradford-Leeds Railway Line.
Shipley
Industrial accommodation in Shipley is focused around a select number of business parks
and Industrial Estates as well as smaller older units in and around the town. Rental values
range from around £45 per sq.m. (£4.25 per sq.ft) for newer premises to £43 per sq.m. (£4
per sq.ft.) for more traditional industrial premises.
The development of the Shipley Eastern Link Road may unlock development potential. The
Dockfields Area currently contains a diverse mix of printing, plastics, engineering and digital
firms. With this in mind, the intention is to build on these successful businesses by
reintroducing research, development and business incubator facilities to Shipley. As part of
the reopening of the waterfront of the Leeds Bradford Canal, the Dockfield Road area would
be part of a mixed use waterfront development, creating a business park around Carnaud
Metal Box. This would enable essential business relocations within Shipley and encourage
inward investment.
256

The ELR by Arup considers that current demand for industrial premises in Shipley is
reasonably good, the level of future demand for industrial premises may be linked to the
success of the Digital cluster (depending on the future success of the proposed Advanced
Digital Institute) and the spin out requirements for light assembly and high value added
manufacturing uses.
It is difficult to see however, how such uses could be differentiated to the proposed use /
occupier profile for Bingley Technology Park. Depending upon the success of the ADI. The
ELR by Arup recommends that the Council is flexible in its approach to granting planning
consents at the park so as not to preclude other types of uses, should such demand come
forward.
Should the Shipley Eastern Link Road proceed, it is recommended that a masterplan of the
Dockfield Road area be drawn up to identify key development opportunities in this part of the
town as a result of the road scheme.
Bingley
Industrial premises in the centre of Bingley town centre are mainly focused around converted
mill buildings and small stone built workshop premises. In addition to this, a number of small
business / industrial parks are dispersed around the fringe of the town, with newly developed
estates situated slightly further a field such as Castlefields Industrial Estate. Single storey
warehouse units are currently available within the estate and are being marketed at £43 per
sq.m (£4 psf).
Castlefields Industrial Estate is the only significant site at present, which has recently gone
through a major overhall with the reprovision of a number of units to a modern specification.
Once these new units have been taken up and the remaining land fully developed out the
only location in Bingley capable of delivering any quantum of accommodation is the
Coolgardie Farm site. Situated on the frontage of the old A650 and bounded by the railway to
the north, this site located on the western edge of Bingley, we see this as the key location for
future development.
The aspiration to deliver a Technology Park is realistic however we would not want to see all
of the available land here restricted to specific sector’s as this may impact the expansion of
other indigenous companies in the town.
Keighley
Demand for industrial premises is strong with many high tech manufacturing and precision
engineering businesses relocating to newly developed premises in the Keighley area. The
area has a multitude of industrial accommodation from light industrial units to high quality
warehouse / distribution premises. There are many other small clusters of industrial
properties throughout the town centre and fringe as well as a number of light industrial
estates offering single storey units.
257

Demand for small-to-medium units is particularly strong (units from around to 232 to 929
sq.m. or 2,500 to 10,000 sq.ft.) whilst there is also a good level of demand for slightly larger
units (above 929 sq.m. or 10,000 sq.ft.). From our discussions with local agents it has been
stated anecdotally that industrial take up in the town could be around 55,750 sq.m. (600,000
sq.ft.) per annum.
Rents vary widely according to location and specification of industrial premises (as
demonstrated in table 4.3 below) and a wide variety of accommodation is currently available
on the market. Many of the units available are suited to a wide variety of occupiers and there
is much scope for the expansion of business, the introduction of new businesses or business
relocations within the Keighley area.
Table: Typical industrial rental values in Keighley
Source: Bradford Employment Land Review (Arup, 2007)
This said, demand in the town is predominantly for freehold premises – the Trafalgar Park
scheme at Lawkholme Lane for instance currently has nine out of the ten of the units under
offer on a freehold rather than a leasehold basis. Freehold values are approximately £1,000
per sq.m. (£95 per sq.ft.) for units up to around 929 sq.m. (10,000 sq.ft.) and around £800
per sq.m. (£75 per sq.ft.) for larger units sizes. Development land in Keighley is likely to
achieve up to around £1.25M per hectare (£500,000 per acre).
Industrial land in Keighley has developed sporadically and primarily around the bespoke
requirements of specific occupiers over a substantial time horizon. There is evidence of
some new build development in the town which has been relatively successful; however
Keighley has a substantial amount of poor, second hand stock which is located throughout
the town and which is now vacant and in disrepair and or struggling to let well having been
refurbished to a low quality standard. It appears that there is simply too much second hand
258

stock on the market and not enough modern accommodation. If new accommodation were to
be delivered, it is likely to be successful, particularly if targeted towards the freehold market.
Ilkley
Ilkley has a limited market for industrial development with most existing provision catering for
indigenous local demand. Whilst there will be a requirement for further land in the future, this
should be restricted to the remaining allocations. The recycling of existing sites as they come
to the end of their useful economic life will therefore, become increasingly important over
time. This puts a greater emphasis on the need to defend such sites from pressure from
developers to deliver higher values uses.
8.5 Retail Profile
This section provides an overview of the Retail Profile of Bradford district from the Retail &
Leisure Study produced by White Young Green on behalf of the Council.
Bradford Districts Catchment
By analysing the survey results of the market share achieved by all convenience goods
facilities in the district, approximately 74.5% of convenience goods expenditure was retained
in 2007. Accordingly less than a quarter of convenience goods expenditure generated in the
study area were lost to competing centres outside Bradford District.
Table 1: Market Share of Bradford District (2007)
Source: Bradford District Retail and Leisure Study (WYG, 2008)
259

In terms of comparison goods, existing facilities within the district retain 59.6% of comparison
goods expenditure generated by residents within the study area. Whilst the market share
achieved for comparison goods shopping is less than that achieved by convenience goods
shopping, this lower market share is understandable given the strength of the major centres
of Leeds, Huddersfield and other out of centre developments.
With forecast growth in convenience shopping predicted at +1.0% per annum after 2007, it is
estimated that Bradford will experience an increase in convenience goods expenditure within
the District of some £243.7m between 2007 and 2022 at current market share. In contrast,
the significant increase identified in expenditure on comparison goods would suggest that
Bradford’s market share would capture a further £1,573.4m between 2007 and 2022.
Bradford City Centre
Bradford City Centre was identified as being of regional significance. The defined shopping
area contains 473 retail outlets which together occupy 98,730sq m of retail floorspace. The
study found that a proportion of convenience provision within the City Centre was limited.
Conversely, the study found that the comparison goods sector was the most significant in
terms of floorspace, accounting for 53% of the total retail floorspace in the centre. In addition,
the study found that the centre benefited from a significant range of civic and cultural
services in and around the City Centre which added to the diversity of the city. It is important
to note that the total amount of retail floorspace in the City Centre has actually dropped by
approximately 100,000sq m between the 2001 and 2007 period. This can be attributed to the
demolition of a number of retail outlets in the Broadway and Petergate area to help facilitate
the new and proposed Broadway Shopping Centre redevelopment. The study found that
given the historic nature of the City Centre, it was dominated by a number of small retail
outlets, not necessarily conducive to modern retail practices. In addition, GOAD identified
that Bradford contained an above average representation of vacant outlets, many of which
were of poor quality. The high proportion of small vacant outlets indicates that these may be
unsuitable to the demands of modern retailing. However, it is noted that vacancies in the City
Centre have actually declined since 2001, which is a positive sign for the vitality of the
centre.
The study found that despite prime Zone A rents in the City Centre being relatively high, they
have remained unchanged since 2000, whilst other competing centres in the sub-region have
witnessed increases in their prime Zone A rents. Following discussions with local agents,
WYG found that whilst there was strong demand for representation in the City Centre, there
was a lack of suitable, high quality retail outlets to meet that demand. Local agents however,
found that Bradford benefited from affordable rents, acceptable terms, a readily available
workforce, and good public transport infrastructure. In addition, yields in Bradford have fallen
in recent years, indicating improvements to investor confidence in the City Centre.
Bradford contains some 65% of the top 20 national high street retailers (as identified by
Focus 2007). In addition to this, there is a significant demand recorded by retailers seeking
representation in the City Centre where some 72 retailers sought up to 138,236sq m (gross)
of new retail floorspace. Accessibility to the City Centre is good and with the largest
proportion of visitors interviewed on the In-Street Survey having arrived in the City centre by
260

us, mini-bus or coach. However, those that drove in to the City Centre did not encounter
any difficulty in obtaining a car parking space.
In conclusion, whilst Bradford can be seen to provide a strong comparison goods offer which
is also enhanced by its leisure destination, its future growth will be restricted unless new high
quality large retail outlets can be brought in the City Centre. The Broadway shopping
development should deliver these, although the inactivity on the site has led to a significant
decline in retail floorspace that has not been replaced. Furthermore, as noted by agents,
many retailers are currently refraining from investing in the centre until development is
complete, which is actually stifling investment. Once the development is completed, careful
management will be required to ensure that the whole of the centre benefits from the
development and to ensure that the Kirkgate and Oastler Shopping Centres remain important
retail destinations.
Keighley Town Centre
Keighley is the second largest town in the district after Bradford and contains 76,690sq m of
retail floorspace. Due to its somewhat isolated location in the North West of the district, it is a
self-contained centre with a dedicated catchment. The representation of both comparison
and convenience goods floorspace is above the national average, whilst retail service,
leisure service and financial and business service floorspace are all below the national
average. In the convenience sector, the town is anchored by a Sainsburys foodstore on
Cavendish Street and a Morrisons foodstore on Worth Way. Comparison retailers are
focused on the purpose built Airedale Centre and Cavendish Retail Park. The Town Centre
contains a mixture of national multiples and independent traders, and includes a permanent
indoor market.
In terms of outlet sizes in Keighley, the Town Centre is dominated by small outlets, whereby
57% of total floorspace is dominated by units under 93sq m. This is compared to a national
average of 39%. The proportion of vacant outlets represents 15% of the total amount, which
is above the national average of 10%. However, the proportion of vacant floorspace (7%) is
below the national average (9%). This demonstrates the high number of small outlets that
are currently vacant which are not suitable for the requirements of modern retailers.
The study found that only half of the top 20 national high street retailers (as defined by
FOCUS) are in the Town Centre. At October 2007 FOCUS found that a total of 21
requirements were recorded by retailers seeking representation in the Town Centre. In total,
these collectively had a requirement for 20,026sq m of new retail floorspace.
In June 2006 prime Zone A rents in Keighley were recorded at £861 per sq m. This was
found to be lower than nearby centres of Halifax and Harrogate. However, rents have
increased by some 45% since 1998. Yields in the centre are falling indicating improvements
to investor confidence.
Keighley is a somewhat unique centre in that it has a lower catchment base due to its
distance from other competing centres. It is identified by agents that the threat of an
improved retail offer in competing centres such as Bradford is likely to be minimal. The
261

centre show signs of strong vitality and viability. However, there are a number of indicators to
suggest that there are key issues which will need to be addressed in the forthcoming Local
Development Framework (LDF). Consequently the key challenge for Keighley in the future
will be to ensure that sufficient retail and leisure developments are brought forward which will
help cater for the needs of shoppers who use the centre. Lastly, the issue of the high amount
of small vacant outlets will need to be addressed.
Ilkley Town Centre
Ilkley contains 37,380sq m of retail floorspace, making it the third largest retail destination in
the district. Convenience retail floorspace is above the national average and this sector is
anchored by a Tesco foodstore and a Booths foodstore. Comparison retail floorspace is
below the national average although the study found that the town centre had an adequate
supply. The centre contains a variety of specialist comparison traders which is dominated by
independent traders. The proportion of retail service and financial and business service
floorspace is above the national average, with the proportion of leisure service floorspace
being lower than the national average. The study found that the majority of retail outlets in
Ilkley are small in nature (under 93 sq m), although these units will appeal to the independent
retail sector. The study found that there are currently 18 retailers who are seeking
representation in Ilkley Town Centre. This represents a combined floorspace of 11,823sq m
gross. Ilkley is well provided for in terms of its train and bus services, with regular
connections to Bradford and Leeds, amongst other destinations. The centre is also well
positioned to take advantage of the A65 road.
A major concern identified by local traders was the inadequacy of customer car parking,
which was a barrier to trading performance. Ilkley benefits from a safe and pleasant shopping
environment for pedestrians. Half of the shoppers felt that the accessibility to Ilkley was
‘better’ or ‘much better’ than the accessibility to other shopping centres. The environmental
quality of the Town Centre was good, with well maintained retail units and high quality public
realm.
The study found that Ilkley is clearly a healthy, vital and viable Town Centre. The high
proportion of good quality independent retailers adds to the diversity and the unique range of
goods and services on offer in the town. In terms of the future of the centre, the study found
that it will be necessary to balance the delivery of new retail floorspace to ensure that it
retains/improves its market share, whilst at the same time preserving the good quality
environment and independent/specialist nature of the businesses that it currently contains.
Shipley Town Centre
Shipley was found to have 38,800 sq m of retail floorspace. The Town Centre is dominated
by the large-format ASDA superstore off Manor Road which offers a range of comparison
and convenience goods. The centre contains a permanent indoor market, as well as an
outdoor market in the Market Square. This is held three times a week. The study found that
the proportion of convenience, retail service and financial and business service floorspace is
above the national average, whilst the proportion of comparison and leisure service
floorspace is below the national average.
262

Similar to other Town Centres in the district, Shipley is dominated by small outlets of less
than 93 sq m. Vacancies in the Town Centre are above the national average with respect to
both the proportion of floorspace and the proportion of outlets that they occupy. Many of
these outlets are noted to be of poor quality, which detract from the overall quality of the
environment. The study also found that vacancies in the Town Centre had actually increased
between 2001 and 2006. The centre only contains five of the top twenty national high street
retailers including Boots, Woolworths, Argos, Superdrug and Wilkinsons. Yields in the centre
have remained largely static over the past ten years, although they have fallen marginally
from 9.5% in October 1996 to 8.5% in January 2007.
Shipley has a centrally located bus station that provides good services to the local area
including Leeds, Bradford, Harrogate, and Keighley. A train station is located within close
proximity of the Town Centre and provides direct services to Leeds and Bradford every thirty
minutes. The Town Centre benefits from a number of car parks, although the largest of these
(Ivar Way multi-storey and Manor Road), are both located adjacent to the ASDA foodstore.
There is limited parking elsewhere in the town centre which is well linked to the other retailing
core. Pedestrian movement around the centre is not impeded; however bus movements can
create some conflict
Shipley is predominantly a destination for convenience shopping, dominated by the ASDA
and retail markets. The centre does show signs of vitality and viability, however there are a
number of indicators which suggest that the centre is vulnerable. The future of the Town
Centre will require diversification of Town Centre retail uses and make it a more attractive
retail destination. This could be achieved by improving the quality of the indoor markets to
provide a quality retail offer, and also environmental improvements would help to increase
the attractiveness of the Town Centre.
Bingley Town Centre
Bingley is the smallest Town Centre with only 15,940 sq m of retail floorspace. The study
found that Bingley has a limited shopping function and performs a role providing for the day
to day needs of the local population. The study found that the proportion of both comparison
and convenience floorspace is below the national average, whilst the proportion of leisure
service, retail service and financial and business service floorspace are all above the national
average.
Bingley is dominated by small retail outlets of less than 93 sq m. These represent 62% of all
outlets compared to a national average of 39%. The only large-format retail accommodation
in Bingley is situated in the Myrtle Walk Shopping Centre. The centre has a high number of
vacancies with both the proportion of vacant floorspace and vacant outlets being above the
national average. However, the study found that vacancies in the Town Centre had declined
since 2001. Many of these vacancies are found in the Myrtle Walk Shopping Centre which
itself is poorly lit and of a poor environmental quality. However, this is earmarked for potential
redevelopment.
The centre benefits from good accessibility on foot with pedestrian movement around the
centre being unproblematic. The Town Centre contains a centrally located train station with
263

services to Skipton, Keighley, Bradford and Leeds. The centre benefits from a large amount
of off-street car parking. The Town Centre is currently being redeveloped with a new Town
Centre Square which will provide a number of environmental enhancements and
improvements to Main Street.
In conclusion, Bingley was found to be a healthy centre performing a role as a service centre.
The major issue that the centre faces is the poor quality of the Myrtle Walk Shopping Centre
which detracts form the town’s environmental quality and does not provide an attractive
shopping environment. However, the ongoing redevelopment of Main Street and the Town
Square are positive signs for the centre which will be beneficial for the future of Bingley.
Retail Market Share
Based on the current market shares for all existing facilities within the district (which includes
town centres, district centres, local centres, freestanding stores etc.), WYG’s analysis
indicates that existing facilities in the district have a convenience goods turnover of some
£641.8m in 2007. In addition, £9.6m (or 1.5%) of convenience goods expenditure is also
captured from outside the Study Area (otherwise classed as ‘inflow’). WYG has estimated the
‘benchmark’ turnover of existing facilities in Bradford District based on published trading
information. WYG estimate that all facilities have a benchmark convenience goods turnover
of £548.9m.
The study indicates that convenience goods facilities in Bradford appear to be overtrading by
approximately £102.5m in 2007, primarily due to the overtrading of the WM Morrisons store
in Keighley. This overtrading is set to increase to £157.7m by 2012 and to £307.3m by 2022.
The results show that there is an immediate capacity within Bradford District as a whole for
additional convenience goods floorspace of between 8,565 sq m (net) and 20,507 sq m (net).
However, this is dependent upon the end operator and type of development. In respect of
comparison goods capacity, our analysis identifies that in 2007 existing facilities within the
district have a comparison goods turnover of approximately £1,046m. This equates to a
market share of 59.6%. The district benefits from some £16.5m (or 2.5%) derived from
inflow from outside the study area.
Based on its current market share, Bradford District is identified to have a capacity for almost
£288.8m of additional comparison goods expenditure that will be made available for new
retail floorspace by 2012. By 2022, this surplus comparison goods expenditure will rise to
more than £1.34bn.
Set out below is a summary of the comparison and convenience goods capacity both within
the main Town Centres in the district, including, Bradford City Centre; Ilkley Town Centre;
Bingley Town Centre; Shipley Town Centre; and Keighley Town Centre.
264

Table: Summary of the Main Centres (2007)
Notes: 1 - Floorspace derived from Experian Goad for Bradford, Keighley, Bingley, Shipley, Ilkley and WYG for all
District Centres. Floorspace figure for *Bradford excludes the Tesco store at Peel Centre.
2 - Catchment and market share derived from Household Survey (2006) based on Study Area only
3 - Assumes constant market share for each centre
Source: Bradford District Retail and Leisure Study (WYG, 2008)
Based on current performance of the main town and district centres, Keighley was identified
to be the strongest convenience goods retail destination. Bradford City Centre is identified to
provide the most important comparison goods destination, but has a weak convenience
goods function. The results also show that some of the defined District Centres (Mayo
Avenue, Girlington, Great Horton and Thornbury) perform important roles for convenience
hopping compared to some of the Town Centres (Bingley, Bradford, and Ilkley).
The study also illustrates that Bradford City Centre is the strongest bulky and non-bulky
comparison goods shopping destination, followed by Keighley Town Centre. The results
show that Bingley and Ilkley perform limited bulky goods roles, whilst Ilkley plays a more
important on-bulky role to its local catchment. Similar to convenience shopping, the results
found that some of the District Centres (Thornbury and Five Lane Ends) play an important
bulky and non-bulky comparison role than other competing centres such as Ilkley and
Bingley. The results also demonstrate the important role that the network of local centres
provide in local main food, bulky and non-bulky shopping in the District. The rise of out-ofcentre
provision also shows that collectively they have a significant influence on local
shopping patterns.
8.6 Leisure and Tourism Market Profile
This section provides and overview of the Leisure market profile of Bradford district. The
Retail & Leisure Study produced by White Young Green on behalf of the Council does
enable analysis of leisure activities through analysis of the results of the Household Survey in
regard to specific leisure activities. These include:
265

• Cinemas;
• Health and fitness;
• Ten pin bowling;
• Bingo; and
• Pubs/Bars/Nightclubs
In terms of existing provision, the study found that the district has a diverse range of leisure
facilities within it. In terms of cinemas, the District contains a 13 screen Odeon Cinema at
Gallagher Leisure Park, a 2 screen cinema at The Picture House, Keighley, and a 3 screen
cinema at the National Media Museum which includes an IMAX screen. 10-pin bowling
facilities in the District comprise Hollywood Bowl at Vicar Lane, Bradford (28 lanes), AMF
Bowling at Keighley (20 lanes) and Go-Bowling at Shipley Lanes (12 lanes). In addition to
small and informal bingo clubs, large format bingo halls in the District include Buckingham
Bingo, Bradford Interchange; Mecca Bingo, Little Horton, Bradford; Gala Bingo, Tong Street;
Oxford Bingo, Dudley Hill Road, Bradford; and Gala Bingo, Alice Lane, Keighley.
The District contains a wide array of gyms, and health clubs, both private membership and
publically run facilities. These include amongst other facilities: Manningham Sports Centre,
Carlisle Road; Richard Dunn Sports Centre, Rooley Avenue; Esporta, Gallagher Leisure
Park, Thornbury; Fitness First, Worth Way, Keighley; Soccer City, Leaverthrope Lane,
Thornton; Virgin Active; and Ilkley’s Lido.
With respect to the evening economy the Alhambra theatre and St George’s Concert Hall are
both located in Bradford City Centre, and a large number of bars, public house and
nightclubs are located across the District.. The District contains a high number of restaurants
offering specialist cuisine from around the world, reflecting the multi-cultural diversity of the
Districts residents. Such leisure facilities are concentrated in Bradford City Centre primarily
together with the other defined town centres, although they can be found in varying quantities
throughout Bradford District.
Cinemas
Within the study area, approximately 44% of respondents to the household survey visited the
cinema, of which 65% of these visited cinemas within Bradford district. Within the district the
most popular cinema was the Cineworld at the Leisure Exchange in Bradford. This was
followed by the Odeon Cinema in Thornbury. WYG’s assessment has identified that there is
potential support for up to ten cinema screens in Bradford.
Health and Fitness
The study found that a quarter of the respondents within the study area participate in health
and fitness activities. Of those people that undertook health and fitness activities, some 66%
of respondents stated that they visited facilities in the District. The most popular facility was
the Dines First at Horton Park Avenue in Bradford, with a market share of 7%. Other
important destinations were Fitness First in Keighley and the Richard Dunn Sports Centre in
Bradford, closely followed by Cannons Health Club in Bingley.
266

Ten Pin Bowling
The study found that 26% of the population participated in ten-pin bowling activity. Of those,
70% indicated that they visited ten-pin bowling facilities no more than once every two
months. The study found that there are three ten-pin bowling facilities in Bradford, Keighley
and Shipley. The study found that 72% of residents who partake in ten-pin bowling did so in
facilities within the district. The most popular destinations were the Hollywood Bowl at Vicar
Lane in Bradford, which attracted 47% of those residents, followed by the Hollywood Bowl in
Kirstall, and the AMF Bowling in Keighley.
Bingo
The study found that 8% of the population use bingo facilities. Of those that stated that they
participate in bingo, 82% stated that they visited facilities within the District. The most popular
destinations were large-format clubs including Buckingham Bingo at Bradford Interchange,
Mecca Bingo in Bradford, and the Gala Clubs in Tong Street and Keighley.
Pubs/Bars/Nightclubs
The study found that 56% of the resident population indicated that they visited pubs on a
regular basis. This increased in age groups between 35 and 54. In terms of restaurants, the
study found that 78% of respondents undertook this activity. In contrast, the study found that
across the study area only 13% of respondents visited nightclubs.
Potential Retail Development & Emerging Strategy
Given the identified need in the study, WYG recommend that the Council take a pro-active
approach to enhance the role of all the key town centres through the plan period. WYG do
not believe that any of the defined Town Centres can afford to stand still. In terms of
convenience shopping there is a quantitative need to provide a new foodstore in Bradford
City Centre, through enhancing its current poor market share, which will also seek to address
the qualitative deficiency in the City Centre. We also believe that there is quantitative and
qualitative need to improve the convenience provision in Shipley Town Centre.
In terms of Keighley, the study has found that the proposed new ASDA store will meet the
identified quantitative need for the town. The study has also found that up to three new
superstores/supermarkets can be implemented in three centres up to 2012. This would
satisfy the district’s quantitative need in the short term. Subject to the delivery of this we
would recommend that the Council review and monitor this over the next five years.
In terms of comparison shopping, the study found that there is capacity to enhance the
position of Bradford City Centre through the implementation of major retail development.
WYG believe that delivery of the Broadway will be fundamental and will help transform
Bradford as a shopping destination and will address the recent decline over the last 10 years.
WYG also believe that there is scope to enhance the current positions of Shipley and
Keighley as comparison goods shopping destinations through both the redevelopment and
the expansion of the existing Town Centres. This expansion will need to be carefully
monitored and delivered through appropriately scaled developments.
267

In terms of Bingley, WYG recommend that the LDF should focus on the redevelopment of the
Myrtle Walk Shopping Centre. The objective should be to secure a replacement convenience
anchor in the Town Centre which will then help to encourage other comparison retailers to
the centre. At the same time, the Council should seek to maintain the centres strong service
role.
In terms of leisure development, although the study has found limited capacity for new
leisure provision in quantitative terms, there is a qualitative need to improve the leisure
provision within Keighley and maybe Shipley. The current leisure provision in Bradford City
Centre is good. There is scope to improve the evening economy through the promotion and
enhancement of leisure and cultural facilities, which will complement the role and function of
the City Centre as a retail destination. This should include improving the quality and range of
restaurants, bars, public houses and evening entertainment uses.
The study sets out a clear framework for enhancing and sustaining the role of the defined
Town Centres within the district, and that appropriate and sensitive retail and leisure
development should be accommodated where possible within the five Town Centres. In
terms of the existing network of defined District Centres as set out in the Bradford UPD,
WYG has reviewed the role and function of each of these and has concluded that the
following centres are performing an adequate role as a District Centre, and require no further
action by the Council apart from minor boundary changes where appropriate. These include:
• Five Lane Ends;
• Girlington;
• Great Horton Road;
• Greengates; and
• Thornbury.
The study has recommended that Tong Street becomes a priority for regeneration and
investment in order to support and enhance its future role. This is required to help support
the regeneration of this deprived area of Bradford and to become a focal point for community
life. Given the lack of diversity of uses, WYG have advised that Mayo Avenue be de-listed as
a District Centre and unallocated in future planning documents. As part of the study, WYG
also examined 40 local centres throughout the district. The study assessed their current role
and function against the definitions in PPS6 to understand whether they were satisfying their
required role.
In conclusion, WYG consider that the following local centres are performing their role well
and require no Planning Policy intervention from the Council. These include:
• Addingham Local Centre;
• Baildon Local Centre;
• Barkerend Road Local Centre;
• Burnley-in-Wharfedale Local Centre;
• Carlisle Road/Whetley Hill Local Centre;
• Clayton Local Centre;
268

• Denholme Local Centre;
• Duckworth Lane Local Centre;
• Frizinghall Local Centre;
• Haworth (Main Street) Local Centre;
• Haworth (Mill Hey) Local Centre;
• Horton Grange Local Centre;
• Idle Local Centre;
• Laisterdyke Local Centre;
• Leeds Road Local Centre
• Lidget Green Local Centre;
• Marshfields (Manchester Road) Local Centre;
• Oak Lane, Manningham Local Centre;
• Queensbury Local Centre;
• Saltaire Local Centre;
• Silsden Local Centre;
• Thornton Local Centre;
• Undercliffe Local Centre;
• White Abbey Road Local Centre;
• Wibsey Local Centre; and
• Wyke Local Centre.
Based on site visits and analysis of role and function, WYG recommend that the following
centres should not be defined as local centres under the guidance of PPS6. These include:
• Bolton Junction Local Centre;
• Buttershaw Local Centre;
• Eldwick Local Centre; and
• Shearbridge/Listerhills (Woodhead Road) Local Centre.
Future Retail Policy Strategy
WYG has reviewed the current retail and leisure strategy as set out in Chapter 7 of the
Replacement UDP (Adopted 2005). WYG have examined this against the national Planning
Policy set out in PPS6 to ensure that any emerging Local Development Framework will
reflect national guidance and will try to emulate the aims and objectives of PPS6.
WYG have set out a preferred retail hierarchy which provides a clear network of town, district
and local centres.
City Centre
Bradford
Town Centre
Bingley; Ilkley; Keighley; Shipley
District Centre
Five Lane Ends; Girlington; Great Horton Road; Greengates; Thornbury; Tong Street
269

Local Centre
Addingham; Idle; Silsden; Allerton; Saltaire; Baildon; Horton Grange; Thornton; Cross Road
(Keighley); Crossflats; Barkerend Road; Haworth (Mill Hey); Undercliffe; Eccleshill; Fell
Lane/Oakworth (Keighley); Denholme; Laisterdyke; Queensbury; Holme Wood; Princeville;
Carlisle Road/Whetley Hill; Leeds Road; Wibsey; Duckworth Lane; Frizinghall Clayton; Lidget
Green; Wyke; Sticker Lane; Wrose; Burley-in-Wharfedale; Marshfields (Manchester Road);
Oak Lane, Manningham; Haworth (Main Street); White Abbey Road; Bankfoot (Manchester
Road).
The Council will need to consider other potential strategic locations for local centres to
ensure that social inclusion and accessibility considerations are satisfied through the
emerging LDF.
Although the WYG study has not specially been asked to look at locations for new centres,
PPS6 requires local planning authorities to consider the designation of new centres in areas
of significant growth or in areas of clear deficiency, with priority given to areas of high
deprivation, where access to local services is needed. From the accessibility review set out
in Section 9 of the study, we highlighted the network of town, district and local centres as well
as known foodstores. From this analysis we found that generally the district is well catered
for with existing retail (convenience) facilities. However, from closer inspection we did find
that there may be scope to designate some local centres to ensure that most of the district is
covered. WYG has identified that the following settlements areas should be considered for
designation of a local centre. We should note that some of these centres (*) do benefit from a
foodstore/superstore. The settlements are:
• Steeton with Eastburn;
• Menston *;
• Riddleston *;
• Oakworth *;
• Harden;
• Cullingworth *
• Wilsden *;
• Cottingley *;
• Heaton *;
• Sandy Lane *;
• Low Moor *.
If any future retail strategy is to address social exclusion issues and deficiencies, then it will
be essential that the above settlements with no identified supermarket/foodstore present
should represent the priority for some form of daily provision to meet daily needs. The
Council will need to consider allocating these strategic locations for local centres to ensure
that social inclusion and accessibility considerations are satisfied through the emerging LDF.
The study has reviewed and recommended appropriate changes where possible to many of
the adopted retail and leisure policies set out in the UDP. Many of the changes identified by
270

WYG are to ensure that the future policies are compliant with national planning guidance set
out in PPS6, and that any future changes required are reflected in the emerging LDF.
8.7 Visitor Economy Profile
This section provides and overview of the visitor economy based upon the Bradford
Destination Assessment & Strategy (2008) produced by Locum Consulting on behalf of the
Council.
Bradford’s proximity to other large conurbations such as Leeds, Sheffield and Manchester
means that it has a large catchment population: over one and a half million people live within
a 30 minute drive time and nearly eleven million people in total live within a 90 minute drive
time of Bradford.
Overall and allowing for the deficiencies and uncertainties in the data, the main conclusion
that can be drawn is to lend further weight to the view that Bradford is underachieving in
terms of volume and value of day visitors.
The Cambridge model estimates that about 760,000 visits involving at least a one night stay
are made to the district each year, and estimates that the number has decreased by 5%
since 2003, albeit that the amount they have spent has increased by 11%. Staying visitors
are estimated to have accounted for 10% of all visits to Bradford in 2006, but to have
accounted for nearly 30% of total tourism expenditure in Bradford.
The two main reasons for staying visits to Bradford are for a holiday and to visit friends and
relatives, although visiting Bradford for business reasons has become more popular since
2003 and now accounts for nearly a quarter of all staying trips to the city and about a third of
all spend. This is important because the hotel sector in city centres normally depends on
business tourists to generate it bread and butter trade.
Cambridge estimates that there is a more or less even split in expenditure between those
staying with friends and relatives and those staying in serviced accommodation.
271

City’s attraction to the wider international visitors are very promising and encouraging as
well. According to figures released by the Office for National Statistics the length of time
overseas visitors stay in Bradford has more than doubled in a year, averaging 19 days per
visit in 2008 as opposed to eight days per visit in 2007.
The Travel Trends survey also revealed that overseas visitors spent a combined total of 2.1
million nights in Bradford in 2008, up from just 826,000 in 2007.
Meanwhile, the number of overseas visitors who stayed more than a day in Bradford
increased from 105,000 in 2007 to 111,000 in 2008, with their spending going up from £26 to
£29 million.
In 2008, the district welcomed 5,000 overnight visitors from North America, many of whom
were wooed by attractions such as the Bronte Parsonage Museum in Haworth, the World
Heritage Site of Saltaire and Bradford’s National Media Museum. Meanwhile, 75,000 visitors
from Europe had overnight stays in Bradford 79 .
The key challenge for Bradford however is to lift the appeal of the city centre and to persuade
people who live relatively locally, especially more affluent people living “outside the ring-road”
to visit the city centre more often and to spend more money there. The population of the
country is increasingly middle class and any place that wants to have a thriving economy can
only do so by appealing to middle class taste. Upping the quality of the visitor offer in the city
centre to make it a primary leisure resource for the metropolitan area and its surrounds
should be top priority.
Having improved the appeal of the city centre to people who live nearby, a second challenge
is to persuade people that live further afield that the city is worthwhile visiting. This
represents a huge potential market and there are good reasons for them to come to the city
and the district, especially star attractions like the National Media Museum and Saltaire, but
currently the image of the city and the poor quality of the general urban experience are major
deterrents. The image is related to the reality of the appearance of the urban realm and will
79 Telegraph and Argus (2008) Visitors increase stop-offs in Bradford [online]. Newsquest Media Group [cited 6 th
May 2009]. < http://www.thetelegraphandargus.co.uk/news/4497966.Tourists_double_length_of_their_stay/ >
272

e difficult to change without substantial progress in addressing that. Improvements to
marketing could probably also help.
Another key challenge in this respect is differentiating Bradford from the many other post
Industrial towns in the Leeds-Manchester conurbation – places like Preston, Blackburn,
Bolton, Oldham, Halifax and Huddersfield. Research that Locum has undertaken for the
Northwest Regional Development Agency show that they all struggle to be seen as
destinations. Bradford District has the advantage of a range and depth of major attractions
that place Bradford apart from other locations in the North and Yorkshire in particular. The
task of the strategy needs to be to place them in a much better context, and then to market
them more effectively.
A market of third priority (after locals and potential day visitors within about 90 minutes) is
people who are potential staying visitors, especially those coming to the city to stay in paid
for accommodation. The statistics – albeit they are crude – suggest that the city has been
going backward in this respect, and it certainly has not been enjoying the investment in new
hotel stock that has been seen by the larger regional cities. A major reason for this is the lack
of professional and commercial business in the city to sustain the bread and butter. There
are, however, hotels proposed as part of the new development schemes that should help to
address the situation. The most optimal approach to promoting to potential staying visitors
seems to be to collaborate more with Leeds.
In terms of promoting to overseas markets, working with Leeds and other Yorkshire
stakeholders to promote to markets served by Leeds-Bradford Airport seems to be the best
approach.
The 2004 Benchmark Report5 was based on visitor surveys carried out in various locations
in Bradford, Ilkley and Haworth. It asked respondents about their experience of different
aspects of the visitor experience. Respondents were asked to assess dimensions of the
visitor experience on a scale of 1 – 5 with 1 being poor and 5 being very good. The
researchers reported that the responses compared favourably6, where information was
available, with national benchmarks. The dimension on which Bradford offered the least
satisfaction was the range of shops within the city, which scored 3.97. On average Haworth
and Ilkley received higher visitor satisfaction scores than the city centre.
Bradford District Visitor Guide Conversion Research 2006 survey was sent to all those
who requested a Bradford District Visitor Guide. In total there were nearly 2,000 enquiries for
a guide and 550 responded to the questionnaire. The results are compared with data
collected in 20057. Two thirds of the respondents were over the age of 55. The majority
stayed between 2 -3 nights in the District. On average, respondents spend £89 per person
on accommodation in Bradford in 2006 and £167 per person on the total holiday.
Visitors were most likely to visit Bradford city centre, Haworth and Ilkley. The proportion
visiting Saltaire is notably low.
273

The top three places of interest to visit in 2006 were Bradford City Centre, Haworth and
Brontë Country. The National Media Museum was ranked the 11th most interesting attraction
by respondents in 2006. Salts Mill seems to generate a level of interest that is not matched
by the proportion of visitors actually going there.
There are 35 visitor attractions listed on the Visit Bradford website: 31 of which are heritage
sites, with 15 being specifically museums and galleries. The table shows the range of
attractions in Bradford whilst the map indicates their location.
274

275

The National Media Museum is considerably the most visited attraction in the District. It is
one of the most visited national museums outside of London and is, unquestionably, a major
asset for the city that it should keep seeking to build upon. It reported 650,000 visits in 2006
(although this was the lowest number since 2002).
The other star attraction in the district is Saltaire, which was designated a World Heritage
Site in 2001 because it is a complete and well-preserved industrial village dating to the
second half of the nineteenth century. It was constructed by textile industrialist Sir Titus Salt
over the period 1853 – 1876. The main attraction at Saltaire, however, is Salts Mill, which
was converted into a mixed gallery-shopping-dining experience by the late Jonathan Silver. It
is probably the best such mix in the country (there are only a few other examples, one being
the successful Snape Maltings outside Aldeburgh in Suffolk). The offer at the Mill has
progressively improved over the years and it now deserves to be seen and treated as one of
the foremost attractions in the north of England. It should be on the itinerary of many foreign
visitors. Almost certainly, its profile outside of the sub-region is lower than it deserves to be.
The most popular paid attraction in the Bradford area is the Brontë Parsonage Museum,
which reported nearly 79,000 visits in 2006. This was also lower than in preceding years and
it is in danger of slipping into unsustainable territory. Generally, all visits to Bradford
276

attractions listed in the Visit Britain Attractions Monitor have decreased since 2002. This is
not necessarily out of step with the rest of the country.
It is common for admissions to specific attractions to be on a downward trend because, on
the whole, the total number of visits to attractions has not been keeping pace with the
increase in new attractions (many of them funded by the National Lottery and other public
funds). In Yorkshire and Humber as a whole, there was a 1% increase in visits to all
attractions in 2006. 41% of attractions reported an increase, 11% reported no change 39%
reported a decrease. Smaller visitor attractions (20,000 visits or less) reported an 8% decline
in total visitor numbers in 2006.
Perhaps the single factor that gives Bradford a special sense of place is the mills. The truly
special nature of Saltaire is discussed above. It is soon to be joined by other mills that have
been beautifully restored to provide modern, contemporary uses.
The Bradford events calendar currently has thirty three events programmed from January –
June 2008. This includes eight classical music concerts at the cathedral, five festivals
(including three prestigious film festivals) and three exhibitions. Events traditionally held in
the winter months include a Victorian Fayre and a Christmas Carol Service.
In the surrounding area, current events programmed for Ilkley are a range of walks in the
locality whilst sixteen of the nineteen events programmed for Haworth will be taking place at
277

the Keighley and Worth Valley Railway. This includes two steam gala weekends. There will
also be a Festival of Transport held at the Keighley Bus Museum.
The events in Bradford with the highest profile include:
• Bradford Mela: usually held over a weekend in July, the Bradford Mela has been
running since 1989 and attracts up to 140,000 people annually9. It provides an
opportunity for the local community to come together to share and celebrate their
culture. Events include markets, bazaars, international food stalls, art, crafts,
educational ‘zones’ and traditional and contemporary music, dance and theatre.
• Bradford International Film Festival: first festival was held in 1995. Showcases classic
films as well as works of new and up-coming European directors.
• Bite the Mango: initially conceived as a showcase for black and Asian filmmakers in
Britain, it now attracts cinema from Africa, South Asia, Central America and the Far
East. Showcases a mix of feature films, documentaries, shorts, masterclasses and
seminars.
• Bradford Animation Festival: UK’s longest running and biggest animation festival
which includes talks, workshops and the annual BAF awards celebrating best in new
animation from around the world.
• Bradford International Market: Held in 2004 and 2006 in the city centre with
stallholders from many countries and extensive entertainments. In 2006, the event is
estimated to have attracted 700,000 visitors from across the region and generated
revenue of over £9 million.
• Bradford Classic: Vintage vehicles on display in the city centre. In 2006 it was held in
Centenary Square, 120 cars were displayed and 6,000 people attended the show.
• There is increasing use of the Big Screen in Centenary Square to attract audiences
and people downtown for example for televised concerts and opera. The Council
owns the screen.
The Visit Bradford website, contains details of some forty four restaurants in and around
Bradford City Centre as well over twenty eateries in the surrounding Haworth and Ilkley
areas. The Bradford Curry Guide lists and reviews Asian restaurants from one to five stars
and has more than 60 entries
There are more restaurants serving Indian and Kashmiri food than any other style of cuisine.
Italian and Chinese restaurants are the second most prolific cuisine styles. Bradford was
crowned Curry Capital in 2004, a competition organised by Menu Magazine. In the most
recent competition, Bradford missed out on the title of UK Curry Capital but was awarded the
status of a Curry Super City along with six others in the UK.
278

There is one Michelin star-rated restaurant in the Bradford area: the Box Tree Restaurant in
Ilkley, which has one star.
There are 28 hotels with more than 10 rooms registered on the Visit Bradford website. Five
are 4*, thirteen are 3*, six are 2* and four are unclassified.
279

Occupancy rates have consistently been lower than the Yorkshire average.
The main prompt to further hotel investment in the city is likely to be growth of the
office/commercial sector and for hotels to be built (as seems to be happening) as part of
large development schemes.
The following table shows the number of proposed/emerging hotel projects to be located in
and around Bradford city centre. All these hotels are proposed as part of a series of
ambitious mixed-use development.
Table: proposed Hotel in and around Bradford city centre
Site Proposal Current status
National House
Sunbridge Road
Highpoint
Westgate
Bradford Channel
Limited
Citygate
Manchester Road
Yorkshire Water
George Street
Odeon Cinema
Prince's Way
Broadway
Southgate Project-
Jurys Inn
Car Park at
Salem Street
Carnation
Manchester Road
Former gasworks site
Thornton road
New build 145 bed 7 storey hotel
Mixed-use development including
a 96 bed hotel.
Mixed-use development- 5109
sqm (gross) hotel.
Hotel with conference facility.
Mixed-use scheme that will
include a 120 bed hotel with
conference facility.
Mixed-use scheme that will
include a 120 bed hotel.
Shopping centre with 220 bed
hotel
8-storey 200 bed hotel and
offices
120 bed hotel with office,
restaurant and apartments
Redevelopment of the site with a
125 bed hotel and other facilities.
Swimming pool with associated
facilities including a hotel.
Planning Permission Granted- Section
106 agreement under negotiation
Planning Permission Granted
Outline Planning Permission granted
Outline Planning Permission - Pending
Decision
Outline Planning Permission - Pending
Decision
Full Planning Application is expecting
soon- Public exhibition on revised
scheme design has been carried out.
Planning Permission Granted
Planning Permission Granted-
Construction ongoing
Pre-application Major Enquiry- pending
consideration
Pre-application major enquiries.
Feasibility study has been carried out.
280

A recent news report suggests that the number of hotel bedrooms in Bradford could increase
from 1,079 to more than 2,000 if the redevelopment proposals all come to fruition 80 . It is also
possible that there might be merit in trying to secure funding support towards a “landmark”
hotel, perhaps a city-spa, preferably in the Medieval heart of the city centre.
In addition to the hotels proposed in Bradford city centre, another is set to be built at Odsal
Top after a recent decision to grant planning permission for a hotel and restaurant on the site
of Wiltex House, at the junction of Halifax Road and Odsal Road.
8.8 Residential Market Profile
Bradford district consists of a range of settlements including the City of Bradford itself and
the smaller settlements of Shipley and Keighley. The north of the district is generally more
rural / semi-rural in character than the south. The estimated population in mid-2008 was
501,700, having grown by some 30,900 (6.5%) since 2001. The district experienced periods
of population decline during the mid 1980's and late 1990's, and was a net donor of
population throughout the 1990's.
However, strong natural population growth and considerable levels of in-migration to the
district more recently have served to cause very strong population and household growth.
Semi-detached housing, closely followed by terraced housing, forms the majority housing
type in the district. Detached housing forms a small component of the local housing offer.
Owner-occupation is a more dominant tenure than across the region as a whole – making up
70% of the total housing stock in the district.
Total dwelling stock as at April 2009 was 208,473 residential dwellings across Bradford
District. Over the past 10 years, total dwelling stock has increased 4.8% from a total of
198,958 in 1999 (Bradford SHMA, 2009).
The overall vacancy rate is around 7.0% which is much higher that the regional average of
4.1%. The vacancy rate is highest in the City Central sub-area (10%) and Keighley/Worth
Valley (7.1%) and lowest in Wharfedale (5.2%) (Table 4.1)
80 th
Telegraph and Argus (2008) Boom in hotel rooms welcomed [online]. Newsquest Media Group [cited 6 May
2009].
< http://www.thetelegraphandargus.co.uk/search/3641897.Boom_in_hotel_rooms_welcomed/>
281

Table: Vacancy rates by sub-area
Sub-areas Occupancy
Empty
New build and
not occupied
Occupied Total
Vacancy
Rate (%)
Bingley 1772 374 28428 30574 5.8
City Central 5480 388 48727 54595 10.0
City North East 1549 166 26927 28642 5.4
City South 1560 118 25386 27064 5.8
City West 1227 161 19706 21094 5.8
Keighley and Worth Valley 1921 103 25224 27248 7.1
Wharfedale 1006 141 18109 19256 5.2
Total 14515 1451 192507 208473 7.0
Source: CBMDC Council Tax 2009
New housing completions have averaged 1,187 per year since 1998, with 90% of these
being private sector completions.
Average house prices have risen broadly in line with regional averages, rising sharply over
the period 2001-2006, before falling slightly early in 2007. However, the gap between prices
in Bradford and the region has grown since 2001. Figure X below shows how house prices
across Bradford District have increased a staggering 298% over the period 1996 to 2008,
with average prices peaking at £129,950 during 2008. Figure XX summarises the latest
house price data for Bradford District which suggests that average prices have been falling
since reaching this peak and by May 2009, average prices had fallen by 23.5% to £103,293.
In comparison, regional prices have fallen by 21% since February 2008.
Figure: House price trends 1996 to 2008: Bradford, Leeds and regional data
Median House Prices (£)
140,000
120,000
100,000
80,000
60,000
40,000
Q1
1999
Source: Land Registry
Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1
2002
Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1
2005
Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1
2008
Bradford Leeds Yorkshire and Humber
282

Figure : Recent price trends: Bradford and Y&H Jan 08 – May 2009
Average Price (£)
150,000
140,000
130,000
120,000
110,000
100,000
Jan-08
Source: Land Registry
Mar-08
May-08
Map: Median house prices in 2008
Source: Land Registry
Jul-08
Sep-08
Nov-08
Jan-09
Bradford Y&H
Mar-09
May-09
283

Within Bradford District there are considerable variations in house prices. Map X summarises
median house prices across Bradford District, clearly illustrating highest prices in Wharfedale
(with prices in excess of £180,000); prices of between £150,000 and £180,000 in the
Bingley/Shipley area, with lowest prices in City Central and City South areas with median
prices of between £90,000 and £120,000. Within other suburban areas of Bradford City and
Keighley/Worth Valley, prices are around £120,000 to £150,00.
The increasing supply of flats (rising from 3% of all sales in 2001 to around 10% in 2006) is
likely to have impacted positively on local affordability for those able to take up this housing
offer. However, a shortage of affordable family accommodation is recognised as being a
significant issue at a local level. This is the case for inner-urban and rural areas alike.
There is a severe mismatch between supply (of smaller terraced homes) and demand (from
larger households) in some areas of Bradford with well established BME communities.
8.9 Key Facts
• Bradford is forecast to experience highest annual job growth in office sector within
Leeds City Region and significant growth in retail, leisure, manufacturing, industry
and public services over the coming years.
• Bradford’s office market is constrained by lack of both a defined central business
district, and available, good quality product, which will meet modern occupiers’
requirements. The market is however expected to be transformed in near future with
the completion of major mixed use schemes currently in the pipeline.
• The district’s major retail centres are poorly represented by national multiples with
below average volume and quality of retail outlets. There is however strong demand
for representation and it is clear that the Broadway will be a major catalyst for city
centre retail.
• Following several years of continued inward investment in retail property market, the
later half of 2007 marked the beginning of a clear downturn reflecting the turbulent
state of the current national/global economy. Despite this, the investor interest
remains in the city as evidenced by several recent investments across the district.
• Demand for residential property is strong. However, the market is currently
experiencing a slow down following several years of continued investment in this
sector. The developers are expected to take a more cautious approach to
development, and this may be necessary to ensure a correct influx of residential
accommodation in the market place.
• Industrial and warehousing market is relatively stable in Bradford compared to the
regional trend.
284

Source:
• Provision of leisure uses and services are considered to be adequate to serve the
district’s residents and tourists. There is however strong demand for improvement of
quality and expansion to the range of provisions.
• Although the District has the advantage of a range and depth of major tourist
attractions in Yorkshire, tourism industry is underachieving in terms of volume and
value of both day and staying visitors. The key challenge is to lift the appeal and
quality of some attractions and encourage people to make more visits locally. The
district’s attraction to the wider international visitors however is very promising.
• BMDC (2010) Bradford District Economic Assessment. Report Dated January 2010.
Bradford Council.
• Arup (2007) Bradford Employment Land Review. Report dated December 2007.
ARUP.
• Donaldsons (2007) Bradford Office Audit. Report dated January 2007. Donaldsons
LLP.
• Henderson. R (2006) Leeds City Region Development Programme- Appendix 2
(Financial and Business Services: Cluster and / or Catalyst). Report Dated August
2006. Leeds Metropolitan University.
• LCRDP (2006) Leeds City Region Development Programme- Appendix 5 (City
Region Economic Growth). Report Dated October 2006. Leeds City Council.
• Locum (2008) Bradford Destination Assessment. Report dated April 2008. Locum
Consulting.
• Locum (2008) Bradford Destination Strategy. Report dated November 2008. Locum
Consulting.
• Regeneris (2005) Bradford Positioning Statement. Report dated May 2006.
Regeneris Consulting.
• The Northern Way (2005) Leeds City Region Diagnostic. Report dated 2005. The
Northern Way.
• WYG (2008) Bradford District Retail and Leisure Study. Report Dated June 2008.
White Young Green.
• Yorkshire & Humber Strategic Housing Market Assessment - Bradford Housing
Market Area (2008)
285

9.0 TRANSPORT AND ACCESSIBILITY
This section assesses key aspects of transport in the Bradford district by discussing the key
opportunities and issues faced by the various transportation methods and identifying gaps in
the promotion of sustainable transport infrastructure. The section also outlines detail national,
regional and local transport policies which will mould the way these transport systems
develop in the years to come.
A range of documents, studies and reports has provided valuable information for this section
of the base line report. Some of the main documents are-
• Bradford District Transport Strategy 2006-2021(CBMDC, 2007)
• The West Yorkshire Local Transport Plan 2011-2026 (Wyltp, 2011)
• The LTP Bradford Local Implementation Plan 2011-2014 (BMDC, 2011)
• The West Yorkshire Urban Congestion Target Delivery Plan (DfT, 2009)
• Leeds City Region Transport Vision (Appendix 4 of LCRDP, 2006)
• Bradford Channel and Market NDFs Transport Report (Ove Arup & Partners Ltd, 2005)
• Bradford Positioning Statement (Regeneris, 2005)
9.1 Policy Context
The following section briefly describes the key aspects of some regional and local policies
and strategies in relation to their implication for the current and future transport development
in the district and the city centre.
Regional Transport Strategy
Transport affects business success, the quality of life and the environment. Transport allows
people to make social trips, access leisure facilities and go on holiday. Without transport and
movement, people social well being and quality of life would be dramatically affected.
Addressing traffic growth and congestion is a major issue for the RSS. A key aim of
integrated land use and transport planning policies is to reduce the need to travel and to
reduce the length and number of journeys, particularly those made by private car. The Plan
includes a number of complementary policies to attract more journeys by foot, bicycle and
onto public transport, encourage developments in locations well-served by public transport
and introduce measures aimed at achieving a shift away from increasing car dependency.
Policy T1 covers the specific contribution which transport planning makes to effect modal
shift, and Policy T2 (parking) also makes an important contribution. There are strong linkages
with Policy T3 (public transport), as significant increases in the capacity of the public
transport network will be needed if a step change in modal share is to be achieved.
Greater use of walking and cycling as modes of transport, particularly over short distances,
requires encouragement and support. The provision of well designed shared or where
necessary segregated, spaces for pedestrian and cycling should be supported in appropriate
286

circumstances, including the use of towpaths alongside inland waterways. These measures
should be complemented by using the planning system to require employers’ travel plans
and the provision of incentives to use public transport at new housing developments such as
free or subsidised travel cards.
Following the principles of PPG13, the Assembly has produced a set of parking standards to
be applied across the region reflecting the situation in Yorkshire and Humber. These
standards are based on the principle of specifying the upper limit of parking to be provided at
developments.
Park and Ride has the potential to complement local parking policies. There is scope for local
and strategic Park and Ride sites which will require cross boundary cooperation on
development, management and policy co-ordination. However the introduction of Park and
Ride should not lead to an increase in private car use in order to reach Park and Ride sites,
rather than making the complete journey by public transport. Neither should it alleviate urban
congestion at the expense of suburban/rural areas.
Strengthening public transport is essential for the delivery of the Plan and to address existing
problems of congestion and accessibility. The Public Transport framework set out in Policy
T3 is complemented by public transport accessibility criteria that define the levels of public
transport accessibility needed to support development across the Region. The overall aim of
the framework is to strengthen and clarify the integration of public transport and landuse.
Developments should be planned to enhance the viability of existing public transport, which
in some cases will mean making use of spare capacity and in others will mean increasing
patronage such that additional services become viable.
The Region will seek to improve access to all its main tourist destinations, particularly
Regional Cities and Sub Regional Cities and Towns by more sustainable modes of transport.
Tourism requires movement so the general presumption underlying the rest of the Plan and
RTS about reducing the need to travel cannot apply to transport related to tourism. However,
tourism still needs to become more sustainable and the policies on modal shift and public
transport in the RTS also apply to those on a tourist trip.
The West Yorkshire Local Transport Plan 2011-2026 and
Bradford Local Implementation Plan 2011-2014
The West Yorkshire Integrated Transport Authority (WYITA) is currently delivering on LTP2,
which runs from 2006 to 2011. LTP3 has been completed in March 2011 which consists of a
15 year strategy (2011-2026) and will be delivered through 3 year Local LTP Implementation
Plans. The first Bradford Local LTP Implementation Plan (2011-2014) has been approved in
June 2011 which, as well as setting out an overview of the transport issues in the District,
can be used when engaging local stakeholders and communities on transport issues. LTP3
thus provides greater flexibility for ITAs to determine the scope, nature and duration of its
strategy and implementation plans.
287

The third West Yorkshire Local Transport Plan Strategy 2011 – 2026 and its first
Implementation Plan 2011 – 2014 have been developed by the WYITA with support from all
five West Yorkshire Districts. Whilst the Department for Transport had previously been very
prescriptive about the content and performance management of previous LTPs, this is
relaxed for LTP3 giving more flexibility for the development of plans more suited to local
circumstances. The current LTP has been developed to deliver three key objectives:
• To make substantial progress towards a low carbon transport system for West
Yorkshire.
• To improve connectivity to support economic activity and growth across West
Yorkshire and the Leeds City Region
• To enhance the quality of life of people in West Yorkshire
The objectives will be delivered through four strategic approaches:
• Maintaining and managing Transport Assets
• Providing information on, and encouraging use of sustainable Transport Choices
• Improving Connectivity through the delivery of an integrated and reliable transport
system
• Making Enhancements to the transport system to provide greater capacity and better
performance
In Bradford the Council aim to achieve the vision and objectives through:
• supporting the delivery of new housing and jobs and helping to regenerate existing
local communities
• making it easier to access places, services and amenities by sustainable means
• creating high quality, distinctive, cohesive and safe environments
• reducing congestion and supporting greener fuel technologies
• serving the transport needs of the most vulnerable members of the community and
reducing the harmful effects of road traffic within neighbourhoods.
The Bradford Local Implementation Plan 2011-2014 lists all the schemes that are
programmed under the above strategic elements. See appendix A of the Bradford Local LTP
Implementation Plan 2011-2014 for detail.
Over the last 3 years the Council has also been preparing annual Transport Delivery Plans
setting out its priorities for delivery of transport related schemes which enabled the Council to
deliver transport measures in partnership with WYITA. Some major achievements under the
above plans include:
• Enforcement of access to the Bradford City Centre Pedestrianised Area has been
improved through the introduction of rise and fall bollards.
• Work has commenced on site on junction improvement schemes for Little Horton
Lane / Southfield Rd and Leeds Road/Laisterdyke.
288

• Phase 1 of the Living Street, which extends from the City Centre to Manchester
Road, is nearing completion.
• Continued delivery of casualty reduction and local improvement schemes through
partnership working with local communities and other stakeholders
Despite good progress in many programme areas there has been some delay in
implementing a number of schemes in the programme which has necessitated re-phasing.
This re-phasing is incorporated in the Council’s Capital Investment Plan on an on-going
basis.
Other major integrated transport capital investment in Bradford, funded through the West
Yorkshire Strategic Programme of Schemes, is progressing as follows:
Bradford City Links – supporting highways measures for City Park
This scheme is nearing completion - includes a bus only right turn at the junction of Little
Horton Lane and Princes Way and a new pedestrian crossing on Princes Way.
Saltaire Improvements – following the successful outcome of an innovative stakeholder
involvement process a detailed design work has now commenced and work on the scheme
is scheduled to be complete by the end of 2013.
Low Moor Rail Station
A rail engineering consultant for this scheme has now been appointed and the new station
should be operational by 2013/2014. It is unlikely that this scheme could be accelerated due
to the complexities involved in delivering rail related schemes and the rail industry's approval
procedures.
Traffic Light Priority for Buses
This West Yorkshire wide scheme will include the introduction of equipment to provide bus
detection for up to 60 sites in Bradford. This will give priority to late running buses at traffic
signals. It is envisaged that 5 of these sites will be implemented by the end of the current
financial year together with an upgrade to the Urban Traffic Control system to work with the
new detection equipment.
Other Considerations:
Strategic Road Network- Highway Agency’s previous modelling work has identified a need
for a number of improvements to junctions on the SRN in and close to Bradford District to
cater for traffic growth generated by proposed developments emerging from the LDF process
in all of the Districts of West Yorkshire. Issues relating to the existing peak period congestion
on the M62 eastbound between Junctions 24 (Ainley Top) and 27 (Gildersome) and
westbound between Junctions 28 (Tingley) and 26 (Chain Bar) have been addressed by the
Managed Motorway and Hard Shoulder Running scheme that is expected to commence by
2015. The objectives of this scheme are to increase capacity for strategic traffic and to
relieve existing traffic delays. Although the M62 motorway does not enter Bradford District,
the scheme will address congestion problems that have an adverse effect on traffic
movement to and from Bradford.
289

Apperley Bridge Rail Station- The provision of a new station at Apperley Bridge is included in
a Leeds City Region Rail Growth Package which has been submitted to the Department for
Transport for approval. As part of the Comprehensive Spending Review the Department
resolved that this Package would be included in the pot of 22 schemes across the country
where promoters would be asked to provide more information. A decision would then be
made by the Department on which schemes would be supported. This decision is expected
by the end of 2011.
Caldervale Line- Bradford Council is working with officers from Leeds, Calderdale and
Rochdale Councils, as well as Metro, the Greater Manchester Transport Executive, Network
Rail and Northern Rail, to identify proposals that would improve the operation of, and journey
times on, the Caldervale line. Any viable proposal could be subject of a future bid for funding
in recognition of the importance of the line to the Districts through which it passes and it’s
potential to improve the economy of the Leeds and Manchester City Regions
Local Development Framework (LDF)
The district’s Unitary Development Plan adopted in 2005 was drafted having particular regard
to the transport implications of the district’s development requirements, especially in the
hierarchy of settlements and the location and phasing of sites for housing. The emergence of
regeneration master plans for Airedale, Bradford city centre, Manningham and the Canal
Road corridor post date the UDP. They promote strategic development opportunities,
intensification of development and make specific proposals for new elements in both the
highway and public transport systems.
The replacement of the UDP by new Development Plan Documents will address the
comprehensiveness of the transport system and its integral relationship with district’s spatial
development. A new Core Strategy is being prepared which will determine any changes to
the role of settlements and whether any new strategic land allocations (as suggested in the
master plans) are needed. Area Action Plans are being prepared for the city centre and the
Shipley and Canal Road Corridor which will incorporate proposals for new transport
infrastructure.
City Centre Masterplan and the NDFs
The implications of the Bradford Centre Regeneration Masterplan in terms of changes and
intensification of land use for the overall transport network are considerable. The Masterplan,
through its Neighbourhood Development Frameworks, promotes a package of public
transport, parking and pedestrian projects. It identifies also a significant increase in the levels
of residential, retail and commercial activity in the city centre. While individual elements of
these proposals will be considered as they are brought forward, a viable and comprehensive
transport system in the city centre needs to be maintained for all users including service and
public transport access.
This city centre’s role as the district’s meeting place demands improvement in the quantity
and quality of public realm to create a more pedestrian friendly environment. This will be
290

supportive of the greater activity through which the Masterplan promotes the transformation
of the city centre.
Bradford District Transport Strategy 2006-2021
This District Transport Strategy outlines the key gaps that the district faces in both quantity
and quality of its transport network and makes the case for a ‘step-change’ in investment in
the district as part of a comprehensive approach to meeting the transport needs of business,
residents and visitors.
The report also highlights the importance of the urban areas to function for its growing
businesses and residential population. Investment in the strategic road network is expected
to address this in part but a particular issue is the quality of the Outer Ring Road and in
particular its significant junctions with major radial routes in the city. The outer ring road is
also seen as a barrier for public transport routes into the city centre. Schemes have been
developed for some junctions to improve public transport, safety and congestion but the
complexity of the orbital routes, particularly on the west and north of the city, requires
resolution and funding.
Whilst the pattern of employment areas is changing, many jobs will be provided within the
district and it is important that the local transport system, in essence the bus, is capable of
allowing workforce to access them. The anticipated growth in city centre employment will
require that the bus network can make a substantial contribution to t commuting. Additionally,
some of the larger employment sites and traditional employment areas will be redeveloped
for mixed or other uses which may have transport impacts, such as on peak travel and on
existing public transport networks.
One of the other most challenging issues is reduction of through traffic on Godwin Street and
Westgate which must be resolved to be able to implement the Masterplan transport
aspirations in their entirety. This cannot be achieved without the creation of a replacement
highway route. This would normally be a major scheme for Local Transport funding but
current Department for Transport assessment methods are unlikely to be supportive. Other
funding sources may be necessary.
9.2 Travel and Transport in Bradford District
The following part of the section will outline a general overview of the key dimensions of
travel and transport in Bradford District.
9.2.1 General traffic trend
The use of the road system in Bradford District is dominated by private vehicles. These form
some 80% of the vehicles on the road and carry around 70-75% of the travelling population.
The journeys involved have a wide range of origins and destinations; they also have a wide
range of journey purposes, from leisure to commuting. Other journeys occurring as part of
291

the working process involving either travelling as part of the working procedure or the
transfer of goods and equipment are an essential element of the district’s business activity. 81
Between 1979 and 1993 all day traffic in Bradford District increased significantly (by 45%);
since then growth has levelled off - with an increase of only 1.3% between 1993 and 2005.
Peak traffic levels within Bradford have remained fairly static over the last twelve years, with
flows in 2005 slightly lower than those recorded in 1993. Census data, however, indicates
significantly increased journey lengths for commuters between 1991 and 2001, with Bradford
workers travelling an average 21% greater distances over that period. Government forecasts
are for an increase in car journeys of 12% in Bradford District between 2005 and 2015. 82
A more recent study has also highlighted that total vehicle traffic in Bradford has continued to
increase, albeit at a much slower rate than the national and regional trend (8.7% compared
to 13.5% and 11.4% respectively). Vehicle traffic is by far the highest in Leeds within the City
Region with 6.4 billion km travelled per year and the greatest rise in traffic volume was in
Barnsley with a 22.5% percentage increase between 1998 and 2007. 83
Table: Total Vehicle Traffic (billion km per year) by Local Authority 1998-2007 (HL 22)
Trend data on traffic volumes within the Bradford urban areas (measured from the Bradford
Monitoring Cordon) indicates that inbound peak period (0700-1000) traffic levels are less
now than they were ten years ago. Traffic volumes fell between 2001 and 2007 (despite a
rise between 2003 and 2005). The flows in 2007 were still some 5% lower than in 2001 and
3% below the 1997 level. For the shorter peak period (0800-0900), inbound flows in 2007
were some 8.0% below the 1997 level.
Modal share data from the Monitoring Cordon indicates increased rail patronage (up 13%)
and a slight increase in bus use (up 3%) since 2005 in the inbound morning peak.
81 Bradford District Transport Strategy (CBMDC, 2007)
82 A Picture of the District (Report on the State of the District produced by CBMDC Research and
Consultation Service 2006 and 2007 updates)
83 Progress in Leeds City Region (LCR Secretariat and Yorkshire Future, 2009)
292

Forecast increases in employment for Bradford District, however, could potentially increase
peak period traffic across the cordon by as much as 8% between 2005 and 2011. The LTP
target to restrict this to 3% or less assumes that growth will be limited by a significant
expansion in City Centre living, accompanied by the effects of increased rail use and car
sharing (under the Liftshare scheme).
The Bradford SATURN model shows that the person journey times on the three Bradford
congestion routes (A647 Leeds Road, A650 Aire Valley Road and Little Horton Lane) would
rise by around 5% which is well within the overall West Yorkshire target of 7%. 84
9.2.2 Commuting Patterns
The 2001 Census revealed important information about how and where people travelled to
work in the district. According to origin-destination data from the 2001 census:
• Of Bradford’s 191,200 employed residents:
- 78% also work in Bradford
- 22% commute outside the district to work
• Of 194,700 people who work within Bradford District:
- 77% are Bradford residents
- 23% are in-commuters
• 41,400 people who live in Bradford commute outside the district to work
- Over half of these commuters work in Leeds
- 80% of the trips made out of the District are by car
- Over 9% are made by train
• 44,900 people who live elsewhere commute into the District to work
- Over a third of these people come from Leeds
- A further 20% come from Kirklees, and 16% from Calderdale
- Nearly 86% of the trips into the District are made by car
- Only 3% of commuters into Bradford arrive by train
• Around 3,500 more people commute into the District than commute out. 85
84 West Yorkshire Congestion Target Delivery Plan (2009)
85 Recent economic forecasting by WM Enterprise for Inputs into the Bradford Economic Strategy
(2007) showed that since the 2001 census there is likely to have been a shift from a net import of
labour to a larger net export – with more people commuting out than commute in. This shift is driven
by the growth in population in Bradford compared to the increase in job opportunities inside and
outside the district.
293

Table: Commuting Counts in and out of West Yorkshire Districts
• Bradford and Leeds is the heaviest corridor between West Yorkshire districts and
the most balanced.
• 15% of people who work in Bradford district do so in the city centre (29,000 approx)
– of these one third travels from outside the district.
• Between 1991 and 2001 the average distance travelled to work by people working
in the district increased by 21% to 8.5km, slightly below the West Yorkshire figure of
25%
• 23% of people who work in Bradford district travel less than 2km to work, of these
half travel by car.
• The proportion of Bradford residents travelling to work by car rose by 6% between
1991 and 2001 compared with a West Yorkshire figure of 3%.
Commuting within the LCR
There are significant movements of commuters between districts within west Yorkshire, and
other LCR districts, with the highest two-way flow between Leeds and Bradford.
There is a net inward flow of commuter into Bradford from all surrounding districts except
Leeds, which receives a net gain of 6,000 Bradford commuters.
294

Figure: Largest Commuting Flows within Leeds City Region (counts over 400 shown)
Commuting by mode of travel
Car is the dominant mode of transport for people travelling to work, accounting for 63% of all
trips to work made by Bradford’s employed residents – higher than the regional average. 80% of
out-commuters and 86% of in-commuters travel by car. Car travel accounts for 59% of trips by
people living and working within Bradford, where a higher proportion of trips to work are made
by bus, and on foot.
Travel by train is significant for commuting trips out of the District, with 9% of trips out being
made by train. A lower proportion of trips into Bradford (3%) are by train.
9.2.3 Car ownership
Between 1991 and 2001, the total number of cars owned in Bradford rose by 28% (the
national figure was 23%). The proportion of households with no car fell from 41% to 33%,
over the same period. The 2001 figure for England and Wales is 27%. Forecasts for car
ownership show that this trend is set to continue - between 2001 and 2015 car ownership is
set to rise by 28% in Bradford compared with a national forecast of around 23%.
Table : Car ownership in Bradford District-1
H’hlds with no cars or
vans
H’hlds with one car
or van
Bradford District- no 58592 79003 42651
Bradford District- % 32.3 43.9 23.8
Source: Census 2001
H’hlds with two or
more cars or vans
295

Table : Car ownership in Bradford District-2
% of H’hlds with no
cars or vans
Cars or vans per
H’hlds
England and Wales 26.8 1.11
West Yorkshire 32.2 0.98
Bradford District 32.3 0.97 309
Source: Census 2001
9.2.4 Congestion
Rank (out of 378
LAs)
Congestion in Bradford is not a district wide problem though there are hot spots, especially at
peak times. Whilst there is little change recorded at particular periods it is clear that public
perception believes there to be increasing congestion. This is most likely manifested in
lengthening of peak periods as drivers seek to avoid congestion. Studies included in the LTP
reveal that whilst many of the key junctions and the corridors leading to them are congested
in the morning peak period, a substantial number are remaining so throughout the inter-peak
period, especially on the outer ring road, in the city centre and Airedale. (Congestion is
defined as traffic speeds less than 70% of speed limit.) This is a concern for those journeys
involving either travelling as part of the working procedure or the transfer of goods and
equipment.
The Bradford District Transport Study 86 has identified eight major radial routes to and from
central Bradford as being the most important transport corridors within the district. Of those
eight radial routes, three were identified in the West Yorkshire Local Transport Plan as
having regional significance and designated ‘Congestion Corridors’.
The radial routes and congestion corridors within the Bradford district are:
1: A647 Leeds Road (Congestion Corridor);
2: A650 Wakefield Road;
3: A641 Manchester Road (Congestion Corridor is Little Horton Lane);
4: A647 Great Horton Road;
5: B6145 Thornton Road;
6: A650 Aire Valley Road (Congestion Corridor);
7: A6037 Canal Road;
8: A658 Harrogate Road.
The recent update of the West Yorkshire Urban Congestion Target Delivery Plan (UCTDP)
has highlighted the current levels of congestions on these 3 Bradford congestion corridors
which are among the 13 specifically chosen routes across the region to tackle congestion.
The average journey time for vehicles on A650 Mannigham Lane is 5 mins/mile, equating an
average speed of just 12mph, although that speed falls to an even lower level during peak
periods. The average journey time on A647 Leeds Road is 4min 30 seconds and 3min 45
seconds on Little Horton Lane.
86 The Bradford District Transport Study (Interim report by Steer Davies Gleave, 2009)
296

The Bradford SATURN model shows that the person journey times on the three Bradford
congestion routes would rise by around 5% which is well within the overall West Yorkshire
target of 7%. 87
In the future, major regeneration projects, particularly in the city centre itself are likely to lead
to increased traffic movements on inner and outer ring roads. Employment growth in the
M606 corridor is likely to lead to increased congestion on the M606-A6177-A650 and the
A650. Future growth in the numbers of jobs and housing in the Airedale Corridor will put
increased pressure on road and rail capacity in the Aire Valley where the topography
concentrates local movements and through movements to North Yorkshire.
9.2.5 Environmental Issues
Road traffic is the main source of air-borne pollution in Bradford. The Council has already
established 4 Air Quality Management Areas in localities where levels of Nitrogen Oxide
were found to be higher than acceptable. The location of all the AQMAs identified experience
significant levels of traffic congestion. The large volume and varied types of vehicular traffics
are the major sources of this pollutant at those sites. Measures to try and improve air quality
in these locations are being considered. (See Environment chapter for further consideration
of air quality matters.)
It is possible to reduce the impact of transport on the environment, especially with regard to
its effect on air quality and its contribution to climate change by reducing the length and
number of car journeys and encouraging the use of alternative modes of transport.
There are some locations where Travel Plans can have an impact on car usage, for example,
major employers, schools and developments generating significant amounts of travel.
Bradford Carshare scheme is now well established, with 600 members who have saved over
50 tonnes of CO2. The Bradford Council Walking Bus scheme now runs at seven schools in
the district - Aire View Infants in Silsden, Eldwick Primary in Bingley, All Saints School in
Ilkley, Parkwood School in Keighley, Wibsey School in Wibsey, St Walburga's in Shipley and
Keelham Primary in Den-holme, which has significantly reduced the number of car trips to
and from schools and helped children learn about traffic and road safety issues. 88 Moreover,
over 30 employers in Bradford have now signed up to the West Yorkshire Travel Plan
network which demonstrates that they are committed to implementing travel plan measures
in their organisations.
Sustainability
Over the past decade the environmental impacts of traffic and transport schemes have been
presented as an issue for sustainability. These impacts, coupled with congestion, have lead
to investigation and introduction of demand management measures. The concerns are now
part of the wider ‘climate change’ concerns and carbon reduction. Whilst demand
management will be important to tackle congestion, it is likely that alternative technology may
87 West Yorkshire Congestion Target Delivery Plan (2009)
88 http://www.thetelegraphandargus.co.uk/news/2260696.children_rank_high_in_walking_to_school/
297

in due course offer alternatives to the carbon content of current vehicle fuels. However,
maintenance of the transport network has its own carbon footprint through electricity usage,
especially for street lighting and traffic signals. Investment in low energy use therefore will
become increasingly significant for investment programmes.
Greenways
A system of greenways is also being developed to encourage biodiversity and enable people
to become more active and get around the District without having to use a car. The initial
strategic routes will be based around the following:
- The Sustrans routes on the canal towpath connecting Shipley to Leeds and Shipley to
Keighley with links to the town centres of Shipley, Bingley and Keighley.
- The planned route along the side of the new canal spur from Shipley to Forster
Square in Bradford and its extension through Bowling to link with the Spen Valley
Greenway.
- The planned Worth Way route linking Haworth to Keighley.
- The Great Northern Trail linking Queensbury to Denholme.
9.3 Accessibility and connectivity
In past centuries Bradford's location in Bradfordale made communications difficult, except
from the north. Nonetheless, Bradford is now well-served by transport systems. Bradford was
first connected to the developing turnpike network in 1734, when the first Yorkshire turnpike
was built between Manchester and Leeds via Halifax and Bradford. In 1740, the Selby to
Halifax road was constructed through Leeds and Bradford. Several more local and longdistance
roads were built through the rest of the century.
Today Bradford lies on several trunk roads:
• The A647 to Leeds
• The A650 between Wakefield and Keighley
• The A658 to Harrogate
• The A6036 to Halifax
The M606, a spur off the M62 motorway, connects Bradford with the national motorway
network. Although it was originally planned to go directly into the city centre, this has never
been built and is unlikely now ever to be, as a hotel has been built across the proposed route
298

Bradford also has a relatively
competitive position in terms
of its connectivity to wider
destinations. Junction 26 of
the major east-west M62
artery lies only three miles
from the city centre,
connected directly by the
M606. Rail access is good,
with direct services taking
around 20 minutes and
departing about 7 times per
hour. There are also good
direct services down the Aire
Valley to Leeds (and the
centre of Bradford) and from
Ilkley to Leeds. Frequent,
direct rail links are also
available to Manchester and
Map: Highways and Motorways serving Bradford
York. Air links to the district are provided by Leeds Bradford Airport, which lies around six
miles north-east of the city centre.
A key planning objective of the current national and local planning policies is to ensure that
jobs, shopping, leisure facilities and services are accessible by public transport, cycling and
walking. This is also particularly important in terms of social inclusion for people without
access to a car. However, one of the main transport issues for Bradford is the extent to which
developments that attract large numbers of people should be allowed in areas of poor public
transport accessibility. These are normally employment sites where redevelopment is
proposed for either more intensive employment use or for mixed use; for example in the
M606 corridor, which is accessible mainly by car. The impact may be mitigated to some
extent through the effective use of ‘Travel Plan’ initiatives that offer people and businesses a
choice of travel.
There are key services, employment and areas in Bradford, which are poorly served by
public transport, cycling and walking. These include employment sites such as East Bowling
in the M606 corridor as mentioned above, some housing sites in Bingley and Thornton and
areas on the Outer Ring Road. Bradford Royal Infirmary for instance though served by buses
from Bradford City Centre, is poorly accessed by direct bus services from adjacent
residential areas, and areas to the north of the district such as Shipley and Baildon.
9.4 Public Transport
Bus patronage in West Yorkshire has been declining for many years, however rail usage
continues to rise. The number of rail journeys increased by 43% between 1999/2000 and
2005/06 to more than 23 million per year.
299

The number of bus passengers declined by 3% between 1999/2000and 2005/06 to 194.8
million journeys per year through West Yorkshire, although the introduction of specific
initiatives has led to an increase in passengers – the Manchester Road Quality Bus has seen
an increase in 9% of passengers since it was introduced in 2001. 89
Detail assessment of the major public transport services are discussed below-
9.4.1 Train Services
There are 67 MetroTrain stations in West Yorkshire and Bradford is connected to all of them
through a mix of long-distance and local services operating on 12 different metro train lines.
The city is centrally served by Bradford Interchange to the south of the city centre and by
Forster Square to the north. There are 12 other trains stations located within the boundary of
the district and served by a range of local and national services.
MetroTrain stations in Bradford District are:
1. Baildon
2. Ben Rhydding
3. Bingley
4. Bradford Forster Square
5. Bradford Interchange
6. Burley-in-Wharfedale
7. Crossflatts
8. Frizinghall
9. Ilkley
10. Keighley
11. Menston
12. Saltaire
13. Shipley
14. Steeton and Silsden
Table : Journey Times and Frequency to Metro Stations from Bradford
Location
Journey Time (1-way)
1
Frequency (daytime)
New Pudsey 8 minutes 4 tph
Shipley 9 minutes 2 tph
Baildon 14 minutes 2 tph
Halifax 14 minutes 4 tph
Bingley 16 minutes 2 tph
Guiseley 19 minutes 2 tph
Leeds
20 minutes
4 tph to Interchange
(via Caldervale line)
89 A Picture of the District (Report on the State of the District produced by CBMDC Research and
Consultation Service 2006 and 2007 updates)
300

Keighley 23 minutes
4 tph to Forster Square
(via Airedale & Wharfdale lines)
2 tph
Brighouse 26 minutes 1 tph
Hebden Bridge 30 minutes 2 tph
Ilkley 33 minutes 2 tph
Morley
1 change 47 minutes 1 tph Morley - Leeds
4 tph Leeds - Bradford
Dewsbury
1 change 48 minutes 1 tph Deswbury - Leeds
4 tph Leeds - Bradford
Horsforth
1 change 50 minutes 2 tph Horsforth - Leeds
4 tph Leeds - Bradford
Wakefield
(Westgate)
1 change 50 minutes
2 tph Wakefield Westgate –Leeds
4 tph Leeds - Bradford
1 Journey times taken from National Rail enquiries journey planner to arrive 0900 with least changes
possible.
Description of some of the major train stations and their services are presented below:
Bradford Interchange
Bradford Interchange is on the Caldervale Line and is one of the two railway stations serving
the city of Bradford. The other station is, as mentioned above, Forster Square, ten minutes'
walk away.
During Monday to Saturday daytimes, services run every 15 minutes between the
Interchange and Leeds, and hourly onwards to York and Selby respectively. On evenings
and Sundays there is a half-hourly service to Leeds and usually hourly to York.
In the other direction there is a train every 15 minutes to Halifax with two trains an hour
continuing to Manchester Victoria (one limited stop, the other serving all stations to
Rochdale), one to Blackpool North and one to Wakefield Westgate via Huddersfield where
customers can change for Sheffield and Manchester Airport.
Sundays there is a half-hourly service to Halifax with an hourly service on to Manchester
Victoria and one train an hour alternates between Blackpool North and Huddersfield.
Due to the geography of Bradford, the station was built as a terminus. Trains have to reverse
out of the station, and drivers have to change to the other end of the train.
Recently it has been announced that direct rail services between Bradford Interchange and
London are set to return for the first time in more than a decade. Grand Central Railway - an
open-access company that operates services between London and Sunderland, had
proposed to run services into Bradford Interchange using the East Coast Main Line from
Kings Cross via Halifax, Brighouse, Wakefield Kirgate, Pontefract Monkhill and Doncaster
301

under the name the ‘West Riding Service’. The Office of Rail Regulation (ORR) has granted
them permission to run three return services a day between the Interchange and Kings Cross
and it is scheduled to start from December 13, 2009 using 125mph streamlined trains.
Bradford Forster Square
Trains from Bradford Forster Square are operated by Northern Rail and National Express
East Coast. Most trains are run by Northern Rail; these are towards Leeds (on the Leeds-
Bradford Line), Skipton (on the Airedale Line) and Ilkley (on the Wharfedale Line). During
Monday to Saturday daytimes, trains operate every 30 minutes on each route. During the
evenings, there are trains every hour to each of Skipton and Ilkley; on Sundays these run
every two hours. At these times there are no trains to Leeds; passengers have to change at
Shipley.
National Express East Coast operates around three services per day via Leeds and the East
Coast Main Line to London Kings Cross.
Shipley
Train services are mostly commuter services between Leeds and Bradford, and from the
Airedale Line and the Wharfedale Line into Leeds and Bradford.
During Monday to Saturday daytimes, these operate every 30 minutes on each of the
following routes:
• Leeds-Bradford Forster Square;
• Leeds-Skipton;
• Bradford Forster Square-Skipton;
• Bradford Forster Square-Ilkley.
In Evenings a half hourly service is maintained between Leeds and Skipton. Ilkley and
Skipton to Bradford are hourly. There is no direct service between Leeds and Bradford but a
shuttle from Shipley to Bradford connects with Leeds departures. On Sundays, Ilkley/Skipton
- Bradford is every 2 hours with Skipton and Bradford to Leeds every hour.
There are also a number of trains each day from Leeds to Carlisle (six each way weekdays,
seven on Saturdays and three on Sundays) and Morecambe (four on weekdays, two or four
on Sundays; both routes operated by Northern Rail), and from Bradford Forster Square to
London King's Cross (via Leeds), operated by NXEC.
Keighley
The station is located on the Airedale Line and managed by Northern Rail, who operate most
of the passenger trains serving it. Electric trains operate frequently from Keighley towards
Bradford Forster Square, Leeds and Skipton. Longer distance trains on the Leeds to
Morecambe Line and Settle to Carlisle Line also call here.
302

Keighley is also the northern terminus of the Keighley and Worth Valley Railway. This is a
heritage branch-line railway run by volunteers that was originally built by the Midland Railway
and opened in 1867. Closed to passenger traffic in 1962, it was reopened by the K&WVR
Preservation Society six years later and is now a popular tourist attraction.
There is a half-hourly service to both Leeds and Bradford Forster Square and four trains an
hour on to Skipton during Monday to Saturday daytime. The evening frequency is hourly to
Bradford and half hourly to Leeds, with three trains per hour to Skipton. On Sundays there is
an hourly service to Leeds and a two-hourly service to Bradford with two or three trains per
hour to Skipton. There is usually one longer distance train per hour to either Carlisle or
Morecambe.
In addition to the above, National Express East Coast operate one train daily to London
King's Cross, via Leeds and the East Coast Main Line.
The Keighley and Worth Valley service runs daily during the summer and at weekends in
other seasons.
Figure: Annual rail passenger usage of Bradford Stations*
Millions
3
2.5
2
1.5
1
0.5
0
Bradford
Interchange
Annual rail passenger usage
Bradford
Forster
Square
Shipley Keighley Ilkley
2004/05 2005/06 2006/07
* Annual passenger usage based on sales of tickets in stated financial year(s) which end
or originate at Bradford Interchange from Office of Rail Regulation statistics.
Rail is expected to continue to be the dominant public transport mode in those corridors
where it exists, notably Airedale. Airedale and Wharfedale services are the busiest in the
West Yorkshire network as are Shipley and the two Bradford stations. However,
overcrowding on some peak services into both Bradford city centre stations is still an issue
and needs to be addressed. Whilst the high standard of the Forster Square service is
recognised, services to the south of the city are of poor quality in terms of both rolling stock
and infrastructure provision and considerable investment is needed.
303

The immediate investment priorities for the local network are set out in Metro’s Rail Plan 6.
This identifies two of the four proposed new stations as being in Bradford district with Low
Moor the most ready to introduce. This does not include the Manningham station proposed in
the Masterplan. The logic for this station is strong as part of a recasting of Bradford Forster
Square – Leeds services which will also serve a new station in north Bradford at Apperley
Bridge.
9.4.2 Bus and Coach Services
First Group presently run the majority of the local bus network around Bradford, including the
high-frequency core ‘Overground’ network, and services to Leeds, Halifax and Huddersfield.
Other services are run by:
• Arriva – operate longer distance services to Dewsbury, Wakefield and Sheffield
• Keighley and District Travel – operate the local Keighley network including a number
of Bradford connections
• Black Prince Buses – operate a number of services to Leeds.
High frequency bus networks have been developed in Bradford and Keighley and there has
been investment made by operators in high quality corridors such as the Keighley-Bradford
662 route. A ‘guided bus’ corridor has also been developed on Manchester Road (A640)
which has retained patronage levels.
Table: Major bus stations in Bradford.
Description :
List of Main
Operators using
this bus station :
Bradford
Interchange
29 Drive-In Reverse
Out stands. 1 set
down only stand.
Upper and lower
concourse. On same
site as Bradford
Interchange railway
station.
Arriva, First, Halifax
Joint Committee,
TLC Travel,
Transdev Keighley
and District, National
Express
Keighley Bus
Station
17 stand Drive-In
Reverse-Out bus
station with central
passenger
concourse.
Jacksons, Transdev
Burnley and Pendle,
Transdev Keighley
and District, Tyrer
Tours
Ilkley Bus
Station
3 bus shelters
surrounding a
layover and car
parking area.
Next to Ilkley rail
station.
First, Transdev
Keighley and
District, Pride of
the Dales.
Daily Footfall : 25,803 17,324 2,288 5,518
Recent major
improvement
2001 Rebuilt in 2002 Rebuilt in 1998
Staffed: Yes Yes No No
Shipley Market
Place
Drive through bus
point on public
highway (Market
Square) - 9
stands.
First, Transdev
Keighley and
District, National
Express
Complete
upgrading
CCTV Coverage: Yes Yes Yes Yeas
304

Facilities:
Maintained by
Metro:
* Facility not provided by Metro
Baby Changing
Facilities, Cafe*,
Disabled Persons
Toilet, Escalators,
Information Help
Point, Lifts,
Newsagent*, Photo
Booths, Toilets,
Travel Centre,
Baby Changing
Facilities, Cash
Machines, Disabled
Toilets, Newsagent,
Photo Booths,
Toilets, Travel
Centre*, Telephones.
Real Time
Information,
Information Help
Point,
Newsagent,
Telephones,
Travel Centre
Yes Yes Yes Yes
Cafe*, Disabled
Toilet*,
Newsagents*,
Telephones,
Toilets*
The MetroConnect (737 and 747) services connect the city to Leeds Bradford International
Airport and call at both the Interchange and Forster Square stations. MetroConnect MC3
provides services in Little Horton area connecting Smiddles Lane - Great Horton - Little
Horton - West Bowling.
AccessBus, a dial-a-ride bus service operated by the Metro, provides door-to-door local
transport to people who are unable to use conventional bus services. The service is free of
charge to residents of Bradford and operates between:
• 9am and 5.30pm Monday to Saturday
• 9am - 5pm on Sunday.
• A limited evening service is available to groups of 5 or more.
Due to the very high demand for the service travel is restricted to local journeys only. Most
trips are for shopping purposes, such as to the local supermarket or shopping centre, but
also provides a limited number of journeys for social purposes, e.g. to the local community
centres.
Bus services in Bradford are very well used across the district and is rated one of the top
services within West Yorkshire. The outcome of a recent public opinion surveys undertaken
earlier in 2008 by independent researchers on behalf of Metro has highlighted that 73% of
Bradford respondents who used local bus services were satisfied with those services (BVPI
103). This was significantly higher than the West Yorkshire average of 67% and was the
highest level of satisfaction of the five districts. Furthermore, 82% of Bradford respondents
who used local bus services were satisfied with local provision of public transport information
(BVPI 104). Again this was the highest level of satisfaction within West Yorkshire.
Satisfaction levels relating to the safety, cleanliness and reliability were also found to be
higher in Bradford than the West Yorkshire average and these have increased compared to
previous years.
Recently the council has adopted a ‘Bus Action Plan 2008-11’ in partnership with the Metro,
West Yorkshire Police and bus operators First, Keighley & District Travel and Arriva which
recognises the comparatively positive performances of the district’s bus services and
identified a number of specific areas where further measures is needed to improve the
305

services including congestion and punctuality, effective interchange and bus stop
infrastructure and better accessibility.
There is also a Freecitybus service funded by Bradford Council and Metro that run every ten
minutes from 7am to 7pm Monday to Friday and 8am to 5:30pm on Saturdays covering the
city centre, the university and the college campus.
Figure: City Centre Free Bus Route
The service was initially launched on 29 September 2008 with a six month trial ending on 28
March 2009. At the end of the trial period a survey work was undertaken on the service
which indicated that the service was exceeding all of its predetermined targets in terms of
patronage, modal shift, trip generation, mobility and accessibility. Therefore long term
funding for the service was secured from the council and its partners and it has become a
permanent transport facility in the city centre.
National Express operates long distance coach services from Bradford Interchange.
Coaches run from their own bays in the travel interchange to many towns and cities within
the UK and also providing linking services between Leeds-Bradford International and other
major Airports. The Euroline, also operated by the National Express, connects to over 500
European destinations. A network of 32 independent coach companies provides services to
destinations covering the whole of Continental Europe, plus other destinations such as
Morocco.
The New Bharat Coaches, based in Southall, also runs a service to and from the Bradford
Interchange once everyday via Leicester and Derby.
In March 2009, the Stagecoach group, in partnership with East Midland Trains, has also
introduced a new budget integrated bus and rail services connecting Bradford with London St
Pancras station. The Megabusplus services depart from the bus stop located on Mayo Ave
outside the Morrisons superstore.
9.4.3 Taxis
'Hackney Carriage' is the licensed Taxi services in Bradford. The Council has the right to
regulate the number of Hackney Carriage licences it issues, or may decide to deregulate.
306

Currently there are 224 Hackney Carriage taxis in Bradford and the council will review the
situation in 2009.
Hackney Carriage fares are regulated by the Council. All Hackney Carriage vehicles are
inspected at least once per annum to a standard determined by the Council.
Private Hire Vehicles cannot ply for hire in the street or at taxi ranks. Journeys must be prebooked,
normally by phone or in person at a booking office. Fares for private hire vehicles
are not regulated by the Council - the cost of a journey will normally be based on a rate per
mile or should be agreed with the company before the journey.
Private Hire vehicles must be licensed by the Council.
9.5 Air Travel
The city is served by both Leeds Bradford International Airport (LBIA), 6 miles (9.7 km) to the
north east of the city, and Manchester International Airport located 50 miles (80 km) away at
Ringway in the City of Manchester.
By the number of passengers handled, Leeds Bradford is the 16th busiest in the UK and
Yorkshire's largest. There has been rapid expansion to the airport in recent years and direct
flights are now available to over 70 business and leisure destinations (July 2009). Around
3 million passengers used the airport in 2006. It is the home base of economy Airline
Jet2.com, voted Best European Short Haul Airline 2006.
Figure: Passenger Numbers at LBIA 1997-2008
Source: UK Airport Statistics 2008-Annual
Recently low cost airline Ryanair has announced that it is going to open a new base at LBIA
investing more that £54 million and creating opportunities for around 1,000 new jobs. The
307

Dublin-based company will offer 14 new routes and 63 weekly return flights from the base
taking its total number of destinations from the airport to 17.
The airport was in public ownership until May 2007, when it was sold for £145.5 million to
Bridgepoint Capital. Bridgepoint announced that a further £70 million would be invested in
airport improvements, to boost passenger figures to over 7 million by 2015. 90 The airport has
recently started a new long-haul route to Islamabad three times a week using wide-bodied
Airbus A310 aircraft. It is hoped this spurs on new routes from the airport.
Below is the full list of direct flights and holiday destinations available.
Africa
Tunisia
Austria
Innsbruck
Salzburg
Balearics Islands
Mahon – Menorca
Palma – Majorca
Ibiza
Belgium
Brussels
Bulgaria
Bourgas
Canary Islands
Fuerteventura
Gran Canaria
Lanzarote
Tenerife
Caribbean
Barbados
Channel Islands
Jersey
Croatia
Dubrovnik
Cyprus
Larnaca
Paphos
Czech Republic
Prague
Egypt
Sharm el Sheikh
France
Avignon
Bergerac
Chambery
La Rochelle
Nice
Paris
Toulouse
Germany
Düsseldorf
Greece
Corfu
Crete
Rhodes
Zante
Holland
Amsterdam
Iceland
Italy
Milan
Pisa
Rome
Sardinia
Venice Marco Polo
Verona
Lapland
Malta
Malta
Pakistan
Islamabad
Portugal
Faro – Algarve
Poland
Krakow
Mainland Spain
Alicante – Costa Blanca
Almeria - Costa Almeria
Barcelona - Costa Brava
Girona - Costa Brava
Malaga – Costa Del Sol
Murcia
Switzerland
Geneva
Turkey
Bodrum
Dalaman
United Kingdom & Ireland
Aberdeen
Belfast City
Belfast International
Bristol
Dublin
Exeter
Edinburgh
Glasgow
Isle Of Man
London Gatwick
Newquay
Plymouth
Southampton
90 http://www.thetelegraphandargus.co.uk/news/1374024.airport_sold_for_145_million_to_bridgepoint/
308

The LBIA plays an important part in building the City Region’s economy and its contribution to the
region’s economy is set to grow as the passenger throughput is expected to reach from 2.6m in
2005 to 5.1m in 2016.
Over 89% of passengers originate in the Leeds City Region using business or leisure flights on
short and medium haul services within the UK and to mainland Europe. Similarly, it acts as a
significant ‘gateway’ to tourist and business visitors to the Region, as around 900,000 overseas
visitors came to the Yorkshire and Humber Region in 2003, spending approximately £294 million.
By 2030, the Airport is forecast to handle 8.2 million passengers and support around 4,100 FTE
jobs and provide £154 million of income 91 .
The Airport therefore has an increasingly important role to play in supporting this growing industry.
It has developed a strategic masterplan 2005-2016 which shows how the airport might develop in
the future in terms access, transport mode share and maximising the efficiency of its existing land
and facilities.
Recently Leeds City Council has approved a £28million expansion plan for LBIA that includes a
new two storey building extension and internal improvements to the existing terminal. The
extension will create a new check-in area and security facilities, and a new departure lounge and
shops on the first floor. It follows a recent £2m re-development of the forecourt.
Manchester airport provides much wider international destinations to the people of the district. This
airport is the fourth busiest airport in the UK and the biggest outside of London, in terms of annual
passenger throughput.
The airport provides regular direct flights to over 190 destinations worldwide by 84 airlines and is
the main international gateway to and from the North-West of England. It offers non-stop
scheduled flights to destinations across Europe, North America, Africa, South Asia, the Caribbean,
Middle East and Far East.
Moreover, 65 tour operators utilise the airport’s facility and many of Manchester's overseas routes
are served by charter flights to holiday destinations, some being seasonal.
9.6 Cycling and Walking
Cycling is not an intensively used form of transport in Bradford but provides a sustainable, healthy
means of travel for a range of journeys that could otherwise be carried out by car, not only for
leisure but also for some work and school journeys. Furthermore, encouragement of travel by cycle
will assist in minimising the demand for road space from other road users. However, the numbers
of accidents involving cycling casualties is high in relation to the levels of cycling that take place,
highlighting the vulnerability of this group of road users. Allocation of road space for cyclists is a
matter for local scheme design whereas the creation of long distance cycle routes including the
National Routes 66 and 69 and the Great Northern Trail is of strategic importance to the district.
91 Leeds Bradford International Airport (2004) LBIA Masterplan 2005-2016. Leeds: LBIA.
309

The Bradford Living Street proposal which is pat of the Sustrans’ Connect2 project is expected to
create a walking and cycling network linking East and West Bowling with Little Horton, and by
extending Bradford's traffic free ‘Living Street' over the busy A647 Manchester Road to a network
of traffic-free paths and quiet roads reaching deep into the surrounding communities - benefiting
more than 85,000 people living within a mile of the scheme.
This urban greenway and a new bridge over Manchester Road will transform the community by
providing a three mile continuous walking and cycling route from the city centre to Bowling Park
with local links to schools, the university and the hospital and transport interchange - enabling
easier everyday journeys to school, to work or the shops, without having to negotiate the busy dual
carriageway which cuts the community in two.
Bradford Council are working to make the bridge the best it can be and throughout 2009 and 2010
will go through extensive public consultation, design development and planning phases before
work to build the bridge can begin in 2011. Its opening in 2012 will mark the completion of the
Connect2 scheme in Bradford. 92
The Bradford City Cycling Map covers the whole Bradford District and shows a network of routes
recommended by cyclists, consisting of a number of signed cycle routes, many quiet roads, traffic
calmed areas and off highway links. The map was first produced in 2000 and now has been
updated in 2009 taking account of the additional cycle provision across the district.
The Bradford Cycle map is available as a free hard copy map from tourist information centres,
council buildings, libraries, bike shops, travel centres and leisure centres and other outlets around
the district. Alternatively it can be downloaded from the following link:
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/transport_and_infrastructure/transport_planning/bradford_cycle_map.htm
9.7 Car Parking Provision
Car parking is a key consideration for people who travel by car in Bradford District. Two main types
of car parking exist within the control of Bradford Council, on street public car parking and off street
public car parking.
Currently there are xxx on street public Council pay and display managed car parking spaces in
Bradford District which provides access to town centre facilities including shopping, work, leisure
and education. In addition to this, Bradford Council manages xx off street pay and display car
parking within the District. The largest concentration is in Bradford City Centre.
Bradford city centre has a large supply of off-street parking both in charged facilities and on vacant
sites. The city centre Masterplan proposes the development of many of these sites for
development as well as acknowledging the 1800 spaces being provided at Broadway and
promoting three new and replacement car parks on the perimeter of the city centre. There is also a
good deal of free unrestricted on-street parking throughout the City Centre. The Figure below
presents a map of all principle car parks across the area.
92 http://www.sustransconnect2.org.uk/schemes/project_detail.php?id=17
310

Figure 0: Bradford City Centre Principal Public Car Parks (Off Street)
Car Parks No
Wigan Street 116
Burnett Street 180
Crown Court 140
Eurocar 390
Forster Square (N) 450
Forster Square (S) 500
Hall Ings NCP 198
Jacobs Well (Sat only) 958
Leisure Exchange 432
New Southgate 404
Oastler (long stay) 404
Oastler (short stay) 60
Pine Street 105
Radwell Drive 33
Rawson Road 98
Sharpe Street 77
Simes Street 102
St Thomas A 30
St Thomas B 110
Tyson Street 43
Other major car parks in other town centres and tourist destinations within the district are listed
below:
Shipley:
• Market Place Car Park
• Saville Car Park
• Atkinson Car Park
• Westcliffe Road Car Park
• Wharfe Street Car Park
• Swimming Pool Car Park
• Oastler Road Car Park
• Caroline Street Car Park, Saltaire
• Exhibition Road Car Park, Saltaire
Bingley:
• Ferncliffe Road Car Park
• Wellington Street Car Park
• Waterloo Car Park
• Queen Street v
• Main Street Car Park
• Victoria Street Car Park
Keighley:
• Scott Street Car Park
• Church Green Car Park
311

Haworth:
• Museum Car Park
• Bronte Village Car Park
• Gas Street Car Park
• Rawdon Road Car Park
Ilkley:
• South Hawksworth Street
One of the key parking issues is to keep balance between long stay and short stay parking in
the main city and town centres. As a general comparison, parking in Bradford is cheaper
than in other West Yorkshire centres and may need to be addressed in the context of wide
area congestion measures.
Table : Comparison of Parking Charges in Leeds and Bradford (Aug 2005)
Source: Bradford Channel and Market NDFs Transport Report (Ove Arup & Partners Ltd, 2005)
Council parking charges however have been increased by 50p a day or 10p per hour from
3rd August 2009. The move is part of a budget deal struck by Bradford Council in February
to raise £170,000 over the year by increasing short-stay parking charges. It applies to the
majority of car parks and on-street parking in Bradford, Shipley, Bingley, Keighley, Haworth
and Ilkley.
The charges at some car parks remain unchanged. These are: Shipley: Swimming Pool and
Oastler Road; Baildon: Ian Clough Hall; Esholt: Car and Coach park; Silsden: Wesley Place
and Bridge Street; Haworth: Gas Street and Rawdon Road.
Although the Council has no current proposals to open any new car parks in the city centre,
the Broadway retail development is expected to provide the largest parking facilities in the
city centre. Other changes in car parking provision may occur to those sites on land
earmarked for development, which include Crown Court car park, Alexandra car park and
Burnett Street car park and this could result in a loss of significant number of parking spaces.
In addition to the car parking spaces managed by Bradford Council, there are also a number
of privately managed car parking spaces across the district. The following provides a list of
the largest privately managed car parking spaces in Bradford District:-
• NCP New Southgate Multi Storey Car Park off Thornton Road, Bradford, 432 spaces
• NCP Bradford Hall Ings Multi Storey Car Park, Bradford, 526 spaces
• Britannia Parking Ltd Leisure Exchange, Vicar Lane, Bradford, 432 spaces
312

Location of primary Council owned car parking spaces across the district can be viewed via
the Direct Gov website:-
http://bluebadge.direct.gov.uk/index.php?br_wid=1024&br_hgt=768&stoneage
9.8 Road Injuries
Road injuries in the District are measured against target reductions to 2010 set in the
National Road Safety Strategy; the West Yorkshire Local Transport Plan – Safer Roads; and
the Local Public Service Agreement (LPSA1 and 2).
These targets included 40% fewer people killed or seriously injured, 50% fewer children
killed or seriously injured, and 50% fewer pedestrians killed or seriously injured. The LPSA 1
target to reduce the number of people killed or seriously injured on the roads in Bradford by a
further 20 people by 31 December 2005 was not met, but the 2010 target reduction in killed
and serious injury to children was met in 2005.
2006 was a year of consolidation after significant falls in road injuries in 2005. Final figures
show that all injuries are slightly more in 2006 than in 2005, with a very small increase in the
numbers of children injured. The figures are still well below those occurring in 2004. The total
for the category ‘All killed and seriously injured’ is marginally above 2005 and more work
needs doing to get back on track to meet the 2010 target reductions. Pedestrian injuries
continue to fall.
LPSA2 target reductions to achieve stretch targets in 2008 in the reduction of killed and
serious injury to children and children overall as pedestrians, cyclists and car passengers,
are still on track.
Further initiatives being developed include pedestrian skills training, speed management and
targeted police enforcement
9.9 Key Facts
• Bradford’s road system is dominated by private vehicles with journeys involving a
wide range of origins, destinations and purposes. Car ownership in Bradford is also
set to rise at a faster rate than nationally.
• Commuters flow between Bradford and Leeds is the highest in Leeds City Region.
There is a net inward flow of commuter into Bradford from all surrounding districts
except Leeds, which receives a net gain Bradford commuters.
• Congestion in Bradford is not a district wide problem though there are hot spots,
especially at peak times at the major radial routes to and from the central part of the
district. In the future, major regeneration projects, particularly in the city centre, and
employment growth in the M606 corridor are likely to lead to increased traffic
movements at inner and outer ring roads. Future growth in the numbers of jobs and
313

housing in the Airedale Corridor will also put increased pressure on road and rail
capacity in the Aire Valley.
• Although Bradford District has a relatively competitive position in terms of its
connectivity to wider destination, the city internally faces the challenge of planning
for major infrastructure projects e.g. completion of city centre west ring road, and
allowing large scale/intensive developments in areas of poor transport accessibility.
There are also some key services, employment and housing areas in Bradford that
are poorly served by public transport, cycling and walking.
• Road traffic is the main source of air-borne pollution in Bradford. All the four Air
Quality Management Areas in the district experience significant levels of traffic
congestion which causes the level of Nitrogen Oxide in those localities being higher
than acceptable. Travel initiatives that reduce the length and number of car journeys
and encourage using alternative modes of transport are increasingly becoming
popular and thus contributing towards reducing the impacts of traffics on the
environment.
• Bus services in Bradford are well used across the district and rated by public opinion
survey as one of the top services within West Yorkshire. However, there are specific
areas e.g. congestion, punctuality and better accessibility where further and
effective measures are needed for improvement.
• Rail patronage in the district has increased significantly over the years and is
expected to continue to be the dominant public transport mode in those corridors
where it exists, notably in Airedale. However, lack of adequate park and ride
facilities at stations and overcrowding on some peak services still remain a major
issue and needed to be addressed.
• Air travelling to and from Bradford is set to increase as the city is now connected to
more frequent and wider national and international destinations through the Leeds-
Bradford International Airport and Manchester Airport. The LBIA is expected to play
a much important regional role in the future and thereby directly contributing to the
economy of the region.
• In the long terms good connections between all public transport modes will be
increasingly important. The district is unlikely to create enough jobs on its own to
meet the demands of a growing workforce, and therefore links with neighbouring
districts will be important to connect people with employment and housing.
314

Sources:
• WYITA (2011) West Yorkshire Local Transport Plan 2011-2026. Report Dated
March 2011. WY Integrated Transport Authority.
• BMDC (2011) Bradford LTP3 Local Implementation Plan 2011-2014. Report
Dated June 2011. Bradford Council.
• CBMDC (2007) Bradford District Transport Strategy 2006-2021. Bradford Council.
• LCR Secretariat (2009) Progress in Leeds City Region. Leeds City Region
Secretariat and Yorkshire Forward.
• CBMDC (2007) Bradford District Sustainable Community strategy- Information
pack and Fact Sheets. Policy Development Service, Bradford Council.
• Genecon (2006) BCR Performance Framework: Second Annual Update 2004/05-
2005/06 Final report. Report dated May 2006. Genecon Consultancy Ltd.
• Genecon, King Sturge, Gillespies (2007) Leeds Bradford Corridor Study. Report
dated July 2007. Leeds Bradford Corridor Group.
• LCRDP (2006) Leeds City Region Development Programme- Appendix 4 (Leeds
City Region Transport Vision). Report dated October 2006. Leeds City Council.
• GOYH (2008) the Yorkshire and Humber Plan- Regional Spatial Strategy to 2026.
Government office for Yorkshire and the Humber.
• Ove Arup & Partners Ltd (2005) Bradford Channel and Market NDFs Transport
Report. Report dated December 2006. BCR.
• Regeneris (2005) Bradford Positioning Statement. Report dated May 2006.
Regeneris Consulting.
315

10. ENVIRONMENT
This section of the report appraises the current environmental situation across the district
and also reviews the existing and ongoing studies that deal with the issues.
A wide range of research and study materials have been investigated to compile the facts on
these subject areas. Some of the reports are-
• The Big Plan: Sustainable Community Strategy for Bradford District (CBMDC, 2008)
• Bradford District Environmental Strategy 2008-11 (BMDC, 2007)
• Bradford District Air Quality Action Plan (BMDC, 2009)
• Air Quality in CBMD: Progress Report (CBMDC, 2007)
• Bradford District Carbon Management Programme 2007-12 (BMDC, 2007)
• Bradford Strategic Flood Risk Assessment: Final Report ( BMDC, March 2003)
• Review to Consider the Future of Water Management and the Associated problems
of Flooding in the Bradford District ( BMDC, 2005)
• Inspection Strategy for Contaminated Land in the Bradford District (BMDC, 2001)
• Bradford Local Biodiversity Action Plan- Draft (CBMDC, 2003)
• YH Regional Biodiversity Strategy (Y&H Biodiversity Forum, 2009)
• YH Regional Environment Enhancement Strategy 2008-13 (YHREF, 2009)
• Low Carbon and Renewable Energy Capacity in Y&H (AECOM, 2011)
• Weathering the Storm: Yorkshire and Humber Regional Climate Change Adaptation
Study (Y&H Assembly, 2009)
• Climate Change Plan for Yorkshire and Humber 2009-2014 (LGYH, 2009)
• West Yorkshire Adaptation Action Plan (AWAY, 2010 )
• West Yorkshire Geodiversity Action Plan (WY Geology Trust, 2008)
• Saltaire World Heritage Site Environmental Capacity Study (Atkins, 2006)
• Conservation Area Review Programme (CBMDC, 2007/08)
• Listed Building at Risk Survey (CBMDC, 2005)
10.1 Air Quality
The Government estimates that air pollution in the UK kills between 12,000 and 24,000
people prematurely each year.
Cars are the greatest source of air pollution and they are responsible for the majority of smog
forming gases. The other main sources of air pollutants in Bradford are wood and coal
smoke from wood and coal heaters and industry. 93
The Environment Act 1995 introduced the National Air Quality Strategy and the requirement
for local authorities to determine if statutory air quality objectives are likely to be exceeded.
All local authorities now report to DEFRA on an annual basis, and have the obligation to
93 A Picture of the District (Report on the State of the District produced by CBMDC Research and
Consultation Service 2006 and 2007 updates)
316

declare Air Quality Management Areas and develop action plans for improvement of air
quality if objectives are likely to be exceeded.
The council has carried out two rounds of review and assessment of air quality in the
Bradford district since 2001. The first round was undertaken as a staged process in
accordance with DETR technical guidance and submitted to DETR in December 2000. A
second round of review and assessment was submitted to DEFRA in April 2003.
A subsequent Detailed Assessment of Air Quality was produced in November 2004 updating
the findings of the second round of air quality review. One of the major findings of the
assessment was that it discounted the need for an air quality management declaration at 8 of
the 12 sites it has investigated for nitrogen dioxide as it has been found very unlikely that the
objective will be exceeded at those sites. However, due to identifying concentrations above
the objectives for nitrogen dioxide the study suggested to declare the remaining 4 sites as air
quality management areas (AQMAs). 94
As a result of work done in the second round of review and assessment the council has now
declared the following four AQMAs.
i) Mayo Avenue, Bradford (Mayo Avenue Manchester Road junction)
ii) Thornton Road, Bradford (Near the junction with Princes Way and Godwin Street
within the City Centre area)
iii) Manningham Lane, Bradford (Junction of Manningham Lane and Queens Road)
iv) Shipley Airedale Road, Bradford
They were declared on the 1st of September 2006. The maps of the four AQMAs can be
seen in Appendix 1 of this chapter.
The AQMAs have been looked at in more detail in a Further Assessment report, which was
submitted to DEFRA in October 2007. At the time of writing this report a Draft Action Plan
has been written and further work is ongoing to complete an Action Plan for the four AQMAs.
Based on the recent assessment it has been understood that the main pollutants of concern
is fine particles and nitrogen dioxide. The particles arise from a wide range of sources, some
of which are outside the District. Around 70% of nitrogen dioxide emissions arise from traffic
pollution. The location of all the 4 AQMAs identified experience significant levels of traffic
congestion. The large volume and varied types of vehicular traffics are the major sources of
this pollutant at those sites.
94 BMDC (2007) Air Quality in the City of Bradford Metropolitan District-Progress Report 2007. Report
dated December 2007. Department of Environment and Neighbourhood, BMDC.
317

Figure : Locations of the continuous monitoring in the Bradford District.
Source: Air Quality in the City of Bradford Metropolitan District: Progress Report 2007
Continuous monitoring for nitrogen dioxide has taken place at the 9 sites as shown on the
Map 1 and in Table X. The table also shows the monitoring results for NO 2 up to the year
2006. (For further information on the monitoring methods used by Bradford MDC such as
quality control and methods etc please refer to the Updating and Screening Assessment
produced in April 2006 which is freely available on the Bradford MDC website at the following
web address:
http://www.bradford.gov.uk/council/enviro_protect_and_waste_manage/air_quality_review.as
p.)
318

Table : Continuous monitoring results NO 2
Figure X Below shows the trends in continuous monitoring data for NO 2 between the years
1999 and 2006. The graph illustrates the unusually high number of days with poor pollution
dispersion conditions in 2001 with higher than average annual means for NO 2 for 2001 at all
three sites. The graph does not show any significant trend of either a reduction or increase in
annual mean concentrations for NO 2 .
Figure: Trends in NO 2 Annual Mean 1999 - 2006 95
In addition some passive monitoring using nitrogen dioxide tubes was also undertaken in an
attempt to ascertain the extent of the area of exceedance. The following map identifies the
locations of the nitrogen dioxide tubes that are currently monitoring in Bradford. The
corrected NO 2 annual mean for 2006 in µg/m3 is also displayed. The nitrogen dioxide tube
95 Air Quality Progress Report 2007, CBMDC
319

esults are corrected using the method described in Government guidance LAQM.TG (03)
which utilises coexposure with a continuous monitor.
There are no trends to be seen in the historical results as the nitrogen dioxide tubes are not
often kept at the same location for longer than a year, they are generally used as a screening
tool to identify sites that require continuous monitoring.
Figure : Locations of the NO 2 tubes that are currently monitoring in Bradford
The District also currently has 187 industrial processes subject to local authority air pollution
control (LAPC), requiring them to meet nationally set standards for emissions to air 96 . The
review and assessment of air quality concluded that industrial sources were unlikely to cause
a breach of national air quality objectives.
Reporting of Monitoring Data
The Government owned site in central Bradford has been discontinued (as of October 07)
however, past Information about air pollution measured at the site can be seen on Ceefax,
page 413, and on the Internet at http://www.aeat.co.uk/netcen/airqual.
Data from the three automatic monitoring sites owned by the Council can be seen on the
Council website at www.bradford.gov.uk and is also displayed 24 hours a day on computer
screen in The Council Shop, Main Street, Bingley.
96 BMDC (2006). Bradford District Environment Partnership Strategy. Report dated July 2006. BMDC.
320

Air pollution measured at the Government owned station and all the others in the UK
Automatic Urban Network is reported annually by the National Environmental Technology
Centre.
The National Environmental Technology Centre reports summary data for the 1 UK smoke
monitoring site in Bradford centre and nitrogen dioxide levels measured at the four UK
National Survey sites annually.
Air Quality Strategy
Government guidance strongly recommends that all authorities, particularly those that have
not had to designate AQMAs but who have areas close to the exceedance levels, should
consider drawing up a local air quality strategy. Although Bradford MDC has designated
AQMAs at four sites it has been decided that an Air Quality Strategy would still be of benefit
to the Authority in addition to Action Plans as a result of the AQMAs.
Bradford MDC is still at the preliminary stages of drawing up an air quality strategy. An air
quality strategy steering group has been set up which includes representatives within the
Council from planning, highways, policy and environmental health. The Steering group has
been involved in work on the Action Planning that is taking place as a result of the four
AQMAs. A draft Air Quality Action Plan has been produced in July 2009.
It is anticipated that this group will be widened to include external agencies, other Council
departments such as Leisure Services and other interested parties in the future. One of the
aims of the group has been to ensure that information on air quality is distributed throughout
relevant departments so that the information is available to all those that might need to use it.
It also allows information on relevant air quality matters such as new road developments,
EMAS policy or climate change to be distributed within the group.
10.2 River and Water Quality
The main river systems comprise:-
• The Becks in the south of the district which drain to the south into the River Calder;
• The streams around Bradford which drain into Bradford Beck and then into the River Aire;
• The River Worth which meets the River Aire in Keighley and drains the catchment from
the moors in the west of the district;
• The River Aire which continues towards Leeds in the east;
• And the River Wharfe which drains across the north of the district towards the east.
The Environment Agency undertakes river water quality sampling across the district and the
summary results are available on the web-site at www.environment-agency.gov.uk ‘What’s in
your backyard?’ section. The information presented there, demonstrates that the water
quality is more likely to be poor or bad (according to the EA’s General Quality Assessment
(GQA) classification system) in the urban areas such as the centre of Bradford, and in the
becks to the south of the district which drain toward the Calder catchment. The Aire
catchment tends to have better water quality until it reaches the confluence with Bradford
Beck in Shipley. The Council is working with the Environment Agency to improve the quality
321

of these watercourses. It is also running a trial involving two areas of reed beds – these are
being used to evaluate their effectiveness in cleaning up diffuse pollution. The Wharfe water
quality tends to be very good through the north of the district.
It should be noted that the GQA classification scheme is only for chemical parameters and
there are other water quality issues involved including pesticides, pathogens and other
criteria related to the current and previous industrial and other effluent impacts on the
watercourses.
In recent years, increased investment in sewage treatment has also brought improvements in
river water quality, but there is still concern about certain pollutants such as contamination
from faulty combined sewer overflows, pesticides and industrial detergents. There are
emerging issues relating to new pollutants such as synthetic human hormones used as
contraceptives which have been detected in water samples. These chemicals are persistent
in waterway ecosystems and may have a hormone disrupter effect on fish, invertebrates and
other indicators of biological water quality. This highlights the need to monitor the
connections between lifestyles and the potential consequences for human environmental
impacts.
Through a system of permits the Environment Agency also regulates anyone wishing to
dispose of effluent to rivers. As well as these point sources it also considers pollution from
diffuse sources such as run-off from contaminated land. In addition to the grading systems
for both chemical and biological pollution, an agreed target or River Quality Objective (RQO)
has been set for certain stretches of a watercourse. The monitoring of waterways in the
District shows an overall improvement in biological and chemical water quality in recent
years.
The water for public supplies in the district comes from surface water. Most of it is from
reservoirs, although there are also a number of licensed spring sources and significant
quantities are abstracted from the River Wharfe. Water is ‘imported’ from higher up the
Wharfe and from the Nidd Valley and pumped to the local reservoirs for distribution. Water is
also abstracted under license for industrial cooling and processing purposes.
10.3 Renewable Energy
In order to meet the Government’s carbon-cutting ambitions, both higher levels of energy
efficiency and much greater use of renewable energy is required. PPS1 ’Planning and
Climate Change’ emphasises the important role of local planning authorities in encouraging
much greater use of local renewable and low-carbon energy in new developments as part of
their strategies for mitigating and adapting to climate change.
The ambitious goal of the Energy White Paper (2007) is to put ourselves on a path to cut the
UK’s carbon dioxide emissions (by some 60% by about 2050), with real progress by 2020,–
by creating a low-carbon economy through improved energy efficiency and increased use of
renewables. The White Paper also confirms the requirement for 10% of UK electricity to
come from renewable energy by 2010 (with an aspiration to double this by 2020). PPS22
322

elating to Renewable Energy aims to promote and encourage, rather than restrict, the
development of renewable energy resources. Renewable energy developments should be
capable of being accommodated in locations where the technology is viable and
environmental, economic and social impacts can be addressed satisfactorily.
Moreover, The Home Energy Conservation Act 1995 requires that local authorities report on
progress towards meeting objectives to improve the energy efficiency of residential
properties in the area. Government has set a target of a 30% reduction in domestic
consumption by 2010 from a baseline figure from 1996. Bradford’s cumulative improvement
in energy efficiency between 1996 and 2005 is 15.6%. Based on current rates of progress,
the best estimate is that it will take a further two years to 2012 to meet the target. Carbon
dioxide reduction per annum as a result of this improvement is 588,250 tonnes. 97
Bradford is one of the smaller LA's in the region in terms of land size but has a population
that is above the average. The town of Bradford has the density necessary to support district
heating networks. The Energy Opportunities Plan 98 shows that there are many public
buildings in the town that could provide anchor loads for such networks.
The council itself runs an Eco-Management and Audit Scheme (EMAS) for its own buildings
and properties. In support of the process it has an ongoing programme of works aiming to
reduce energy consumption in council buildings and to increase use of renewable sources of
energy where appropriate.
Other renewable energy opportunities in the district include wind and hydro opportunities.
There is currently one hydro generation plant operating in Esholt, and a potential site
identified at Greenholme Mills on the border with Harrogate district. Bradford’s hydro
potential is among the best in the region and their installation should be sought and
supported wherever feasible.
List of all commercial scale renewable energy generators in Bradford should be included.
Because of Bradford’s hilly topography the main pressure has been for energy generation
from the wind. The district is largely built-up to the east around Bradford but is more rural to
west and north and incorporates areas of moorland. These extra-urban areas are mainly
classified as having a high and very high sensitivity to wind development. For these reasons
wind developments are most likely on a small scale in appropriate pockets of land within
suburban and green belt land. However, the potential for small wind developments in such
situations may be higher than that indicated by the targets in the RSS.
97 BMDC (2007). Bradford City Centre Area Action Plan Sustainability Appraisal Final Scoping Report.
Report dated September 2007. Planning Service, Department of Regeneration, BMDC.
98 Low carbon and renewable energy capacity in Y&H- Draft Final Report (AECOM, 2011)
323

Table: Renewable energy sources in Bradford
Source: Low carbon and renewable energy capacity in Y&H- Draft Final Report (AECOM, 2011)
The Council is also in the process of carrying out an ‘Environmental Constraint Assessment’
for the district which will look into the different level of environmental sensitiveness across
the district (e.g. greenbelt, flood zone, low wind speed zone etc) and help identify potential
locations for renewable energy sources e.g. wind farms, individual turbines etc. An initial
overview of the study suggests that the most potential sites for wind turbines in the district
lies in the south-west at Denholme-Queensbury area near the Ovenden Moor.
In addition, the built-up areas in Bradford provide an opportunity for exploiting PV which
should make a significant contribution to renewable energy generation and can stand above
average for any LA's in the region. By 2021 biomass technologies can provide significant
opportunities to further diversify Bradford’s power supply. There should also be potential for
growing energy crops on brownfield sites and as an alternative to agricultural crops on
established farmland.
In terms of energy generation from waste, planning permission has been granted to BioGen
Power in April 2010 to build the world’s largest waste gasification facility in Bradford, capable
of processing 160,000 tonnes of residual waste.
However, despite the good potential for various renewable opportunities, the overall potential
for Bradford to generate renewable energy is lower than the average for LA's in the region
due to the District’s lower potential for wind developments. (Source: AEA Planning for
Renewable Energy Targets, Yorksire & Humber, 2004).
(ADD PLAN SHOWING AREAS OF WIND ENERGY POTENTIAL IN BRADFORD DISTRICT – SEE
JANE SCOTT)
324

10.4 Land Contamination
Bradford has a legacy of land used for industry resulting in land contamination. Certain past
and present human activity will have potentially caused contamination of the ground.
However, existing assessment and knowledge suggest that the potential contamination
sources are limited to previous manufacturing and industrial activity, chemical or fuel storage
and treatment or disposal of waste.
Although the precise extent of the problem is still being investigated, the Council is
developing various strategies which include assessing and prioritising the treatment of
contaminated sites as part of the regeneration process across the District. Recently a guide
to submitting planning application for development on contaminated land has been published
which aims to help developers identify the best way of dealing with possible contaminated
land and bring those lands back into use releasing pressure on other environmentally
sensitive areas.
The current 2020 Vision highlights the potential for using previously developed sites, also
known as “brown field” sites, to aid urban regeneration, improve the environment of the inner
urban areas, and minimise the pressures on “green field” land. Some sites could be used for
woodland and quality green-space, whereas certain sites could be regenerated for more
affluent uses. For example, the former Gaswork site on Thornton road has been through a
Council Land Reclamation Scheme to get rid of the pollutants in order to make it fit to cater
for major urban regeneration projects. However, decisions regarding the preferred uses of
these sites will be made through consultation with local communities, specialist agencies,
and the development assessment process.
The current rUDP policies emphasise the need to ensure public health and safety and, in
order to determine the level of suspicion in relation to contamination, suggest developer carry
out phase I and later phase II site investigation (if it is considered from phase I study that the
contamination would adversely affect the proposed development) to the satisfaction of the
council before the status of the planning application is determined. The type and level of
contaminants present on the site and the remedial measures proposed will be prime
consideration to deal with such issues.
The council also has a contaminated land inspection strategy which highlights the possible
sources and receptors of land contamination across the district and outlined the aims,
objectives and key action areas in order to deal with the issue. 99
10.5 Hazardous Installations
Within the District there are certain sites and pipelines for example High Pressure Gas
pipelines designated by the Health and Safety Executive (HSE) as notifiable hazardous
installations because of the quantities of hazardous substances stored, used or transmitted.
99 contaminated land inspection strategy
325

Hazardous substances and their specified quantities are set down in The Planning
(Hazardous Substances) Regulations 1992 as amended by The Planning (Control of Major-
Accident Hazards) Regulations 1999 (COMAH). These latter regulations implemented the
land use planning requirements of the Seveso II Directive [Council Directive 96/82/EC of 9
December 1996]. The notifiable installations under these regulations, as at April 2002, are
listed below and shown on the rUDP proposals maps.
Sites within Bradford Designated Under the Control of Major Accident Hazards (Planning)
Regulations 1999 (Comah)*:
Bradford North
• British Gas Plc, Peace Street, Bradford
• British Gas Plc, Canal Road, Bradford
• Towler & Staines Ltd, Leeds Road, Bradford
Bradford North
• A H Marks, Wyke Lane, Wyke
• Ciba Speciality Chemicals, Cleckheaton Road, Low Moor
• Coales & Son, 21 Commondale Way, Euroway Trading Estate, Bradford
• Ellis And Everard (Uk Ltd), Holme Lane, Bradford
Bradford North
Keighley
Shipley
• Cytec Industries Uk Ltd, Bowling Park Drive, Bradford
• Yorkshire Water Services, Chellow Heights
• Water Treatment Works, Haworth Road, Bradford
• Transco Plc, Marley Road, Thwaites, Keighley
• Towler & Staines Ltd, Bradford Road, Keighley
• Filtronic Comtek Uk Ltd,
• Woolcombers Shed, Salts Mill, Saltaire
*(Sites As At April 2002)
Bradford also has a number of sites where significant quantities of potential hazardous
chemicals are used and stored. These chemical plants are a major source of local
employment but the storage and use of these chemicals can place significant restrictions on
certain kinds of development in the vicinity. When considering development on land in the
vicinity of COMAH sites the council aims to strike the proper balance taking account of the
costs and benefits and the nature of the risk as well as the level of risk. Unacceptable risk is
determined with regard to what is considered to be an acceptable level of safety in relation to
the potential accident affects on people in the surrounding area, taking account of HSE
advice and appropriate comparable acceptable levels of risk.
326

10.6 Litter and Dereliction
Litter and related problems are one of the big concerns for ensuring quality city living in
Bradford. The districts emerging Sustainable Community Strategy has highlighted this fact
and pointed out that poor quality of some parts of the urban environment, particularly due to
fly-tipping, litter and dereliction, is an important factor behind the trend of the higher socioeconomic
groups moving out of inner urban areas towards the suburbs and outskirts of the
District. Research commissioned on behalf of the Environmental Task Force in July 2006 in
the 10% most deprived wards of the District highlighted the following:
• 59% of people surveyed felt that rubbish and litter was a very big or fairly big problem
• Only 29% of people felt the quality of the environment in their neighbourhood was
very good or fairly good
• In some wards satisfaction with Bradford Council in keeping land clear of refuse and
litter was just 32%
This graph below shows Bradford’s performance against the England and Neighbourhood
Renewal Local Authority average on unacceptable levels of litter and detritus as judged by
Government. The trend shows positive progress particularly in comparison with other NR
Local Authorities however considerable work is needed to bring Bradford in line with the
England average.
Figure : Percentage of Unacceptable Levels of Litter and Detritus
Source: The Bradford District Environment Strategy 2008-11
The most recent survey across the district however saw a 17% increase in satisfaction of
cleanliness standards. The percentage of people satisfied with the cleanliness of the District
has increased from 45% in 2003 to 63% in 2007, while the levels of cleanliness of our streets
has risen from 60% to 88% (using the Tidy Britain/ENCAMS standard). 100
100 BMDC (2007) Bradford District Sustainable Community strategy- Information pack and Fact
Sheets. Policy Development Service, Bradford Council.
327

Furthermore, a user satisfaction survey carried out in July 2007 with residents in Bradford
Environmental Task Force 101 areas demonstrates the improvements people are seeing in
their neighbourhood as a result of Task Force activities. These results are compared to July
2006 results, prior to the Task Force commencing work:
- Percentage of people satisfied with the quality of the environment in their
neighbourhood has increased from 29% to 40%
- Percentage of people who agree that “overall my neighbourhood is a good place
to live” has risen to 66% compared to 53%
- The proportion of residents who felt that fly tipping and dumping is a problem in
their area has fallen to 33% from 44%
In April 2006, £5m Neighbourhood Renewal Funding was allocated to the Environmental
Partnership over 2 years (NRF must be targeted within the 10% most deprived communities
across the District, which also have a poor local visible environment). £4m has been
allocated to the Environmental Task Force which aims to replicate and build upon the
successes of the Go Girlington and Big Sweep initiatives. £1m will be used to support the
local environmental initiatives across the District. 102
The standard of cleanliness of adopted highways remains very high with 96% at a high or
acceptable standard. However, other areas of land both in the public sector and private
ownership continue to have a negative impact on the overall appearance of the District. 2020
Vision highlights the need to clean up the environment of the inner city, as part of a wider
package of actions aimed at reversing this trend and bringing earners and spending-power
back into the inner areas. 103
Derelict land and buildings refer to the amount of land identified in NLUD as ‘Previously
Developed Land (PDL)’. These are lands or buildings so damaged by previous development,
e.g. contamination, sub surface structures, that they are incapable of beneficial use without
treatment. In 2007 the total amount of all previously developed land in Bradford district was
182 hectares of which only 41% (75 hectares) was in use and/or have planning permission or
redevelopment potential. The rest of the PDL was vacant (77 hectares) and derelict land and
buildings (29 hectares) 104 .
101 This is a partnership of public and voluntary sector projects working together to improve the quality
of the neighbourhood environment, supported through the Neighbourhood Renewal Fund. The Task
Force works closely with the community to organise cleanups and re-design and improvement of
community spaces, including pathways and parks. Education and awareness-raising around
maintaining a clean and safe local environment is integrated with these activities. The Environmental
Task Force won the 2007 Improving Lives Award at the Yorkshire and Humber Making a Difference
Awards led by the Local Government Yorkshire and Humber.
102 A Picture of the District (Report on the State of the District produced by CBMDC Research and
Consultation Service 2006 and 2007 updates)
103 BMDC (2002) The Bradford District Multi-Agency Environmental Strategy 2002-2007 (Draft for Consultation).
Reprt dated February 2002. BMDC.
104 DCLG (2008) Previously-developed land that may be available for Development: England 2007. Report dated
August 2008. London:DCLG.
328

The breakdown by different category is:
Land Type A – Previously developed land now vacant- 48 hectares
Land Type B – Vacant Buildings- 29 hectares
Land Type C – Derelict Land and Buildings- 29 hectares
Land Type D – Land or buildings currently in use and allocated in the local plan and/or
having planning permission- 72 hectares
Land Type E – Land or buildings currently in use with redevelopment potential- 3 hectares.
Figure: Distribution of PDL in Yorkshire and Humber by Land Type 2004
Source: National Landuse Database of PDL- Y&H Summery, 2004
The map above shows the extent of the PDL across Bradford district by various land types. It
is clear from the map that PDL is mostly concentrated within the existing built-up areas both
in urban and rural locations.
10.7 Flood Risk
Flood risk is a real and also a perceived issue throughout Yorkshire, not only in Bradford
where demand and potential for further development, particularly in new housing sectors, are
increasing every year. Major flooding incidents have often resulted in the Council and others
making policy and operational changes to water management in order to reduce the risk of
further floods or to reduce the damage caused. The local authority together with the
329

environment agency is therefore working towards improving the standard of protection of the
existing communities and infrastructures. The government also has developed a strategy in
the form of PPG 25 that aims to use the planning system to reduce the demand for further
flood defences by protecting natural floodplains from development, and to steer investment
away from areas of high flood risk.
Bradford district encompasses a significant part of the catchment for the river Aire. The Aire
enters the district from the Craven District to the north west, and has a number of major
tributaries from the south. To the north, the Bradford district is bounded by the Wharfe
corridor, although there is a part to the north of the river at Ilkley which lies within the
CBMDC area. The Aire, Wharfe, Worth and Silsden Beck are classified as main rivers and
are the responsibility of the Environment Agency, although parts of the Aire are managed by
the Drainage Board. Flooding from the Aire is moderated by the extensive washlands
upstream of the district. Flood risk in the district may be examined by accessing the EA’s online
maps that have recently been updated. These show the likelihood of inland areas being
affected by flooding for both a 1% (100 to 1) and 0.1% (1000 to 1) chance of occurrence in
any one year. The ‘natural’ flood plains shown are illustrated as if there were no flood
defences in place, although where these exist, they show higher levels of protection.
The EA Flood Risk maps currently show some 3,476 properties as potentially at risk from
flooding within the boundaries of Bradford Council. This figure is a “count” of the properties
within the floodplain in the “urban” areas as defined by the areas shown grey on the 1:50,000
Ordnance Survey maps.
Bradford has a history of land and property being flooded through heavy downpours of rain
and watercourses overflowing their banks. Flooding can be caused by main rivers bursting
their banks or by localised incidents involving smaller becks or by surcharging drainage
330

systems. Communities on the Rivers Aire and Wharfe were flooded during the November
2000 event. As a result delineation of the natural floodplain is well understood.
During the flooding of November 2000 significant numbers of properties were affected along
the River Aire at Shipley, Bingley and Apperley Bridge and particularly at Stockbridge, where
substantial flood damages were sustained as a result of structural failure of the river
defences, which have subsequently been reinstated and improved. In general relatively few
areas within the Bradford District are constituted as ‘defended areas’, flooding from the River
Aire is modified by a substantial system of washlands upstream of Bradford. During periods
of high flow, water spills into these vital washland areas, reducing maximum flood areas
downstream (ie within residential communities).
An increased programme of investment is currently underway to improve the standard of
protection to existing communities. The Authority works in partnership with a variety of
organisations to address water management in the district. European funding has been
accessed for flood alleviation capital projects. Water management strategies and
programmes aim to:
• Reduce the risk of flooding
• Mitigate the effect of flooding
• Provide coordinated and effective emergency responses to flooding incidents
A Strategic Flood Risk Assessment for Bradford District was carried out in 2003 in
consultation with the Environment Agency and Yorkshire Water. Primarily this used existing
data sources and provided information on the nature of flood risk in the district, and its
potential consequences with respect to the allocation of proposed development sites. Only a
handful of sites out of 400 allocations have been subsequently withdrawn or re-phased, a
proportion of these until such time that further investigations have been undertaken. More
recently PPS 25 clarifies the Sequential Test that matches types of development to degrees
of flood risk and strengthens the requirement to include flood risk at all levels of the planning
process.
The Strategic Flood Risk Assessment (SFRA) identified the main river flooding issues as
given in following Table.
331

Table : Known Main River Flooding Issues – Bradford District
Source: Bradford Strategic Flood Risk Assessment Final Report 2003
The report also highlighted the known flooding issues related to the ‘Critical Ordinary
Watercourses’ and also summarises Surface Water Drainage Related Issues across the
district.
In March 2005 the council also published a Review to consider the Future of Water
Management and the Associated Problems of Flooding in the Bradford District 105 that
analysed information from agencies involved in water management and the public affected
by flooding in order to support future policy development and implementation. The report
particularly highlighted how the nature and the scale of flood risk in Bradford district could be
affected by future developments in regeneration, the landuse planning system, new
legislation, and new working practices. In conclusion, it outlined a range of recommendations
based on its inquiry on the following key issues-
• The risk, nature and scale of flooding in the district
• Key actions required for reducing the risk of flooding
• Key actions required for mitigating the effects of flooding
105 BMDC (2005) Review to consider the Future of Water Management and the Associated Problems
of Flooding in the Bradford District. Report dated March 2005. Policy Development Service, CBMDC.
332

The designation of the flood plains by the Environment Agency has seriously affected the
availability of development sites where land and property are seen to be at risk. This not only
restricts new development but also makes the redevelopment of existing buildings and
brownfield sites potentially very difficult. The above report however envisaged that landuse
plans (including the Airedale Master plan and the City Centre Master Plan) will recommend
that new developments will include alternative methods of urban water management
including rainwater harvesting, the use of reed beds, permeable hard surfaces, grey water
recycling etc. The delivery of these innovative systems will require partnership working with
the developers, the EA, YW and Bradford Council. There are of course other opportunities
such as tree planting, and the creation of water storage and retention areas, which need to
be considered.
The council has recently agreed to review the current SFRA in order to update the flood risk
issues across the district and investigate the scope of the phase 2 recommendations outlined
in the SFRA. At the time of writing this report the council has commissioned JBA Consulting
to carry out this assessment and the work is ongoing.
This flood risk assessment will influence the strategic choices for development that are to be
addressed in the Core Strategy. When considering development in certain areas, particularly
Bradford City and locations along the valley floor within Airedale, this will also help achieve a
balanced view of the competing objectives of reducing flood risk and achieving sustainable
regeneration across the district.
10.8 Biodiversity and Wildlife
Biodiversity is the widespread term for biological diversity, which represents the richness and
variety of plants, birds, animals and insects throughout the world. Biodiversity is not just
about rare, or threatened species or habitats, but peoples day to day quality of life and
experience of nature.
Biodiversity conservation and caring for the district’s wildlife and their natural habitats is
important from both global and local points of view, and this has direct implications for the
health and quality of life of local people. Bradford has a wide range of ecosystems from
Pennine uplands to lowland pasture, woodland, parkland, river floodplain and numerous
reservoirs. While these environments have suffered degradation, such as habitat and
species loss to development and agricultural practices, they still support a rich diversity of
native plant and animal species.
A wide range of legislative provisions exists at the international and national level that can
impact on planning decisions affecting biodiversity and geological conservation issues.
Working with the Grain of Nature: a Biodiversity Strategy for England sets out the
Government’s vision for conserving and enhancing biological diversity, including the broad
aim that planning should have a minimal impact on biodiversity and enhance it wherever
possible. PPS1: Delivering Sustainable Development also supports biodiversity, stating
that the reversal of biodiversity loss/decline is a national planning priority. While supporting
the broad aim of the Biodiversity Strategy PPS9, which sets out planning policy on
333

Biodiversity and Geological Conservation, puts greater emphasis on restoration and
enhancement, based on the view that maintaining a wide range of species is vital to the
future.
Figure: RIGS in West Yorkshire
Source: West Yorkshire Geodiversity Action Plan (WY Geology Trust, 2008)
1. Addingham Edge Millstone
Quarry
2. Baildon Bank and Baildon
Green Quarries
3. Baildon Moor
4. Cow and Calf Rocks, Ilkley
5. Dimples Quarry, Haworth
6. Doubler Stones, Addingham
Moorside
7. Eldwick Crag and Quarry
8. Goitstock Waterfall,
Cullingworth
9. Horton Bank Country Park,
Bradford
10. Lanshaw Delves, Ilkley
11. Noon Nick, Shipley
12. Ponden Clough, Haworth
13. Royds Hall Beck, Wyke
14. Shipley Glen
15. Throstle Nest, Silsden
16. Wrose Hill, Shipley
The West Yorkshire Geodiversity Action Plan (WY Geology Trust, 2008) also provides a
framework to safeguard, manage and promote the geodiversity of the county, especially the
existing and potential Regionally Important Geological/Geomorphological Sites (RIGS).
Objectives of the Action Plan includes identification and monitoring of the RIGS in west
Yorkshire and ensuring that they are included on the LDF proposal map for each local
authority.
The Yorkshire & Humber Regional Biodiversity Strategy sets out a framework for the
integration of biodiversity into regional and local policies, programmes and processes, and
provides a means of promoting a coherent approach to biodiversity action in the region. It
complements and implements the biodiversity elements of the Regional Spatial Strategy and
identifies key mechanisms and actions required of different partners and sectors across the
region.
In addition to indicating the location of designated sites, the local development frameworks
should identify any areas or sites suitable for the restoration or creation of new priority
habitats that contribute to regional targets. Distinctive elements in the biodiversity resource
of the region, that are relevant to Bradford are upland heath and floodplain habitats, where
urban regeneration is seen as an opportunity to create and restore habitat corridors. The
LDF should also protect ancient woodland, to the extent of refusing proposals that would
harm it, whilst also protecting networks of connected corridors from development. Core
334

strategy policies especially need to reflect national, regional and local biodiversity priorities
and objectives, including those agreed by local biodiversity partnerships.
A Local Biodiversity Action Plan for the Bradford District (draft) was prepared in 2003.
Action Plans have been prepared for local species and habitats that have been highlighted
for their conservation concern. The LBAP gives in-depth descriptions of the different habitats
and species that can be found within the District.
Important objectives in the Bradford LBAP (draft) are- safeguarding locally and nationally
valued species and habitats and raising public awareness of and commitment towards local
biodiversity issues. Key habitats and species identified in the local BAP are set out in the
later section, as are the four tiers of protected sites. Additional strategic documents relating
to nature conservation are the Nature Conservation Strategy for Bradford and the more
recent Woodland Strategy. The latter expresses the Council’s commitment to improving the
amount of woodland cover and quality of woodlands in Bradford.
Existing policies in the RUDP offer strong support for the four levels of designated sites and
also wildlife corridors. Policy NE10 aims to ensure that development respects important
landscape and geological features and Policies NE11 and 12 require ecological appraisals
and landscape and wildlife enhancement schemes, where appropriate. Outside designated
areas, where there are competing priorities for development gain, a lack of information about
species and habitats and limited resources for evaluation can lead to the biodiversity asset
being undervalued.
10.8.1 Bradford’s Biodiversity: Habitat Summery
The habitats of the Bradford District are largely influenced by their underlying geology. The
Millstone Grits of the Southern Pennines to the west of the District give rise to substantial
areas of upland heathland and blanket bog, whilst the softer shales of the Coal Measures
have produced more woodlands, valley wetlands and unimproved grasslands. The demand
for development on the lower-lying Coal Measures has fragmented these habitats, although
unique habitats have also been created throughout the District as by-products of
industrialisation, such as reservoirs, canals and quarries.
The main habitats through the Bradford District can be categorised as:-
Upland: A combination of geology, historic agricultural practice and high rainfall has
produced the acidic infertile soils of the upland plateaux and this mosaic of expansive
heather moorland, blanket bog and acid grassland forms a substantial part of the District and
were the dramatic setting for Charlotte Bronte’s ‘Wuthering Heights’. However, much of it is
considered to be of international nature conservation value – Rombald’s Moor (Ilkley Moor,
Burley Moor and Bingley Moor) and the other South Pennine Moors in the Bradford District
(Oxenhope Moor, Haworth Moor, Stanbury Moor, Oakworth Moor and Keighley Moor) have
been designated as a Special Protection Area and Special Area of Conservation under
European Directives for their moorland breeding birds and their upland habitats.
335

Woodland: Only 4.6% of Bradford District is
woodland, compared to a national average of 10%.
Within the upland areas of the District, remnants of
woodlands remain in steep sided ravines (cloughs).
The trees here are a mixture of oak, birch, rowan,
alder and ash, with a surprisingly varied ground flora.
There are also a number of conifer plantations of
more recent origin, with a limited biodiversity value.
Much of the woodland in the lower lying valleys
originated in the mid nineteenth century when the
Victorians became aware of the value of planting
trees to replace resources lost to the Industrial
Revolution. Only fragments of ancient semi-natural
woodlands remain in the Bradford District, totalling
approximately 200 hectares. Middleton Woods at
Ilkley, Hirst Wood and Shipley Glen are good
examples.
Figure : Ecology and Heritage
Wetlands and watercourses: The characteristic
landform of the Bradford District has been carved as
a result of the Ice Age, with glacial overflow channels
and cloughs (steep sided tributary valleys) forming the frameworks for the water collection
from the uplands. Many of these overflow channels now form valuable wetlands. Numerous
reservoirs also collect water from the uplands which are not only an important water
catchments area but these water bodies and the surrounding wetlands also provide
important wintering and breeding habitats for the wide variety of wildfowl and waders. Small
streams, springs and wet flushes slow from the uplands into the Rivers Worth, Aire and
Wharfe. The Leeds and Liverpool Canal also acts as a valuable wildlife corridor across the
District and a network of neglected mill ponds – a legacy of Bradford’s industrial heritage –
have been re-colonised by amphibians. In addition there are a few fragments of lowland
raised mire, which are ecologically valuable but fragile and threatened habitats.
Two main rivers flow through the district, the River Aire and the River Wharfe. Both the River
Wharfe, which supports a variety of fish, including salmon, brown trout and grayling and the
Leeds and Liverpool Canal are designated as SEGIs for their nature conservation value.
The River Aire has been affected by years of pollution, although recent dramatic
improvements to water quality have seen otters return to these waters. There are also
numerous ponds and reservoirs of nature conservation importance, especially those which
support notable bird populations such as Thornton Moor Reservoir.
Grassland: Bradford District has a variety of grasslands, from the species-poor waterlogged,
acid grasslands of the uplands to the more fertile, mesotrophic grasslands on the valley floor.
In between, on the moorland fringes, occur the ‘in-bye grasslands’; traditionally enclosed for
winter pasture and summer hay. The inbye supports a range of invertebrates which support
a range of waders and birds such as twite, whose numbers are declining drastically.
However, many of the grasslands in the District are classified as ‘improved’ fertilised or
336

seeded as grass leys for more intensive stock-grazing, and therefore have limited wildlife
value.
The majority of the field boundaries of Bradford District consist of dry-stone walls, with few
hedges concentrated around areas such as Silsden, Addingham and Menston. Stone walls,
as wildlife habitats and linking other habitats as wildlife corridors, provide cover for mammals,
such as stoats, weasels, mice and voles, and create a variety of microclimates and niches for
the invertebrates which inhabit the wider environment.
Boundaries: The majority of the field boundaries of the district consist of dry-stone walls,
with a few hedges concentrated around areas such as Silsden, Addingham and Menston.
Stone walls, as wildlife habitats and linking other habitats as wildlife corridors, provide cover
for mammals and create a variety of microclimates and niches for the invertebrates which
inhabit the wider environment. Hedgerows, although of limited extent throughout the district,
also act as important wildlife corridors between other habitats as well as support their own
range of flora and fauna. Hedges are an important habitat for a variety of birds as well as
bats and small mammals. Many hedgerows in the district however have been neglected or
poorly managed.
Quarries: Bradford District has a legacy of abandoned mineral quarries, which have
developed into good wildlife habitats, supporting birds such as peregrines which nest on the
cliff faces, as well as bats in old mine shafts.
10.8.2 Wildlife: Species Summery
Flora: Bradford District’s climate and its predominantly acid, often water-logged, soils do not
favour a particularly diverse range of flora. The habitats which are formed by the range of
plant communities in composite are perhaps more valued than the individual species.
Nevertheless, it does host an array of interesting species, with some notable rarities.
Mammals: Bradford District contains a variety of mammala, according to the range of
habitats. In particular, have healthy populations of deer and badger. The deer numbers are
increasing and are generally migrating from the north towards Calderdale in the south west
and also east along the Leeds and Liverpool Canal 106 . Badgers are also well presented
throughout the District and successfully protected against persecution.
Recent exciting news about the District’s mammals includes the return of the otter, with
sightings on both the Rivers Wharfeand Aire, indicating cleaner water quality and the
recovery of this, once seriously threatened, species. However, the news is not so good for
the water voles whose number in the district have plummeted. The population of Brown hare
has also been reduced by illegal poaching and habitat loss, although they are still present in
the district in key strongholds. Unfortunately, red squirrel is no longer found in the Bradford
District.
106 Bradford Deer Survey 1996
337

The District has only 3 or 4 of the 16 species of mainland UK bats living in a variety of
roosting sites such as trees, buildings (old and new), old parkland and bridges, especially
over rivers.
Birds: A range of bird species can be found in all habitats throughout, especially on the
moorlands. A total of 241 bird species have been recorded within the Bradford Ornithological
Group recording area, although there area covers places outside the district.
Amphibians and Reptiles: Amphibians and reptiles, however, are limited to the common
species; great crested newts are unrecorded in the Bradford area. Frogs and toads are
widespread in the district, though their numbers are thought to be declining as wetlands are
drained and ponds infilled.
Invertebrates: Apart from bees, butterflies, moths and dragonflies many invertev=brates in
Bradford District are under-recorded. However, the wide range of habitats supports a good
range of known species.The heathland habitat of Harden Moor, in particular, is known to
support an interesting range of bees, wasps as well as several ant species.
West Yorkshire was the northern limit for some butterflies and insects, however with global
warming some species have increased their range northwards and the loss of diverse
grasslands generally will have a long-term effect on these populations, with subsequent
consequences throughout the ecosystem as a whole.
One of the locally important invertebrates, the white clawed or freshwater crayfish, generally
found in clean rivers and canals, is unfortunately suffering from a variety of problems and its
location is now limited to the River Wharfe.
A detail description of these habitats and species are to be found in the Bradford Local
Biodiversity Action Plan (draft) report.
The Bradford Local Biodiversity Action Plan (draft), in common with many other LBAPs,
includes a series of detailed action plans for priority habitat and species. These cover firstly
the current status of the habitats/species, factors causing loss or decline in the local context
and current action being undertaken, followed by more detailed recommendations for site
safeguard, habitat management, habitat creation, policy requirements, data needs, research
and advisory work.
The following table depicts the priority habitat and species from the UK Biodiversity Action
Plan which are found in the Bradford district and also local priority habitats and species
which have been selected by the Bradford Biodiversity Partnership as being important and
locally threatened.
Habitats and species in bold indicate those which have been chosen for the first trenche of
the Local Biodiversity Action Plan for Bradford District. Other habitats and species will
hopefully have action plans written for them as part of the subsequent phases of the Bradford
Biodiversity Action Plan.
338

Table: Habitats and Species Found in the Bradford District
HABITATS FOUND IN THE BRADFORD DISTRICT
National/Yorkshire and Humberside Key Habitats Local Key Habitats*
Species Rich Hedgerows Upland Oakwood In-Bye Pasture
Lowland Heathland Upland Mixed Ashwood River Corridors
Upland Heathland Wet Woodlands
Fens Lowland Hay Meadow
Reedbeds Lowland Dry Acid Grassland
Blanket Bog
SPECIES FOUND IN THE BRADFORD DISTRICT
National/Yorkshire and Humberside Key Species Local Key Species*
Water Vole Linnet Lesser Twayblade
Brown Hare Tree Sparrow Yellowhammer
Otter Spotted Flycatcher Lapwing
Pipistrelle Black Grouse Twite
Skylark Song Thrush Green Hairstreak Butterfly
Reed Bunting White Clawed Crayfish
White Letter
Butterfly
Hairstreak
Bullfinch
Grey Partridge
Killarney Fern Blue Butterflies
* Selected by the Bradford Biodiversity Partnership as being locally significant in the Bradford District
The LBAP acknowledges the Council’s role in the protection of these species and habitats,
and states that ‘site and species protection policies, negotiations as part of the development
control process and the using of planning conditions and Section 106 Agreements all provide
mechanisms to protect, manage and enhance the existing areas of wildlife importance and
establish new areas for wildlife’.
10.8.3 Biodiversity Assets
The wildlife interest of the Bradford District is influenced by its climate, topography and
latitude, with many species at the limit of their range. On a national scale the climate of the
Bradford District lies on the transition zone between the warmer drier lowlands of Britain and
the cool, wet, uplands. The microcimate is influenced by topography, whereby the sheltered
and more humid valleys and cloughs cut into the Pennines following glaciation, contrast with
the open, exposed moorland plateaux. The soils closely reflect the pattern of bedrock and
superficial deposits, varying from acidic peat and thin, nutrient-poor brown earth soils and
badly drained boulder clay deposits from the last Ice Age along the Wharfe and Aire valleys
to the east.
There are 4 levels of designated nature conservation sites within Bradford District. In
addition to the 4 SSSIs, there are 21 Sites of Ecological or Geological Importance and 16
Regionally Important Geological / Geomorphological Sites (RIGS). One of these SSSIs, the
South Pennine Moors, represented by Rombalds Moor and Haworth Moor has been
339

designated a Special Protection Area (SPA) due to the importance of its breeding bird
populations. It is also a Special Area of Conservation (SAC), under the European Habitats
Directive because it contains habitats which are rare or threatened within a European
context. In addition, there are also 152 sites of local nature conservation value and Bradford
Wildlife Areas (BWAs),, designated not only for their biodiversity interest, but also for their
community benefits in respect of their accessibility for the quiet enjoyment of nature, their
educational value or their heritage associations (such as mill ponds).
Table : Biodiversity Asset
Designation No Area/Details
Special Protection Area (SPA) SPA 1 No 4489 ha – South Pennine Moors
Special Area of Conservation (SAC) SAC 1 No 4489 ha – South Pennine Moors
South Pennine Moors, Bingley
Sites of Special Scientific Interest (SSSI) SSSI 4 No South Bog, Trench Meadows.
Yeadon Brick Works
Sites of Ecological/ Geological Interest (SEGI) SEGI
Ecological 21 No
340ha – Leeds/Liverpool Canal
and River Wharfe
Geological 16 No
Third Tier Sites Over 100 Yet to be verified
For detail description of the 4 SSSIs, including maps and most up to date condition
summery, are to be found on natural England website by clicking the link below-
http://www.sssi.naturalengland.org.uk/Special/sssi/search.cfm
10.9 Agricultural Land
Most of the agricultural land in Bradford consists of improved and semi-improved pastures on
the upland fringes of the north-west of the District or the neutral (neither alkaline nor acidic)
grasslands to the east and south of the City. Agriculture in Bradford is generally based
around rearing stock, mainly sheep, although cattle rearing take place in areas along the
river valleys and on the lowlands to the east of the District.
Most of the farmland in Bradford District can be described as marginal, constrained by
climate and physical topography. Nearly half of the farmland is classed as Grade 4 or 5 107 ;
that is, land with severe limitations which significantly restricts the range of crops and is
mainly suitable for pasture grazing. However, there are also some grade 3 lands made up of
alluvial soils along the flood plains of the River Wharfe and River Aire which are more
productive.
107 The ALC system classifies land into five grades, with Grade 3 subdivided into Subgrades 3a and
3b. Grade one is best quality and Grade five is poorest quality. A number of consistent criteria used for
assessment which include climate (temperature, rainfall, aspect, exposure, frost risk), site (gradient,
micro-relief, flood risk) and soil (depth, structure, texture, chemicals, stoniness).
340

Figure: Bradford agricultural land classification 108
An interactive map showing the agricultural land classifications within Bradford can be
viewed online by clicking the link below.
http://www.magic.gov.uk/website/magic/opener.htm?startTopic=maglandclass&xygridref=408
406,438698&startScale=250000
Countryside recreation is increasingly important as a rural land use and people are visiting
the countryside in increasing numbers. However, it is important to recognise the impact
visitors have on the countryside and that the pressures which result need to be carefully
managed in order to prevent the quality of the countryside from being diminished.
10.10 Climate Change and Energy Efficiency
On average, each person in Bradford produces a total greenhouse gas emissions equivalent
to 6.5 tonnes of CO2 per year just from energy and transport use. With over 485,000 people
108 http://www.self-willed-land.org.uk/rep_res/rur_vis_bfd.ppt
Grade 3
Grade 4
Grade 5
341

living in Bradford, that equates to roughly 3 million* tonnes of CO2 in total. 109 So, cutting
carbon emissions and promoting sustainable living as part of the fight against climate change
are one of the top corporate agendas for Bradford council.
The draft Corporate Plan 2009-2012, submitted to the Council in March 2009 for approval,
makes a firm commitment to working towards a sustainable environment. One of its Strategic
Delivery Priorities (SDP) is ‘contributing to a more sustainable environment’ throughout the
district.
The government has set targets to reduce CO2 emissions by 34% by 2020 and 50% by 2080,
from a baseline taken in 1990. A more locally adopted target (NI186) is to reduce district’s
CO2 emissions by 11.4% by 2010 from the 2005 baseline.
Figure: Bradford District’s CO2 emission 2006
Source: CBMDC
42% of CO2 emissions in the district are from business and industry and 17% from road
transport. Between 2005 and 2006, CO2 emissions in the district fell from 2,957 kt CO2 to
2,945 kt CO2, a reduction of 0.4%. 110
In order to meet targets by 2010, emissions must reduce from 6.1 tonnes CO2 per capita to
5.4 tonnes per capita.
The District has also developed its Sustainable Community Strategy. One of its stated
priorities is improving the environment of the District. The key issues have been identified as:
1. Improving the Neighbourhood Environment so that the Bradford District is a clean
and attractive place to live and work.
2. Resource Efficiency so that people and organisations across the District protect the
natural environment and reduce waste
109
BMDC (2008) Climate Change and Bradford District [online]. CBMDC [cited 20 June 2008].
Accessed on :
*Statistics taken from DEFRA End User Local and Regional Estimates of Carbon Emissions, 2004 findings
110 Bradford and Airedale NHS Pct (2009) Joint Strategic Needs Assessment 2009.
342

3. Climate Change so that the Bradford District is a place which takes action to use
energy efficiently and to tackle the impact of climate change
Bradford Council is undertaking a range of actions to improve its own performance and to act
as a community leader for the District in addressing climate change:
• In partnership with the Carbon Trust, the Council has undertaken a Carbon
Management Plan, through which it aims to reduce the levels of carbon dioxide
emissions it is responsible for by 20% compared to the ‘business as usual’ scenario
by the end of the financial year 2011/12.111 The Council is seeking to achieve Ecomanagement
and Audit Scheme (EMAS) accreditation by 2011-2012;
• Sustainability appraisal guidance is being developed in partnership with Bradford
Centre Regeneration, the University of Bradford and Bradford College;
• The Council is working with other local authorities in West Yorkshire to develop the
DEFRA sponsored warm zone initiative to promote and financially support energy
improvements for fuel-poor households;
• The Council is working with the Ove Arup Consultancy to look at the relationship
between economic growth and carbon emissions and assess how sustainable
production and consumption can co-exist in the District;
• In partnership with Future Energy Yorkshire, it is looking at setting up an Energy
Service Company. Based on the Woking Council model, such a structure would
enable initiatives such as district heating schemes to be connected into an energy
efficient local energy network, making the District less reliant on the national grid;
• The Climate Change Plan proposes an eight- year timescale to achieve
transformational change in the key work areas, ensuring that clear connections can
be made between current and planned activity with particular regard to climate
proofing and carbon dioxide emissions
• Bradford is one of over 200 Councils which have signed the Nottingham
Declaration on Climate Change which commits them to actively tackle climate
change in their area and work with others to reduce emissions country-wide.
Currently only 3% of the total energy used across the council is obtained from renewable
sources. So in order to reduce its own carbon emission the council is taking a leading role to
switch their energy consumption into renewable sources in council buildings, fleet services,
passenger transport, car business travel and street lighting, and also to encourage the
private sector and individual residents to respond similarly.
111 BMDC (2007) Carbon Management Programme 2007- 2012 Strategic and Implementation Plan.
Report dated October 2007.Bradford Council.
343

The Council has direct management control of 400 of the 600+ operational Buildings. Most of
the higher energy using sites consists of large civic buildings such as City Hall, office blocks
and leisure centres and are located in the city and town centres. The ongoing Ecomanagement
and Audit Scheme (EMAS) has already established baselines for 68 high
energy using buildings and taken steps to reduce energy are being built up through individual
building action plans.
Through 2006, the Council has been gathering data of the highest energy using buildings as
part of the European Display Initiative which supports the Energy Performance of Buildings
Directive. The buildings are given an A-G rating for three areas- energy use, carbon dioxide
emissions and water management, and certificates are publicly displayed to help staff and
public using those buildings to consider the impact of their actions on energy consumption.
Although the cost of energy for all Bradford schools accounts for 57% of the Council’s total
energy bill, it has not been included in this programme. As energy budgets are devolved to
schools, the emissions and spend cannot be fully controlled. For this reason, schools are
excluded from the Carbon Management Programme. Schools are supported by the council in
reducing their carbon emissions through awareness training and technical support.
Climate change is already impacting on the delivery of some of the council services-
• Growing season is 40 days longer- impacting on grass cutting and maintenance of
parks and open spaces
• Mild winter- less gritting. In 2006 winter the council gritted 27 times compared to
annual average of 95 times (in severe winter it could be 140 times).
• Flooding in Stockbridge area in 2000.
• Rise in the number of uncontrolled fires on Ilkley Moor.
The cost of tackling these will be increasing if decisions are not made ‘future-proofed’.
Regeneration across the district, particularly in the city centre, is important but growth needs
to be within environmental limits. The council, with its partners, is therefore working towards
achieving environmental sustainability through ‘future-proof’ regeneration and by tackling the
factors affecting climate change. A report to the Council’s Environment & Waste
Management Improvement Committee in March 2009 has identified the major areas of
concern around these issues and highlighted the strategic recommendations and key actions
taken and/or ongoing to make progress in this aspect. Details of this are included in appendix
2 of this chapter.
The Council has agreed the development of its own Climate Change Action Plan, which will
be an 8-year programme with targets and resources for carbon savings and adaptation
measures. As an initial step the council’s Environment and Waste Management Improvement
Committee has launched the first report on climate change in June 2008 which focussed on
the impact of regeneration in the district.
Housing accounts for around 30% of the UK’s total energy use and 27% of carbon dioxide
emissions. The council views that retrofitting of some of the existing housing stock is
344

important as they will constitute a large part of the houses in 2030. DEFRA has already
granted £300k for the Warm Zone scheme, covering two inner city wards, offering advice and
subsidies on loft insulation, cavity wall insulation and draft proofing.
Although Bradford has been named the “Greenest City in the UK” in the recent Forum for the
Future survey112, there are still major issues that need to be addressed effectively. The city
scored well on air and water quality, waste per head and ecological footprint but less well for
‘Quality of Life’ and ‘Future Proofing’. One of the many ways to achieve this should be to
concentrate on underused resources in the district. For example, Bradford Woodlands could
be better employed for woodchip biomass heating. It is used in City Hall & Ilkley Town Hall
but could be more widely used e.g. in schools. The city has the most cost effective UK wind
firm at Ovenden Moor, so more use of such wind technology could be better promoted.
10.11 Key Facts:
• Fine particles and nitrogen dioxide are the two pollutants likely to have the most
impact on the District’s air quality. Heavy traffic movement is identified as one of the
major sources of these pollutants. The District also has a number of industrial
processes subject to local authority air pollution control but they are unlikely to
cause a breach of national air quality objectives.
• Water quality within Bradford district tends to be ‘poor or bad’ in urban areas and
‘better’ in the Aire and Wharfe catchment. Increased investments in sewage
treatment and improved monitoring of trade effluents have brought overall biological
and chemical improvements in district’s waterways. However issues related to
pesticides, pathogens, industrial detergents are still to be explored further; but
currently they are unlikely to cause any detrimental effect to the river ecosystem or
public health.
• Poor quality of some parts of the inner city/town urban environment, particularly due
to fly-tipping, litter and dereliction, is a major problem and studies suggest that it
causes the affluent residents of those areas to move out towards the suburbs and
outskirts of the District. Most up to date studies and opinion surveys however show
that public satisfaction about the cleanliness of the district’s streets and
neighbourhoods have increased in recent years.
• Land contamination is not expected to be a major problem although the precise
extent of the contamination is still being investigated. Existing assessment and
knowledge however suggest that the potential contamination sources are limited to
previous manufacturing and industrial activity and treatment or disposal of waste.
112 BBC (2007). Bradford tops green cities league [online]. BBC [cited 18 June 2008]. Accessed on:
345

Sources:
• The delineation of Bradford’s natural floodplains is well understood as experienced
from the recent flood events. The main flood risk areas lies along the course of river
Wharfe, River Aire and Silsden beck covering their catchment areas mainly in Ilkely,
Burley, Stockbridge, Shipley, Bingley, Apperley Bridge and Silsden. Developments
in those floodplains are strictly controlled by dedicated planning policies and through
extensive consultation process with related partners including the the Environment
Agency.
• The wildlife and habitat interest in Bradford District is influenced by its climate,
topography and latitude, with many species at the limit of their range. There is a
range of designated nature conservation sites within Bradford some of which are
specially protected because of their nationally and internationally recognised
species and habitats. There are also a number of Wildlife Areas and sites with
Local Nature Conservation value which, apart from their biodiversity interest, provide
community benefits in terms of quiet enjoyment of nature and educational value.
• Climate change is a major concern worldwide and it has already impacted on some
of the council’s services. There are ongoing schemes and strategies that are
coordinated to tackle this issue in the district primarily by focussing on energy
efficiency through better design and by exploring potentials for alternative
technologies.
• The overall potential for Bradford to meet the regional and national renewable
energy target is lower than the average for LA's in the region. Although there is good
potential to make alternative technologies, such as biomass and photovoltaic, more
commercially viable, there is a lower potential for wind turbine developments across
the district.
• There has been no comprehensive assessment of the archaeological history of the
district. However, desktop analysis and field investigation of certain development
sites have indicated the presence of early medieval settlements in Bradford which
flourished in later centuries most prominently surrounding the cathedral.
• BBC (2008). Beneath Bradford’s Streets! [online]. BBC [cited 19 June 2008].
Available:
• BCR (2005) Masterplan Framework for the Public Realm of Bradford- Feasibility
Study. Report dated August 2005. Arup.
• BCR (2005) Utilities and Drainage Study. Report dated October 2005. Arup.
346

• CBMDC (2001) Inspection Strategy for Contaminated Land in the Bradford District.
Report dated December 2001. Bradford Council.
• CBMDC (2002) The Bradford District Multi-Agency Environmental Strategy 2002-
2007 (Draft for Consultation). Reprt dated February 2002. CBMDC.
• CBMDC (2003) Bradford Strategic flood Risk Assessment. Report dated March 2003.
JBA Consulting.
• CBMDC (2005) City Centre Conservation Area Assessment. Report dated October
2005. CBMDC.
• CBMDC (2005) Municipal Waste Management Strategy. Report dated October 2005.
CBMDC.
• CBMDC (2005) Review to consider the Future of Water Management and the
Associated Problems of Flooding in the Bradford District. Report dated March 2005.
Policy Development Service, CBMDC.
• CBMDC (2006). Bradford District Environment Partnership Strategy. Report dated
July 2006. CBMDC.
• CBMDC (2007) Air Quality in the City of Bradford Metropolitan District-Progress
Report 2007. Report dated December 2007. Department of Environment and
Neighbourhood, CBMDC.
• CBMDC (2007) Bradford City Centre Area Action Plan Sustainability Appraisal Final
Scoping Report. Report dated September 2007. Planning Service, Department of
Regeneration, CBMDC.
• CBMDC (2007) Bradford District Environmental Strategy 2008-11. Report dated
2007. CBMDC.
• CBMDC (2007) Bradford District Sustainable Community strategy- Information pack
and Fact Sheets. Policy Development Service, Bradford Council.
• CBMDC (2007) Carbon Management Programme 2007- 2012 Strategic and
Implementation Plan. Report dated October 2007.Bradford Council.
• CBMDC (2007) Sustainability Appraisal Scoping report for the Open Space and
Recreational Built Facilities SPD. Report dated March 2007. CBMDC.
• CBMDC (2008) Climate Change and Bradford District [online]. CBMDC [cited 20 June
2008]. Accessed on :
347

• AWAY (2010) West Yorkshire Adaptation Action Plan. Association of West Report
Dated September 2010. Yorkshire Authorities.
• CBMDC (2009) Air Quality Action Plan for Bradford District –Draft. Report dated June
2009. CBMDC.
• Genecon (2010) BCR Performance Framework: Annual Update 2010/11-Draft Final
report. Report dated February 2010. Genecon Consultancy Ltd.
• Keith, K. (2000). Broadway Centre, Hall Ings, Bradford, West Yorkshire: Desk-based
Assessment. Unpublished WYAS report (R778, 2 vols).
• Waterman Burrow Crocker (2003) Flood Risk Assessment-Foster Square, Bradford.
Report dated March 2003. Waterman Burrow Crocker.
• Y & H Assembly (2003) Yorkshire and Humber Regional Waste Strategy. Report
dated July 2003. Y & H Assembly.
• YHREF (2009) YH Regional Environment Enhancement Strategy 2008-13. Yorkshire
and Humber Regional Environment Forum.
• AECOM (2011) Low Carbon and Renewable Energy Capacity in Y&H-Final Draft.
Report Dated February 2011. Local Govt Yorkshire and Humber.
348

Appendix 1:
Maps of Bradford AQMAs
The City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council Air Quality Management Order
(No.1), 2006.
The Area surrounded by the red line has been designated as an Air Quality Management
Area
349

The City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council Air Quality Management Order
(No.1), 2006.
The Area surrounded by the red line has been designated as an Air Quality Management
Area
350

The City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council Air Quality Management Order
(No.1), 2006.
The Area surrounded by the red line has been designated as an Air Quality Management
Area
351

The City of Bradford Metropolitan District Council Air Quality Management Order
(No.1), 2006.
The Area surrounded by the red line has been designated as an Air Quality Management
Area
352

Appendix 2:
CLIMATE CHANGE ISSUES AND STRATEGIC RECOMMENDATIONS AND KEY ACTIONS TO BE TAKEN BY THE COUNCIL
Recommendations Current Issues and Actions Taken/Ongoing
1. The Council, working with its partners, should
take a lead on action to adapt to, and mitigate
climate change in Bradford District.
2. The Council and the Local Strategic
Partnership should undertake regular and
transparent monitoring of the environmental
sustainability of regeneration and development
taking place in the district.
• Climate Change features within the Big Plan (Sustainable Community Strategy). Aligned delivery
planning to follow.
• Partnership project to recruit a District Carbon Reduction Officer to conduct research and feasibility
studies into how best the district can reduce CO2 emissions. Research to include renewable
technology, Planning guidance (linked to LDF) and Building Schools for the Future
• A Climate Change Strategy for the Council is in development.
• National Local Indicator 186 has been adopted as part of the Local Area Agreement with the
Government Office. This relates to district wide reduction of Carbon Dioxide emissions. A target of
11.4% reduction has been agreed to be achieved by 2011.
• Eco-city campaign in existence and under development. 20 organisations have signed up, enabling
the sharing of practice on the pledges on CO2 reduction and adaptation.
• Working Neighbourhood Fund, £160,000 has been allocated to the Partnership for District carbon
reduction work. £30k match funding will be provided by each: Bradford University, Bradford and
Airedale tPCT and Incommunities, totalling an additional £90k for 2009-11.
• Regeneration projects incorporate environmental sustainability into the project development,
appraisal and management processes.
• Such an approach is prioritised because environmental sustainability is understood to be an integral
part of regeneration in Bradford district.
(see below – recommendation 7 - for information on sustainability at strategy and specific project level)
353

3. The Council should ensure that it is robustly
employing all its existing planning powers and
fully exploits the opportunities presented by the
development of the Local Development
Framework in order to ensure that the
regeneration of the district is environmentally
sustainable.
• Existing policies in RUDP and approved Regional Spatial Strategy (RSS) aim to deal with
environmental sustainability and were subject to Sustainability Appraisals (SA) as part of preparation
process in 2002-03.
• Supplementary Planning Document on Sustainable Design Guide adopted by the Council in 2007,
supports existing policies in RUDP.
• Policy ENV5 in the RSS sets out an interim target requiring new developments to secure at least
10% of their energy from decentralised and renewable or low-carbon sources, where feasible and
viable, until local targets emerge. Work is ongoing with the Regional Assembly to establish the best
methods of achieving targets.
• The Council needs to consider how Bradford implements this provision in advance of Local
Development Framework (LDF). (There is an opportunity in the LDF to set local requirements for
sustainable buildings in advance of the progressive increases in national standards that are
anticipated to lead to housing with zero carbon emissions. However any local requirement set for
sustainable buildings and/or a target percentage of the energy to be used in new development from
decentralised and renewable or lowcarbon energy sources, will have to take account of local
circumstances, the viability of projects and the need to deliver housing targets).
• Emerging LDF work has established a SA framework in line with national guidance and EU
Sustainable Environment Appraisal Directive that will assess LDF proposals against common
sustainability criteria and will inform decisions on strategy and approach. The SA framework includes
economic and social considerations as well as environmental.
• National requirements will ensure new housing is carbon neutral by 2018.
• With its partner, Bradford City Regeneration (BCR) planning legislation is used to ensure new
developments take account of flooding risks. Plans are scrutinised by both the Council’s Drainage
service and the Environment Agency.
• BCR seek to encourage developers to exceed minimum planning law requirements.
354

4. All proposals for new developments in the
district should be required to take account of the
environmental and quality of life impacts of
transport.
• All BCR sponsored development meets BREEAM requirements for sustainable disposal of site
waste.
A safe, efficient and integrated transport system is the key to quality of life for those living, working and visiting
Bradford. It is also important to the economic prospects of the District. Our aim is to produce a safe and
effective modern transport system which caters for the need of all users, enhanced by regeneration, with an
attractive public transport network, reduced reliance on the car and much improved air quality.
The West Yorkshire Local Transport Plan (LTP) provides the framework for implementing transport schemes
and tackles environmental and quality of life issues by:
• Increasing opportunities for walking and cycling by connecting housing, employment and leisure
sites with green pathways, such as the Shipley to Spen Valley Cycle Route, the Great Northern Trail
and Airedale Greenway
• Introducing new bus services where accessibility is poor e.g. between BRI and local communities in
north Bradford and introduction of FreeCityBus in City Centre
• Investigating ways to reduce congestion such as High Occupancy Vehicle (HOV) lanes e.g. M606,
and encouraging people to car share e.g. Bradford Carshare scheme is now well established, with
600 members who have saved over 50 tonnes of CO2
• Promoting active travel which contributes to delivering the health agenda through both infrastructure
(e.g. implementation of the Rights of Way Improvement Plan and development of cycle ways) and
other measures (e.g. promotional events such as Bike Week and cycle proficiency training in
schools)
• LTP partners working with LDF teams to promote sustainable land use planning by reducing the
need to travel, encouraging walking, cycling and use of public transport and having denser
development in more accessible locations.
• WY Planning Authorities and Metro are including planning obligations for developers to provide free
MetroCards to residents of new developments to encourage public transport use.
• It is possible to reduce the impact of transport on the environment, especially with regard to its effect
on air quality and its contribution to climate change by reducing the length and number of car
journeys and encouraging the use of alternative modes of transport.
• Non motorised forms of transport are being encouraged through promotion of Travel Plans for
355

5. The Council and its partners must urgently
seek ways in which to address the energy
efficiency of existing privately owned and
privately rented housing
schools and businesses.
• Work with schools in Bradford to promote walking and cycling includes initiatives such as the
provision of pedestrian and cycling training, assistance in establishing walking buses, the
organisation of events as part of Bike Week, and support for campaigns such as ‘Walk to School
Week’. 144 schools in Bradford have an approved school travel plan which qualifies them for capital
grant funding from central Government to support various measures such as installation of cycle
parking, facilities for pedestrians and safety improvements
• The LDF core strategy will ensure that all new developments in the district promote sustainable
methods of transport. Travel plans for new developments facilitated through the planning process
are starting to be delivered as the developments come on stream. All types of development affected:
retail, residential and commercial.
• All development proposals likely to have significant travel implications are required to undertake a
Transport Assessment to identify the impact of the development on the transport network and put
forward measures for addressing any adverse impact.
• Over 30 employers in Bradford have now signed up to the West Yorkshire Travel Plan network which
demonstrates that they are committed to implementing travel plan measures in their organisations
• Bradford Carshare scheme is now well established, with 600 members who have saved over 50
tonnes of CO2.
• The Council, with its partners, is investing £1.5 million in Bradford’s Community Warmth Scheme,
targeted at 170,000 homes in private ownership or private renting.
• Three wards have been completed, with residents self referring. 2,600 energy efficient measures
have been installed and 2,750 referrals made to partner organisations for further action.
• The programme now makes it possible to offer free cavity wall insulation across the district and free
loft insulation for over the 60’s and to people on benefits.
• At completion, the programme will have treated 37,000 cavity walls and 48,000 lofts.
Three city centre developments, facilitated by Bradford City Regeneration will achieve high energy efficiency
standards:-
356

6. Accessible and practical advice and support
on environmental sustainability should be made
available and promoted to local businesses.
i) Exchange Court – CBMDC/YF/BCR and HMCS, designing the new Magistrates Court to
BREEAM 2008 Excellent Standards.
ii) The New Victoria Place development, designed to BREEAM Excellent Standard
iii) Listerhills Student village, designed to BREEAM Outstanding and has full planning permission
NRF supported project: Environment Made Easy
A variety of business support organisations exist to encourage businesses to address their environmental
impacts. Many offer free support in a specialised area. Some have a national remit, others are regional.
However, many business are unaware of this support and some find it confusing.
In response, the BBEF (Better Business Environment Forum) developed the ‘Green Pages’ directory funded
by Bradford District Economic Development Partnership. The booklet signposts businesses to over twenty
environmental support programmes open to businesses in Bradford including:
• Free waste audits from Envirowise;
• Free energy audits provided by the Carbon Trust;
• A free online degree course in Sustainable Waste Management from Leeds University;
• Assistance turning waste into a valuable resource with Why Waste;
• Grants for environmental projects from Manufacturing Advisory Service;
• Grants for Capital Investment from Yorkshire Fund Managers.
LEGI and Kickstart advisors help to disseminate the booklet to a wide audience.
To ensure the booklet reached its appropriate target audience it was distributed to all businesses in the
Bradford postal area with over ten employees. The booklet was not mailed to the services sector as that is
considered to have a lower environmental impact.
The project has created awareness of contemporary environmental issues facing Bradford businesses. This in
turn has effected the following:
• Amount of waste sent to Landfill
357

7. The Council, when carrying out its economic
development function, should actively
encourage, and also promote the opportunities
presented by ‘green’ enterprise and the ‘green’
economy.
• Amount of non-renewable resources consumed by businesses
• Amount of climate change gases emitted by businesses
• Demand for environmental services.
Enterprise Europe Yorkshire
The Enterprise Europe Network provides a local gateway to a wealth of information on doing business, finding
collaborative partners and increasing competitiveness in Europe. It is delivered out of the Economic
Development Service within Bradford Council.
EEY sit on the Steering Group for the Chamber co-ordinated Better Business Environment Forum – see above
– which provides a local green business club for Bradford businesses.
Working with BBEF, Enterprise Europe Yorkshire provides seminars on a range of issues, including assisting
businesses to meet the sustainability goals of local authorities articulated through their procurement
processes.
EEY provides information direct to local businesses on European environmental legislation, and regularly
posts news on their website (www.ee-yorkshire.com) – for example a recent post focused on a new retail
forum established to promote sustainable consumption.
The economic strategy for Bradford identifies the development of environmental industries as a major growth
opportunity for the district and commits to supporting the development of this sector.
• Shipley sustainable resource park Phase 1: A reclaimed and refurbished industrial unit now houses
two social enterprises – one of which is in the green business sector – Aire Valley recycling.
Phase 2 is being considered for implementation – would reclaim 5ha of heavily contaminated land,
to create a green business park.
Bradford Together sets out in a single document opportunities for partners and suppliers to help the Council
meet its sustainability objectives and has been adopted as part of the procurement methodology.
358

8. The Council and its partners should
proactively campaign and lobby for the powers
needed to enable the district to adapt to and
mitigate climate change.
The opportunities for business partners and suppliers to help the Council meet its sustainability objectives lie
in the tender process. Organisations wishing to tender for supplies of goods or services to the Council, or for
development of Council-owned land or property in the District, will be asked to make clear their contributions
to sustainability objectives as laid out in Bradford Together. For example, when Procurement Unit considers
tenders for a development in the district, regard will be given to provision for employment of local labour, use
of energy from sustainable sources, commitment to spend percentage of contract value with the local supply
chain. It is anticipated that this practice will become increasingly commonplace among developers and lead to
increased competition in the sustainability content of tenders.
Bradford Together forms part of the Council’s contribution to implementation of the Big Plan in relation to the
shared outcomes of sustainability.
• The Council and University , set up an Eco city pledge in March 2007.
• All Council Directorates have been asked to describe their contributions to the Prince of Wales’ May
Day Pledge.
• A full Council resolution to contact Government for support in relation to climate change and oil
dependency was made in xxxx
• The District Environment Strategy will be presented to Executive in April 2009. That will promote for
the Council and its partners in the Local strategic Partnership a range of actions and criteria that will
positively support environmental sustainability.
• The Council is a member of the regional climate change forum and uses the forum to represent the
district’s priorities.
• During 2009, the district’s Environment Partnership will be working with the UK Climate Improvement
Programme, to model “good practice “to reduce carbon emissions, in business operations with
partners- including the Council.
359

11. MINERALS AND WASTE MANAGEMENT
This section of the report provides details about the existing Minerals resources within the
district and highlights the issues being faced by the industry. The section also reviews the
district’s Waste Management issues- the types of wastes produced in Bradford, how this is
currently being managed and the challenges faced by the Local Authority to meet the
regional and national waste management targets.
The information used in this section were mostly derived from:
• Waste DPD Issues and Options (CBMDC, 2009)
• Core Strategy Further Issues and Options: Topic Paper 7 and 8 (CBMDC, 2008)
• Municipal Waste Management Strategy (CBMDC, 2005)
• Yorkshire & Humber Regional Waste Strategy (2003)
• Identifying mineral resources in the Bradford District – local distinctiveness and
protection of heritage (Jon Ackroyd, 2008)
• British Geological Survey, 2009. Mineral Resource Data for City of Bradford MDC
• Yorkshire and Humber Region Aggregates Working Party Annual Report 2008.
• Yorkshire and Humber Regional Aggregates Working Party: Sand and Gravel Study
(British Geological Survey, 2004).
11.1 Minerals
National minerals planning policy is set out in Minerals Planning Guidance Notes (MPGs)
and the new replacement Minerals Policy Statements (MPSs). The key national policy
document relevant to the forward planning of minerals in the Bradford District is Minerals
Policy Statement 1: Planning and Minerals (MPS1). MPS1 sets out the Government’s key
overarching policies and principles which apply to all minerals, applying the principles of
sustainable development.
The key policy messages in MPS1 are:
- the need to maintain sufficient supply to meet the anticipated need for minerals
consistent with environmental acceptability;
- the need to protect designated areas of national and international importance;
- the need to encourage efficient use of extracted materials and the use of
substitute or recycled materials in place of primary minerals wherever practicable;
and
- the need to ensure that where extraction does take place, restoration and
aftercare of sites are of high quality.
The Yorkshire and Humber Plan Regional Spatial Strategy to 2026 (RSS) follows the
overarching key polices set out in MPS1, but gives a regional context. However the RSS
focuses on aggregate production and does not specifically refer to building stone, roofing
stone or flagstone production in the region.
360

The RSS states that development plans should seek to safeguard mineral deposits in the
region from sterilisation by other types of development and provide for an adequate and
steady supply of minerals by maintaining a landbank for all nationally and regionally
significant minerals. The RSS also commits the region to maximising the use of secondary
and recycled aggregates to reduce the need for primary extraction by encouraging facilities
involved in the production of such material, especially in West Yorkshire. The intended
outcome of regional minerals policy is that:
- Mineral deposits in the Region will have been safeguarded from sterilisation, and
conserved through maximising the use of secondary and recycled aggregates
wherever possible.
11.1.1 Aggregates
The Regional Aggregates Working Party (RAWP) is a Yorkshire and Humber regional
technical working group with the purpose of monitoring aggregate and sand and gravel
landbanks within the region. An annual monitoring report is published providing information
on the length of sub-regional landbanks
The tables below illustrate the position in West Yorkshire in terms of sand & gravel and
crushed rock. The Region intends to monitor the situation to ensure that sub-regional
apportionments are met and that the use of substitute/secondary aggregates is maximised.
Table: Sub-Regional Apportionment of the National and Regional Guidelines for Aggregates
Provision, 2001 to 2016 (Million Tonnes)
Land-won sand and gravel
Land-won crushed rock
West Yorkshire 5.5 17.8
(Source: Yorkshire and Humber Region Aggregates Working Party Annual Report 2007 Aggregates
Monitoring 2007)
Table: Crushed Rock Reserves and Landbanks
Reserves at
31.12.07
(million tonnes)
Sub-regional Apportionment
(million tonnes per annum)
Landbank
at 31.12.07
(years)
West Yorkshire 40.8 1.11 36.6
(Source: Yorkshire and Humber Region Aggregates Working Party Annual Report 2007 Aggregates
Monitoring 2007)
The figures for the sub-region (shown in table 2) indicate that in West Yorkshire there are
significant permitted reserves of crushed rock aggregate (40.8 million tonnes), with a
landbank of over 36 years. The apportionment for West Yorkshire between 2001 and 2016
is 17.8 million tonnes, which is actually less than the current permitted reserves. However
West Yorkshire currently makes a minimal contribution to sand and gravel supply within the
region.
361

Figure: Mineral extraction sites and potential Resource areas within Bradford district
Source: BMDC Minerals and waste Planning
11.1.2 Sand and Gravel
Due to the low number of sites within the West Yorkshire sub-region (only 1 site was
recorded as active during 2007 with another site inactive but possessing permitted reserves)
data on landbank length cannot be published due to commercial confidentiality. However the
report acknowledges that there is a ‘low’ level of permitted reserves within the sub-region.
The Yorkshire and Humber Assembly (YHA) has estimated that there is a 32 million tonne
shortfall in the permitted reserves of sand and gravel in the Yorkshire and Humber Region to
meet the apportionments likely to be set by the government up to 2021.
There are currently 13 operational minerals extraction sites in the Bradford district, mainly
extracting sandstone in a block form, with aggregate production a secondary activity. The
sites vary in size, from the relatively small, extracting an average of 10,000 tonnes per
annum to some larger scale sites, extracting of up to 80,000 tonnes per annum.
Most of the sites are established historical sites, run by local companies. They are mostly
situated in green belt (including the moors) to the north west of the City Centre and to the
south of Keighley.
362

Many of the sites are approaching the exhaustion of their permitted reserves.
During a meeting of the Regional Aggregates Working Party the sand and gravel industry
expressed doubts about the viability of exploiting sand and gravel resources within Bradford
in terms of finding sites with sufficient accessible resources to make them commercially
viable. The British Geological Society (BGS) has been commissioned by the Yorkshire and
Humber Assembly (YHA) to undertake a reality checking exercise which will involve the sand
and gravel industry in identifying constraints to commercial sand and gravel extraction within
West Yorkshire, including Bradford.
11.1.3 Building, Roofing and Flag Stone
The government commissioned a report on the planning issues related to the supply of
natural stone building materials which was published in March 2004, Planning for the
Supply of Natural Building and Roofing Stone in England and Wales. Research was
carried out on building and roofing stone supply through survey work, analysis of published
statistics and case studies. Demand was discussed but not quantified, due to the variable
and unpredictability of building stone markets.
The supply data analysed indicated that there was a generally slowly rising trend in building
and roofing stone production in England and Wales between the period from 1992 to 2001.
However the proportion of building and roofing stone demand being met by imports
increased dramatically over this period, with imports being 14% greater than domestic
production in 1992 but 200% greater by 2001.
The survey found that the majority of quarries are relatively small scale (under 3ha) with
relatively low output (up to 2,000m 3 ) per annum and are often only worked intermittently.
However the majority of production is concentrated within a small number of relatively large
operations.
The report highlights the significance of carboniferous sandstones in terms of building and
roofing stone production, which account for both the largest number of individual quarries
and the greatest level of output. The importance of Yorkshire, in terms of the supply of
carboniferous sandstones, commonly known as York Stone, is particularly noted.
Imports are stated to be the perceived biggest threat to the UK building stone industry. In
particular sandstone from India and China is noted to be competing directly with materials
such as York Stone paving at less than half the price (ODPM/ Symonds group, 2004).
The need for natural stone building materials within the district is integrally linked to housing,
built heritage and design policy objectives. The most significant element of building, roofing
and flag stone demand is for new build projects, including new housing developments and
public realm projects. The RSS sets out benchmark figures for housing provision within the
Bradford District. Depending upon the location of the housing and the design policies
adopted by the Council, a certain proportion of the building materials required to construct
these new houses will comprise natural sandstone products such as sandstone walling
363

masonry. Likewise design objectives are likely to require natural Elland Flag paving and
decorative/ monumental stone for a certain proportion of public realm projects.
Locally produced building stone, and in particular flagstone, is also sold throughout the UK
for both new paving and building projects and the restoration of historic buildings. Stone
produced in the district has been recently been used in projects at nationally significant sites
such as Saltaire World Heritage Site, York Minster and Buckingham Palace.
The need for materials for the repair, alteration or extension of historic and culturally
important buildings within the district, such as listed buildings and many buildings within
Conservation Areas, is less significant in terms of sales but of significant importance in terms
of the maintenance of the traditional character of Bradford’s built environment.
To inform the development of minerals policies the Council’s Design and Conservation team
have produced a report (Jon Ackroyd, 2008) discussing the relationship of the built heritage
of the district with minerals resources. The report notes that the character of the settlements
within Bradford and the ‘sense of place’ of the inhabitants is primarily derived from the local
building stone materials and that the use of artificial stone, brick or contrasting materials can
dilute local character and result in the loss of a sense of place.
The report goes on to note that there are only a limited number of operational quarries
supplying building stone with appropriate aesthetic characteristics for use within the district.
The scarcity of supply of coarse grained ‘gritstone’ walling, suitable for use in settlements to
the north of the district, and stone slate roofing are particularly highlighted. Concerns are
raised that the natural stone materials currently imported from outside the district can have
subtly different aesthetic characteristics to local stone, in terms of colour, texture and course
thickness. The report concludes that there is a clear need for greater availability of local
stone for local use, and that particular emphasis should be placed on increasing supplies of
roofing stone.
Enquiries have been made with both English Heritage and the West Yorkshire
Archaeological Advisory Service (WYAS) to establish if any records exist of specific quarries
within the District which may be important in supplying materials for the repair and
maintenance of historic sites and monuments. English Heritage indicated that they intend to
undertake a survey of building stone quarrying within West Yorkshire, but that, pending the
outcome of the survey, they cannot provide any assistance in identifying such sites. WYAS
likewise indicated that they do not hold any records of sites within Bradford which could
provide material for the repair of historic sites or monuments.
In December 2008 discussions were held between English Heritage and the Yorkshire and
Humber Assembly regarding the potential for a jointly funded regional building stone study.
However these discussions have been postponed pending the reorganisation of the Regional
Planning Body, with the intention of recommencing in April 2009.
364

11.1.4 Coal and Fireclay
Fireclays are sedimentary mudstones mainly found underlying coal seams. Fireclay was
traditionally valued as a raw material for manufacturing refractories for lining furnaces,
however demand from refractory manufacturers has diminished and fireclay is now more
commonly used for manufacturing high quality buff coloured facing bricks (BGS, 2006). In the
past fireclay workings were widespread to the south of the district around the settlements of
Denholme, Queensbury, Thornton, Tong and South of Bradford City Centre. These workings
supplied several brickworks and refractory manufacturers within the district. In recent years
fireclay has been extracted at a site to the south of Oxenhope to supply a refractory business
located in Queensbury.
There are currently no active mineral workings within the district supplying fireclay, all
brickworks located within the district have closed and the MPA are not aware of any
proposals for future fireclay extraction within the district to supply markets for either brick or
refractory production. One site in the Denholme area has recently obtained permission for
the extraction clay for engineering purposes; however this is for a surface deposit of glacial
till rather than deeper fireclay resources.
There has been widespread historic deep mining of coal within the district; however no large
scale opencast coal mining has taken place. There are currently no active deep or opencast
coal mines within the district and the MPA are not aware of any proposals for future deep or
surface coal extraction.
Fireclay resources are largely coincident with shallow coal resources, and the viability of
fireclay extraction is usually dependant upon the recovery of other minerals, principally coal;
therefore potential fireclay resources identified within the district correspond with potential
shallow coal resources (BGS, 2006). Resource maps obtained from the coal authority
indicate that a wide area surrounding the City of Bradford contains shallow coal resources
potentially suitable for surface extraction. Much of this area is heavily urbanised, however the
potential resource includes areas of countryside to the east and west of the City including
areas around Tong, Thornton, Queensbury and Denholme.
11.2 Current Minerals Supply Situation within Bradford
The predominant mineral extracted within the Bradford District is sandstone used to produce
building, roofing or flag stone. Crushed sandstone aggregate production also takes place
utilising material unsuitable for producing natural stone building materials, but no large scale
primary aggregate quarries operate in the District. Although resources exist, there are no
active fireclay, coal or sand and gravel extraction sites located within the District. One site
has recently obtained permission for the extraction of a surface deposit of boulder clay to be
used for landfill engineering applications.
There are currently 10 active building or flagstone quarries within the District; however
several of these sites are only intermittently worked. The majority of sites are located west of
the City of Bradford around the settlements of Bingley, Cullingworth, Wilsden, Thornton,
365

Denholme and Oxenhope. However several ‘urban quarries’ are located within the City of
Bradford. The sites vary in size, from the relatively small scale, operations with low or
intermittent output, producing up to 10,000 tonnes per annum, to several relatively large
scale operations producing up to 80,000 tonnes of building stone, flag stone and aggregates
per annum. It is understood that there is a small amount of stone slate roofing produced
within the district however this is restricted to a small number of sites.
Most of the active quarries are long established sites that have provided stone for the
construction of buildings within the Bradford District for over 100 years, where the quarries
themselves form part of the character of the landscape. The landscapes in which the
quarries within the district tend to be situated are predominantly either mixed upland
agricultural areas or gritstone moorland. The exploitation of certain sandstone resource
areas, such as resources to the north of the district, and the production of certain types of
natural stone materials, such as riven flags and stone slate roofing has declined
substantially.
Many of the active building stone quarries are thought to be approaching the exhaustion of
their permitted reserves and several have closed within recent years. However further survey
work is to be undertaken to gather data on currently permitted reserves and output within the
district. Several quarry operators have suggested areas of land which they would wish to
extend their operations into in order to extend the operational life of their sites. These and
other sites will be considered for inclusion in the Allocations Development Plan Document at
a later stage of the LDF process.
There are 10 dormant minerals permissions within the district, equally split between fireclay
and sandstone extraction sites. Under the Review of Minerals Permissions legislation these
sites can be re-activated through an application to the Planning Authority for the
determination of a modern set of planning conditions. The dormant sites are concentrated
around the settlements of Haworth, Denholme and Queensbury.
As a consequence of the historic widespread working of building, roofing and flag stone
within the Bradford district, there are known to be a number of disused quarry workings. The
viability of re-opening disused workings would depend upon the circumstances of each site in
terms of the extent and quality of the remaining resource, surrounding highways
infrastructure, neighbouring land uses and ecological, geological or cultural designations. In
order to determine whether any of these sites are likely to be suitable for minerals extraction
within the plan period, further survey work will be necessary.
11.3 Waste Production in Bradford
In 2007 (the latest data available) the total amount of waste produced (known as waste
arisings) in the District is estimated to have been at least 852,489 tonnes excluding
Construction Demolition and Excavation Waste 113 . This rises to a best estimate of 1,424,003
tonnes when all waste types are included:
113 Data taken from Waste Data Interrogator 2007 produced by the Environment Agency
366

• Agricultural waste: waste arising from a farm or market garden, including organic
matter such as manure, slurry, silage effluent and crop residues, but also packaging
and films, and animal treatment dips;
• Commercial waste: waste arising from wholesalers, catering establishments, shops
and offices (in both the public and private sector). This also includes municipal
waste collected by commercial waste agencies;
• Construction and demolition waste: waste arising from the construction, repair,
maintenance and demolition of buildings and structures. For this waste type it is
important to note that the original figures from the RSS have been used as they are
likely to portray a more accurate reflection of waste arising of this type due to certain
exclusions within the waste data interrogator figures for C&D waste;
• Hazardous waste: defined in European Law as those wastes included within the
European Waste Catalogue because they possess one or more of the hazardous
properties set out in the Hazardous Waste Directive. Waste data figures for
hazardous waste type is taken from the Hazardous Waste Interrogator 2007;
• Industrial waste: waste arising from factories and industrial plants; and
• Municipal waste: includes household waste and other waste collected by waste
collection authorities.
The figures below outline the waste arisings within the District in 2007. They illustrate large
contributions to the total waste arisings across the District from Municipal Solid Waste and
Commercial and Industrial, together accounting for over 56% of total estimated waste
arisings. Construction, Demolition & Excavation waste is also likely to produce large
contributions to total waste arisings although these figures are only estimates from regional
data.
Figure: Summary of Waste Arisings in Bradford (2007)
Type of Waste Arising Arisings (tonnes)
Municipal Solid Waste (BMDC only) 261,065
Commercial and Industrial Waste 547,131
Construction, Demolition and Excavation Waste 114 571,514
Hazardous Waste 21,821
Agricultural Waste 115 22,472
TOTAL 1,424,003
Source: Waste and Hazardous Waste Data Interrogator, 2007, Environment Agency
114 NB: Robust data is not available at the time of writing specific to Bradford. In order to generate a figure for Construction,
Demolition and Excavation Waste arisings for Bradford the Yorkshire and Humber total has been divided by 21 (the number of
UA / District areas within the region) as an average. It is noted that in the context of Bradford relative to the other administrative
areas across the region that this figure is likely to be a low estimate.
115 NB: Data on Agricultural Waste arisings across Bradford is believed to be a low estimate based on some data being
excluded or counted as commercial and industrial waste due to licensing of premises additionally the Environment Agency does
not count most of this type of waste. Agricultural waste arisings excludes manure or straw. Manure and slurry when spread at
the place of production, for the benefit of agriculture, is not considered waste.
367

Figure: Breakdown of Waste Arisings in Bradford (2007)
40%
2% 2%
18%
Municipal Solid Waste
Commercial and Industrial Waste
Construction, Demolition and Excavation Waste
Hazardous Waste
Agricultural Waste
Source: Waste and Hazardous Waste Data Interrogator set, 2007, Environment Agency
11.4 Municipal Waste
Bradford MDC covers an area of 141 square miles (36,536 hectares), and contains some
200,000 domestic properties. The vast majority of municipal waste is delivered directly to the
2 transfer stations (in Bradford to the south of the District, and Keighley to the north). The
waste is bulk loaded and transported by road to landfill sites in Wakefield and Skipton
(outside the district). The volume of waste produced is currently growing at approximately 2-
3% per annum.
The types of municipal waste produced in Bradford (for 2005/06) are identified in the table
below. The information was derived from the Waste Treatment Project Outline Business
Case January 2008.
38%
368

Table: Wastes produced in 2005/06 116
Source: Environ (2008)
11.5 Waste Collection, Treatment and Disposal Services
The Council operates 4 very different and discrete waste collection services. Operating from
two bases, Harris Street at Bradford and Stockbridge at Keighley, 185 operational staff,
utilising 60 frontline vehicles, collect approximately 210,000 tonnes of waste per annum.
Table: Waste Collection Services
Domestic Refuse Collection
The domestic collection service is delivered with 31 operational rounds, of these 28 service
the urban areas utilising 26 tonne vehicles with a driver and 2 loaders. The rural areas
represent 60% of the district are serviced with 3 rounds operating on 11 tonne vehicles with
a driver and loader. The Authority began the introduction of wheeled bins in 1998 and
completed the process in December 2000. The weekly service collects 162,000 tonnes
annually of domestic waste from 200,000 households.
116 Source: Bradford Waste DPD Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report Revision (Environ, 2008)
369

Recycling
The division collects paper and glass via separate 240 litre wheeled bins from 120,000
households across the District. The monthly service uses 26 tonnes compaction vehicles to
collect over 10,000 tonnes of recyclates per annum.
Bulky Household Collection
Three dedicated bulk collection crews of a driver and one operative collect 3,000 tonnes of
bulky waste from around of 30,000 requests per annum.
Trade Waste Service
The trade portfolio has 5,500 customers and a turnover of £3.7m. There are 22 operational
staff operating 10 frontline vehicles. The service collects 43,000 tonnes of trade waste from
a variety of commercial and industrial premises.
To handle all the waste collected by the above, the Council operates a number of facilities
and functions. Within the District there are a number of waste management facilities,
including:
• Landfill sites;
• Civic amenity / household waste recycling centres;
• Waste transfer sites;
• Metal recycling sites;
• Storage sites; and
• Treatment sites.
In total there were 61 such facilities across the District in 2007. These are broken down by
site category in the table below.
Table: Number of Operational Waste Management Facilities in Bradford (2007)
Type of Waste Management Facility Number of Facilities
Landfill 2
MRS 21
Treatment 4
Transfer 34
TOTAL 61 facilities
Source: Waste Date Interrogator, 2007, Environment Agency
TableX provides an outline capacity for each of the facility types across the District in tonnes.
This data is taken from the previous RATS Data set (2005), prepared by the Environment
Agency, which represents the best available data currently in record and will be subject to
further update and analysis during the net review of the baseline analysis report.
Table : Capacity of Operational Waste Management Facilities in Bradford (2005)
Capacity of Facilities
Type of Waste Management Facility
(tonnes)
Landfill
Inert 944,260
Non Hazardous 1,089,356
370

Restricted 165,000
Transfer
Civic Amenity/Household Waste Recycling Sites 81,997
Waste Transfer 1,005,678
Metal Recycling Sites
Car Breaker 102,149
Metal Recycling 1,161,800
Storage
In-House Storage 2,500
Pet Crematorium 75
Treatment
Chemical Treatment 250
Physical-Chemical Treatment 80,914
TOTAL (including Waste Transfer) 4,633,979
TOTAL (excluding Waste Transfer) 1,347,688
Source: RATS Data set, 2005, Environment Agency
To deal with MSW specifically the following treatment and disposal services are currently
being used in the district.
Table: Municipal Waste Treatment and Disposal Services in the District
Transfer Stations
There are 2 transfer stations:
• Royd Way, Keighley - handles approximately 70,000 t/pa
• Bowling Back Lane, Bradford - handles approximately 180,000 t/pa These sites are
purpose built facilities, providing weighing in and out of all loads, and categorising waste
into type, source and destination. The sites utilise large items of plant and 44 tonne road
going haulage and are open 362 days per year.
Currently Bradford transfer station hauls to Welbeck landfill near Wakefield, operated by
WRG (contracted minimum of 160,000 t/pa): Keighley transfer station hauls to Skibedon
Landfill near Skipton, operated by Yorwaste (contracted minimum of 60,000 t/pa). Landfill
contracts end in 2010 but it is likely that BMDC will need to procure further landfill contracts
to 2015. There are no suitable landfills in the Bradford area.
The transfer sites also receive waste directly from traders and commercial waste collections
for which a charge is levied. They also offer a public weighbridge facility for which a charge is
levied. A household waste recycling centre is also provided at each transfer station.
Materials Reclamation Facility (MRF)
A small MRF is located at Bowling Back Lane and processes waste for recycling. Dry
recyclables are received from Household Waste Recycling Centres, bring sites and wheeled
bin recycling schemes. The facility incorporates a sorting and picking station, magnetic
separations, and metal, aluminium, card, paper, textile and plastic baling equipment. Once
371

ecycling waste is received, the waste is cleaned up and sorted into various types and
grades and put into a suitable form for onward transportation to specialist recycling
merchants. Any reject or non suitable materials are deposited as a waste into the adjoining
transfer station.
Household Waste Recycling Centres
There are 7 sites located throughout the District, (formerly known as Civic Amenity Sites).
The sites are open for the public to use to dispose of bulky or excess waste and to deposit
materials for recycling (these sites are not available for traders to use).
These sites are open 7 days per week, 362 days per year, and are serviced by a fleet of 4 x
32 tonne container handling vehicles. The quality of the site infrastructures varies from well
planned sites such as Sugden End, to ones with little space or facilities (e.g. Golden Butts,
Ilkley). Significant infrastructure improvements have taken place recently, with further action
planned for 2006.
Chemical Advisory Service (CAS)
A chemical advisory service is offered to inspect, investigate, consign, transport and correctly
dispose of small quantities or unwanted chemicals.
• Lab chemicals e.g., from schools, colleges etc.
• Pharmaceuticals.
• Herbicides.
• Poisons.
• Chemical reagents.
• Unidentified powders and liquids.
The service is offered at no charge to Bradford householders. An inspection, collection and
disposal charge is made to outside companies and organisations.
Contract Management
Disposal contracts for deposit of waste to landfill are managed including:
- two major contracts for landfill (described below);
- the disposal of difficult or special wastes to landfill e.g., tyres, asbestos;
- incineration of various chemicals from CAS or analysis of chemicals;
- incineration of clinical wastes;
- recycling contracts for various types of products with recycling/reclamation
- merchants;
- composting of green wastes;
- other minor contracts associated with operations.
Landfill Aftercare
The service is also responsible for looking after the legacy of previous landfilling of municipal
wastes within the District, including site restoration and maintenance, and environmental
control measures for areas such as landfill gas and leachates. This aftercare will continue
for many years into the future and includes environmental monitoring, which involves the
372

collection of field data via monitoring equipment, its subsequent collation and interpretation,
culminating in a quarterly report to the Environment Agency. This service is also provided to
some outside agencies for which a fee is levied.
Currently a landfill gas flaring system is operating at the Sugden End landfill, along with
leachate pumping. Progressive capping and restoration continues at this site, other sites are
now restored but still require monitoring and land management.
Maps showing all the Transfer and Landfill Facilities Location are attached in appendix 3.
Management of non-municipal waste sources is listed below-
Commercial and Industrial
There are approximately 10 sites in the District managing general commercial and industrial
(C & I) waste. 8 of the sites are located to the south of the district, in or around the City
Centre area (particularly the Bowling area), with 2 sites to the north of the District (in the
Keighley/Eldwick area). Most of the 10 sites are waste transfer stations, which sort the
waste, recycle what is possible and dispose of that material which cannot be recycled to
landfill
There are 4 specialist sites which specialise in managing animal wastes, 2 of the specialist
sites are located in the city centre area and 2 to the east of the district in the
Thorton/Harecroft area. These sites undertake processes such as rendering and incineration.
Construction and Demolition Waste
Currently there are approximately 8 sites managing construction and demolition (C&D)
waste. 7 of the sites are located to the south of the district (near or within the city centre) and
1 site is to the north (in the Keighley area). Most of the sites are waste transfer stations
which recycle the material to produce a secondary aggregate and divert the unrecyclable C &
D to landfill. 3 of the sites also manage the C & I waste detailed above.
Hazardous Waste
There is currently one major facility managing hazardous waste which is situated in the south
of the district (in the Bowling Back Lane area).
Agricultural Waste
There is no facility managing this type of waste in the Bradford District. The farmers
currently manage this waste individually on their agricultural holding.
373

11.6 Waste Composition
In 2002 MEL Research (MEL) was commissioned to undertake an analysis of kerbside
collected domestic wastes in Bradford. MEL found that the average Asian household size
was 4.58 people, while average for non-Asian was 2.40 people, and also the Asian
households had a younger age profile.
In terms of overall weight of waste put out for disposal, Asian households produced 18.36kg /
week, while non-Asian households 14.52kg / week. When household size is taken into
account, residual weight per capita for Asian household was 4.01kg / week, as against
6.05kg / week for non-Asian households.
Observation as to difference in waste composition showed there to be more kitchen waste
and disposable nappies in Asian households, and conversely more glass in non-Asian
households.
The survey found surprisingly similar levels of awareness of recycling facilities at household
waste sites and drop-off recycling sites, but interestingly Asian households tended to donate
higher levels of clothing and textiles to charitable/fund raising collections. Despite higher
levels of kitchen waste, Asian households tended not to compost their waste, even where
they had a garden.
The survey showed 37% of Asians and 48% of non-Asian households putting garden waste
directly into the residual waste stream. The report found that enthusiasm for recycling is
probably determined more by levels of deprivation than by ethnicity.
The overall waste composition for waste collected at the kerbside for Bradford is detailed in
the table below.
Table : Summary MEL Kerbside Waste Composition Analysis (Bradford)
Waste Stream Kg per household/week
Putrescibles 57.0 38.6
Paper and card 33.9 23.5
Misc. combustible 10.6 7.4
Glass 9.8 6.9
Dense plastic 9.3 6.5
Plastic film 7.2 5.0
Textiles 5.0 3.5
Ferrous metal 4.6 3.2
Misc. non-combustible 2.8 2.0
Non-ferrous metal 2.3 1.6
WEEE 0.7 1.5
Fines 0.4 0.3
TOTAL 143.6 100
% by weight
374

Household Waste Recycling Centres
Some 51,000 tonnes of waste (23% of the District’s domestic waste) arises from Bradford’s 7
Household Waste Recycling Centres (HWRC). MEL undertook a survey of HWRC waste use
and waste types in July 2002.
Survey data, plus data held by the department indicates that:
• 50% of all HWRC inputs by weight arises on weekends.
• around 60% of all inputs are delivered in summer months (April to September).
• the heaviest fractions from the sample representing 75% of total weight are:
- electrical and electronic equipment 15.6%
- green waste 14.8%
- mixed household (bin waste) 14.3%
- hardcore/rubble 11.3%
- textiles 10.3%
- wood 9.1%
The biodegradable content of the HWRC waste surveyed is reproduced in the table below.
Table: Biodegradable material, HWRC July 2002
Primary Category Sub Category
Friday
%
Saturday
%
Recyclable paper 1.4 0.9
Paper and card
Recyclable card
Cardboard
0.0
4.5
0.0
2.7
Non-recyclable paper 2.8 0.9
Textiles
Man made and natural
fibres
4.1 6.6
Shoes 0.1 0.0
Misc. combustible Wood 8.9 9.2
Other combustible 1.4 0.3
Misc. non-
Soil 0.0 0.0
combustible Other non-combustible 0.8 0.1
Putrescible
Soft compostable
garden waste
9.1 22.6
Other putrescibles 1.6 0.0
Fines Particles >10mm 0.4 0.0
Mixed Household
Normally material for
the wheeled bin
7.8 10.6
TOTAL 42.9 53.9
375

11.7 Recycling and Composting in Bradford
Bradford MDC achieved a recycling / composting rate for domestic waste of 23.8% for
2007/8 against a local service agreement target of 24%. Recently published research
suggests 30% is the maximum recycling level likely to be achieve in large metropolitan areas
such as Bradford.
Approximately 55% of waste in 2004/05 was sourced from refuse collection, approximately
17.5% of waste was collected from household waste and recycling centres and a further 7%
was collected in trade waste containers including commercial and industrial waste handled
by the Council.
The Government has set (and will continue to revise and review) performance standards
relating to such areas as recycling and composting, along with specific guidance as to how
definitions these indicators are to be calculated e.g., what materials count and how
measured. The current statutory recycling target (2005/06) BV82 (a) + (b) for Bradford is
24%. Clearly the achievement of BVPI targets will be a very important feature of any long
term strategy for Bradford’s waste.
Table: Recycling and composing trend data based on BVPIs
Source: Bradford Waste DPD Sustainability Appraisal Scoping Report Revision (Environ, 2008)
To achieve the 16.7% recycling target in 2004/5, the Council employed a number of
initiatives:
• a diversion rate of nearly 50% is achieved at HWRC;
• a kerbside recycling scheme based on paper is provided to 60% of all
• domestic properties on an opt out basis;
• a kerbside recycling scheme based on glass/cans is provided to 10% of all
• domestic properties on an opt in basis;
• drop off banks are provided across the District; and
• green waste kerbside collection.
376

11.8 The Future Waste Position in Bradford to 2021
Bradford is subject to a number of waste targets derived from the national, regional and local
levels.
At the national level, the following targets apply:
• Landfill: By 2010 reduce the amount of biodegradable municipal waste sent to
landfill to 75% of the total generated in 1995; 50% by 2013 an 35% by 2020 (Landfill
Directive).
• Recycling and composting of household waste: At least 40% by 2010; 45% by 2015
and 50% by 2020 (Waste Strategy 2007).
• Recovery of municipal waste: 53% by 2010; 67% by 2015 and 75% by 2020 (Waste
Strategy 2007).
• Commercial and industrial waste: Reduce amount going to landfill by 20% in 2010
compared to 2004 (Waste Strategy 2007).
At the regional level the following targets apply:
• Waste production: Reduce the annual increase in waste growth to 2% (from 3%) by
2008/09 (Yorkshire and Humber Regional Waste Strategy).
• 100% of waste developments should be in compliance with the Regional Plan’s
locational criteria in Policy ENV14. 100% of local authorities have allocated sufficient
sites in line with Policy ENV14.
Local targets are shown in the BVPI table above.
Predictions have been made at Regional level through the RSS on the likely waste to be
managed up to 2021. Predictions have also been made on the landfill capacity, treatment
and recycling required for municipal waste and commercial and Industrial waste (in order to
meet targets) and these are illustrated below.
Table : Municipal solid waste forecasts for Bradford
377

Table : Commercial and industrial waste forecasts for Bradford
Source: Regional Spatial Strategy (2008)
Recycling and composting trend data based on BVPIs indicate that by 2008/2009, the target
rate should be 26% of all wastes are recycled or composted. Performance targets and
predictions for household waste for 2020 estimate 33% of waste will be recycled or
composted.
Bradford’s Municipal Waste Management Strategy outlines the current management of the
waste stream and details the challenging targets set by Government through policy and other
legislative drivers such as the Landfill Allowance Trading Scheme. The Strategy analyses
how these drivers seek to divert municipal waste from landfill, increase recycling and move
the management of waste up the waste hierarchy. The strategy acknowledges the need for a
step change to the management of municipal waste, up the waste hierarchy and away from
landfilling.
11.9 Key Facts
• The predominant mineral extracted within the Bradford District is sandstone.
Crushed sandstone aggregate production also takes place but no large scale
primary aggregate quarries operate in the District. Although resources exist, there
are no active fireclay, coal or sand and gravel extraction sites located within the
District.
• A large proportion of building stone and flag produced in Bradford is exported to
other regions, London and oversees markets. York Stone is a widely marketable
product and sales are not limited to specific areas. This product however is now
facing increasing challenges from cheaper sandstones imported from overseas.
• The exploitation of certain sandstone resource areas, such as resources to the north
of the district, and the production of certain types of natural stone materials, such as
riven flags and stone slate roofing has declined substantially.
• Many of the active building stone quarries are thought to be approaching the
exhaustion of their permitted reserves and several have closed within recent years.
However further survey work is to be undertaken to gather data on currently
permitted reserves and output within the district.
378

• Exporting waste arisings to landfill outside of the District remains the primary waste
management method utilised by BMDC for Municipal Solid Waste, a situation which
needs to be reversed. The main destinations of exported municipal solid waste at
the current time is Wakefield and Skipton.
• There has been a continued improvement in the amount of municipal waste that is
being recycled across Bradford District in recent years. However this amount
constitutes a small fraction of the waste arisings and is below the council’s current
local service agreement target for recycling.
• There are currently eight Household Waste Recycling Centres (HWRC) across
Bradford District, which handle just under a quarter of municipal waste arising.
Better accessibility to these centres is still an issue in encouraging more local
participation and this is being considered through a review of the current waste
infrastructure.
• Given the current trend within Bradford to export the majority of waste arisings
outside of the District, coupled with new challenges for recycling, composting, and
recovery of energy from waste there is currently a need for new waste infrastructure
within Bradford.
• There is a shortage of waste management facilities in the District at the current time.
Both extant planning permissions for new waste facilities, future applications, and
the PFI programme will result in improvements to this waste management
infrastructure across the District.
379

380

381

382

383

12. SUSTAINABILITY
The LDF Core Strategy must undergo Sustainability Appraisal, as described under Section
19(5) of the Planning and Compulsory Purchase Act 2004, in recognition of its role within
Local Development Frameworks. This ensures that any significant environmental, social and
economic effects have been considered during the preparation of planning policy documents
consistent with European Directive 2001/42/EC relating to Strategic Environmental
Assessments (SEA).
This report has presented all the policy context and baseline information that will inform the
Sustainability Appraisal relevant to the Core Strategy. At this stage, it is appropriate to outline
the broad sustainability objectives that the forthcoming options for the Core Strategy will seek
to achieve. This will also help draft a list of decision making criteria that could act as
sustainability indicators for the Core Strategy and would be refined and agreed upon at the
next stage of the plan making process.
384

385

The sustainability objectives have been identified from the review of national, regional and
local policies, aspirations and targets, and have been adapted to reflect the character and
needs of the Bradford District as a whole.
The objectives will be further revised and refined at later stages of the sustainability appraisal
process through consultations of the various options designed to meet the plan objectives.
Each option will meet the range of objectives in different ways. Some of the objectives may
conflict, and so each option will meet each objective to a differing extent. This provides an
opportunity to test and measure each option against each objective, providing an outline
Sustainability Appraisal of the options. The outline appraisal report will suggest mitigation
and monitoring methodologies and identify the preferred option. This will be carried out and
reported upon as part of the community consultation process. Therefore the Sustainability
Appraisal will be integrated into the process. The final report on the Core Strategy will be
integrated with the Sustainability Appraisal of the entire LDF.
386

13. CONCLUSIONS
The key issues identified within this report will be addressed through the approach being
undertaken to prepare the Core Strategy for Bradford District. This combines a collaborative
consultation process and evaluation to prepare the emerging development options. The
baseline analysis and the evaluation of key will help determine development priorities for the
district and influence spatial distribution of the planned growth proposed by the Core
Strategy.
As part of the ongoing consultation which is being undertaken, this report will be made
publicly available for comment and review. Any additional information, factual corrections or
further thoughts will be welcomed by the Bradford Metropolitan District Council. Any
comments should be forwarded to:
Local Development Framework Group
FREEPOST NEA 11445
PO BOX 1068
BRADFORD
BD1 1BR
Or by hand at any planning office at Bradford, Keighley or Ilkley.
Or by Fax to: 01274 433767
At the present time, this report has been deliberately left in ‘Draft’ and will be supplemented
with additional information during the course of the preparation of the Core Strategy
submission report. This report and its findings will be the subject of further extensive public
consultation and engagement.
Further details on the practical arrangements for the preparation of Core Strategy are
provided in ‘Creating Local Development Frameworks - A Companion guide to PPS12’
published by the Department of Communities and Local Government and can be viewed at:
http://www.communities.gov.uk/archived/publications/planningandbuilding/pps12companiong
uide
387

Produced by the
City of Bradford Metropolitan District
Council
Local Development
Framework Group